Copyright © 2020 NR. All rights reserved.
NR, the NR logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of NR Electric Co., Ltd. No NR
trademarks may be used without written permission. NR products appearing in this document may
be covered by P.R. China and foreign patents. NR Electric Co., Ltd. reserves all rights and
benefits afforded under P.R. China and international copyright and patent laws in its products,
including but not limited to software, firmware and documentation. NR Engineering Co., Ltd. is
licensed to use this document as well as all intellectual property rights owned or held by NR
Electric Co., Ltd, including but not limited to copyright, rights in inventions, patents, know-how,
trade secrets, trademarks and trade names, service marks, design rights, database rights and
rights in data, utility models, domain names and all similar rights.
The information in this document is provided for informational use only and does not constitute a
legal contract between NR and any person or entity unless otherwise specified. Information in this
document is subject to change without prior notice.
To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable IEC and IEEE standards,
but no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary
greatly.
Although every reasonable effort is made to present current and accurate information, this
document does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for your purposes, please do not hesitate to contact us.
Preface
Preface
About This Manual
The technical manual describes the protection, automation, control, and supervision functions of
PCS-9613S differential relay, and contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function, as well as the hardware of the device. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase and during normal service. In addition, the manual also includes a
glossary that lists and defines technical terms used throughout the manual.
Safety Information
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the
equipment (module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed
for personal safety, as well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated
as follows according to the degree of danger:
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.
Indicates that property damage can result if the measures specified are
not taken.
Important information about the device, product handling or a certain
section of the documentation which must be given particular attention.
Instructions and Warnings
The following hazard statements apply to this device.
Disconnect or de-energize all external connections BEFORE opening this
device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
I
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
can cause electrical shock resulting in injury or death.
Contact with instrument terminals can cause electrical shock that can
result in injury or death.
Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this manual can
impair operator safety safeguards provided by this equipment.
Have only qualified personnel service this equipment. If you are not
qualified to service this equipment, you can injure yourself or others, or
cause equipment damage.
This device is shipped with default passwords. Default passwords should
be changed to private passwords at installation. Failure to change each
default password to a private password may allow unauthorized access.
NR shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from unauthorized
access.
DO NOT look into the fiber (laser) ports/connectors.
DO NOT look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical
output.
DO NOT perform any procedures or adjustments that this instruction
manual does not describe.
During installation, maintenance, or testing of the optical ports, ONLY use
the test equipment qualified for Class 1 laser products!
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
II
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
Incorporated components, such as LEDs, transceivers, and laser emitters,
are NOT user serviceable. Return units to NR for repair or replacement.
Equipment components are SENSITIVE to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD
procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment
BEFORE removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not
equipped to work with these components, contact NR about returning this
device and related NR equipment for service.
Insufficiently rated insulation can deteriorate under abnormal operating
conditions and cause equipment damage. For external circuits, use wiring
of SUFFICIENTLY RATED insulation that will not break down under
abnormal operating conditions.
SEVERE power and ground problems can occur on the communications
ports of this equipment as a result of using non-standard cables. Please
use the wiring method recommended in the manual for communication
terminals.
DO NOT connect power to the relay until you have completed these
procedures and receive instruction to apply power. Equipment damage
can result otherwise.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein, may RESULT IN hazardous radiation exposure.
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify
existing features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is
compatible with the product in your hand.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
III
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
Document Conventions
⚫
The abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are explained in “Appendix A Glossary”. The
Glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
⚫
Menu path is connected with the arrow "→" and bold.
For example: the access path of protection settings is: MainMenu→Settings→Protection
Settings
⚫
Settings not in the table should be placed in brackets.
For example: the system setting [Opt_SysFreq]
⚫
Cross-references are presented in italics.
For example: refer to Figure 1.1-1, refer to Table 1.1-1, reference to Section 1.1
⚫
Binary input signals, binary output signals, analogs, LED lights, buttons, and other fixed
meanings, should be written in double quotes and bold.
For example: press the button "ENT".
Symbols
⚫
AND Gate
&
⚫
&
&
>=1
>=1
OR Gate
>=1
⚫
Comparator
⚫
Signal input
SIG
⚫
xxx
Setting input
SET
xxx
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
IV
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
⚫
Enable input
EN
⚫
xxx
Timer
Optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristics
Timer
t
t
⚫
Timer
Fixed delay pickup (10ms), fixed delay dropout (2ms)
10ms
⚫
2ms
Timer
Settable delay pickup, fixed delay dropout
[Tset1]
⚫
0ms
Timer
Fixed delay pickup, settable delay dropout
0ms
⚫
[Tset2]
Timer
Settable delay pickup, settable delay dropout
[Tset1]
⚫
[Tset2]
Generator
G
⚫
Transformer
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
V
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
⚫
Reactor
⚫
Motor
M
⚫
Capacitor
C
⚫
Busbar
⚫
Circuit breaker
52
⚫
Current transformer
3CT
*
⚫
Voltage transformer
3VT
⚫
Disconnector
⚫
Earth
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
VI
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
Three-phase Corresponding Relationship
Basic
A, B, C
L1, L2, L3
R, Y, B
AN, BN, CN
L1N, L2N, L3N
RN, YN, BN
ABC
L123
RYB
U (voltage)
V
U
Example
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0
IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
IR, IY, IB, IN
Ua, Ub, Uc
VL1, VL2, VL3
UR, UY, UB
Uab, Ubc, Uca
VL12, VL23, VL31
URY, UYB, UBR
U0, U1, U2
VN, V1, V2
UN, U1, U2
Warranty
This product is covered by the standard NR 10-year warranty. For warranty details, please consult
the manufacturer or agent for warranty information.
Document Structure
This manual is a comprehensive work covering the theories of protection, control, supervision,
measurement, etc. and the structure & technical data of relevant hardware. Read the sections that
pertain to your application to gain valuable information about using this device. To concentrate on
the target sections of this manual as your job needs and responsibilities dictate. An overview of
each manual section and section topics follows.
1 Introduction
Introduces the features of this device, summarizes functions and applications of the device.
2 Technical Data
Lists device specifications, type tests, and ratings.
3 Protection Functions
Describes the function of various protection elements, gives detailed specifics on protection
scheme logic, and provides the relevant logic diagrams.
4 Control Functions
Describes the logic for the control of disconnectors and circuit breakers.
5 Measurement
Provides information on viewing fundamental and metering quantities for voltages and currents,
as well as power and energy metering data.
6 Supervision
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
VII
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
Describes self-supervision technique to help diagnose potential difficulties should these occur and
includes the list of status notification messages. Provides a troubleshooting chart for common
device operation problems.
7 System Functions
Describes how to perform fundamental operations such as clock synchronization, communicating
with the device, switching active setting group, checking relay status, reading event reports and
SER (Sequential Events Recorder) records.
8 Hardware
Describes the hardware of the PCS S series device family and provides general information on
the product structure and the modules’ information.
9 Settings
Provides a list of all PCS-9611S settings and their ranges, unit, steps, defaults. The organization
of the settings is similar to the settings organization in the device and in the PCS-Studio
configuration tool.
Appendix A Glossary
Describes the abbreviations adopted in this manual.
Document Revision History
PN: ZL_PCS-9613S_X_Technical Manual_EN_Overseas General_X
Current version: R1.10
Corresponding Version
Date
Document
Software
R1.00
R1.00
2019-07-29
R1.01
R1.11
2019-10-17
Description of change
⚫
Form the original manual.
⚫
Capacitive current compensation function for current
differential protection is deleted.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
VIII
Date: 2020-09-02
Preface
R1.10
R1.12
⚫
Measurement scope and accuracy are modified
⚫
The logic of the direction element of phase overcurrent
protection,
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection,
negative-sequence overcurrent protection and sensitive
earth fault protection are modified;
⚫
The operation characteristic and dropout characteristic of
RMS overcurrent protection are modified;
⚫
The VT circuit supervision function is modified
⚫
The logic diagram of enabling/disabling phase overvoltage
protection,
residual
overvoltage
protection,
negative-sequence
overvoltage
protection,
positive-sequence overvoltage protection and under
voltage protection is modified;
⚫
Switch-on-to-fault protection is modified;
⚫
Broken conductor protection is added;
⚫
Thermal overload protection is added;
⚫
The control function is modified;
⚫
The NR6661A module is added.
⚫
The NR6663A module is added;
2020-09-02
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
IX
Date: 2020-09-02
Introduction
1 Introduction
1
Table of Contents
1.1 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Features............................................................................................................ 1-6
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Functional diagram of PCS-9613S ....................................................................... 1-1
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-a
Date: 2020-09-02
1 Introduction
1
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-b
Date: 2020-09-02
Introduction
1.1 Application
The PCS-9613S relay can provide current differential protection, measurement, control and
monitoring functions for the feeder line in all systems of which the neutral point is effectively
grounded or not effectively grounded. Many auxiliary functions such as fault location, fault
recording, event recording, communication functions and etc. are also integrated into the device.
This relay is suitable for wall surface mounted indoors or outdoors or flush mounted into a control
panel.
The function diagram of this relay is shown in Figure 1.1-1.
Busbar
3VTs
52
27P
59P
59Q
VTS
59G
81U
81R
81O
25
79
1 VT
67P
*
3 CTs
87L
*
32R
50P
51P
50G
51G
46BC
CTS
51Q
37
FR
49
1CT
SOTF
67G
Data
exchange
Load
Figure 1.1-1 Functional diagram of PCS-9613S
1.2 Functions
1
Protection functions
ANSI
87
Protection Functions
Current differential protection
Remark
Steady-state current differential element (2 stages)
CT saturation detection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-1
Date: 2020-09-02
1
1 Introduction
1
67P
50/51P
Phase overcurrent protection
Up to 6 stages with independent logic
Voltage control element for each stage
Optional direction element for each stage, including
forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Harmonic control element for each stage
Up to 6 stages with independent logic
Optional direction element for each stage, including
forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
67G
50/51G
Earth fault protection
Optional measured zero-sequence current or calculated
zero-sequence current
Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
50/51Q
Negative-sequence
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Harmonic control element for each stage
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Optional direction element for each stage, including
overcurrent
forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
protection
Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
50/51R
46BC
RMS overcurrent protection
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Full-current
RMS
value
includes
2nd~11th
harmonic
components
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Adopt
the
ratio
of
negative-sequence
current
to
positive-sequence current (Ι2/Ι1) to detect the broken
Broken conductor protection
conductor.
59P
59G
59Q
59Pos
Overvoltage protection
Residual overvoltage protection
Negative-sequence
overvoltage
protection
Positive-sequence
protection
overvoltage
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
One stage of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-2
Date: 2020-09-02
Introduction
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
1
characteristic for each stage
27P
Undervoltage protection
Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic
Check mode using circuit breaker position and current
criterion
81O
Overfrequency protection
81U
Underfrequency protection
81R
32R
37
Frequency
rate-of-change
protection
Reverse power protection
Undercurrent protection
Blocked by instantaneous VT circuit failure
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Up to 6 stages with independent logic
Voltage control element
Up to 6 stages with independent logic
Voltage control element
Up to 6 stages with independent logic
Voltage control element
Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Optional blocking condition, including circuit breaker
position and current criterion
Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic
Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage
Breaker failure protection and re-trip function
Optional current criterion (phase overcurrent element,
zero-sequence overcurrent element, negative-sequence
50BF
Breaker failure protection
overcurrent element)
It can be initiated by current, circuit breaker position or
external binary input
50PSOTF
50GSOTF
Switch-on-to-fault protection
Two time delays
One stage of phase overcurrent SOTF protection
One stage of earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection
Harmonic control element
Voltage control element for phase overcurrent SOTF
protection
49
Thermal overload protection
25
Synchro-check
79
Auto-reclosing
Two stages of thermal overload protection, one stage for
alarm purpose and the other stage for trip purpose
Independent logic for auto-reclosing and manually closing
One shot or multi-shot
3-pole AR
It can be triggered by protection operation signal or
external binary input signal
VTS
Voltage transformer supervision
CTS
Current transformer supervision
FL
Supports synchronism check or dead charge check
Fault location function
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-3
Date: 2020-09-02
1 Introduction
TCS
1
2
3
4
5
Tripping circuit supervision
Control functions
⚫
Circuit breaker & disconnector control (Remote/Local)
⚫
Synchronism check for remote and manual closing
Measurement functions
⚫
Energy metering (active and reactive energy are calculated in import and export direction
respectively)
⚫
Power (Apparent/Active/Reactive)
⚫
Power factor
⚫
Frequency
⚫
Event recorder including 1024 disturbance items, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs.
⚫
Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file).
Supervision functions
⚫
VT circuit supervision
⚫
CT circuit supervision
⚫
Trip/Close coil supervision
⚫
Self-diagnostic
⚫
DC power supply supervision
⚫
System frequency supervision
Communication functions
⚫
Up to four 10Base-T/100Base-TX copper Ethernet ports using IEC 61850, DNP3 or IEC
60870-5-103 over TCP/IP
⚫
Up to four 100Base-FX optical Ethernet ports using IEC 61850, DNP3 or IEC
60870-5-103 over TCP/IP
⚫
Two RS-485 serial ports using IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus
⚫
One RS-485 serial port for clock synchronization
⚫
Support GOOSE communication module using IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE
⚫
Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
⚫
Redundancy protocols PRP and HSR
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-4
Date: 2020-09-02
Introduction
⚫
6
7
8
One front RJ45 port for debugging
Digital interface
⚫
Support IEC 61850 MMS Server via extendable electrical or optical Ethernet port
⚫
Support IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE via extendable electrical or optical Ethernet port
⚫
Support IEC 61850-9-2LE SV via extendable electrical or optical Ethernet port
1
User Interfaces
⚫
Friendly HMI interface with LCD, easy-to-use keypad aids simple navigation and
set-point adjustment
⚫
Push buttons for open/close, switch for selection between local and remote control, and
user's login and logout authority management
⚫
4 Programmable operator pushbuttons with user-configurable labels
⚫
Up to 15/18 (6U, 1/3 × 19" or 6U, 1/2 × 19" chassis) programmable target LEDs with
user-configurable labels
⚫
1 RS-232 rear port for printer (by iumper)
⚫
Language switchover—English+ selected language
⚫
Configuration tool—PCS-Studio
Additional functions
⚫
User programmable logic
⚫
Fault location
⚫
Fault phase selection
⚫
System phase sequences rotation function (ABC or ACB)
⚫
Clock synchronization
⚫
IRIG-B: IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level or TTL level
PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level or binary input
PPM: Pulse per minute (PPM) via RS-485 differential level or binary input
IEEE1588: Clock message based on IEEE1588 via Ethernet network
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Message (IEC103/Modbus/DNP3): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol,
Modbus protocol and DNP3 protocol
Cyber security
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-5
Date: 2020-09-02
1 Introduction
1
NERC CIP
IEC 62351
IEC 62443
IEEE 1686
1.3 Features
⚫
Unified software and hardware platform, comprehensive power grid solutions of protection,
control, measurement and monitoring, easy to use and maintain.
⚫
High reliability and redundancy design for drive systems of the sampling circuit and the output
circuit ensure that overall reliability of the device is high. Real-time sampling based on dual AD
can mutually check and detect the potential abnormality in the sampling circuit in time. The
control power supply of the output relay is independent with the control circuit of trigger signals,
which can prevent from undesired operation caused by the abnormality of drive circuit of
output relays.
⚫
Various function modules can satisfy various situations according to the different requirements
of users. Flexible and universal logic programming, user-defined configuration of BI/BOs,
buttons and LEDs and powerful analogue programming are supported.
⚫
Modularized hardware design makes the device be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified
service person. It can be combined with different I/O modules, with online self-check and
monitoring function, and the device can be restored from abnormal operation only need to
replace a single abnormal module.
⚫
Support memory check and error correction function, ensure high reliability and safety.
⚫
Support the internet communication protocol of native PRP/HSR and RSTP.
⚫
Fully compatible with IEC 61850 edition 1 & edition 2, support MMS service, IEC 62351
communication service, GOOSE communication in station level & process level, SV
communication with multi-sampling rate.
⚫
Fully comply with cyber security standards, including IEC62443, IEC62351, IEEE1686,
NERC-CIP, support role based access control (RBAC), security audit, security encryption
communication and security tool, improve the cyber security capability of devices.
⚫
Powerful COMTRADE fault and disturbance recording function is supported. The whole
recording time is automatically configurable by the fault duration, which is convenient to fault
analysis and replay. The recording sample rate is up to 9.6kHz.
⚫
Settable secondary rated current (1A/5A) and settable voltage threshold of binary input
⚫
Support small size and large size LCD, control and multifunction button
⚫
Support flush mounting, semi-flush mounting, surface mounting, wall mounting and other
mounting methods.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-6
Date: 2020-09-02
Introduction
⚫
Cross screw IO, CT/VT terminals can support AWG12 specification connector and 4mm 2 lead
⚫
Multiple variants with case size 6U, 1/3 × 19" or 6U, 1/2 × 19"
⚫
Protection class of front side is up to IP54
⚫
PCS-Studio engineering tool is the application software on the user's PC for the interface with
PCS S series devices providing all the related functionality. It ranges from device configuration
to entire substation design of bay integration.
⚫
Support IEEE1588, IRIG-B clock synchronization
⚫
Support actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB, incorrect connection of actual
phase sequence can automatically be verified and relevant protection functions can be
blocked.
⚫
Equipped with high-speed large capacity output relay, its operation speed is less than 1ms and
its break capacity is up to 10A. The real-time supervision for output drive circuit can detect the
abnormality in advance.
⚫
Support setup up to 40 users and allow each user to own different password and access
authority.
⚫
Fully integrates multi functions into one device and can realize the protection and monitoring
1
function of feeder line.
⚫
Current differential protection
Two-terminal transmission line application.
Phase-segregated differential protection employs steady quantities as protection criteria,
easy to set, quick to clear the fault, high sensitivity and immune to power swing and load
fluctuation.
Current differential protection has the excellent resistance to CT saturation when external
fault. As long as the correct transfer time is no less than 3ms, current differential
protection will ensure fast clearance of internal fault and non-operation of external fault.
Current differential protection supports double fiber channel, parallel and independent,
either can be selected as main channel and seamlessly switched to standby channel
when main channel is abnormal.
Unique and reliable differential logic and it can be set non-operation when CT circuit
failure under normal conditions.
⚫
Both dedicated fiber channel and multiplexing fiber channel are supported, and single mode
and multi-mode channel combination operation mode is enable. Communication rate supports
64kbit/s and 2Mbit/s, and communication protocol supports C37.94 and G.703.
⚫
Comprehensive functionality includes phase overcurrent protection, earth fault overcurrent
protection, negative-sequence overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-7
Date: 2020-09-02
1 Introduction
protection, frequency protection, reverse power protection, breaker failure protection,
undercurrent protection etc. The breaker failure, reclosing, measuring, monitoring and control
function are supported.
1
⚫
The overcurrent protection is combined with harmonic blocking logic, which can prevent
mal-operation affected by inrush current while the transformer is no-load energized.
⚫
Selectable IEC, ANSI inverse-time characteristic curves that can be defined by users, and the
inverse-time drop-out curve selection is supported.
⚫
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection support single phase and three phase operation
criteria setting, phase voltage and phase-to-phase voltage measurement mode are selectable,
which can be for various applications.
⚫
Complete event recording function is provided: 64 latest protection operation reports, 1024
latest supervision records, 1024 latest control operation records, 1024 latest user operation
records and 1024 latest records of time tagged sequence of event (SOE) can be recorded.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1-8
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 AC Current Input ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.5 Binary Output........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2 Mechanical Specifications .............................................................................. 2-5
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-6
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.4.3 Optical Fiber Port ................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.4.4 Print Port............................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port .................................................................................................. 2-7
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-8
2.5.1 Environmental Tests ............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests .................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.3 Electrical Tests...................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.6 Certifications.................................................................................................. 2-10
2.7 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) .........................................................................2-11
2.8 Terminals .........................................................................................................2-11
2.8.1 Ring Ferrule ........................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.8.2 Pin Ferrule .......................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.9 Measurement Scope and Accuracy ..............................................................2-11
2.10 Management Function ................................................................................. 2-12
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-a
Date: 2020-09-02
2
2 Technical Data
2.10.1 Control Performance ........................................................................................................ 2-12
2.10.2 Clock Performance ........................................................................................................... 2-12
2.10.3 Fault and Disturbance Recording..................................................................................... 2-12
2.10.4 Binary Input Signal ........................................................................................................... 2-12
2
2.11 Protective Functions ................................................................................... 2-13
2.11.1 Fault Detector (FD) ........................................................................................................... 2-13
2.11.2 Current Differential Protection (87L) ................................................................................. 2-13
2.11.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P) ........................................................................... 2-13
2.11.4 Earth Fault Protection (50/51G) ....................................................................................... 2-14
2.11.5 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q)...................................................... 2-15
2.11.6 RMS Overcurrent Protection (50/51R) ............................................................................. 2-16
2.11.7 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) ............................................................................... 2-16
2.11.8 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) ................................................................................ 2-16
2.11.9 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G) ........................................................................... 2-17
2.11.10 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q) ........................................................ 2-17
2.11.11 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Pos) ....................................................... 2-17
2.11.12 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) ............................................................................ 2-17
2.11.13 Overfrequency Protection (81O) .................................................................................... 2-18
2.11.14 Underfrequency Protection (81U)................................................................................... 2-18
2.11.15 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R) ................................................................. 2-18
2.11.16 Reverse Power Protection (32R).................................................................................... 2-18
2.11.17 Undercurrent Protection (37) .......................................................................................... 2-19
2.11.18 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF).................................................................................. 2-19
2.11.19 Switch-on-to-Fault Protection (SOTF) ............................................................................ 2-19
2.11.20 Thermal Overload Protection (49) .................................................................................. 2-20
2.11.21 Auto-reclosing (79) ......................................................................................................... 2-20
2.11.22 Transient Overreach ....................................................................................................... 2-20
2.11.23 Fault Locator ................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.12 Communication Functions ......................................................................... 2-20
2.12.1 GOOSE ............................................................................................................................ 2-20
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-b
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2.12.2 SV ..................................................................................................................................... 2-21
2
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-c
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-d
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications
“System phase sequence”, which can be set by PCS-Studio, this setting
informs the device of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or
ACB. CT and VT inputs on the device, labelled as A, B and C, must be
connected to system phase A, B and C for correct operation.
2.1.1 AC Current Input
Phase rotation
ABC or ACB
Nominal frequency (fn)
50Hz, 60Hz
Rated current (In)
1A/5A (Settable)
Linear to
0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously
4In
-for 10s
30In
-for 1s
100In
-for half a cycle
250In
Burden
<0.05VA/phase @1A, <0.25VA/phase @5A
Number
Up to 4 current inputs according to various applications
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input
Phase rotation
ABC or ACB
Nominal frequency (fn)
50Hz, 60Hz
Rated voltage (Un)
100V~130V
Linear to
1V~300V
Thermal withstand
Phase-to-ground
Phase-to-phase
-continuously
300V
519V
-10s
600V
1038V
-1s
660V
1141V
Burden at rated
<0.10VA/phase @100V
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-1
Date: 2020-09-02
2
2 Technical Data
Number
Up to 4 voltage inputs according to various applications
2.1.3 Power Supply
100Vac/110Vac/115Vac
110Vdc/125Vdc
2
24Vdc/30Vdc
Rated voltage
120Vac/127Vac/220Vac
220Vdc/250Vdc
48Vdc/60Vdc
230Vac/240Vac/250Vac
IEC 61000-4-11:2017
IEC 61000-4-29:2000
Permissible voltage range
88~300Vdc
80~275Vac
18~72Vdc
IEC 60255-26:2013
Permissible AC ripple voltage
≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Quiescent condition
Additional
for
<15W (Default hardware configuration)
each
0.25W ~ 0.35W
energized SFP
Quiescent condition: <1W
0.004W @ 24VDC
Additional
for
each
BI
0.015W @ 48VDC
Additional for each energized
Burden
module
0.08W @ 110VDC
binary input
0.32W @ 220VDC
0.41W @ 250VDC
Additional for
each BO
module
Quiescent condition: <0.1W
Additional for each energized relay: <0.44W
Additional module for SV
<7W
sampling
2.1.4 Binary Input
Settable pickup voltage and dropout voltage
Rated voltage
110Vdc
125Vdc
220Vdc
250Vdc
Rated current drain
0.73mA
0.83mA
1.47mA
1.67mA
On value (default set)
69.3~132Vdc
78.75~160Vdc
138.6~264Vdc
157.5~300Vdc
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-2
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Off value (default set)
<55Vdc
<62.5Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage
300Vdc
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc (1 min)
<110Vdc
<125Vdc
Up to 34 (6U, 1/3 × 19", ring ferrule), 41 (6U, 1/3 × 19", pin ferrule), 84
Number
(6U, 1/2 × 19", ring ferrule) or 105 (6U, 1/2 × 19", pin ferrule) binary
inputs according to various hardware configurations
Settable pickup voltage and dropout voltage
Rated voltage
110Vac
220Vac
Rated current drain
0.73mA
1.47mA
On value (default set)
69.3~132Vac
138.6~264Vac
Off value (default set)
<55Vac
<110Vac
Maximum permissible voltage
300Vac
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc (1 min)
Up to 34 (6U, 1/3 × 19", ring ferrule), 41 (6U, 1/3 × 19", pin ferrule), 84
Number
(6U, 1/2 × 19", ring ferrule) or 105 (6U, 1/2 × 19", pin ferrule) binary
inputs according to various hardware configurations
Settable pickup voltage and dropout voltage
Rated voltage
24Vdc
48Vdc
Rated current drain
0.16mA
0.32mA
On value (default set)
15.12~28.8Vdc
30.24~57.6Vdc
Off value (default set)
<12V
<24V
Maximum permissible voltage
300Vdc
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc (1 min)
Up to 34 (6U, 1/3 × 19", ring ferrule), 41 (6U, 1/3 × 19", pin ferrule), 84
Number
(6U, 1/2 × 19", ring ferrule) or 105 (6U, 1/2 × 19", pin ferrule) binary
inputs according to various hardware configurations
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-3
Date: 2020-09-02
2
2 Technical Data
2.1.5 Binary Output
Tripping/signalling contact
2
Output mode
Potential free contact
Maximum system voltage
250Vac, 300Vdc
Continuous carry
10A
Pickup time (Typical value)
<5ms
Drop-off time (Resistive load)
<6ms
0.5A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)
0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
0.5A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Cyclic capacity (2.5 cycle/second,
0.30A@125Vdc
L/R=40ms)
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
30A@3s
Short duration current
50A@1s
Durability (Loaded contact)
10000 operations
Up to 18 (6U, 1/3 × 19", ring ferrule), 22 (6U, 1/3 × 19", pin ferrule), 44
Number
(6U, 1/2 × 19", ring ferrule) or 56 (6U, 1/2 × 19", pin ferrule) binary
outputs according to various hardware configurations
Heavy-capacity tripping contact
Output mode
Potential free contact
MOV Protection (Maximum voltage)
350Vdc, 275Vac
Continuous carry
10A
Pickup time (Typical value)
<1ms
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-4
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Dropout time (Resistive load)
<10ms
10A@48V L/R=40ms
10A@110V L/R=40ms
Breaking capacity
10A@125V L/R=40ms
2
10A@220V L/R=20ms
10A@250V L/R=20ms
10A@48V L/R=40ms
Cyclic Capacity (4cycles in 1 second,
10A@110V L/R=40ms
followed by 2 minutes idle for thermal
10A@125V L/R=40ms
dissipation)
10A@220V L/R=20ms
10A@250V L/R=20ms
30A@3s
Short duration current
50A@1s
Durability (Loaded contact)
10000 operations
Up to 4 (6U, 1/3 × 19", ring ferrule) or 12 (6U, 1/2 × 19", ring ferrule)
Number
heavy-capacity binary outputs according to various hardware
configurations
2.2 Mechanical Specifications
Chassis color
Silver grey
Approx. 8.66kg (6U, 1/2 × 19")
Weight per device
Approx. 6.93kg (6U, 1/3 × 19")
Chassis material
Aluminum alloy
Location of terminal
Rear panel of the device
Device structure
Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated front plate
Protection Class
Standard
IEC 60529-2013
IP52
Front side
IP54 (valid for surface mounting mode of 6U, 1/3 × 19" or 6U, 1/2 × 19"
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-5
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
case with sealing strip)
2
Other sides
IP50
Rear side, connection terminals
IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range
Standard
IEC 60255-1:2009
-40°C to +80°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C
Operating temperature
and above 70°C)
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +80°C
range
Permissible humidity
5%~95%, without condensation
Pollution degree
Ⅱ
Altitude
<3000m
2.4 Communication Port
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate
4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103:1997 or Modbus
Maximum capacity
32
Maximum transmission distance
500m
Safety level
Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair
Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port
Connector type
RJ-45
LC
Transmission rate
100Mbit/s
Transmission standard
100Base-TX
100Base-FX
Maximum transmission distance
100m
2km (1310nm)
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-6
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Safety level
Isolation to ELV level
2.4.3 Optical Fiber Port
For Station Level and Process Level
Characteristic
Glass optical fiber
Connector type
LC
Fiber type
Multi mode
Maximum transmission distance
2km
Wave length
1310nm
Minimum transmission power
50μm: -24dBm
Minimum receiving power
-31dBm
Margin
50μm: -7dBm
2
62.5μm: -20dBm
62.5μm: -9dBm
For Differential Communications
Characteristics
Glass optical fiber
Connector type
ST or FC
Fibre type
Single mode
Wave length
1310nm
1550nm
850nm
Transmission power
-11.0dBm~-7.0dBm
0dBm~5dBm
62.5μm: -20dBm~-12dBm
Minimum receiving power
-38dBm
-36dBm
62.5μm: -32dBm
Maximum transmission distance
60km
120km
62.5μm: 2km
Multi mode
2.4.4 Print Port
Type
RS-232
Baud rate
4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type
EPSON® 300K printer
Safety level
Isolation to ELV level
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port
Type
RS-485 serial port
Input
Demodulated IRIG-B or PPS
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-7
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Nominal voltage
5Vdc+10%
Maximum voltage
5.5Vdc
Input impedance
2.5kΩ
Isolation
500Vdc
2
2.5 Type Tests
2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test
IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test
IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic
IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class Ⅰ
Shock and bump
IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class Ⅰ
2.5.3 Electrical Tests
Standard
IEC 60255-27:2013
Dielectric tests
Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Impulse voltage tests
Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category
Ⅲ
Insulation resistance measurements
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 60255-26:2013
1MHz burst disturbance test
Common mode: class Ⅲ 2.5kV
Differential mode: class Ⅲ 1.0kV
IEC 61000-4-2:2008 class Ⅳ
Electrostatic discharge test
For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
Radio frequency interference tests
IEC 60255-26:2013 class Ⅲ
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-8
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz, 1400~2700MHz
Spot frequency
2
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
IEC 60255-26:2013
Power supply, I/O, Earth: class Ⅳ, 4kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
Fast transient disturbance tests
Communication terminals: class Ⅳ, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-26:2013
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class Ⅳ, 1.2/50μs
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-26:2013
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class Ⅲ, 10V (rms), 150
Conducted
RF
electromagnetic
kHz~80MHz
disturbance
Spot frequency
10V (rms), f=27MHz/68MHz
Power
frequency
magnetic
field
immunity
IEC 61000-4-8: 2009
class Ⅴ, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2016
Pulse magnetic field immunity
class Ⅴ, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-10:2016
immunity
class Ⅴ, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
IEC 60255-26:2013
Conducted emission
0.15MHz~0.50MHz: 79dB (μV) quasi peak, 66dB (μV) average
0.50MHz~30MHz: 73dB (μV) quasi peak, 60dB (μV) average
IEC 60255-26:2013
Radiated emission
Below 1GHz
30MHz~230MHz: 40dB (μV/m) quasi peak @10m,
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-9
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
50dB (μV/m) quasi peak @3m
230MHz~1000MHz: 47dB (μV/m) quasi peak @10m,
57dB (μV/m) quasi peak @3m
1GHz~3GHz: 56dB (μV/m) average, 76dB (μV/m)
2
peak @3m
Above 1GHz
3GHz~6GHz: 60dB (μV/m) average, 80dB (μV/m)
peak @3m
IEC 60255-26:2013
Auxiliary power supply performance
Up to 200ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
- Voltage dips
50ms for interruption without rebooting without energy storage board
-Voltage short interruptions
(Typical configuration)
500ms for interruption without rebooting with energy storage board
(Typical configuration)
2.6 Certifications
⚫
ISO9001:2015
⚫
ISO14001:2015
⚫
ISO45001:2018
⚫
ISO/IEC27001:2013
⚫
CMMI L5
⚫
EMC: 2014/30/EU, EN60255-26:2013
⚫
Products safety (LVD): 2014/35/EU, EN60255-27:2014
⚫
IEC 61850: Edition 2, Parts 6, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3,7-4 and 8-1
⚫
IEC 61850: Edition 2, GOOSE Performance Class P1 (3ms)
⚫
IEEE 1588: IEEE Std C37.238TM-2017
⚫
DNP: DNP 3.0
⚫
PRP: IEC 62439-3 Ed.3 (IS 2016)
⚫
HSR: IEC 62439-3 Ed.3 (IS 2016)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-10
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2.7 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Type
Resolution
Large size (6U 1/2 × 19" case)
320x240 pixels
Small size (6U 1/3 × 19" case)
240x160 pixels
2
2.8 Terminals
2.8.1 Ring Ferrule
Connection Type
Wire Size
Screw Type
Torque
AC current
Screw terminals, 1.5~4mm2 lead
M4
1.6~1.8 N⋅m
AC voltage
Screw terminals, 0.8~4mm2 lead
M4
1.6~1.8 N⋅m
Power supply
Screw terminals, 0.8~4mm2 lead
M4
0.8~1.4 N⋅m
Contact I/O
Screw terminals, 0.8~4mm2 lead
M4
0.8~1.4 N⋅m
Grounding (Earthing) connection
BVR type, 0.8~4mm2 lead
M3
0.6~0.8 N⋅m
2.8.2 Pin Ferrule
Connection Type
Wire Size
Screw Type
Torque
Power supply
Screw terminals, 0.3~3.3mm2 lead
M2.5
0.4~0.6 N⋅m
Contact I/O
Screw terminals, 0.3~3.3mm2 lead
M2.5
0.4~0.6 N⋅m
2.9 Measurement Scope and Accuracy
Item
Range
Phase range
0°~ 360°
Accuracy
±0.2° (0.2×In＜I＜4.0×In)
±0.5° (0.1×In＜I＜0.2×In)
Frequency
Fn±5 Hz
≤ 0.002Hz
Currents from protection measurement current transformers
≤ 0.6% of rating (0.06In~0.2In)
Current
0.06~4.00In
≤ 0.2% of applied quantities (0.2In~4.00In)
Voltage
0.05~1.50Un
≤ 0.2% of applied quantities (0.05Un~1.50Un)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-11
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
0.05~1.50Un
≤ 1.0% of rating (0.06~0.1In)
0.06~4.00In
≤ 0.5% of applied quantities (0.1~4.00In)
0.05~1.50Un
≤ 1.0% of rating (0.06~0.1In)
0.06~4.00In
≤ 0.5% of applied quantities (0.1~4.00In)
0.05~1.50Un
≤ 1.0% of rating (0.06~0.1In)
0.06~4.00In
≤ 0.5% of applied quantities (0.1~4.00In)
0.05~1.50Un
≤ 1.0% of rating (0.06~0.1In)
0.06~4.00In
≤ 0.5% of applied quantities (0.1~4.00In)
0.05~1.50Un
≤ 1.0% of rating (0.06~0.1In)
0.06~4.00In
≤ 0.5% of applied quantities (0.1~4.00In)
Active power (W)
Reactive power (VAr)
2
Apparent power (VA)
Energy (Wh)
Energy (VAh)
2.10 Management Function
2.10.1 Control Performance
Control mode
Local or remote
Response time of local control
≤1s
Response time of remote control
≤3s
2.10.2 Clock Performance
Real time clock accuracy
≤1s/day
Accuracy of GPS synchronization
≤1ms
External time synchronization
IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, IEEE1588 or SNTP protocol
2.10.3 Fault and Disturbance Recording
Duration & Recording position
Sampling rate
Settable pre-disturbance, post-disturbance and maximum recorded
duration
Up to 9.6kHz
2.10.4 Binary Input Signal
Resolution of binary input signal
≤1ms
Binary input mode
Potential-free contact
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-12
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2.11 Protective Functions
2.11.1 Fault Detector (FD)
2.11.1.1 DPFC Current Element
2
≤2.5%×Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Current setting accuracy
2.11.1.2 Residual Current Element
≤2.5%×Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Current setting accuracy
2.11.2 Current Differential Protection (87L)
Current setting accuracy
≤2.5%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤30ms (at 2 times current setting)
Maximum operating time (at 4 times
<30ms (Steady-state current differential element)
current setting)
Minimum operating time (at 4 times
<20ms (Steady-state current differential element)
current setting)
Dropout time
<30ms
2.11.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)
Without direction controlled element
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤25ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Inverse-time characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Definite-time
characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Inverse-time
characteristics)
Dropout ratio
≤1%×Setting or 25ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% current tolerance or 35ms (1.2≤I/Ip≤30)
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
≤5% of calculated value or 30ms
0.95
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-13
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
With direction controlled element
2
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤40ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Inverse-time characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Definite-time
characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Inverse-time
characteristics)
≤1%×Setting or 40ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% current tolerance or 35ms (1.2≤I/Ip≤30)
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
≤5% of calculated value or 30ms
Dropout ratio
0.95
Phase angel accuracy
≤3°
2.11.4 Earth Fault Protection (50/51G)
Without direction controlled element
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤25ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Inverse-time characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Definite-time
characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Inverse-time
characteristics)
Dropout ratio
≤1%×Setting or 25ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% current tolerance or 35ms (1.2≤I/Ip≤30)
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
≤5% of calculated value or 30ms
0.95
With direction controlled element
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-14
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤40ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Inverse-time characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Definite-time
characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Inverse-time
characteristics)
≤1%×Setting or 40ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% current tolerance or 35ms (1.2≤I/Ip≤30)
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
≤5% of calculated value or 30ms
Dropout ratio
0.95
Phase angel accuracy
≤3°
2.11.5 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q)
Without direction controlled element
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤25ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Inverse-time characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Definite-time
characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Inverse-time
characteristics)
Dropout ratio
≤1%×Setting or 25ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% current tolerance or 35ms (1.2≤I/Ip≤30)
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
≤5% of calculated value or 30ms
0.95
With direction controlled element
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤40ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 40ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% current tolerance or 35ms (1.2≤I/Ip≤30)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-15
Date: 2020-09-02
2
2 Technical Data
(Inverse-time characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Definite-time
characteristics)
Dropout time accuracy (Inverse-time
characteristics)
2
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
≤5% of calculated value or 30ms
Dropout ratio
0.95
Phase angel accuracy
≤3°
2.11.6 RMS Overcurrent Protection (50/51R)
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤2.5%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤25ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 25ms (at 2 times current setting)
Dropout time accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
Dropout ratio
0.95
2.11.7 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting Accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms (at 2 times current setting)
Dropout ratio
0.97
2.11.8 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)
Pickup voltage
1.0×Setting
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
(Inverse-time characteristics)
accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% voltage tolerance or 40ms (1.1≤U/Up≤2)
Dropout time accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
Dropout ratio
Settable 0.93~1.00, default value: 0.98
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-16
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2.11.9 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G)
Pickup voltage
1.0×Setting
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Dropout time accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
Dropout ratio
Settable 0.93~1.00, default value: 0.98
2
2.11.10 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q)
Pickup voltage
1.0×Setting
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Dropout time accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
Dropout ratio
Settable 0.93~1.00, default value: 0.98
2.11.11 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Pos)
Pickup voltage
1.0×Setting
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 35ms (at 1.1 times voltage setting)
Dropout time accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
Dropout ratio
Settable 0.93~1.00, default value: 0.98
2.11.12 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)
Pickup voltage
1.0×Setting
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤35ms (at 0.9 times voltage setting)
Operating
time
delay
accuracy
(Definite-time characteristics)
Operating
time
(Inverse-time characteristics)
accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 35ms (at 0.9 times voltage setting)
≤5% of calculated value + 1% voltage tolerance or 50ms (U/Up≤0.9)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-17
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Dropout time accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms
Dropout ratio
Settable 1.00~1.20, default value: 1.03
2.11.13 Overfrequency Protection (81O)
2
Pickup frequency
1.0×Setting
Frequency setting accuracy
≤ 0.01Hz
Pickup time
≤70ms
Time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting+70ms
Dropout time accuracy
≤40ms
Dropout frequency
1.0×Setting
2.11.14 Underfrequency Protection (81U)
Pickup frequency
1.0×Setting
Frequency setting accuracy
≤ 0.01Hz
Pickup time
≤70ms
Time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting+70ms
Dropout time accuracy
≤40ms
Dropout frequency
1.0×Setting
2.11.15 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R)
Pickup frequency
Frequency
rate-of-change
accuracy
1.0×Setting
setting
≤ 0.02Hz
Data window
4 cycles
Pickup time
≤70ms
Time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting+70ms
Dropout time accuracy
≤40ms
Dropout frequency
1.0×Setting
2.11.16 Reverse Power Protection (32R)
Pickup power
1.0×Setting
Power setting accuracy
≤2%×Setting or 0.01pu, whichever is greater
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-18
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01pu, whichever is greater
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤30ms (at 2 times power setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms (at 2 times power setting)
Dropout time accuracy
≤30ms
Dropout ratio
0.95
2
2.11.17 Undercurrent Protection (37)
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting Accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Pickup time
≤30ms (at 0.5 times current setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 30ms (at 0.5 times current setting)
Drop-out time accuracy
≤30ms
Dropout ratio
1.1
2.11.18 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting Accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 20ms (at 2 times current setting)
Pickup time
≤20ms
Dropout time
<20ms
Dropout ratio
1
2.11.19 Switch-on-to-Fault Protection (SOTF)
Pickup current
1.0×Setting
Current setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01In, whichever is greater
Voltage setting accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 0.01V, whichever is greater
Pickup time accuracy
≤25ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating time delay accuracy
≤1%×Setting or 35ms (at 2 times current setting)
Drop-out time
≤30ms
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-19
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
Drop-out ratio
0.95
2.11.20 Thermal Overload Protection (49)
≤2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater (for current
Operating time
2
between 1.2 and 20 multiples of pickup)
≤30ms
Reset time
2.11.21 Auto-reclosing (79)
Phase angel accuracy (synchronism
check)
Voltage
setting
accuracy
(synchronism check)
Frequency
setting
accuracy
(synchronism check)
Time delay accuracy (synchronism
check)
≤2°
≤1%×Setting or 0.1V, whichever is greater
0.01Hz
≤1%×Setting+20ms
Time delay accuracy (Reclaim)
≤1%×Setting+20ms
Time delay accuracy (Reclosing)
≤1%×Setting+20ms
2.11.22 Transient Overreach
Accuracy for all high-speed protection
≤2%
2.11.23 Fault Locator
Accuracy for multi-phase faults with
< ±2.5%
single end feed
Tolerance will be higher in case of single-phase fault with high ground resistance.
2.12 Communication Functions
2.12.1 GOOSE
Receiving Control Block (RCB)
Max. 64 (Typical configuration: 50×FCD+200×BOOL+16×FLOAT)
Sending Control Block (SCB)
Max. 16 (Typical configuration: 100×BOOL)
Receiving route delay
Max. 2ms
Sending route delay
Max. 3ms
The capacity of GOOSE receiving and sending is determined by the
number of configured boards and control & protection functions.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-20
Date: 2020-09-02
2 Technical Data
2.12.2 SV
Receiving Control Block (RCB)
Max. 12
Receiving route delay
Max. 2ms
The capacity of SV receiving is determined by the number of configured
boards and control & protection functions.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-21
Date: 2020-09-02
2
2 Technical Data
2
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2-22
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3 Protection Functions
Table of Contents
3.1 Three-phase Current Element (TCUR3P) ....................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Function Description............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.4 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2 Three-phase Voltage Element (TVOL3P)........................................................ 3-3
3.2.1 Function Description............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.4 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3 One-phase Current Element (TCUR1P).......................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Function Description............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.3 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.4 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4 One-phase Voltage Element (TVOL1P) .......................................................... 3-6
3.4.1 Function Description............................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4.2 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.3 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.4.4 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.5 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-7
3.5.1 Function Description............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.5.2 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-a
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.6 Optical Pilot Channel (FO) .............................................................................3-11
3.6.1 Function Description........................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6.2 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-16
3.6.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.6.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.6.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.7 Current Differential Protection (87L) ............................................................ 3-18
3
3.7.1 Functions Description ......................................................................................................... 3-18
3.7.2 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-37
3.7.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.8 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P) ....................................................... 3-39
3.8.1 Function Description........................................................................................................... 3-39
3.8.2 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.3 I/O Signal ............................................................................................................................ 3-52
3.8.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.8.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.9 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50/51G) ............................................... 3-69
3.9.1 Function Description........................................................................................................... 3-69
3.9.2 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-78
3.9.3 I/O Signal ............................................................................................................................ 3-78
3.9.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.9.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.10 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q) ............................... 3-95
3.10.1 Function Description......................................................................................................... 3-95
3.10.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-104
3.10.3 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................ 3-104
3.10.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-105
3.10.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-105
3.11 RMS Overcurrent Protection (50/51R) .......................................................3-110
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-b
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.11.1 Function Description ....................................................................................................... 3-110
3.11.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-117
3.11.3 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................ 3-117
3.11.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-118
3.11.5 Settings ........................................................................................................................... 3-118
3.12 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) ...................................................... 3-122
3.12.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-122
3.12.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-123
3.12.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-123
3.12.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-124
3.12.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-124
3.13 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) ........................................................ 3-124
3.13.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-125
3.13.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-129
3.13.3 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................ 3-130
3.13.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-131
3.13.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-131
3.14 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G) ................................................... 3-135
3.14.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-135
3.14.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-137
3.14.3 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................ 3-137
3.14.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.14.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.15 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q).................................. 3-139
3.15.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-139
3.15.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-142
3.15.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-142
3.15.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.15.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.16 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Pos) ............................... 3-144
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-c
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.16.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-144
3.16.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-147
3.16.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-147
3.16.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-147
3.16.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-147
3.17 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) ...................................................... 3-148
3.17.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-148
3
3.17.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-154
3.17.3 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................ 3-155
3.17.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-156
3.17.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-157
3.18 Overfrequency Protection (81O)............................................................... 3-161
3.18.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-161
3.18.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-163
3.18.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-163
3.18.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-164
3.18.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-164
3.19 Underfrequency Protection (81U)............................................................. 3-165
3.19.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-165
3.19.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-167
3.19.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-167
3.19.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-168
3.19.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-168
3.20 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R) ........................................... 3-169
3.20.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-169
3.20.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-171
3.20.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-171
3.20.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-172
3.20.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-172
3.21 Reverse Power Protection (32R) .............................................................. 3-173
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-d
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.21.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-173
3.21.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-176
3.21.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-176
3.21.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-176
3.21.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-177
3.22 Undercurrent Protection (37) .................................................................... 3-177
3.22.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-178
3.22.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-180
3.22.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-181
3.22.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-182
3.22.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-182
3.23 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) ............................................................ 3-183
3.23.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-183
3.23.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-185
3.23.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-185
3.23.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-186
3.23.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-187
3.24 Switch-on-to-Fault Protection (SOTF) ...................................................... 3-188
3.24.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-188
3.24.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-189
3.24.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-189
3.24.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-190
3.24.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-192
3.25 Thermal Overload Protection (49) ............................................................ 3-193
3.25.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-193
3.25.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-197
3.25.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-197
3.25.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-198
3.25.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-198
3.26 Transfer Trip (TT) ....................................................................................... 3-199
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-e
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.26.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-199
3.26.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-199
3.26.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-199
3.26.4 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-200
3.26.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-200
3.27 Automatic Reclosure (79).......................................................................... 3-201
3.27.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-201
3
3.27.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-210
3.27.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-210
3.27.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-211
3.28 VT Circuit Supervision (VTS) .................................................................... 3-213
3.28.1 General Application ........................................................................................................ 3-213
3.28.2 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-214
3.28.3 Function Block ................................................................................................................ 3-214
3.28.4 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-214
3.28.5 Logic ............................................................................................................................... 3-215
3.28.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-216
3.29 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS).................................................................... 3-216
3.29.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-216
3.29.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-217
3.29.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-217
3.29.4 Logics ............................................................................................................................. 3-217
3.29.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-218
3.30 Fault Location (FL) .................................................................................... 3-218
3.30.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 3-218
3.30.2 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 3-220
3.30.3 I/O Signals ...................................................................................................................... 3-221
3.30.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 3-221
List of Figures
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-f
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of fault detector .......................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3.6-1 Direct optical link up to 2km with 850nm .......................................................... 3-12
Figure 3.6-2 Direct optical link up to 60km with 1310nm ...................................................... 3-12
Figure 3.6-3 Connect to a communication network via communication convertor........... 3-12
Figure 3.6-4 Connect to a communication network via MUX-64 .......................................... 3-13
Figure 3.6-5 Connect to a communication network via MUX-2M ......................................... 3-13
Figure 3.6-6 Schematic diagram of communication channel time ...................................... 3-15
Figure 3.6-7 Logic of receiving signal i ................................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3.6-8 Logic of sending signal i ..................................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3.6-9 Logic of channel alarm ........................................................................................ 3-17
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of enabling current differential protection ............................................. 3-19
Figure 3.7-2 Inconsistent enabling status of current differential protection ...................... 3-20
Figure 3.7-3 Common condition of current differential protection ...................................... 3-20
Figure 3.7-4 Operating characteristics of steady-state current differential element ......... 3-21
Figure 3.7-5 Operating characteristics of steady-state current differential element ......... 3-22
Figure 3.7-6 Logic of steady-state current differential element (stage 1) ........................... 3-23
Figure 3.7-7 Logic of steady-state current differential element (stage 2) ........................... 3-24
Figure 3.7-8 Connection mode ................................................................................................. 3-25
Figure 3.7-9 Schematic diagram of communication channel time ...................................... 3-27
Figure 3.7-10 Relation between CT saturation differential current and restraint current . 3-28
Figure 3.7-11 Logic of differential current supervision ......................................................... 3-29
Figure 3.7-12 CT circuit failure blocking current differential protection ............................. 3-30
Figure 3.7-13 Weak infeed logic of current differential protection ...................................... 3-31
Figure 3.7-14 Sending permissive signal of current differential protection ....................... 3-32
Figure 3.7-15 Logic of differential inter-trip element ............................................................. 3-34
Figure 3.7-16 CT schematic ...................................................................................................... 3-35
Figure 3.7-17 Equivalent circuit ............................................................................................... 3-35
Figure 3.7-18 Core's Magnetizing curve ................................................................................. 3-36
Figure 3.8-1 The enabling and blocking logic of phase overcurrent protection ................ 3-40
Figure 3.8-2 The fault detector element of phase overcurrent protection .......................... 3-40
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-g
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
Figure 3.8-3 The voltage control element of phase overcurrent protection ....................... 3-41
Figure 3.8-4 The direction element operation characteristics when phase A voltage is
polarized ..................................................................................................................................... 3-42
Figure 3.8-5 Logic diagram of forward and reverse direction element of phase overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................... 3-45
Figure 3.8-6 Logic diagram of harmonic control element of phase overcurrent protection3-46
Figure 3.8-7 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection3-47
3
Figure 3.8-8 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection3-48
Figure 3.8-9 Definite-time dropout characteristic of phase overcurrent protection .......... 3-49
Figure 3.8-10 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection3-50
Figure 3.8-11 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of phase overcurrent protection ......... 3-51
Figure 3.8-12 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection ............................................ 3-53
Figure 3.9-1 The enabling and blocking logic of earth fault overcurrent protection ......... 3-70
Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of earth fault overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3.9-3 The direction element operation characteristics when zero-sequence voltage
is polarized ................................................................................................................................. 3-71
Figure 3.9-4 Logic diagram of forward and reverse direction element of earth fault
overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 3-72
Figure 3.9-5 Logic diagram of harmonic control element of earth fault overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................... 3-73
Figure 3.9-6 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................... 3-74
Figure 3.9-7 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................... 3-75
Figure 3.9-8 Definite-time dropout characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection ... 3-76
Figure 3.9-9 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent protection3-77
Figure 3.9-10 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection . 3-78
Figure 3.9-11 Logic diagram of earth fault overcurrent protection...................................... 3-79
Figure 3.10-1 The enabling and blocking logic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
..................................................................................................................................................... 3-95
Figure 3.10-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................... 3-96
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-h
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Figure 3.10-3 The direction element operation characteristics of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 3-96
Figure 3.10-4 Logic diagram of forward and reverse direction element of
negative-sequence overcurrent protection ............................................................................ 3-98
Figure 3.10-5 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection ............................................................................................................ 3-100
Figure 3.10-6 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection ............................................................................................................ 3-101
Figure 3.10-7 Definite-time dropout characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-102
Figure 3.10-8 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-103
Figure 3.10-9 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-104
Figure 3.10-10 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overcurrent protection .................. 3-105
Figure 3.11-1 The enabling and blocking logic of RMS overcurrent protection................3-111
Figure 3.11-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of RMS overcurrent protection3-111
Figure 3.8-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection3-112
Figure 3.8-4 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection3-113
Figure 3.8-5 Definite-time dropout characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection .......... 3-114
Figure 3.8-6 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection 3-116
Figure 3.8-7 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection ........... 3-116
Figure 3.11-5 Logic diagram of RMS overcurrent protection ............................................. 3-118
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of broken conductor protection ............................................................ 3-124
Figure 3.12-1 The enabling and blocking logic of phase overvoltage protection ............ 3-125
Figure 3.12-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase overvoltage protection3-126
Figure 3.12-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of phase overvoltage protection3-127
Figure 3.12-4 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of phase overvoltage protection3-128
Figure 3.12-5 Definite-time dropout characteristic of phase overvoltage protection...... 3-129
Figure 3.12-6 Logic diagram of phase overvoltage protection .......................................... 3-131
Figure 3.13-1 The enabling and blocking logic of residual overvoltage protection ........ 3-135
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of residual overvoltage
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-i
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-136
Figure 3.13-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of residual overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-136
Figure 3.13-4 Definite-time dropout characteristic of residual overvoltage protection .. 3-137
Figure 3.13-5 Logic diagram of residual overvoltage protection ....................................... 3-138
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling negative-sequence overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-140
3
Figure 3.14-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of negative-sequence overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-140
Figure 3.14-3 Operation characteristic curve of negative-sequence overvoltage protection3-141
Figure 3.14-4 Definite-time dropout characteristic of negative-sequence overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-142
Figure 3.14-5 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overvoltage protection .................... 3-143
Figure 3.15-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling positive-sequence overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-144
Figure 3.15-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of positive-sequence overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-145
Figure 3.15-3 Operation characteristic curve of positive-sequence overvoltage protection3-145
Figure 3.15-4 Definite-time dropout characteristic of positive-sequence overvoltage
protection ................................................................................................................................. 3-146
Figure 3.15-5 Logic diagram of positive-sequence overvoltage protection ..................... 3-147
Figure 3.16-1 The enabling and blocking logic of phase undervoltage protection ......... 3-149
Figure 3.16-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase undervoltage protection
................................................................................................................................................... 3-151
Figure 3.16-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of phase undervoltage protection
................................................................................................................................................... 3-152
Figure 3.16-4 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of phase undervoltage protection
................................................................................................................................................... 3-153
Figure 3.16-5 Definite-time dropout characteristic of undervoltage protection ............... 3-154
Figure 3.16-6 Logic diagram of phase undervoltage protection ........................................ 3-156
Figure 3.17-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling overfrequency protection ................ 3-162
Figure 3.17-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of overfrequency protection .............. 3-162
Figure 3.17-3 Operation characteristic curve of overfrequency protection ..................... 3-163
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-j
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Figure 3.17-4 Logic diagram of overfrequency protection ................................................. 3-164
Figure 3.18-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling underfrequency protection .............. 3-166
Figure 3.18-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of underfrequency protection ............ 3-166
Figure 3.18-3 Operation characteristic curve of underfrequency protection ................... 3-167
Figure 3.18-4 Logic diagram of underfrequency protection ............................................... 3-168
Figure 3.19-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling frequency rate-of-change protection3-170
Figure 3.19-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of frequency rate-of-change protection3-170
Figure 3.19-3 Operation characteristic curve of frequency rate-of-change protection ... 3-171
Figure 3.19-4 Logic diagram of frequency rate-of-change protection............................... 3-172
Figure 3.20-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling reverse power protection ................ 3-174
Figure 3.20-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of reverse power protection .............. 3-174
Figure 3.20-3 Operation characteristic curve of reverse power protection ...................... 3-175
Figure 3.20-4 Logic diagram of reverse power protection.................................................. 3-176
Figure 3.21-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling undercurrent protection................... 3-178
Figure 3.21-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of undercurrent protection ................ 3-179
Figure 3.21-3 Operation characteristic curve of undercurrent protection ........................ 3-180
Figure 3.21-4 Logic diagram of undercurrent protection.................................................... 3-182
Figure 3.22-1 Logic of enabling breaker failure protection ................................................ 3-186
Figure 3.22-2 Logic of breaker failure initiating signal abnormality .................................. 3-186
Figure 3.22-3 Logic of breaker failure protection ................................................................ 3-186
Figure 3.23-1 The enabling and blocking logic of SOTF protection .................................. 3-188
Figure 3.23-2 Logic of auto-reclosing signal........................................................................ 3-190
Figure 3.23-3 Logic of manual closing signal ...................................................................... 3-190
Figure 3.23-4 Logic of phase overcurrent SOTF protection ............................................... 3-191
Figure 3.23-5 Logic of earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection ........................................ 3-191
Figure 3.25-1 The operation characteristic curve of thermal overload protection .......... 3-194
Figure 3.25-2 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling thermal overload protection ............ 3-196
Figure 3.25-3 Logic diagram of the fault detector of thermal overload protection (method 1)
................................................................................................................................................... 3-196
Figure 3.25-4 Logic diagram of thermal overload protection (method 1) ......................... 3-198
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-k
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
Figure 3.24-1 Logic of transfer trip ........................................................................................ 3-200
Figure 3.25-1 Logic of enabling AR ....................................................................................... 3-202
Figure 3.30-2 Logic of synchronism check mode selection for AR................................... 3-202
Figure 3.25-2 Logic of AR block............................................................................................. 3-203
Figure 3.25-3 Logic of AR ready ............................................................................................ 3-204
Figure 3.25-4 Tripping initiating AR ....................................................................................... 3-205
Figure 3.25-5 CB state initiating AR ...................................................................................... 3-205
3
Figure 3.25-6 One-shot AR ..................................................................................................... 3-205
Figure 3.25-7 Reclosing output logic .................................................................................... 3-206
Figure 3.25-8 Reclosing failure and success ....................................................................... 3-207
Figure 3.25-9 Transient fault................................................................................................... 3-208
Figure 3.25-10 Permanent fault ([79.Num]=2) ....................................................................... 3-209
Figure 3.30-1 VT circuit supervision logic diagram ............................................................. 3-215
Figure 3.27-1 Logic of CT circuit failure................................................................................ 3-217
Figure 3.28-1 Equivalent circuit of single-phase fault with fault resistance..................... 3-219
List of Tables
Table 3.1-1 Input/Output signals of three-phase current element ......................................... 3-2
Table 3.1-2 Settings of three-phase current element............................................................... 3-3
Table 3.2-1 Input/Output signals of three-phase voltage element ......................................... 3-4
Table 3.2-2 Settings of three-phase voltage element .............................................................. 3-5
Table 3.3-1 Input/Output signals of one-phase current element ............................................ 3-6
Table 3.3-2 Settings of one-phase current element ................................................................. 3-6
Table 3.4-1 Input/Output signals of one-phase voltage element ............................................ 3-7
Table 3.4-2 Settings of one-phase voltage element ................................................................. 3-7
Table 3.5-1 Output signals of fault detector ........................................................................... 3-10
Table 3.5-2 Settings of fault detector ...................................................................................... 3-11
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of optical pilot channel .................................................................. 3-16
Table 3.6-2 Settings of optical pilot channel .......................................................................... 3-17
Table 3.7-1 Protection transmission data format for 64kbit/s .............................................. 3-25
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-l
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Table 3.7-2 Protection transmission data format for 2Mbit/s ............................................... 3-26
Table 3.7-3 Input/Output signals of current differential protection ..................................... 3-38
Table 3.7-4 Settings of current differential protection .......................................................... 3-38
Table 3.8-1 Input/output signals of phase overcurrent protection ...................................... 3-52
Table 3.8-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-53
Table 3.9-1 Input/output signals of earth fault overcurrent protection ............................... 3-78
Table 3.9-2 Settings of earth fault overcurrent protection .................................................... 3-79
Table 3.10-1 Input/output signals of negative-sequence overcurrent protection ............ 3-104
Table 3.10-2 Settings of negative-sequence overcurrent protection................................. 3-105
Table 3.11-1 Input/output signals of RMS overcurrent protection ..................................... 3-117
Table 3.11-2 Settings of RMS overcurrent protection.......................................................... 3-118
Table 3.9-1 Input/Output signals of broken conductor protection..................................... 3-123
Table 3.9-2 Settings of broken conductor protection .......................................................... 3-124
Table 3.12-1 Input/output signals of phase overvoltage protection .................................. 3-130
Table 3.12-2 Settings of phase overvoltage protection ....................................................... 3-132
Table 3.13-1 Input/output signals of residual overvoltage protection ............................... 3-137
Table 3.13-2 Settings of residual overvoltage protection ................................................... 3-138
Table 3.14-1 Input/output signals of negative-sequence overvoltage protection ............ 3-142
Table 3.14-2 Settings of negative-sequence overvoltage protection ................................ 3-143
Table 3.15-1 Input/output signals of positive-sequence overvoltage protection ............. 3-147
Table 3.15-2 Settings of positive-sequence overvoltage protection ................................. 3-148
Table 3.16-1 Input/output signals of phase undervoltage protection ................................ 3-155
Table 3.16-2 Settings of phase undervoltage protection .................................................... 3-157
Table 3.17-1 Input/output signals of overfrequency protection ......................................... 3-163
Table 3.17-2 Settings of overfrequency protection.............................................................. 3-164
Table 3.18-1 Input/output signals of underfrequency protection ....................................... 3-167
Table 3.18-2 Settings of underfrequency protection ........................................................... 3-168
Table 3.19-1 Input/output signals of frequency rate-of-change protection ...................... 3-171
Table 3.19-2 Settings of frequency rate-of-change protection ........................................... 3-172
Table 3.20-1 Input/output signals of reverse power protection.......................................... 3-176
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-m
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
Table 3.20-2 Settings of reverse power protection .............................................................. 3-177
Table 3.21-1 Input/output signals of undercurrent protection............................................ 3-181
Table 3.21-2 Settings of undercurrent protection ................................................................ 3-182
Table 3.22-1 Input/output signals of breaker failure protection ......................................... 3-185
Table 3.22-2 Settings of breaker failure protection.............................................................. 3-187
Table 3.23-1 Input/output signals of SOTF protection ........................................................ 3-189
Table 3.23-2 Settings of SOTF protection ............................................................................. 3-192
3
Table 3.25-1 Input/output signals of thermal overload protection ..................................... 3-197
Table 3.25-2 Settings of thermal overload protection ......................................................... 3-198
Table 3.24-1 Input/Output signals of transfer trip ................................................................ 3-199
Table 3.24-2 Settings of transfer trip ..................................................................................... 3-200
Table 3.25-1 Input/Output signals of AR ............................................................................... 3-210
Table 3.25-2 Settings of AR .................................................................................................... 3-211
Table 3.30-1 Input/output signals of VT circuit supervision ............................................... 3-214
Table 3.30-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision ................................................................... 3-216
Table 3.27-1 Input/output signals of CT circuit supervision ............................................... 3-217
Table 3.27-2 Settings of CT circuit supervision ................................................................... 3-218
Table 3.28-1 Output signals of fault location ........................................................................ 3-221
Table 3.28-2 Settings of fault location ................................................................................... 3-221
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-n
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.1 Three-phase Current Element (TCUR3P)
Three-phase current element is responsible for pre-processing three phase currents and
calculating sequence components, amplitudes and phase angles of three phase currents, etc. All
calculated information of three-phase current element is used for protection logic calculation.
Three-phase current element is a basic element, for a specific application,
the displayed signals and settings may have different prefixes in front of
them.
3.1.1 Function Description
Three-phase current element has following functions:
1.
Pre-process three phase currents
2.
Calculate information related to three-phase current
When any phase current is greater than 0.04In, the input current signals are valid and the valid
signal will be outputted for programmable logic application.
CT circuit supervision of three-phase current is carried out by the CTS element, which can refer to
Section 3.29 for details.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-1
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.1.2 Function Block Diagram
TCUR3P
in_ia
I3P
in_ib
Ia_Sec
in_ic
Ib_Sec
Ic_Sec
I1_Sec
3
I2_Sec
3I0_Cal_Sec
Ang(Ia-Ib)
Ang(Ib-Ic)
Ang(Ic-Ia)
Ang(Ia)
Ang(Ib)
Ang(Ic)
Ang(3I0_Cal)
Alm_CTS
Flg_OnLoad
3.1.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.1-1 Input/Output signals of three-phase current element
No.
Input Signal
Description
1
in_ia
Sampled value of phase-A current
2
in_ib
Sampled value of phase-B current
3
in_ic
Sampled value of phase-C current
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
I3P
A current data set
2
Ia_Sec
Amplitude of secondary phase-A current
3
Ib_Sec
Amplitude of secondary phase-B current
4
Ic_Sec
Amplitude of secondary phase-C current
5
I1_Sec
Amplitude of secondary positive-sequence current
6
I2_Sec
Amplitude of secondary negative-sequence current
7
3I0_Cal_Sec
Amplitude of calculated secondary residual current
8
Ang(Ia-Ib)
Phase angle between phase A and phase B currents
9
Ang(Ib-Ic)
Phase angle between phase B and phase C currents
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-2
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
10
Ang(Ic-Ia)
Phase angle between phase C and phase A currents
11
Ang(Ia)
Phase angle of phase-A current
12
Ang(Ib)
Phase angle of phase-B current
13
Ang(Ic)
Phase angle of phase-C current
14
Ang(3I0_Cal)
Phase angle of calculated residual current
15
Alm_CTS
CT secondary circuit failure
16
Flg_OnLoad
A flag indicating that the load current is detected
3.1.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
3
MainMenu Settings Global Settings System Settings
Table 3.1-2 Settings of three-phase current element
No.
Item
Range
Step
Unit
Default
1
Prot.I1n
0~9999
1
A
1000
2
Prot.I2n
1 or 5
-
A
1
3
Prot.En_RevCT
-
-
Disabled
Enabled,
Disabled
Description
Primary current value of the three-phase CT
Secondary current value of the three-phase CT
Logic setting of enabling/disabling the current
polarity of the three-phase CT reversed
3.2 Three-phase Voltage Element (TVOL3P)
Three-phase voltage element is responsible for pre-processing three phase voltages and
calculating sequence components, amplitudes and phases of three phase voltages, etc. All
calculated information of three-phase voltage element is used for the protection logic calculation.
3.2.1 Function Description
Three-phase voltage element has following functions:
1.
Pre-process three phase voltages
2.
Calculate information related to three phase voltages
VT circuit failure supervision of three-phase voltage is carried out by the VTS element, which can
refer to Section 3.28 for details.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-3
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.2.2 Function Block Diagram
TVOL3P
in_ua
U3P
in_ub
Ua_Sec
in_uc
Ub_Sec
BI_En_VT
Uc_Sec
U1_Sec
3
U2_Sec
3U0_Cal_Sec
Ang(Ua-Ub)
Ang(Ub-Uc)
Ang(Uc-Ua)
Ang(Ua)
Ang(Ub)
Ang(Uc)
Ang(3U0_Cal)
Alm_VTS
3.2.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.2-1 Input/Output signals of three-phase voltage element
No.
Input signal
Description
1
in_ua
Sampled value of phase-A voltage
2
in_ub
Sampled value of phase-B voltage
3
in_uc
Sampled value of phase-C voltage
4
BI_En_VT
Input signal of indicating VT in service
No.
Output signal
Description
1
U3P
A voltage data set
2
Ua_Sec
Amplitude of phase-A secondary voltage
3
Ub_Sec
Amplitude of phase-B secondary voltage
4
Uc_Sec
Amplitude of phase-C secondary voltage
5
U1_Sec
Amplitude of positive-sequence secondary voltage
6
U2_Sec
Amplitude of negative-sequence secondary voltage
7
3U0_Cal_Sec
Amplitude of calculated residual secondary voltage
8
Ang(Ua-Ub)
Phase angle between phase A and phase B voltages
9
Ang(Ub-Uc)
Phase angle between phase B and phase C voltages
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-4
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
10
Ang(Uc-Ua)
Phase angle between phase C and phase A voltages
11
Ang(Ua)
Phase angle of phase-A voltage
12
Ang(Ub)
Phase angle of phase-B voltage
13
Ang(Uc)
Phase angle of phase-C voltage
14
Ang(3U0_Cal)
Phase angle of calculated residual voltage
15
Alm_VTS
VT secondary circuit abnormality
3.2.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings System Settings
3
Table 3.2-2 Settings of three-phase voltage element
No.
Item
Range
Step
Unit
Default
1
Prot.U1n
1~1100
0.001
kV
10
Rated value of primary voltage of the three-phase VT
2
Prot.U2n
1~120
0.001
V
100
Rated value of secondary voltage of the three-phase VT
3
En_VT
-
-
Enabled
Logic setting to put the three-phase VT into service
Enabled,
Disabled
Description
3.3 One-phase Current Element (TCUR1P)
One-phase current element is responsible for pre-processing measured one-phase current and
calculating the magnitude and the phase angle of the one-phase current, etc. All calculated
information of one-phase current element is used for the protection logic calculation.
3.3.1 Function Description
One-phase current element has following functions:
1.
Pre-process measured one-phase current
2.
Calculate information related to the one-phase current
3.3.2 Function Block Diagram
TCUR1P
in_ip
I1P
Neu.I
Neu.Ang(I)
Flg_OnLoad
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-5
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.3.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.3-1 Input/Output signals of one-phase current element
No.
1
in_ip
No.
3
Input signal
Description
Measured one-phase current (external residual current)
Output signal
Description
1
I1P
A current data set
2
Neu.I
Amplitude of external residual secondary current
3
Neu.Ang(I)
Phase angle of external residual current
4
Flg_OnLoad
A flag indicating there is load current
3.3.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings System Settings
Table 3.3-2 Settings of one-phase current element
No.
Item
Range
Step
Unit
Default
1
Neu.I1n
0~9999
1
A
1000
2
Neu.I2n
1 or 5
-
A
1
3
Neu.En_RevCT
-
-
Disabled
Enabled,
Disabled
Description
Primary rated current of the external residual
current CT
Secondary rated current of the external
residual current CT
Logic
setting
of
enabling/disabling
the
current polarity of the external residual
current CT
3.4 One-phase Voltage Element (TVOL1P)
One-phase voltage element is responsible for pre-processing one-phase voltage and calculating
the magnitude and the phase angle of the one-phase voltage, etc. All calculated information of
one-phase voltage element is used for the protection logic calculation.
3.4.1 Function Description
One-phase voltage element has following functions:
1.
Pre-process measured one-phase voltage
2.
Calculate information related to one-phase voltage
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-6
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.4.2 Function Block Diagram
TVOL1P
in_up
U1P
Syn.U
BI_En_VT
Syn.Ang(U)
3.4.3 I/O Signals
3
Table 3.4-1 Input/Output signals of one-phase voltage element
No.
Input signal
Description
1
in_up
Measured one-phase voltage (synchronism voltage)
2
BI_En_VT
Input signal of indicating VT in service
No.
Output signal
Description
1
U1P
A voltage data set
2
Syn.U
Amplitude of the one-phase voltage (secondary value)
3
Syn.Ang(U)
Phase angle of the one-phase voltage
3.4.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings System Settings
Table 3.4-2 Settings of one-phase voltage element
No.
Item
Range
Step
Unit
Default
1
Syn.U1n
0~1100
0.001
kV
-
2
Syn.U2n
1~200
0.001
V
-
Description
Primary rated voltage of the one-phase VT (synchronism
voltage)
Secondary
rated
voltage
of
the
one-phase
VT
(synchronism voltage)
3.5 Fault Detector (FD)
Fault detector is responsible to determine fault appearance on the protected power system. The
device will switch to protection calculation after the fault detector picks up. If the fault is within the
protected zone, the device will issue tripping command.
3.5.1 Function Description
The current amplitude is calculated based on the injected analog quantities. The fault detector
continuously detects the change of phase-to-phase power frequency current and the calculated
zero-sequence and negative-sequence currents. The fault detector includes:
1.
Fault detector based on DPFC current: DPFC current is greater than the setting value
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-7
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3
2.
Fault detector based on zero-sequence current: Zero-sequence current is greater than the
setting value
3.
Fault detector based on negative-sequence current: Negative-sequence current is greater
than the setting value
4.
Fault detector based on weak infeed logic or inter-trip logic of current differential protection:
Weak infeed logic or inter-trip logic of current differential protection pickup
If any of the above conditions is satisfied, the fault detector will operate to start protection
calculation. The fault detector based on DPFC current and the fault detector based on
zero-sequence current are always enabled, and fault detector based on negative-sequence
current could be enabled or disabled by the setting. Current differential protection is controlled by
these fault detector.
3.5.1.1 Fault Detector Based on DPFC Current
DPFC phase-to-phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase-to-phase current from that of
a cycle before.
I(k) is the current sampling point.
I(k-24) is the value of the sampling point before a cycle, 24 is the sampling points cycle.
200
100
0
-100
-200
0
20
40
60
Original Current
80
100
120
0
20
40
60
DPFC current
80
100
120
100
50
0
-50
-100
From above figures, it is concluded that DPFC can reflect the sudden change of current at the
initial stage of a fault and has a perfect performance of fault detection.
It is used to determine whether this pickup condition is met according to Equation 3.5-1.
For multi-phase short-circuit fault, DPFC phase-to-phase current has high sensitivity to ensure the
pickup of protection device. For usual single-phase earth fault, it also has sufficient sensitivity to
pick up except the earth fault with very large fault resistance. Under this condition, DPFC current
may be very small and the sensitivity is reduced, however, zero-sequence current is used to
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-8
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
remedy the reduction of the sensitivity.
This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load current
continuously. The change of load current is small and steady under normal or power swing
condition, the adaptive floating threshold with the ΔI Set is higher than the change of current under
these conditions and hence maintains the element stability.
The criterion is:
ΔIΦΦMAX>1.25ΔITh+ΔISet
Equation 3.5-1
Where:
ΔIΦΦMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current (ΦΦ=AB, BC, CA)
ΔISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set])
ΔITh: The floating threshold value
The coefficient, 1.25, is an empirical value which ensures that the threshold is always higher than
the unbalance current of the system.
If operation condition is satisfied, the fault detector based on DPFC current will operate. The
pickup signal will maintain 5s after the fault detector based on DPFC current drops off.
3.5.1.2 Fault Detector Based on Zero-sequence Current
The operation condition will be satisfied when zero-sequence current (3I0) is greater than the
setting [FD.ROC.3I0_Set]. The fault detector based on zero-sequence current is always in service.
(3I0: zero-sequence current is calculated from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic)
If operation condition is satisfied, the fault detector based on zero-sequence current will operate.
The pickup signal will maintain 5s after the fault detector based on zero-sequence current drops
off.
3.5.1.3 Fault Detector Based on Negative-sequence Current
The operation condition will be satisfied when negative-sequence current (I2) is greater than the
setting [FD.NOC.I2_Set]. It can be enabled or disabled by the setting [FD.NOC.En].
If operation condition is satisfied, the fault detector based on negative-sequence current will
operate. The pickup signal will maintain 5s after the fault detector based on negative-sequence
current drops off.
3.5.1.4 Fault Detector Based on Weak Infeed Logic or Inter-trip Logic
For an internal fault, current fault detector may not operate at weak end. If permissive signal of
current differential protection from the remote end and weak infeed logic of current differential
protection meets operation condition, the fault detector based on weak infeed logic will operate.
The pickup signal will maintain 500ms after the fault detector based on weak infeed logic drops
off.
When any protection (such as overcurrent protection and etc.) of local end operates, inter-trip
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-9
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
signal of corresponding phase will be sent to the remote end. If differential current meets the
criterion and the device receives the inter-trip signal from the remote end, the fault detector based
on inter-trip logic will operate. The pickup signal will maintain 500ms after the fault detector based
on inter-trip logic drops off.
3.5.2 Function Block Diagram
FD
FD.Pkp
FD.DPFC.Pkp
3
FD.ROC.Pkp
FD.NOC.Pkp
Alm_Pkp_FD
3.5.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.5-1 Output signals of fault detector
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
FD.Pkp
The device picks up
2
FD.DPFC.Pkp
DPFC current fault detector element operates.
3
FD.ROC.Pkp
Zero-sequence current fault detector element operates.
4
FD.NOC.Pkp
Negative-sequence fault detector element operates.
5
Alm_Pkp_FD
Fault detector element operates for more than 50s.
3.5.4 Logic
SIG
Ia
SIG
Ib
SIG
Ic
Calculate DPFC phase-tophase current:
ΔIab=Δ(Ia-Ib)
ΔIbc=Δ(Ib-Ic)
ΔIca=Δ(Ic-Ia)
ΔIab>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]
>=1
ΔIbc>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]
FD.DPFC.Pkp
ΔIca>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]
>=1
0s
Calculate residual current:
3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set]
Calculate negativesequence current: I2
I2>[FD.NOC.I2_Set]
5s
FD.Pkp
FD.ROC.Pkp
&
FD.NOC.Pkp
EN
FD.NOC.En
SIG FD.Pkp
50s
10s
Alm_Pkp_FD
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of fault detector
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-10
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.5.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FD Settings
Table 3.5-2 Settings of fault detector
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
FD.DPFC.I_Set
(0.050~40.000)×In
0.100
A
0.001
2
FD.ROC.3I0_Set
(0.050~40.000)×In
0.100
A
0.001
Description
Current setting of DPFC current
fault detector element
Current
FD.NOC.I2_Set
(0.050~40.000)×In
0.100
A
0.001
of
residual
current fault detector element
Current
3
setting
setting
of
negative-sequence current fault
detector element
4
FD.NOC.En
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
negative-sequence current fault
detector element
3.6 Optical Pilot Channel (FO)
The devices can transmit analog quantities and Boolean quantities such as current quantities,
blocking signal and transfer trip signal to the remote end via optical fibre channel. Up to 2 optical
fibre channels are supported, which can be dedicated optical fibre channel or multiplex channel,
the channel mode could be selected as single-mode or multi-mode. The communication rate can
be 64kbit/s or 2048kbit/s, and G.703 or C37.94 are optional for communication protocol.
3.6.1 Function Description
Besides current and voltage, 8 digital bits are integrated in each frame of transmission message
for various applications, and 8 binary signals are configurable. Each received message frame via
fibre optical channel will pass through security check to ensure the integrity of the message
consistently.
3.6.1.1 Channel Interface
The device can adopt dedicated optical fibre channel or multiplex channel. The dedicated fibre
channel is usually recommended unless the received power does not meet the requirement if the
transmission line is very long. The channel connections with two kinds of communication rate,
64kbit/s or 2048kbit/s, via dedicated optical fibre channel is shown in Figure 3.6-1 and Figure
3.6-2.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-11
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
Max 2km for 62.5/125um multi-mode FO (C37.94)
TX
RX
RX
TX
IED1
IED2
ST connectors
ST connectors
Figure 3.6-1 Direct optical link up to 2km with 850nm
3
Max 60km for 9/125um single-mode FO
TX
RX
RX
TX
IED1
IED2
FC connectors
FC connectors
Figure 3.6-2 Direct optical link up to 60km with 1310nm
The channel connections with two kinds of communication rate, 64kbit/s or 2048kbit/s, via single
channel or multiplex channel is shown in Figure 3.6-3, Figure 3.6-4 and Figure 3.6-5.
C37.94 (n*64kbit/s)
Multi-mode FO
IED1
Communication convertor
TX
RX
RX
TX
ST connectors
E
O
Interface
Link to
communicate
device
ST connectors
Figure 3.6-3 Connect to a communication network via communication convertor
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-12
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
G.703 (64kbit/s)
MUX-64
Single-mode FO
IED1
TX
RX
RX
TX
FC connectors
E
Interface
Link to
communicate
device
O
FC connectors
3
Figure 3.6-4 Connect to a communication network via MUX-64
G.703-E1 (2048kbit/s)
MUX-2M
Single-mode FO
IED1
TX
RX
RX
TX
FC connectors
E
Interface
O
Link to
communicate
device
FC connectors
Figure 3.6-5 Connect to a communication network via MUX-2M
The data format of protection transmission is shown as following table.
Bit
High
low
Data Frame
Description
Start bit
The header data of transmission data format, 7E (hexadecimal)
Data information
Including currents and binary signals
CRC
CRC
Stop bit
The ender of transmission data format, 7E (hexadecimal)
3.6.1.2 Communication Clock
The device transmits and receives messages based on respective clocks, which are called
transmit clock (i.e. clock TX) and receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be
extracted from message frame, which can ensure no slip frame and no error message received.
Clock TX has two options:
1. Use internal crystal clock, which is called internal clock. (master clock)
2. Use external clock. (slave clock)
Depend on the clock used by the device at both ends, there are three modes.
1.
Master-master mode
Both ends use internal clock.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-13
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
2.
Slave-slave mode
Both ends use external clock.
3.
Master-slave mode
One of them uses internal clock, the other uses external clock
The logic setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is used to select the communication clock. The internal clock
is enabled automatically when the logic setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is set as “Int”. Contrarily, the
external clock is enabled automatically when the logic setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] is set to “Ext”.
3
If the device uses multiplex PCM channel, logic setting [FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] at both ends should be
set as “Ext” (Mode 2). If the device uses dedicated optical fibre channel, clock Mode 1 and Mode 3
can be used. Mode 1 is recommended in considering simplification to user, i.e. logic setting
[FOx.Opt_ClkSrc] at both ends should be set as “Int”.
3.6.1.3 Identity Code
In order to ensure reliability of the device when digital communication channel is applied, settings
[LocID] and [RmtID] are provided as identity code to distinguish uniquely the device at remote end
using same channel.
Under normal conditions, the identity code of the device at local end should be different with that
at remote end. In addition, it is recommended that the identity code of all devices, i.e., the setting
[LocID], should be unique in the power grid. The setting range is from 0 to 65535. Only for loop
test, they are set as the same.
The setting [LocID] of the device at an end should be as same as the setting [RmtID] of the device
at opposite end and the greater [LocID] between them is chosen as the master end for sampling
synchronism, the smaller [LocID] is the slave end. If the setting [LocID] is set as same as the
setting [RmtID], that means the device in loopback testing mode.
The setting [LocID] is packaged in the message frame and transmitted to the remote end. When
the [LocID] of the device at remote end received by local device is same to the setting [RmtID] of
local device, the message received from the remote end is valid, and data information involved in
message is considered in protection calculation. When these settings are not matched, the
message is considered as invalid and data information involved in message is ignored,
corresponding alarms will be issued.
3.6.1.4 Channel Statistics
The device has the function of on-line channel monitoring and channel statistics. It can produce
channel statistic report automatically at 9:00 every day and the report can be printed for operator
to check the channel quality. The monitoring contents of channel status are shown as follows, and
they can be viewed by the menu Main Menu→"Test"→"Counter"→"Pilot Ch Counter".
1.
FOx.StartTime (starting time)
It shows the starting time of the channel status statistics of the device at local end.
2.
87L.Equip_Local
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-14
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
It shows the local device is master or slaver.
3.
RmtID (ID code of the remote end)
It shows the ID information received by the device at local end now.
4.
FOx.t_ChLag (propagation delay of channel x)
It shows the calculated communication channel time delay of the device at local end now (unit: us).
The calculation is based on the assumption that the sending and receiving channel paths are
same. The device measures propagation delay of communication channel based on the below
principle.
Side S transmits a frame of message to side M, and meanwhile records the transmitting time “tss”
on the basis of clock on side S. When side M receives the message, it will record receiving time
“tmr” of the message with its own clock, and return a frame of message to side S at next fixed
transmitting time, meanwhile data of “tms-tmr” is included in the frame of message. Side S will
receive the message from side M at the time “tsr” and obtain the data of “tms-tmr”.
Therefore, the propagation delay of the channel “Td” is obtained through calculation:
Td =
(t sr − t ss ) − (t ms − t mr )
2
By using the above calculated “Td”, the device automatically compensate time synchronization of
sampling data at each end and transmission time lag.
T1
tss
tsr
tmr
Td
tms
"S"
"M"
T2
Figure 3.6-6 Schematic diagram of communication channel time
5.
FOx.N_CRCFail (total number of error frame of channel x)
It shows the total number of the error frames of the device at local end from starting time of
channel statistics until now. Error frame means that this frame fails in CRC check.
6.
FOx.N_FramErr (total number of abnormal messages of channel x)
It shows the total number of abnormal messages of the device at local end from starting time of
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-15
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
channel statistics until now.
7.
FOx.N_FramLoss (total number of lost frames of channel x)
It shows the total number of the lost frames of the device at local end from starting time of channel
statistics until now.
8.
FOx.N_RmtAbnor (total number of abnormal messages from the remote end of channel x)
It shows the total number of abnormal messages received from the remote end from starting time
of channel statistics until now.
3
9.
FOx.N_CRCFailSec (total number of serious error frames of channel x)
It shows the total number of serious error frame seconds of the device at local end from starting
time of the channel statistics until now.
10. FOx.N_SynLoss (total number of loss synchronous of channel x)
It shows the total number of loss synchronous of the device at local end from starting time of the
channel statistics until now.
3.6.2 Function Block Diagram
FOx
FOx.Enable
FOx.On
FOx.Sendi
FOx.Recvi
FOx.Alm
FOx.Alm_ID
FOx.Alm_87L_Unmatched
3.6.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of optical pilot channel
No.
Input Signal
Description
1
FOx.Enable
Enabling channel x
2
FOx.Sendi
Sending signal i of channel x (i=1, 2, 3, ......, 8)
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
FOx.On
Channel x is enabled.
2
FOx.Recvi
Receiving signal i of channel x (i=1, 2, 3, ......, 8)
3
FOx.Alm
Channel x is abnormal.
4
FOx.Alm_ID
5
FOx.Alm_87L_Unmatched
Received ID from the remote end is not as same as the setting [RmtID] of
the device in local end.
The status of differential protection of channel x between local end and
remote end is inconsistent.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-16
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.6.4 Logic
SIG Receiving transfer signal i from remote side
&
FOx.Recvi
SIG FOx.Alm
>=1
SIG FOx.Alm_ID
SIG FOx.Enable
&
FOx.On
EN
[FOx.En]
3
Figure 3.6-7 Logic of receiving signal i
SIG FOx.Sendi
&
Sending to the opposite end
SIG FOx.On
Figure 3.6-8 Logic of sending signal i
i can be 1~8
SIG
FOx.Alm_ID
SIG
FOx.Alm_NoValFram
SIG
FOx.Alm_CRC
SIG
FOx.Alm_Connect
&
FOx.Alm
>=1
Figure 3.6-9 Logic of channel alarm
3.6.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings Rmt CommCh Settings
Table 3.6-2 Settings of optical pilot channel
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Unit
value
Step
1
LocID
0~65535
1
-
1
2
RmtID
0~65535
2
-
1
3
BaudRate
2048
kbps
-
64
2048
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Description
Identity code of the device at local end
Identity code of the device at remote
end
Baud rate of optical pilot channel
3-17
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Unit
value
Step
G.703
4
Protocol
C37.94
-
-
12
-
1
C37.94
Description
It is used to select protocol type, G.703
or C37.94
The setting for the times of 64kbit/s,
5
FOx.Nx64k_C37.94
1~12
which is an N*64kbit/s standard defined
by IEEE C37.94 standard
Option of internal clock or external
6
FOx.Opt_ClkSrc
3
Ext
Int
Int
-
-
clock
Ext: external clock
Int: internal clock
7
FOx.En
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling channel x
3.7 Current Differential Protection (87L)
Current differential protection refers to the phase-segregated steady-state current differential
element, and it provides CT saturation detection for external fault.
Current differential protection can be used as the main protection of overhead line or cable with
various voltage levels, and it is applied for single CB 2-terminal transmission line.
3.7.1 Functions Description
Current differential protection includes two stages of phase-segregated steady-state current
differential protection.
The device adopts the asynchronous method and the restrained current floating threshold
technology to identify whether there is CT saturation during external fault, which can effectively
prevent current differential protection from maloperation during external fault with serious CT
saturation. Based on differential current abnormality discrimination, current differential protection
can be selected to be blocked according to the specific requirements.
Current differential protection exchanges required analog quantities and binary signals via optical
fibre channel. The optical fibre channel can be dedicated optical fibre or multiplex channel, its
communication rate can be 64kbit/s or 2048kbit/s, and supports G.703 and C37.94. The device
calculates channel propagation delay in real-time, and adjust sampling instant to ensure
synchronization of sampled values at each end. The maximum tolerable channel propagation
delay is 20ms.
Based on the Kirchhoff theory, the magnitude is same and the phase is reverse between the
currents which flowing in and flowing out the protected zone under normal conditions, or during
power swing, or external fault. The differential current which comes from CT error at both sides
and capacitive current due to line capacitive reactance is very small. When an internal fault
appears in the protected zone, a large differential current will be generated. Hence, the distinction
between internal fault and external fault is very explicit.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-18
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.7.1.1 Current Differential Protection Enable/Disable
Current differential protection receives information quantities from other ends, and current
differential protection is not enabled unless all current differential protections of two ends are
enabled. The logic scheme is shown as below.
SIG
87L.FOx.Enable
EN
[87L.En]
SIG
87L.FOx.Block
SIG
87L.FOx.Enable
EN
[87L.En]
&
&
FOx.Enable DIFF (Local end)
3
&
&
FOx.Enable DIFF (Remote end)
SIG
87L.FOx.Block
Setting by the remote end
SIG FO1.Enable DIFF (Local end)
&
87L.FO1.On
SIG FO1.Enable DIFF (Remote end)
>=1
87L.On
SIG FO2.Enable DIFF (Local end)
&
87L.FO2.On
SIG FO2.Enable DIFF (Remote end)
SIG FOx.Enable DIFF (Local end)
SIG 87L.FOx.Block
>=1
SIG 87L.FOx.On
&
87L.FOx.Valid
>=1
SIG Fail_Device
SIG Alm_Invalid_I
&
>=1
87L.FOx.Blocked
SIG FOx.Alm
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of enabling current differential protection
Where:
FOx.Enable DIFF (Local end): local current differential protection is enabled corresponding to
channel x
FOx.Enable DIFF (Remote end): remote current differential protection is enabled corresponding
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-19
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
to channel x
SIG FOx.Enable DIFF (Local end)
&
>=1
SIG FOx.Enable DIFF (Remote end)
&
&
10s
10s
FOx.Alm_87L_Unmatched
SIG FOx.Alm
3
Figure 3.7-2 Inconsistent enabling status of current differential protection
3.7.1.2 Basic Differential Current Condition
SIG 87L.CT_Blk
&
SIG 87L.On
SET IDiffA >[87L.I_Pkp]
&
87L.Low_Slop_StA
&
SET IDiffA >0.15×IBiasA
SIG 87L.CT_Blk
&
SIG 87L.On
SET IDiffB >[87L.I_Pkp]
&
87L.Low_Slop_StB
&
SET IDiffB >0.15×IBiasB
SIG 87L.CT_Blk
&
SIG 87L.On
SET IDiffC >[87L.I_Pkp]
&
&
87L.Low_Slop_StC
SET IDiffC >0.15×IBiasC
Figure 3.7-3 Common condition of current differential protection
Where:
IDiffA, IDiffB, IDiffC: differential current of phase A, phase B and phase C.
IBiasA, IBiasB, IBiasC: restraint current of phase A, phase B and phase C.
87L.CT_Blk: CT circuit failure blocks current differential protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-20
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.7.1.3 Steady-state Current Differential Element
1.
Stage 1
The steady-state current differential element comprises pickup threshold, low slope
characteristics and high slope characteristics. The calculation of steady-state restraint current and
differential current is phase-segregated. The first section is a low slope characteristics, which is
sensitive to slight internal faults. The second section is a high slope characteristics, which mainly
prevents from unbalance current due to large current.
Its criterion is:
3
I DiffΦ I （
H I BiasΦ Knee1）
I DiffΦ I H + K 1 ( I BiasΦ - Knee1）
( Knee1 I BiasΦ Knee2）
IDiffΦ IH + K1 ( Knee2 − Knee1）+ K 2 (IBiasΦ − Knee2)
（IBiasΦ Knee2）
Equation 3.7-1
I DiffΦ = IMΦ + INΦ
I BiasΦ = IMΦ + INΦ
Where:
I DiffΦ : The phase differential current
I BiasΦ : The phase restraint current
IH : 1.5×[87L.I_Pkp]
IDiffΦ
k=1
k2
k1
IH
Knee2
Knee1
IBiasΦ
Figure 3.7-4 Operating characteristics of steady-state current differential element
Where:
K1 and K2 are respectively the setting [87L.Slope1] and the setting [87L.Slope2].
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-21
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Knee1 are Knee2 are respectively the setting [87L.I_Knee1] and the setting [87L.Knee2].
2.
Stage 2
Due to exist transient components, the time delay of stage 2 of steady-state current differential
element is fixed as 1¼ cycles, which can avoid stage 2 of steady-state current differential element
is affected by transient components.
Its criterion is:
I DiffΦ I M（I BiasΦ Knee1）
3
I DiffΦ I M + K 1 ( I BiasΦ - Knee1）
( Knee1 I BiasΦ Knee2）
Equation 3.7-2
IDiffΦ IM + K1 ( Knee2 − Knee1）+ K 2 (IBiasΦ − Knee2)
（IBiasΦ Knee2）
Where:
IM : i.e. the setting [87L.I_Pkp];
I DiffΦ and I BiasΦ are the same as those mentioned above.
IDiffΦ
k=1
k2
k1
IM
knee2
knee1
IBiasΦ
Figure 3.7-5 Operating characteristics of steady-state current differential element
Where:
K1 and K2 are respectively the setting [87L.Slope1] and the setting [87L.Slope2].
Knee1 are Knee2 are respectively the setting [87L.I_Knee1] and the setting [87L.Knee2].
The logic of steady-state current differential element is:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-22
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG
Steady-state DIFF1
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
87L.Low_Slop_StA
EN
[87L.En_Biased1]
SIG
CT saturation
&
&
>=1
&
87L.OpA_Biased1
SIG
87L.CT_Blk
SIG
Permissive signal (phase-A)
EN
[87L.En_LocDiff]
SIG
Steady-state DIFF1
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
87L.Low_Slop_StB
EN
[87L.En_Biased1]
SIG
CT saturation
>=1
3
&
&
>=1
&
87L.OpB_Biased1
SIG
87L.CT_Blk
SIG
Permissive signal (phase-B)
EN
[87L.En_LocDiff]
SIG
Steady-state DIFF1
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
87L.Low_Slop_StC
EN
[87L.En_Biased1]
SIG
CT saturation
>=1
&
&
>=1
&
87L.OpC_Biased1
SIG
87L.CT_Blk
SIG
Permissive signal (phase-C)
EN
[87L.En_LocDiff]
SIG
87L.OpA_Biased1
SIG
87L.OpB_Biased1
SIG
87L.OpC_Biased1
>=1
>=1
87L.Op_Biased1
Figure 3.7-6 Logic of steady-state current differential element (stage 1)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-23
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3
SIG
Steady-state DIFF2
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
87L.Low_Slop_StA
EN
[87L.En_Biased2]
SIG
CT saturation
SIG
87L.CT_Blk
SIG
Permissive signal (phase-A)
EN
[87L.En_LocDiff]
SIG
Steady-state DIFF2
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
87L.Low_Slop_StB
EN
[87L.En_Biased2]
SIG
CT saturation
SIG
87L.CT_Blk
SIG
Permissive signal (phase-B)
EN
[87L.En_LocDiff]
SIG
Steady-state DIFF2
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
87L.Low_Slop_StC
EN
[87L.En_Biased2]
SIG
CT saturation
SIG
87L.CT_Blk
SIG
Permissive signal (phase-C)
EN
[87L.En_LocDiff]
SIG
87L.OpA_Biased2
SIG
87L.OpB_Biased2
SIG
87L.OpC_Biased2
&
&
>=1
&
1¼ cycles 0
87L.OpA_Biased2
1¼ cycles 0
87L.OpB_Biased2
1¼ cycles 0
87L.OpC_Biased2
>=1
&
&
>=1
&
>=1
&
&
>=1
&
>=1
>=1
87L.Op_Biased2
Figure 3.7-7 Logic of steady-state current differential element (stage 2)
Where:
Steady-state DIFF1: Stage 1 of steady-state current differential element meet the operating
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-24
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
equation.
Steady-state DIFF2: Stage 2 of steady-state current differential element meet the operating
equation.
3.7.1.4 Data Exchange
Based on the information transmitted from each end of transmission line via communication
channel, current differential protection can discriminate the fault.
For 2-terminal transmission line, current differential protections at both ends send the current
sampling value to the opposite end and receive the current sampling value from the opposite end.
After finishing synchronization, they calculate differential current and restrained current
respectively.
I1
I2
89
89
52
52
i1
87L
i2
87L
Figure 3.7-8 Connection mode
The detailed channel status can be viewed by LCD, including channel delay, current at the
opposite end and differential current, etc.
Table 3.7-1 Protection transmission data format for 64kbit/s
Bit
High
Data Frame
Description
Format
The header of transmission data format
LocID
The identity code of local device
Ia
Ib
Three phase current
Ic
low
Time
Time for synchronizing
FOx.Send1~FOx.Send8
The eight signals sent by channel No.x
Inter-trip (phase A/B/C)
Phase-segregated inter-tripping signal
Permissive signal (phase A/B/C)
Permissive signal of current differential protection operating
Enable DIFF
Differential protection at both sides are enabled
CRC
The device supports 64kbit/s and 2Mbit/s communication rate. When 64kbit/s was adopted, the
device transmits once sampling data every 5ms, and the data contents transmitted is as shown in
Table 3.7-1. When 2Mbit/s was adopted, the device transmits once sampling data every sampling
interval, and the data contents transmitted is as shown in Table 3.7-2.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-25
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
Table 3.7-2 Protection transmission data format for 2Mbit/s
Bit
High
Data Frame
Description
Format
The header of transmission data format
LocID
The identity code of local device
Ia
Ib
Three phase current
Ic
Ua
Ub
Three phase voltage
Uc
3
low
Time
Time for synchronizing
FOx.Send1~FOx.Send8
The eight signals sent by channel No.x
Inter-trip (phase A/B/C)
Phase-segregated inter-tripping signal
Permissive signal (phase A/B/C)
Permissive signal of current differential protection operating
Enable DIFF
Differential protection at both sides are enabled
CRC
1.
Clock synchronization
Valid messages exchange is key factor for current differential protection. The device sends and
receives messages based on respective clocks, which are called transmit clock (i.e. clock TX) and
receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be extracted from message frame,
which can ensure no slip frame and no error message received.
The device adopts the synchronization mode based on symmetric channel, and the propagation
delay between the sending route and the receiving route of the channel shall be equivalent
(<1ms). It should be ensured that the sending and receiving channels are of same route.
If the propagation delay between the sending route and the receiving route of the channel meets
the requirement, the device adopts clock source in the device (i.e., internal crystal clock, , which is
also called internal clock or master clock) or clock source in the communication network (i.e.,
clock source provided by PCM or SDH) as clock TX. Depend on the clock used by the device at
both ends, there are three modes.
1)
Master-master mode
Both ends use internal crystal clock.
2)
Slave-slave mode
Both ends use the clock of the communication network.
3)
Master-slave mode
One of them uses internal crystal clock, the other uses the clock of the communication network.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-26
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
T1
tss
tsr
tmr
Td
tms
"IED1"
3
"IED2"
T2
Figure 3.7-9 Schematic diagram of communication channel time
For example, IED1 sends a frame of message to IED2, and meanwhile records the sending time
“tss”. When IED2 receives the message, it will record receiving time “tmr”. IED2 sends a frame of
message to IED1 at next sampling interval, meanwhile data of “tms-tmr” is included in the frame of
message. IED1 will receive the message from IED2 at the time “tsr” and obtain the data of
“tms-tmr”. Therefore, the propagation delay of the channel “Td” is obtained through calculation:
Td =
(t sr − t ss ) − (t ms − t mr )
2
By using the above calculated “Td”, the device automatically compensate time synchronization of
sampling data at each end and transmission time lag.
3.7.1.5 CT Saturation Discrimination
Two detectors are used to prevent undesired tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block differential protection to prevent mal-operation.
⚫
High restraint coefficient and self-adaptive floating restraint threshold
Due to high slope of DPFC percent differential protection, differential protection has higher ability
of anti-CT saturation. For external fault as shown in figure below, the restraint current will be able
to reflect the real quantity of system for a short time after current cross zero point and can be used
as the restraint current after CT enters into saturation status by the use of self-adaptive floating
threshold technology.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-27
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Fault-Current-SideA
10
A
5
0
-5
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
80
100
120
140
80
100
120
140
Fault-Current-SideB
20
A
10
0
-10
0
20
40
60
Diff-Current
20
A
10
0
3
-10
0
20
40
60
Restraint-Current
20
CT
A
10
0
-10
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Figure 3.7-10 Relation between CT saturation differential current and restraint current
⚫
Asynchronous method
The asynchronous method is realized according to the the condition that the differential current
and the restraint current change differently. As shown in Figure 3.7-10, there is a short time before
CT is saturated after fault current cross zero point, during the period, CT can convert fault current
accurately, so there is restraint current but no differential current, the congruent relationship
between increased differential current and increased restraint current is used to judge if there is a
internal or external fault, strong anti-saturation ability can be gained based on this method.
The discrimination of external fault is only effective for percentage current differential element.
3.7.1.6 Differential Abnormality Supervision
When the propagation delay of the channel is uncertain, no GPS and unreliable GPS source make
that the device cannot detect the propagation delay of the channel, so the currents at both ends
cannot accurately be synchronized. For large load current, larger differential current may be
generated so as to lead to undesired operation of current differential protection. Hence, differential
current needs to be supervised.
According to unbalance differential current under load conditions, if differential current is greater
than the threshold value, the device will issue an alarm to indicate that differential current is
abnormal.
The threshold of discriminating differential current abnormality needs to cooperate with pickup
setting of current differential protection, at the same time it should be greater than unbalance
current under normal conditions (including unbalance current due to CT error at both ends and
capacitive current not compensated).
In addition to discriminate inconsistent channel route, continuous differential current can also be
used to detect CT circuit failure, an alarm will be issued with a time delay for CT circuit failure of
any end under on-load conditions.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-28
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
The logic of differential current abnormality supervision is
SET IDiffA>[87L.I_Alm]
SET IDiffB>[87L.I_Alm]
SET IDiffC>[87L.I_Alm]
SIG
&
10s
10s
10s
10s
10s
10s
&
>=1
87L.FOx.Alm_Diff
&
3
87L.FOx.On
Figure 3.7-11 Logic of differential current supervision
Where:
IdiffA, IdiffB, IdiffC are respectively differential current of phase A, B, C
3.7.1.7 CT Circuit Supervision
When CT circuit failure occurs at one end, FD and current differential protection on the end might
operate. However, FD on another end will not operate and not send any permissive signal of
current differential protection. Therefore, the current differential protection will not maloperate.
Meanwhile the healthy end will issue alarm signal [87L.Alm_Diff] which will be treated as the same
as the alarm [CTS.Alm].
However, if CT circuit failure associated with internal fault or pickup due to system disturbance is
detected, the device will show two kinds of behaviour.
1)
If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] (differential protection being blocked during CT circuit
failure) is set as “Enabled”, the current differential protection will be blocked.
2)
If logic setting [87L.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “Disabled” and the current differential current of
the faulty phase is more than the differential current setting [87L.I_Pkp_CTS] during CT
circuit failure, the current differential protection will operate with alarm signal being issued at
the same time.
The logic of CT circuit failure blocking current differential protection is:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-29
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SET IDiff >[87L.I_Pkp_CTS]
EN
>=1
[87L.En_CTS_Blk]
SIG CTS.Alm
&
>=1
&
SIG 87L.FOx.Alm_Diff
87L.CT_Blk
SIG 87L.On
Figure 3.7-12 CT circuit failure blocking current differential protection
3
3.7.1.8 Weak Infeed
For some special fault, such as the high-impedance fault, internal fault at weak end, etc., the
sensitivity of fault detector element does not meet the requirements, so as that current differential
protection cannot operate. Hence, the independent mandatory fault detector element is provided
for these cases.
1)
When the voltage is valid, if there is an asymmetric voltage element or phase voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage is lower than the setting, and there is differential current and
permissive signal from the opposite end is received, the independent fault detector element
for weak infeed operate. The device picks up.
2)
When the voltage is invalid, if the current of the opposite end is more than four times that of
the local end, and there is differential current and permissive signal from the opposite end is
received, the independent fault detector element for weak infeed operate. The device picks
up.
The independent fault detector element for weak infeed will be automatically disabled when CT
circuit fails, or differential current is abnormal or three phases of the circuit breaker are all open
position.
The logic of independent fault detector element for weak infeed is:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-30
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG 3U0>1V
>=1
30ms
0
SIG 3U2>6V
SIG UA<0.65UN
>=1
>=1
SIG UB<0.65UN
&
SIG UC<0.65UN
SIG UAB<0.65UNN
>=1
SIG UBC<0.65UNN
3
SIG UCA<0.65UNN
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG 4Ia<Ia_Rmt
>=1
SIG 4Ib<Ib_Rmt
&
SIG 4Ic<Ic_Rmt
>=1
SIG Permissive signal
SIG 87L.FOx.Alm_Diff
Weak infeed logic
&
30ms
>=1
0
SIG CTS.Alm
Figure 3.7-13 Weak infeed logic of current differential protection
Where:
Ia, Ib, Ic are three phases current of local end;
Ia_Rmt, Ib_Rmt, Ic_Rmt are three phases current of remote end;
Ua, Ub, Uc are three phases voltage of local end;
Uab, Ubc, Uca are three phase-to-phase voltage of local end.
3.7.1.9 Permissive Signal
Differential permissive signal is fault discrimination signal, which is sent to the other ends of
current differential protection and used as an auxiliary condition of current differential protection
operation. The setting [87L.En_LocDiff] can determine whether local current differential protection
is controlled by permissive signal from other ends.
For some abnormal conditions, such as CT circuit failure or abnormal sampling, a large differential
current will be produced under non-fault conditions. Taking CT circuit failure as an example, when
CT circuit fails, the differential current maybe is larger than the setting and current differential
protection mal-operates if load current is very large. In order to prevent from undesired operation,
permissive signal from other ends is used as auxiliary criterion of local current differential
protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-31
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
The logic of sending permissive signal is:
SIG 87L.Low_Slop_StA
&
SIG 87L.Low_Slop_StB
&
SIG 87L.Low_Slop_StC
3
SIG 52b_PhA
&
Send permissive signal
(phase A)
Send permissive signal
(phase B)
Send permissive signal
(phase C)
&
SIG 52b_PhB
SIG 52b_PhC
>=1
SIG Weak infeed logic
SIG FD.Pkp
Figure 3.7-14 Sending permissive signal of current differential protection
3.7.1.10 CT Ratio Adjustment
If CTs' ratio at two ends of the transmission line is different, the currents must be corrected to one
reference value. Regarding local end as the referenced end, differential current and restraint
current can be calculated since the current of the opposite end is corrected by the setting.
[87L.K_Cr_CT].
Setting principle: Suppose CT ratio, Terminal M: kM=IM1n : IM2n; Terminal N: kN=IN1n : IN2n
IM1n: primary rated current of terminal M, IM2n: secondary rated current of terminal M
IN1n: primary rated current of terminal N, IN2n: secondary rated current of terminal N
If IM1n>= IN1n
Terminal M: [87L.K_Cr_CT]=1.00
Terminal N: [87L.K_Cr_CT]=IN1n / IM1n
For example:
Terminal M: CT ratio=1250 : 5, the setting [87L.K_Cr_CT] is set as “0.5”
Terminal N: CT ratio=2500 : 1, the setting [87L.K_Cr_CT] is set as “1.0”
If current of terminal M is IM, current of terminal N is IN, the differential current and restraint current
calculated on terminal M is:
I DiffΦ = IMΦ +
INΦ
[87L.K_Corr_CT]
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-32
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
I BiasΦ = IMΦ −
INΦ
[87L.K_Corr_CT]
3.7.1.11 Differential Inter-trip
When a fault associated with high resistance occurs in the outlet of long transmission line, the
device of local end, which is near the fault, can pick up immediately, but, considering the influence
of a considerable power source, the device of the remote end, which is far from the fault, cannot
pick up due to unapparent fault component. In order to avoid this case, any protection (such as
overcurrent protection and etc.) of local end operates, inter-trip signal of corresponding phase will
be sent to the remote end.
In addition, for some special faults, the sensitivity of current differential protection is not enough,
so backup protection (for example, earth fault protection) will operate to clear the fault. In order to
ensure reliable operation at both ends, inter-tripping signal can be configured to send to the
opposite end.
Inter-trip signal is phase-segregated signal and is sent to the opposite end via optical fibre
channel, which can be configured by PCS-Studio.
After receiving the inter-trip signal, the device of the opposite end can pick up, when the setting
[87L.En_InterTrp] is set as “Enabled”, the corresponding phase will be inter-tripped if the
differential current meets the operating condition.
When the circuit breaker of any end is in open position and there is no current, the tripping will be
blocked. The logic of differential inter-trip element is:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-33
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
SIG 87L.Low_Slop_StA
&
SIG Inter-trip element (phase A)
&
&
SIG 52b_PhA
EN
87L.OpB_InterTrp
10ms 0
87L.OpC_InterTrp
&
&
SIG 52b_PhB
[87L.En_InterTrp]
SIG 87L.Low_Slop_StC
&
SIG Inter-trip element (phase C)
&
&
SIG 52b_PhC
EN
10ms 0
&
SIG Inter-trip element (phase B)
EN
87L.OpA_InterTrp
[87L.En_InterTrp]
SIG 87L.Low_Slop_StB
3
10ms 0
[87L.En_InterTrp]
SIG 87L.OpA_InterTrp
SIG 87L.OpB_InterTrp
>=1
87L.Op_InterTrp
SIG 87L.OpC_InterTrp
Figure 3.7-15 Logic of differential inter-trip element
Where:
Inter-trip element: the tripping signal from the opposite end is received and basic differential
current condition is met when the device picks up.
3.7.1.12 CT Requirement for Current Differential Protection
The current transformer converts large current at primary side into small current at secondary side
based on electromagnetic induction principle. The current transformer is composed of a closed
core and windings. Its primary windings is less and connected with the measured loop in series.
Its secondary windings is more and connected with the protection loop in series. When the current
transformer is working, its secondary loop is always closed and is close to short-circuit.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-34
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Figure 3.7-16 CT schematic
There are three kinds of current transformer, including high remnant magnetism, low remnant
magnetism and non remnant magnetism.
⚫
High remnant magnetism
There is no gap in the core with high remnant magnetism. The typical type of current transformer
with high remnant magnetism includes TPX, TPS, P and PX. The rate of remnant magnetism can
be up to 95%.
⚫
Low remnant magnetism
There is a small gap in the core with low remnant magnetism. The typical type of current
transformer with low remnant magnetism includes TPY and PR. The rate of remnant magnetism
cannot be more than 10% saturation flux.
⚫
Non remnant magnetism
There is a large gap in the core with non remnant magnetism. The typical type of current
transformer with non remnant magnetism is TPZ. Its remnant magnetism can be neglected.
Choosing the current transformer used by the protection, it is necessary that the transferring error
of steady-state symmetric short-circuit current should not exceed the specified value. The
aperiodic component of short-circuit current and transient impact of remnant magnetism should
be considered reasonably according to the severity of the system transient state, the protection
characteristics, the transient saturation, etc,.
According to the basic electromagnetic relationship, the equivalent circuit of current transformer is
shown is shown as below.
Figure 3.7-17 Equivalent circuit
When other parameters is unchanged and the current is less than the rated value, the smaller the
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-35
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
current, the smaller the permeability (μ). The excitation impedance is small, and the excitation
current is large, so the error is larger relatively. When the current increases, the permeability
increases, the excitation impedance becomes larger and the excitation current becomes smaller,
so the error becomes smaller. However, if the current continually increases, the excitation
impedance becomes smaller, the excitation current increases, and the error increases again. The
B-H curve is shown as below.
3
Figure 3.7-18 Core's Magnetizing curve
The current transformer can be verified whether it meets the requirements by calculating the
secondary limit electromotive force of current transformer.
1)
The rated secondary limit electromotive force of the current transformer:
ESl = Kalf×Ie×(Rct+Rbn)
Where:
Kalf is accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
Ipal is rated accuracy limit primary current.
Ipn is rated primary current.
Ie is rated secondary current.
Rct is secondary windings of the current transformer.
Rbn is rated resistance burden.
2)
The actual secondary limit electromotive force of the current transformer:
Es = Ktd×Kpcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)
Ktd is steady-state coefficient.
Kpcf is protective checking factor current. (Kpcf=Ipcf/Ipn)
Ipcf is actual maximal primary faulty current.
Isn is rated secondary current.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-36
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Ipn is rated primary current.
Rb is actual resistance burden.
3)
Verification criterion:
ESl>ES
The rated secondary limit electromotive force of current transformer should be greater than the
actual second limit electromotive force.
The steady-state coefficient (Ktd) should be set complying with the followings. Considering a
completed process (CO-CO) and the worst conditions:
⚫
High remnant magnetism CT (P, PX)
Ktd=(2+K2), K2=2
⚫
Low remnant magnetism CT (TPX, TPY, PR)
Ktd=(1+K2), K2=1
⚫
Non remnant magnetism CT (TPZ)
Ktd=(0.6+K2), K2=0.6
System primary time constant: K2=0.8 (<60ms), K3=1 (60-120ms), K3=1.5 (120-200ms), K3=2
(>200ms)
3.7.2 Function Block Diagram
87L
87L. FOx.Enable
87L.On
87L. FOx. Block
87L. FOx.On
87L. FOx. Valid
87L. FOx. Blocked
87L.Op
87L.Op_A
87L.Op_B
87L.Op_C
87L.Op_ Biased1
87L.Op_ Biased2
87L.Op_ InterTrp
87L. FOx.Alm_Diff
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-37
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.7.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-3 Input/Output signals of current differential protection
No.
Input Signal
1
87L.FOx.Enable
2
87L.FOx.Block
No.
Description
Current differential protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Current differential protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Output Signal
Description
1
87L.On
Current differential protection is enabled.
2
87L.FOx.On
Current differential protection of channel No.x is enabled.
3
87L.FOx.Valid
Current differential protection of channel No.x is valid.
4
87L.FOx.Blocked
Current differential protection of channel No.x is blocked.
5
87L.Op
6
87L.Op_A
Current differential protection operates. (Phase A)
7
87L.Op_B
Current differential protection operates. (Phase B)
8
87L.Op_C
Current differential protection operates. (Phase C)
9
87L.Op_Biased1
Stage 1 of steady-stage current differential element operates.
10
87L.Op_Biased2
Stage 2 of steady-stage current differential element operates.
11
87L.Op_InterTrp
Differential inter-trip element operates.
12
87L.FOx.Alm_Diff
The differential current of channel No.x is abnormal.
3
Current differential protection operates, if any of them “[87L.Op_Biased1],
[87L.Op_Biased2], [87L.Op_InterTrp]” operates, then [87L.Op] will operate.
3.7.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings Diff Settings
Table 3.7-4 Settings of current differential protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Unit
value
Step
1
87L.I_Pkp
(0.05~40)×In
0.300
A
0.001
2
87L.I_Alm
(0.05~40)×In
0.300
A
0.001
3
87L.I_Pkp_CTS
(0.05~40)×In
1.0×In
A
0.001
4
87L.K_Cr_CT
0.2~10
1.0
-
0.001
5
87L.I_Knee1
(0.05~40)×In
1.0×In
A
0.001
6
87L.I_Knee2
(0.05~40)×In
3.0×In
A
0.001
7
87L.Slope1
0.3~0.75
0.500
-
0.01
Description
Minimum pickup current setting of
current differential protection
Current setting of differential current
abnormality alarm
Current
setting
of
differential
protection when CT circuit failure
The factor of CT ratio
Current setting of knee point 1 for
current differential protection
Current setting of knee point 2 for
current differential protection
Slope 1 of steady-state current
differential element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-38
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
8
87L.Slope2
9
87L.En
10
11
12
87L.En_Biased1
87L.En_Biased2
87L.InterTrp
Range
0.3~0.75
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Default
Unit
value
Step
0.700
-
0.01
Enabled
-
-
Description
Slope 2 of steady-state current
differential element
Enabling/disabling
differential protection
Enabling/disabling
Enabled
-
-
current
stage
1
of
steady-state current differential
element
Enabling/disabling
Enabled
-
-
stage
2
of
steady-state current differential
element
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling
inter-tripping
element
Enabling/disabling
local
independent current differential
13
87L.En_LocDiff
Disabled
Enabled
protection (independent current
Enabled
-
-
differential protection means local
current differential protection can
operate without permissive signal
from remote end)
14
87L.En_CTS_Blk
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
differential
protection
current
blocked
during CT circuit failure
3.8 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)
Phase overcurrent protection is the most widely used type of protection element in power systems.
It can be used as the main protection of the feeder, and can also be used as the backup protection
for power equipment such as transformers, reactors, and motors. When a fault occurs in the
system, a fault current will be generated and the phase overcurrent protection can reflect the
increase of the fault current.
3.8.1 Function Description
The device can provide six stages of phase overcurrent protection with independent logic. Each
stage can be independently set as definite-time characteristics or inverse-time characteristics.
The dropout characteristics can be set as instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout or
inverse-time dropout. Users can choose whether it is blocked by the voltage control element,
direction control element, or harmonic control element, users can also choose whether it is
controlled by cold load pickup. The direction control element can be set as no direction, forward
direction and reverse direction. The phase overcurrent protection picks up when the current
exceeds the current threshold value, and operates after a certain time delay, once the fault
disappears, the phase overcurrent protection will dropout.
Phase overcurrent protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals,
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-39
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
for some specific applications, overcurrent protection needs to be blocked by the external signal,
so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block overcurrent protection.
The enabling and blocking logic of phase overcurrent protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
50/51Px.En
SI G
50/51Px.Enable
SI G
50/51Px.Block
SI G
Fail_Device
&
50/51Px.On
&
≥1
50/51Px.Blocked
&
3
50/51Px.Valid
Figure 3.8-1 The enabling and blocking logic of phase overcurrent protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase overcurrent protection is as follows:
SET
Ia>0.95×[50/51Px.I_Set]
SET
Ib>0.95×[50/51Px.I_Set]
SET
Ic>0.95×[50/51Px.I_Set]
SIG
50/51Px.On
SIG
50/51Px.Valid
SET
[50/51Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
>=1
&
0
500ms
&
50/51Px.Pkp
&
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.8-2 The fault detector element of phase overcurrent protection
3.8.1.1 Voltage Control Element
When a fault occurs at the remote end of a feeder, the fault current is relatively small, so the
voltage control element can be adopted to increase the sensitivity for this kind of fault. Users can
enable or disable the voltage control element via the setting [50/51Px.En_Volt_Blk] (x=1~6). If the
VT circuit supervision function is enabled for the device, and the setting [50/51P.En_VTS_Blk] is
set as “Enabled”, when VT circuit failure happens, the device will issue a VT circuit failure alarm
signal [VTS.Alm], and the voltage controlled phase overcurrent protection will be blocked. If the
voltage control element of phase overcurrent protection is not enabled, phase overcurrent
protection will not be affected by VT circuit failure. The corresponding relationship between the
phase-segregated overcurrent element and the voltage control element is as follows.
Voltage control
criterion
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase-to-phase
Uab<[50/51P.VCE.Upp]
Uab<[50/51P.VCE.Upp]
Ubc<[50/51P.VCE.Upp]
criterion
Uca<[50/51P.VCE.Upp]
Ubc<[50/51P.VCE.Upp]
Uca<[50/51P.VCE.Upp]
U2>[50/51P.VCE.U2]
U2>[50/51P.VCE.U2]
U2>[50/51P.VCE.U2]
Negative-sequence
criterion
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-40
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Zero-sequence
U0_Cal>[50/51P.VCE.3U0]
criterion
U0_Cal>[50/51P.VCE.3U0]
U0_Cal>[50/51P.VCE.3U0]
The relationship between the phase-to-phase criterion, the negative-sequence criterion and the
zero-sequence criterion is "or". The logic diagram of the voltage control element action is shown
below:
EN
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk]
&
>=1
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG U2, U0_Cal
SIG Prot.BI_En_VT
EN
Voltage
criterion
SIG Uab, Ubc, Uca
&
3
&
50/51P.VCE.Op
&
[En_VT]
Figure 3.8-3 The voltage control element of phase overcurrent protection
3.8.1.2 Direction Control Element
In order to ensure the selectivity of phase overcurrent protection, direction control element is
introduced. The setting [50/51Px.Opt_Dir] (x=1~6) is used for users to select the directional mode
of each stage of phase overcurrent protection: no direction, forward direction and reverse
direction are selectable.
Takes the phase A fault as an example, the polarization mode is set as “Up”, its operation
characteristics are shown in the figure below. The principle of phase B and phase C is the same. If
the positive-sequence voltage or the phase-to-phase voltage is polarized, the operation
characteristics are the same.
The operation boundary of the forward direction element can be set by [50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
and [50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]. The operation boundary of the reverse direction element can be
set by [50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] and [50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev].
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-41
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Ua
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
Ia
Operating area in
forward direction
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
[50/51P.DIR.RCA]
3
Operating area in
reverse direction
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
Non-operating
area
Figure 3.8-4 The direction element operation characteristics when phase A voltage is polarized
Where:
The sensitivity angle of the direction control element (RCA) can be set by the setting
[50/51P.DIR.RCA].
The selection of the polarization voltage can be set by the setting [50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt].
The following table shows the relationship between the operating current, the polarized voltage
and the polarization mode.
Direction criterion (for “ABC” system phase sequence)
Polarization
Faulty
Operating
mode
phase
current
Phase A
Positive-sequence
voltage polarized
Phase B
Phase C
Phase A
Phase-to-phase
voltage polarized
Phase B
Phase C
Phase-to-ground
Phase A
Polarized voltage
Phase-A
Positive-sequence
current Ia
voltage
Phase-B
Positive-sequence
current Ib
voltage
Phase-C
Positive-sequence
current Ic
voltage
Phase-A
Phase-to-phase
current Ia
voltage Ubc
Phase-B
Phase-to-phase
current Ib
voltage Uca
Phase-C
Phase-to-phase
current Ic
voltage Uab
Phase-A
Phase-to-ground
Angle difference
Angle_A=Angle(U1)-Angle(Ia)-RCA
Angle_B=Angle(U1)-Angle(Ib)-RCA-120º
Angle_C=Angle(U1)-Angle(Ic)-RCA+120º
Angle_A=Angle(Ubc)-Angle(Ia)-RCA+90º
Angle_B=Angle(Uca)-Angle(Ib)-RCA+90º
Angle_C=Angle(Uab)-Angle(Ic)-RCA+90º
Angle_A=Angle(Ua)-Angle(Ia)-RCA
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-42
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
voltage polarized
Phase B
Phase C
current Ia
voltage Ua
Phase-B
Phase-to-ground
current Ib
voltage Ub
Phase-C
Phase-to-ground
current Ic
voltage Uc
Angle_B=Angle(Ub)-Angle(Ib)-RCA
Angle_C=Angle(Uc)-Angle(Ic)-RCA
In order to improve the reliability of the direction control element, the direction control element with
the above three polarization modes must be used in conjunction with the negative-sequence
direction criterion. The negative-sequence direction criterion is shown in the table below.
Negative-sequence direction criterion
Operating current
Polarized voltage
Negative-sequence current
3
Angle difference
Negative-sequence voltage
Angle_I2=Angle(U2)-Angle(I2)-RCA+180º
For the “ACB” system phase sequence, the angle difference under
positive-sequence voltage polarization mode and phase-to-phase voltage
polarization mode is different from that of the “ABC” system phase
sequence, as shown in the following table:
Direction criterion (for “ACB” system phase sequence)
Polarization
Faulty
Operating
mode
phase
current
Phase A
Positive-sequence
voltage polarized
Phase B
Phase C
Phase A
Phase-to-phase
voltage polarized
Phase B
Phase C
Polarized voltage
Phase-A
Positive-sequence
current Ia
voltage
Phase-B
Positive-sequence
current Ib
voltage
Phase-C
Positive-sequence
current Ic
voltage
Phase-A
Phase-to-phase
current Ia
voltage Ubc
Phase-B
Phase-to-phase
current Ib
voltage Uca
Phase-C
Phase-to-phase
current Ic
voltage Uab
Angle difference
Angle_A=Angle(U1)-Angle(Ia)-RCA
Angle_B=Angle(U1)-Angle(Ib)-RCA+120º
Angle_C=Angle(U1)-Angle(Ic)-RCA-120º
Angle_A=Angle(Ubc)-Angle(Ia)-RCA+270º
Angle_B=Angle(Uca)-Angle(Ib)-RCA+270º
Angle_C=Angle(Uab)-Angle(Ic)-RCA+270º
Therefore, the criterion for the three-phase direction control element is as follows:
Three-phase direction control element
Direction element
Phase A forward direction
Phase A reverse direction
Phase B forward direction
Operating condition
Angle_A forward direction operates and Angle_I2 reverse direction does not
operate.
Angle_A reverse direction operates and Angle_I2 forward direction does not
operate.
Angle_B forward direction operates and Angle_I2 reverse direction does not
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-43
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
operate.
Phase B reverse direction
Phase C forward direction
Phase C reverse direction
3
Angle_B reverse direction operates and Angle_I2 forward direction does not
operate.
Angle_C forward direction operates and Angle_I2 reverse direction does not
operate.
Angle_C reverse direction operates and Angle_I2 forward direction does not
operate.
The direction element calculation needs to judge the current threshold and voltage threshold. The
corresponding phase operating current must be greater than the minimum operating current
setting [50/51P.DIR.I_Min], otherwise the direction element can not operate. For the voltage, it has
memory function that can eliminate the dead zone of the direction element when the close up
three-phase short circuit fault occurs. When the polarized voltage is less than the minimum
operating voltage setting [50/51P.DIR.U_Min], the polarized voltage will not be used to judge the
direction, the positive-sequence voltage before two cycles is used to judge the direction.
Polarized voltage
Operating current
Phase-to-phase voltage
Phase current
Phase-to-ground voltage
Phase current
Positive-sequence voltage
Phase current
Negative-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence current
EN
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk]
SIG
VTS.Alm
SIG
Three-phase currents
SIG
Three-phase voltages
SIG
Memorized U1
SET
[50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt]
SIG
Prot.BI_En_VT
EN
[En_VT]
SET
Iop>[50/51P.DIR.I_Min]
&
&
>=1
&
Forward direction
criterion
50/51P.FwdDir.Op
&
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-44
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
EN
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk]
SIG
VTS.Alm
SIG
Three-phase currents
SIG
Three-phase voltages
SIG
Memorized U1
SET
[50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt]
SIG
Prot.BI_En_VT
EN
[En_VT]
SET
Iop>[50/51P.DIR.I_Min]
&
&
>=1
&
Reverse direction
criterion
50/51P.RevDir.Op
3
&
Figure 3.8-5 Logic diagram of forward and reverse direction element of phase overcurrent protection
Where:
Memorized U1: the positive-sequence memory voltage, it refers to the positive-sequence voltage
of two cycles before the polarized voltage is less than the minimum operating voltage setting
[50/51P.DIR.U_Min], and it is calculated from the three-phase voltage.
Iop: the operating current.
3.8.1.3 Harmonic Control Element
When transformer and other equipment are energized without any load, the inrush current may be
generated, which may cause the mal-operation of the phase overcurrent protection. According to
the characteristics of high secondary harmonic component in the inrush current and low
secondary harmonic component in common fault current, the secondary harmonic control element
is added to prevent the phase overcurrent protection from mal-operation due to inrush current. For
the harmonic control element, the harmonic blocking mode can be selected through the setting
[50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk], it can support phase locking, cross locking, and maximum phase locking.
The correspondences are shown in the following table:
Harmonic blocking criterion
Setting Value
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Ib2/Ib1>[50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
Ic2/Ic1>[50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
1
PhaseBlk
Ia2/Ia1>[50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
2
CrossBlk
(Ia2/Ia1) or (Ib2/Ib1) or (Ic2/Ic1)> [50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
3
MaxPhaseBlk
Max(Ia2,
Ib2,
Ic2)/Ia1>
[50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
Max(Ia2,
Ib2,
Ic2)/Ib1>
[50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
Max(Ia2,
Ib2,
Ic2)/Ic1>
[50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
Where:
Ia1, Ib1, Ic1: the fundamental current;
Ia2, Ib2, Ic2: the secondary harmonic component of the current.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-45
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
When the fundamental current is greater than the setting [50/51P.HMB.I_Rls], the harmonic
blocking element of the corresponding phase is released.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the harmonic control element of phase
overcurrent protection.
SET Imax>[50/51P.HMB.I_Rls]
&
SIG Ia1, Ib1, Ic1
Harmonic
criterion
50/51P.HMB.Op
SIG Ia2, Ib2, Ic2
SET [50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk]
3
Figure 3.8-6 Logic diagram of harmonic control element of phase overcurrent protection
Where:
Ia1, Ib1, Ic1: the fundamental current
Ia2, Ib2, Ic2: the 2nd harmonic current
Imax: the maximum phase current
3.8.1.4 Operation Characteristic
Phase overcurrent protection can operate without time delay or operate with a definite-time limit, it
can also operate with an inverse-time limit, the characteristic curve meets the IEC60255-3 and
ANSI C37.112 standards. Phase overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC &
ANSI standard inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted
operating curve by the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] (x=1~6), the relationship between the value of
the setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
50/51Px.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
k
α
c
tr
ANSIE
ANSI Extremely Inverse
28.2
2.0
0.1217
29.1
ANSIV
ANSI Very inverse
19.61
2.0
0.491
21.6
ANSIN
ANSI Normal Inverse
0.0086
0.02
0.0185
0.46
ANSIM
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
ANSIDefTime
ANSI Definite Time
-
-
-
-
ANSILTE
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
64.07
2.0
0.25
30
ANSILTV
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
28.55
2.0
0.712
13.46
ANSILT
ANSI Long Time Inverse
0.086
0.02
0.185
4.6
IECN
IEC Normal Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECV
IEC Very inverse
13.5
1.0
0
-
IEC
IEC Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECE
IEC Extremely inverse
80.0
2.0
0
-
IECST
IEC Short-time inverse
0.05
0.04
0
-
IECLT
IEC Long-time inverse
120.0
1.0
0
-
IECDefTime
IEC Definite Time
-
-
-
-
UserDefine
Programmable
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-46
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Only when the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the settings [50/51Px.K], [50/51Px.C] and [50/51Px.Alpha]
are useful, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the three settings.
⚫
Without time delay
When I > Ip , phase overcurrent protection operates immediately.
⚫
Definite-time characteristic
When I > Ip , the protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Px.t_Op]), and the operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
3
t
t op
IP
I
Figure 3.8-7 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time characteristic
When I > Ip , the inverse-time accumulator begins to accumulate, and the operating time is
affected by the applied current I . The operating time will decrease with the current increasing,
but the operating time shall not less than tmin , i.e. the setting [50/51Px.tmin] (x=1~6). The
inverse-time operation characteristic equation is:
k
t=
+ c TMS
(I / I P ) −1
Where:
Ip is the current setting [50/51Px.I_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time time multiplier, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.TMS];
k is the inverse-time coefficient K, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.K];
c
is the inverse-time coefficient C, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.C];
is the inverse-time coefficient Alpha, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.Alpha];
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-47
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
I is the measured current.
The inverse-time operation characteristic curve is shown as below:
t
3
t min
IP
ID
I
Figure 3.8-8 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection
When the applied current is not a fixed value, but changes with time, the operating behaviour of
the protection is shown in the following equation:
T0
1
t ( I )dt
=1
0
Where:
T0 is the operating time of the protection element;
t(I) is the theoretical operating time when the current is I.
3.8.1.5 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the phase overcurrent protection include instantaneous
dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI inverse-time dropout.
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the dropout characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
dropout or definite-time dropout, if inverse-time dropout is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the dropout
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI
inverse-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-48
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
When I <0.95* Ip , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When I <0.95* Ip , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Px.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
Start time
I>Ip
3
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.8-9 Definite-time dropout characteristic of phase overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time dropout
When I > Ip , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
1
dt
t
(
I
)
0
I tp =
At this time, if I <0.95* Ip , the protection element starts dropout, and the dropout characteristic
meets the following equation:
TR
1
dt = 0
t
(
I
)
R
0
I tp −
Where:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-49
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
T R is the dropout time;
tR( I ) is the dropout characteristic equation
When I <0.95* Ip , the inverse-time dropout characteristic equation is as follows:
tr
tR =
TMS
2
1 − ( I / I P )
Where:
3
Ip is the current setting [50/51Px.I_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.TMS];
tr is the dropout time coefficient, it is the dropout time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
I is the measured current.
When 0.95* Ip < I < Ip , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time dropout characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.
t
tr
IP
I
Figure 3.8-10 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection
The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time dropout characteristic is shown in the figure below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-50
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Start time
I>Ip
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
3
Operating
counter
tr
Dropout time coefficient
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.8-11 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of phase overcurrent protection
3.8.2 Function Block Diagram
50/51P
50/51Px.Enable
50/51Px.Block
50/51Px.On
50/51Px.Blocked
50/51Px.Valid
50/51Px.St
50/51Px.StA
50/51Px.StB
50/51Px.StC
50/51Px.Op
50/51Px.Op.PhA
50/51Px.Op.PhB
50/51Px.Op.PhC
50/51P.FwdDir.Op
50/51P.RevDir.Op
50/51Px.Alm
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-51
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.8.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.8-1 Input/output signals of phase overcurrent protection
No.
1
50/51Px.Enable
2
50/51Px.Block
No.
3
Input signal
Description
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Output signal
Description
1
50/51Px.On
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled
2
50/51Px.Blocked
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is blocked
3
50/51Px.Valid
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is valid
4
50/51Px.St
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts
5
50/51Px.StA
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (Phase A)
6
50/51Px.StB
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (Phase B)
7
50/51Px.StC
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (Phase C)
8
50/51Px.Op
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates
9
50/51Px.Op.PhA
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates (Phase A)
10
50/51Px.Op.PhB
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates (Phase B)
11
50/51Px.Op.PhC
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates (Phase C)
12
50/51Px.Alm
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection alarms
13
50/51P.FwdDir.Op
The forward direction element of phase overcurrent protection operates
14
50/51P.RevDir.Op
The reverse direction element of phase overcurrent protection operates
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-52
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.8.4 Logic
SET
Ia>[50/51Px.I_Set]
SIG
50/51P.VCE.Op_A
EN
[50/51Px.En_Volt_Blk]
SIG
50/51P.FwdDir.Op_A
SIG
50/51P.RevDir.Op_A
SIG
[50/51Px.Opt_Dir]
SIG
50/51P.HMB.Op_A
EN
[50/51Px.En_Hm_Blk]
SIG
50/51Px.Pkp
SET
[50/51Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
SET
[50/51Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
SIG
50/51Px.StA
SIG
50/51Px.StB
SIG
50/51Px.StC
SIG
50/51Px.Op.PhA
SIG
50/51Px.Op.PhB
SIG
50/51Px.Op.PhC
SIG
50/51Px.Alm.PhA
SIG
50/51Px.Alm.PhB
SIG
50/51Px.Alm.PhC
>=1
&
Direction
selection
50/51Px.StA
&
&
Timer
t
&
3
&
t
50/51Px.Op.PhA
&
50/51Px.Alm.PhA
>=1
50/51Px.St
>=1
50/51Px.Op
>=1
50/51Px.Alm
Figure 3.8-12 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection
3.8.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings OC Settings
Table 3.8-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The low voltage blocking setting
1
50/51P.VCE.Upp
10~100
70
V
0.001
of the voltage control element of
phase overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-53
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The negative-sequence voltage
2
50/51P.VCE.U2
2~57
8
V
0.001
blocking setting of the voltage
control
element
of
phase
overcurrent protection
The residual voltage setting (set
3
50/51P.VCE.3U0
2~57
8
V
0.001
according to 3U0) of voltage
control
element
of
phase
overcurrent protection
3
The relay characteristic angle of
4
50/51P.DIR.RCA
-180~179
45
deg
1
the direction control element of
phase overcurrent protection
The relay negative-sequence
5
50/51P.DIR.RCA_N
egOC
-180~179
45
deg
1
characteristic
direction
angle
control
of
element
the
of
phase overcurrent protection
6
7
8
9
50/51P.DIR.phi_Min
_Fwd
50/51P.DIR.phi_Ma
x_Fwd
50/51P.DIR.phi_Min
_Rev
50/51P.DIR.phi_Ma
x_Rev
The minimum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The maximum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The minimum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The maximum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The voltage polarization mode
for direction control element of
phase overcurrent protection
10
50/51P.DIR.Opt_Pol
arizedVolt
Upp;
Up;
Upp:
Upp
-
-
U1
phase-to-phase
voltage
polarized
Up:
phase-to-ground
voltage
polarized
U1: positive-sequence voltage
polarized
The minimum operating current
11
50/51P.DIR.I_Min
(0.05~1)In
0.05
-
0.001
setting for the direction control
element of phase overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-54
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The minimum operating voltage
12
50/51P.DIR.U_Min
1~10
4
V
0.001
setting for the direction control
element of phase overcurrent
protection
Logic setting to determine the
behaviour of phase overcurrent
protection
when
VT
circuit
supervision function is enabled
and VT circuit failure happens.
13
50/51P.En_VTS_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
Disabled:
phase
overcurrent
protection will not affected by VT
circuit failure
Enabled:
voltage
controlled
phase overcurrent protection will
be blocked by VT circuit failure
signal
14
50/51P.HMB.K_Hm
2
The
0.1~1
0.2
-
0.001
percent
setting
of
the
harmonic control element of
phase overcurrent protection
The current setting for releasing
15
50/51P.HMB.I_Rls
2~150
20
A
0.001
the harmonic control element of
phase overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
harmonic
16
50/51P.HMB.Opt_Bl
k
PhaseBlk
CrossBlk
blocking
mode
of
phase overcurrent protection
PhaseBlk
-
-
MaxPhaseBlk
PhaseBlk: phase blocking
CrossBlk: cross blocking
MaxPhaseBlk: maximum phase
blocking
17
50/51P1.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
18
50/51P1.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
19
50/51P1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-55
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 1 of phase
20
50/51P1.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
3
Enabled: stage 1 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
21
50/51P1.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 1 of phase
22
50/51P1.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 1 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
23
50/51P1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 1 of phase
24
50/51P1.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-56
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
25
50/51P1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
26
50/51P1.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 1 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
27
50/51P1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
28
50/51P1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 1 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
29
50/51P1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
1
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
30
50/51P1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
1
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-57
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
31
50/51P1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
“C”
constant
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
1
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
32
50/51P2.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
3
33
50/51P2.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
34
50/51P2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 2 of phase
35
50/51P2.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 2 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
36
50/51P2.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 2 of phase
37
50/51P2.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 2 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-58
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
38
Settings
50/51P2.En
Default
Range
Disabled;
Enabled
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 2 of phase
39
50/51P2.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
40
50/51P2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
41
50/51P2.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 2 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
42
50/51P2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
43
50/51P2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 2 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
44
50/51P2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
2
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-59
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
45
50/51P2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
“α”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
2
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
46
50/51P2.C
0 ~1
0
-
3
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
2
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
47
50/51P3.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
48
50/51P3.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
49
50/51P3.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 3 of phase
50
50/51P3.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 3 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
51
50/51P3.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-60
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 3 of phase
52
50/51P3.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 3 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
53
50/51P3.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 3 of phase
54
50/51P3.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
55
50/51P3.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
IECV;
-
-
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-61
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
56
50/51P3.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 3 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
3
57
50/51P3.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
58
50/51P3.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 3 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
59
50/51P3.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
3
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
60
50/51P3.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
3
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
61
50/51P3.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
3
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
62
50/51P4.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
63
50/51P4.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 4 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
64
50/51P4.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 4 of phase overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-62
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 4 of phase
65
50/51P4.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 4 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
66
50/51P4.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 4 of phase
67
50/51P4.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 4 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
68
50/51P4.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 4 of phase
69
50/51P4.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-63
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
3
70
50/51P4.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
71
50/51P4.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 4 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
72
50/51P4.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 4 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
73
50/51P4.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 4 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
74
50/51P4.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
4
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
75
50/51P4.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
4
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-64
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
76
50/51P4.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
4
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
77
50/51P5.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
78
50/51P5.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 5 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
79
50/51P5.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 5 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 5 of phase
80
50/51P5.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 5 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
81
50/51P5.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 5 of phase
82
50/51P5.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 5 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-65
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
83
Settings
50/51P5.En
Default
Range
Disabled;
Enabled
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 5 of phase
84
50/51P5.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
85
50/51P5.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
86
50/51P5.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 5 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
87
50/51P5.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 5 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
88
50/51P5.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 5 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
89
50/51P5.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
5
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-66
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
90
50/51P5.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
“α”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
5
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
91
50/51P5.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
5
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
92
50/51P6.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
93
50/51P6.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 6 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
94
50/51P6.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 6 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 6 of phase
95
50/51P6.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 6 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
96
50/51P6.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection.
3-67
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 6 of phase
97
50/51P6.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
3
Enabled: stage 6 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
98
50/51P6.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 6 of phase
99
50/51P6.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
100
50/51P6.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
IECV;
-
-
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-68
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
101
50/51P6.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 6 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
102
50/51P6.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 6 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
103
50/51P6.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 6 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
104
50/51P6.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
6
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
105
50/51P6.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
6
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
106
50/51P6.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
6
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
3.9 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50/51G)
The normal operating power system is three-phase symmetrical, its zero-sequence current and
voltage are theoretically zero. Most of the faults are three-phase asymmetrical, according to the
asymmetry of the fault, various protections reflect sequence component principle can be
constituted. Earth fault overcurrent protection has been widely used in power systems, it can be
used for the fault conditions that zero-sequence fault current flows into the earth, including
single-phase earth fault and phase-to-phase short-circuit earth fault etc..
3.9.1 Function Description
The device can provide six stages of earth fault overcurrent protection with independent logic.
Each stage can be independently set as definite-time characteristics or inverse-time
characteristics. The dropout characteristics can be set as instantaneous dropout, definite-time
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-69
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
dropout or inverse-time dropout. Users can choose whether it is blocked by the direction control
element or the harmonic control element, users can also choose whether it is controlled by cold
load pickup. The direction control element can be set as no direction, forward direction and
reverse direction. The zero-sequence current used by earth fault overcurrent protection can be
calculated zero-sequence current or the measured zero-sequence current, it can operate to trip or
alarm, it can be enabled or blocked by the external binary input.
3
Earth fault overcurrent protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input
signals, for some specific applications, the protection needs to be blocked by the external signal,
so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block earth fault overcurrent
protection. The enabling and blocking logic of earth fault overcurrent protection is shown in the
figure below:
EN
50/51Gx.En
SIG
50/51Gx.Enable
SIG
50/51Gx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
50/51Gx.On
&
≥1
50/51Gx.Blocked
&
50/51Gx.Valid
Figure 3.9-1 The enabling and blocking logic of earth fault overcurrent protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of earth fault overcurrent protection is as follows:
SET
3I0>0.95*[50/51Gx.3I0_Set]
&
0
SIG
50/51Gx.On
SIG
50/51Gx.Valid
EN
[50/51Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
500ms
50/51Gx.Pkp
&
&
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of earth fault overcurrent protection
3.9.1.1 Direction Control Element
In order to ensure the selectivity of earth fault overcurrent protection, direction control element is
introduced. The setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Dir] (x=1~6) is used for users to select the directional mode
of each stage of earth fault overcurrent protection: no direction, forward direction and reverse
direction are selectable.
The operation boundary of the forward direction element can be set by [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
and [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]. The operation boundary of the reverse direction element can be
set by [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] and [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev].
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-70
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
-U0
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
I0
Operating area in
forward direction
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
[50/51G.DIR.RCA]
3
Operating area in
reverse direction
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
Non-operating
area
Figure 3.9-3 The direction element operation characteristics when zero-sequence voltage is polarized
Where:
The sensitivity angle of the direction control element (RCA) can be set by the setting
[50/51G.DIR.RCA].
The forward direction characteristic is:
-[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]<angle<[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
The reverse direction characteristic is:
180-[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]<angle<180+[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
The following table shows the relationship between the operating current, the polarized voltage
and the polarization mode.
Polarization mode
Operating current
Polarized
voltage
Angle difference
Zero-sequence
Calculated residual current 3I0_Cal
-3U0
angle=angle(-3U0)-angle(3I0_Cal)-RCA
voltage polarized
Measured residual current 3I0_Ext
-3U0
angle=angle(-3U0)-angle(3I0_Ext)-RCA
The direction element calculation needs to judge the current threshold and voltage threshold. The
corresponding operating current must be greater than the minimum operating current setting
[50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min], otherwise the direction element can not operate. The polarized voltage
must be greater than the minimum operating voltage setting [50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min], otherwise the
direction element can not operate.
The logic diagram of the forward direction element and reverse direction element is as follows.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-71
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
EN
[50/51G.En_VTS_Blk]
&
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG 3U0_Cal
EN
3
[En_VT]
>=1
&
Forward
direction
criterion
SIG 3I0_Ext, 3I0_Cal
&
50/51G.FwdDir.Op
&
SIG Prot.BI_En_VT
SET Iop>[50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min]
SET Upo>[50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min]
EN
[50/51G.En_VTS_Blk]
&
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG 3U0_Cal
EN
[En_VT]
Reverse
direction
criterion
SIG 3I0_Ext, 3I0_Cal
&
>=1
&
50/51G.RevDir.Op
&
SIG Prot.BI_En_VT
SET Iop>[50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min]
SET Upo>[50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min]
Figure 3.9-4 Logic diagram of forward and reverse direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection
Where:
3I0_Ext is the measured residual current.
3I0_Cal is the calculated residual current.
3U0_Cal: the calculated residual voltage
Iop: the operating current.
Upo: the polarized voltage.
3.9.1.2 Harmonic Control Element
Zero-sequence harmonic control element can be used together with earth fault overcurrent
protection when harmonic blocking is required, the zero-sequence current can be the calculated
zero-sequence current or the measured zero-sequence current.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-72
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
When the percentage of the second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual
current is greater than the setting [50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to
block stage x of earth fault protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gx.En_Hm_Blk] is
enabled.
When the fundamental zero-sequence current is greater than the setting [50/51G.HMB.I_Rls], the
harmonic blocking element is released.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the harmonic control element of earth fault
overcurrent protection.
SET
3
3I0>[50/51G.HMB.I_Rls]
&
SIG
3I0_Ext or 3I0_Cal
50/51G.Hm_Op
Harmonic
blocking
logi c
SET
3I02/3I0>[50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2]
Figure 3.9-5 Logic diagram of harmonic control element of earth fault overcurrent protection
Where:
3I0_Ext, 3I0_Cal: the measured residual current and the calculated residual current
3I02: the 2nd harmonic residual current
3.9.1.3 Operation Characteristic
Earth fault overcurrent protection can operate without time delay or operate with a definite-time
limit, it can also operate with an inverse-time limit, the characteristic curve meets the IEC60255-3
and ANSI C37.112 standards. Earth fault overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit,
IEC & ANSI standard inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the
wanted operating curve by the setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of
the setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
50/51Gx.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
α
k
c
tr
ANSIE
ANSI Extremely Inverse
28.2
2.0
0.1217
29.1
ANSIV
ANSI Very inverse
19.61
2.0
0.491
21.6
ANSIN
ANSI Normal Inverse
0.0086
0.02
0.0185
0.46
ANSIM
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
ANSIDefTime
ANSI Definite Time
-
-
-
-
ANSILTE
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
64.07
2.0
0.25
30
ANSILTV
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
28.55
2.0
0.712
13.46
ANSILT
ANSI Long Time Inverse
0.086
0.02
0.185
4.6
IECN
IEC Normal Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECV
IEC Very inverse
13.5
1.0
0
-
IEC
IEC Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECE
IEC Extremely inverse
80.0
2.0
0
-
IECST
IEC Short-time inverse
0.05
0.04
0
-
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-73
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
50/51Gx.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
α
k
c
tr
IECLT
IEC Long-time inverse
120.0
1.0
0
-
IECDefTime
IEC Definite Time
-
-
-
-
UserDefine
Programmable
Only when the setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the settings [50/51Gx.K], [50/51Gx.C] and [50/51Gx.Alpha]
are useful, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the three settings.
⚫
3
Without time delay
When I 0 > I 0 p , the protection operates immediately.
⚫
Definite-time characteristic
When I 0 > I 0 p , the protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Gx.t_Op]), and the operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
t
t op
I0p
I0
Figure 3.9-6 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time characteristic
When I 0 > I 0 p , the inverse-time accumulator begins to accumulate, and the operating time is
affected by the applied current I 0 . The larger current is, the smaller the operating time is, but not
unlimited. When the current is large enough to a certain threshold ( I 0 p ), the inverse-time
operating time will not continue to decrease, then the operation characteristic becomes the
definite-time characteristic, and the operating time is tmin , i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.tmin]. The
inverse-time operation characteristic equation is:
+ c TMS
(I 0 / I 0P ) − 1
t =
k
Where:
I 0 p is the current setting [50/51Gx.3I0_Set];
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-74
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
TMS is the inverse-time time multiplier, i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.TMS];
k is the inverse-time coefficient K, i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.K];
c is the inverse-time coefficient C, i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.C];
is the inverse-time coefficient Alpha, i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.Alpha];
I 0 is the measured zero-sequence current.
The inverse-time operation characteristic curve is shown as below:
t
3
t min
I0P
ID
I0
Figure 3.9-7 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent protection
When the applied zero-sequence current I 0 is not a fixed value, but changes with time, the
operating behaviour of the protection is shown in the following equation:
T0
1
t ( I )dt
0
=1
0
Where:
T0 is the operating time of the protection element;
t(I0) is the theoretical operating time when the current is I 0 .
3.9.1.4 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent protection include
instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI inverse-time dropout.
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the dropout characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
dropout or definite-time dropout, if inverse-time dropout is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-75
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the dropout
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI
inverse-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the
setting [50/51Gx.t_DropOut]), the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
3
Start time
I0>I0p
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.9-8 Definite-time dropout characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time dropout
When I 0 > I 0 p , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
Itp =
1
t(I
0
dt
0
)
At this time, if I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection element starts dropout, and the dropout characteristic
meets the following equation:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-76
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
TR
1
dt = 0
t
(
I
)
R
0
I tp −
Where:
T R is the dropout time;
tR( I ) is the dropout characteristic equation
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the inverse-time dropout characteristic equation is as follows:
3
tr
tR =
TMS
2
1 − ( I 0 / I 0 P )
Where:
I0P is the current setting [50/51Gx.3I0_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.TMS];
tr is the dropout time coefficient, it is the dropout time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
I 0 is the measured current.
When 0.95* I 0 p < I 0 < I 0 p , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time dropout characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.
t
tr
I0 P
I0
Figure 3.9-9 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent protection
The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-77
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
inverse-time dropout characteristic is shown in the figure below:
Start time
I0>I0p
Start
signal
Operating
signal
3
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
tr
Dropout time coefficient
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.9-10 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection
3.9.2 Function Block Diagram
50/51G
50/51Gx.On
50/51Gx.Enable
50/51Gx.Block
50/51Gx.Blocked
50/51Gx.Valid
50/51Gx.St
50/51Gx.Op
50/51Gx.Alm
50/51Gx.FwdDir.Op
50/51Gx.RevDir.Op
3.9.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.9-1 Input/output signals of earth fault overcurrent protection
No.
Input signal
1
50/51Gx.Enable
2
50/51Gx.Block
Description
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-78
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
No.
Output signal
Description
1
50/51Gx.On
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is enabled
2
50/51Gx.Blocked
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is blocked
3
50/51Gx.Valid
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is valid
4
50/51Gx.St
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection starts
5
50/51Gx.Op
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection operates
6
50/51Gx.Alm
Stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection alarms
7
50/51G.FwdDir.Op
The forward direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection operates
8
50/51G.RevDir.Op
The reverse direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection operates
3.9.4 Logic
3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set]
SIG
50/51G.FwdDir.Op
SIG
50/51G.RevDir.Op
SET
[50/51Gx.Opt_Dir]
SIG
50/51G.HMB.Op
EN
[50/51Gx.En_Hm_Blk]
SIG
50/51Gx.Pkp
SET
[50/51Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
Direction
selection
SET
50/51Gx.St
&
Timer
t
&
t
&
&
50/51Gx.Op
&
50/51Gx.Alm
SET
[50/51Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.9-11 Logic diagram of earth fault overcurrent protection
3.9.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings ROC Settings
Table 3.9-2 Settings of earth fault overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Unit
value
Step
Description
The relay characteristic angle
1
50/51G.DIR.RCA
-180~179
45
deg
1
of
the
element
direction
of
earth
control
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-79
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The minimum boundary of the
2
50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_
Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The maximum boundary of the
3
50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_
Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
3
The minimum boundary of the
4
50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_
Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The maximum boundary of the
5
50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_
Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The
6
50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min
(0.05~1)In
0.05
-
0.001
minimum
operating
current setting for the direction
control element of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
7
50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min
1~10
4
V
0.001
minimum
operating
voltage setting for the direction
control element of earth fault
overcurrent protection
Logic setting to determine the
behaviour
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection when
VT circuit supervision function
is enabled and VT circuit
8
50/51G.En_VTS_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
failure happens.
Disabled
-
-
Disabled:
earth
fault
overcurrent protection will not
affected by VT circuit failure
Enabled:
earth
voltage controlled
fault
overcurrent
protection will be blocked by
VT circuit failure signal
The percent setting of the
9
50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2
0.1~1
0.2
-
0.001
harmonic control element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-80
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
10
50/51G.HMB.I_Rls
2~150
20
A
0.001
current
setting
for
releasing the harmonic control
element
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
11
50/51G1.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 1
12
50/51G1.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
13
50/51G1.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
14
50/51G1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
15
50/51G1.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Direct
Forward;
ional
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 1 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 1 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
16
50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 1 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 1 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
17
50/51G1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-81
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
Enabling stage 1 earth fault
18
50/51G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
3
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
19
50/51G1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECDefTim
IECN;
e
inverse-time
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 1
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
20
50/51G1.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 1
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
21
50/51G1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
22
50/51G1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 1 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
23
50/51G1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
1
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-82
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
24
50/51G1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
1
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
25
50/51G1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
1
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
26
50/51G2.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 2
27
50/51G2.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
28
50/51G2.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
29
50/51G2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
30
50/51G2.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Direct
Forward;
ional
-
Reverse
-
directional mode of stage 2 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-83
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 2 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
31
50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 2 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
3
control element
Enabled: stage 2 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
32
50/51G2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 2 earth fault
33
50/51G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
34
50/51G2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECDefTim
IECN;
e
inverse-time
-
IECV;
-
operation
characteristic curve of stage 2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-84
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
35
50/51G2.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 2
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
36
50/51G2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
37
50/51G2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 2 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
38
50/51G2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
2
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
39
50/51G2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
2
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
40
50/51G2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
2
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
41
50/51G3.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 3
42
50/51G3.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-85
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The operating time setting of
43
50/51G3.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
44
50/51G3.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
3
45
50/51G3.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Direct
Forward;
ional
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 3 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 3 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
46
50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 3 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 3 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
47
50/51G3.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 3 earth fault
48
50/51G3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-86
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
49
50/51G3.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECDefTim
IECN;
e
inverse-time
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 3
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
50
50/51G3.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 3
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
51
50/51G3.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
52
50/51G3.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 3 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
53
50/51G3.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
3
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
54
50/51G3.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
3
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-87
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
constant
“C”
customized
55
50/51G3.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
of
the
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
3
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
3
56
50/51G4.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 4
57
50/51G4.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
58
50/51G4.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
59
50/51G4.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
60
50/51G4.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Direct
Forward;
ional
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 4 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 4 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
61
50/51G4.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 4 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 4 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-88
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
62
50/51G4.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 4 earth fault
63
50/51G4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
3
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
64
50/51G4.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECDefTim
IECN;
e
inverse-time
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 4
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
65
50/51G4.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 4
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
66
50/51G4.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
67
50/51G4.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 4 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-89
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
68
50/51G4.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
4
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
69
50/51G4.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
3
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
4
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
70
50/51G4.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
4
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
71
50/51G5.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 5
72
50/51G5.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
73
50/51G5.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
74
50/51G5.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
75
50/51G5.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Direct
Forward;
ional
-
Reverse
-
directional mode of stage 5 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-90
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 5 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
76
50/51G5.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 5 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 5 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
77
50/51G5.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 5 earth fault
78
50/51G5.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
79
50/51G5.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECDefTim
IECN;
e
inverse-time
-
IECV;
-
operation
characteristic curve of stage 5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-91
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
80
50/51G5.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 5
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
3
The time multiplier setting of
81
50/51G5.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
82
50/51G5.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 5 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
83
50/51G5.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
5
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
84
50/51G5.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
5
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
85
50/51G5.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
5
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
86
50/51G6.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 6
87
50/51G6.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-92
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The operating time setting of
88
50/51G6.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
89
50/51G6.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
90
50/51G6.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Direct
Forward;
ional
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 6 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 6 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
91
50/51G6.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 6 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 6 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
92
50/51G6.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 6 earth fault
93
50/51G6.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-93
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
3
94
50/51G6.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECDefTim
IECN;
e
inverse-time
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 6
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
95
50/51G6.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 6
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
96
50/51G6.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
97
50/51G6.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 6 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
98
50/51G6.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
6
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
99
50/51G6.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
6
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-94
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
100
50/51G6.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
6
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
3.10 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q)
When a phase-to-phase fault occurs in the system, the fault current is small, and the phase
current criterion may not be able to detect the fault. At this time, the negative-sequence
overcurrent protection with higher sensitivity can be used. Negative-sequence overcurrent
protection can also be used to detect the broken phase operation or load unbalance.
3.10.1 Function Description
The device can provide two stages of negative-sequence overcurrent protection with independent
logic. Each stage can be independently set as definite-time characteristics or inverse-time
characteristics. The dropout characteristics can be set as instantaneous dropout, definite-time
dropout or inverse-time dropout. For a double-circuit or a ring network line, the negative-sequence
fault current may have different flow direction. Considering the protection selectivity, the
negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be blocked by the direction control element.
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can operate to trip or alarm, it can be enabled or
blocked by the external binary input.
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary
input signals, for some specific applications, the protection needs to be blocked by the external
signal, so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block negative-sequence
overcurrent protection. The enabling and blocking logic of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
[50/51Qx.En]
SIG
50/51Qx.Enable
SIG
50/51Qx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
50/51Qx.On
&
≥1
50/51Qx.Blocked
&
50/51Qx.Valid
Figure 3.10-1 The enabling and blocking logic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is as
follows:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-95
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
SET I2>0.95×[50/51Qx.I2_Set]
&
0
500ms
&
SIG 50/51Qx.On
50/51Qx.Pkp
&
FD.Pkp
SIG 50/51Qx.Valid
SET [50/51Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.10-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
3.10.1.1 Direction Control Element
3
In order to ensure the selectivity of negative-sequence overcurrent protection, direction control
element is introduced. The setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Dir] (x=1 and 2) is used for users to select the
directional mode of each stage of negative-sequence overcurrent protection: no direction, forward
direction and reverse direction are selectable.
The operation boundary of the forward direction element can be set by [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
and [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]. The operation boundary of the reverse direction element can be
set by [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] and [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev].
For the direction control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection,
negative-sequence voltage is polarized, the operation characteristic is shown as below.
the
-U2
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
I2
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
Operating area in
forward direction
[50/51Q.DIR.RCA]
Operating area in
reverse direction
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
Figure 3.10-3 The direction element operation characteristics of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection
Where:
The sensitivity angle of the direction control element (RCA) can be set by the setting
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-96
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
[50/51Q.DIR.RCA].
The forward direction characteristic is:
-[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]<angle<[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
The reverse direction characteristic is:
180-[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]<angle<180+[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
The following table shows the relationship between the operating current, the polarized voltage
and the polarization mode.
Polarization mode
Negative-sequence
voltage polarized
Operating current
Negative-sequence current I2
Polarized
voltage
-U2
Angle difference
3
Angle=Angle(-U2)-Angle(I2)-RCA
The direction element calculation needs to judge the current threshold and voltage threshold. The
operating current must be greater than the minimum operating current setting
[50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min], otherwise the direction element can not operate. The polarized voltage must
be greater than the minimum operating voltage setting [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min], otherwise the
direction element can not operate.
The logic diagram of the forward direction element and reverse direction element is as follows.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-97
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
EN
[50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk]
&
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG U2
EN
3
[En_VT]
>=1
&
Forward
direction
criterion
SIG I2
&
50/51Q.FwdDir.Op
&
SIG Prot.BI_En_VT
SET Iop>[50/51Q.DIR.I_Min]
SET Upo>[50/51Q.DIR.U_Min]
EN
[50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk]
&
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG U2
EN
[En_VT]
>=1
&
Reverse
direction
criterion
SIG I2
&
50/51Q.RevDir.Op
&
SIG Prot.BI_En_VT
SET Iop>[50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min]
SET Upo>[50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min]
Figure 3.10-4 Logic diagram of forward and reverse direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection
Where:
I2: the negative-sequence current.
U2: the negative-sequence voltage.
Iop: the operating current.
Upo: the polarized voltage.
3.10.1.2 Operation Characteristic
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can operate instantaneously or operate with a
definite-time limit, it can also operate with an inverse-time limit, the characteristic curve meets the
IEC60255-3 and ANSI C37.112 standards. Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can support
definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit,
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-98
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
users can select the wanted operating curve by the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] (x=1 or 2), the
relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
50/51Qx.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
α
k
c
tr
ANSIE
ANSI Extremely Inverse
28.2
2.0
0.1217
29.1
ANSIV
ANSI Very inverse
19.61
2.0
0.491
21.6
ANSIN
ANSI Normal Inverse
0.0086
0.02
0.0185
0.46
ANSIM
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
ANSIDefTime
ANSI Definite Time
-
-
-
-
ANSILTE
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
64.07
2.0
0.25
30
ANSILTV
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
28.55
2.0
0.712
13.46
ANSILT
ANSI Long Time Inverse
0.086
0.02
0.185
4.6
IECN
IEC Normal Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECV
IEC Very inverse
13.5
1.0
0
-
IEC
IEC Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECE
IEC Extremely inverse
80.0
2.0
0
-
IECST
IEC Short-time inverse
0.05
0.04
0
-
IECLT
IEC Long-time inverse
120.0
1.0
0
-
IECDefTime
IEC Definite Time
-
-
-
-
UserDefine
Programmable
Only when the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the settings [50/51Qx.K], [50/51Qx.C] and [50/51Qx.Alpha]
are useful, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the three settings.
⚫
Without time delay (Instantaneously)
When
⚫
I 2 > I 2 p , the protection operates immediately.
Definite-time characteristic
When
I 2 > I 2 p , the protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Qx.t_Op]), and the operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-99
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
t
t op
3
I2p
I2
Figure 3.10-5 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time characteristic
When
I 2 > I 2 p , the inverse-time accumulator begins to accumulate, and the operating time is
affected by the applied current I 2 . The operating time will decrease with the current increasing,
but the operating time shall not less than tmin , i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.tmin]. The inverse-time
operation characteristic equation is:
k
t={
+ c} × TMS
α
(I2 ⁄I2p ) − 1
Where:
I 2 p is the current setting [50/51Qx.I2_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time time multiplier, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.TMS];
k is the inverse-time coefficient K, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.K];
c is the inverse-time coefficient C, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.C];
is the inverse-time coefficient Alpha, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.Alpha];
I 2 is the measured negative-sequence current.
The inverse-time operation characteristic curve is shown as below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-100
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
3
t min
ID
I2P
I2
Figure 3.10-6 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
When the applied negative-sequence overcurrent current I 2 is not a fixed value, but changes
with time, the operating behaviour of the protection is shown in the following equation:
T0
∫
0
1
dt = 1
t(I2 )
Where:
T0 is the operating time of the protection element;
t(I2) is the theoretical operating time when the current is
I2 .
3.10.1.3 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the negative-sequence overcurrent protection include
instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI inverse-time dropout.
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the dropout characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
dropout or definite-time dropout, if inverse-time dropout is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the dropout
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI
inverse-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When
I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the protection drops out immediately.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-101
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When
I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Qx.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
Start time
I2>I2p
3
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.10-7 Definite-time dropout characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time dropout
When
I 2 > I 2 p , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
I tp =
0
1
dt
t(I2 )
At this time, if
I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the protection element starts dropout, and the dropout characteristic
meets the following equation:
TR
I tp −
0
1
dt = 0
tR ( I 2 )
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-102
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Where:
T R is the dropout time;
tR( I 2 ) is the dropout characteristic equation
When
I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the inverse-time dropout characteristic equation is as follows:
t R (I2 ) = {
tr
1 − (I2 /I2p )
2} ×
TMS
3
Where:
I 2 p is the current setting [50/51Qx.I2_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.TMS];
tr is the dropout time coefficient, it is the dropout time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
I 2 is the measured negative-sequence current.
When 0.95* I 2 p < I 2 < I 2 p , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time dropout characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.
t
tr
Figure 3.10-8 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time dropout characteristic is shown in the figure below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-103
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Start time
I2>I2p
Start
signal
Operating
signal
3
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
tr
Dropout time coefficient
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.10-9 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
3.10.2 Function Block Diagram
50/51Q
50/51Qx.On
50/51Qx.Enable
50/51Qx.Block
50/51Qx.Blocked
50/51Qx.Valid
50/51Qx.St
50/51Qx.Op
50/51Qx.Alm
50/51Q.FwdDir.Op
50/51Q.RevDir.Op
3.10.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.10-1 Input/output signals of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
No.
Input signal
1
50/51Qx.Enable
2
50/51Qx.Block
No.
1
Description
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection enabling input, it is
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection blocking input, it is
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output signal
50/51Qx.On
Description
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is enabled
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-104
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
2
50/51Qx.Blocked
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is blocked
3
50/51Qx.Valid
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is valid
4
50/51Qx.St
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection starts
5
50/51Qx.Op
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operates
6
50/51Qx.Alm
Stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection alarms
7
50/51Q.FwdDir.Op
8
50/51Q.RevDir.Op
The forward direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
operates
The reverse direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
operates
3.10.4 Logic
3
SET
I2>[50/51Qx.I2_Set]
SIG
50/51Q.FwdDir.Op
SIG
50/51Q.RevDir.Op
SET
[50/51Qx.Opt_Dir]
SIG
50/51Qx.Pkp
SET
[50/51Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
50/51Qx.St
&
Direction
selection
&
Timer
t
t
&
50/51Qx.Op
&
50/51Qx.Alm
SET
[50/51Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.10-10 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
3.10.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings NegOC Settings
Table 3.10-2 Settings of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The relay characteristic angle
1
50/51Q.DIR.RCA
-180~179
45
deg
1
of
the
direction
control
element of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum boundary of the
2
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_
Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-105
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The maximum boundary of the
3
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max
_Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum boundary of the
4
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_
Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
3
The maximum boundary of the
5
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max
_Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
minimum
operating
current setting for the direction
6
50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min
(0.05~1)In
0.05
-
0.001
control
element
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
minimum
operating
voltage setting for the direction
7
50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min
1.0~10.0
4
V
0.001
control
element
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Logic setting to determine the
behaviour
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection when
VT circuit supervision function
is enabled and VT circuit
8
50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
failure happens.
Disabled
-
-
Disabled: negative-sequence
overcurrent protection will not
affected by VT circuit failure
Enabled:
voltage controlled
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection will be
blocked by VT circuit failure
signal
The current setting of stage 1
9
50/51Q1.I2_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-106
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The operating time setting of
10
50/51Q1.t_Op
0.03 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
11
50/51Q1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
12
50/51Q1.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al
Non_Directio
Forward
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 1 of
overcurrent protection.
The
13
50/51Q1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
3
negative-sequence
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 1
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Enabling
stage
1
of
negative-sequence
14
50/51Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overcurrent protection operate
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
15
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 1
of
IECV;
operation
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-107
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
16
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 1
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
3
The time multiplier setting of
17
50/51Q1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
18
50/51Q1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting
of
stage
1
of
of
the
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
19
50/51Q1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
operation
“k”
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
20
50/51Q1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
operation
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
21
50/51Q1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
operation
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The current setting of stage 2
22
50/51Q2.I2_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
23
50/51Q2.t_Op
0.03 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
24
50/51Q2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-108
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Non_Direction
25
50/51Q2.Opt_Dir
Description
The setting used to select the
al
Non_Directio
Forward
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 2 of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
The
26
50/51Q2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 2
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Enabling
stage
2
of
negative-sequence
27
50/51Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overcurrent protection operate
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
28
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 2
of
IECV;
operation
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
29
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 2
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
30
50/51Q2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-109
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The minimum operating time
31
50/51Q2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting
of
stage
2
of
of
the
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
32
50/51Q2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
operation
“k”
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 2 of negative-sequence
3
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
33
50/51Q2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
operation
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
34
50/51Q2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
operation
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
3.11 RMS Overcurrent Protection (50/51R)
When the capacitive equipment such as a capacitor bank or the inductive equipment such as a
rotating electrical machine in the system has a serious fault, the fundamental component in the
fault current will be relatively low, and the higher harmonic components will be higher. The
conventional phase overcurrent protection uses filtering algorithms to filter out higher harmonics
and perform calculation based on the fundamental component, resulting in failure to truly reflect
the fault condition and the protection sensitivity is affected. The RMS overcurrent protection
calculates the full-current RMS value includes 2nd~11th harmonic components, which can
sensitively reflect the actual fault current, so the fault can be removed quickly and accurately.
3.11.1 Function Description
The device can provide two stages of RMS overcurrent protection with independent logic. When
the fault current with more harmonic components is generated in the system, the amplitude is
larger than the current threshold of RMS overcurrent protection, the RMS overcurrent protection
will operate.
Each stage of RMS overcurrent protection can be independently set as definite-time
characteristics or inverse-time characteristics. The drop-out characteristics can be set as
instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out or inverse-time drop-out. RMS overcurrent
protection can operate to trip or alarm, it can be enabled or blocked by the external binary input.
RMS overcurrent protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals, for
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-110
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
some specific applications, the protection needs to be blocked by the external signal, so the
device provides a function block input signal to be used to block RMS overcurrent protection. The
enabling and blocking logic of RMS overcurrent protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
&
50/51Rx.En
50/51Rx.On
SIG
50/51Rx.Enable
SIG
50/51Rx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
≥1
50/51Rx.Blocked
3
&
50/51Rx.Valid
Figure 3.11-1 The enabling and blocking logic of RMS overcurrent protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of RMS overcurrent protection is as follows:
SET
IRMS >0.95*[50/51Rx.I_Set]
&
0
50/51Rx.Pkp
500ms
&
&
SIG
50/51Rx.On
SIG
50/51Rx.Valid
EN
[50/51Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.11-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of RMS overcurrent protection
3.11.1.1 Operation Characteristic
RMS overcurrent protection can operate without time delay or operate with a definite-time limit, it
can also operate with an inverse-time limit, the characteristic curve meets the IEC60255-3 and
ANSI C37.112 standards. RMS overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI
standard inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted
operating curve by the setting [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve] (x=1~6), the relationship between the value
of the setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
50/51Rx.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
k
α
c
tr
ANSIE
ANSI Extremely Inverse
28.2
2.0
0.1217
29.1
ANSIV
ANSI Very inverse
19.61
2.0
0.491
21.6
ANSIN
ANSI Normal Inverse
0.0086
0.02
0.0185
0.46
ANSIM
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
ANSIDefTime
ANSI Definite Time
-
-
-
-
ANSILTE
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
64.07
2.0
0.25
30
ANSILTV
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
28.55
2.0
0.712
13.46
ANSILT
ANSI Long Time Inverse
0.086
0.02
0.185
4.6
IECN
IEC Normal Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-111
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3
50/51Rx.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
k
α
c
tr
IECV
IEC Very inverse
13.5
1.0
0
-
IEC
IEC Inverse
0.14
0.02
0
-
IECE
IEC Extremely inverse
80.0
2.0
0
-
IECST
IEC Short-time inverse
0.05
0.04
0
-
IECLT
IEC Long-time inverse
120.0
1.0
0
-
IECDefTime
IEC Definite Time
-
-
-
-
UserDefine
Programmable
Only when the setting [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the settings [50/51Rx.K], [50/51Rx.C] and [50/51Rx.Alpha]
are useful, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the three settings.
⚫
Without time delay
When IRMS>IRMSp, phase overcurrent protection operates immediately.
⚫
Definite-time characteristic
When IRMS>IRMSp, the protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Rx.t_Op]), and the operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
t
t 0p
IRMSp
IRMS
Figure 3.11-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time characteristic
When IRMS>IRMSp, the inverse-time accumulator begins to accumulate, and the operating time is
affected by the applied current IRMS. The operating time will decrease with the current increasing,
but the operating time shall not less than
operation characteristic equation is:
tmin ,
i.e. the setting [50/51Rx.tmin]. The inverse-time
k
t=
+ c TMS
( I RMS / I RMSP ) − 1
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-112
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Where:
IRMSp is the current setting [50/51Rx.I_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time time multiplier, i.e. the setting [50/51Rx.TMS];
k is the inverse-time coefficient K, i.e. the setting [50/51Rx.K];
c
is the inverse-time coefficient C, i.e. the setting [50/51Rx.C];
is the inverse-time coefficient Alpha, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.Alpha];
3
IRMS is the measured current.
The inverse-time operation characteristic curve is shown as below:
t
t min
I RMSP
ID
I RMS
Figure 3.11-4 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection
When the applied current is not a fixed value, but changes with time, the operating behaviour of
the protection is shown in the following equation:
T0
t(I
0
1
RMS
)
dt = 1
Where:
T0 is the operating time of the protection element;
t(IRMS) is the theoretical operating time when the current is IRMS.
3.11.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the RMS overcurrent protection include instantaneous
dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI inverse-time dropout.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-113
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the dropout characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
dropout or definite-time dropout, if inverse-time dropout is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the dropout
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI
inverse-time dropout.
⚫
3
Instantaneous dropout
When
⚫
I RMS <0.95* I RMSP , the protection drops out immediately.
Definite-time dropout
When
I RMS <0.95* I RMSP , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr
(i.e. the value of the
setting [50/51Rx.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
Start time
IRMS >Iset
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.11-5 Definite-time dropout characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection
⚫
Inverse-time dropout
When IRMS>IRMSp, the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-114
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
to the following equation:
tp
I tp =
1
t ( I RMS )
0
dt
At this time, if IRMS<0.95*IRMSp, the protection element starts dropout, and the dropout
characteristic meets the following equation:
TR
I tp −
0
1
dt = 0
t R ( I RMS )
3
Where:
T R is the dropout time;
tR( I RMS ) is the dropout characteristic equation
When IRMS<0.95*IRMSp, the inverse-time dropout characteristic equation is as follows:
tr
tR =
TMS
2
1 − ( I RMS / I RMSP )
Where:
IRMSp is the current setting [50/51Rx.I_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Rx.TMS];
tr
is the dropout time coefficient, it is the dropout time required for the current to drop to 0 after the
protection operates.
IRMS is the measured current.
When 0.95*IRMSp <IRMS <IRMSp, the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time dropout characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-115
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
3
tr
I RMSP
I RMS
Figure 3.11-6 Inverse-time dropout characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection
The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time dropout characteristic is shown in the figure below:
Start time
IRMS >IRMSp
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Operating threshold
Protection
operate
Operating
counter
tr
Dropout time coefficient
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.11-7 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-116
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.11.2 Function Block Diagram
50/51R
50/51Rx.On
50/51Rx.Enable
50/51Rx.Block
50/51Rx.Blocked
50/51Rx.Valid
50/51Rx.St
50/51Rx.StA
50/51Rx.StB
3
50/51Rx.StC
50/51Rx.Op
50/51Rx.Op.PhA
50/51Rx.Op.PhB
50/51Rx.Op.PhC
50/51Rx.Alm
3.11.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.11-1 Input/output signals of RMS overcurrent protection
No.
Input signal
1
50/51Rx.Enable
2
50/51Rx.Block
No.
Description
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output signal
Description
1
50/51Rx.On
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection is enabled
2
50/51Rx.Blocked
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection is blocked
3
50/51Rx.Valid
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection is valid
4
50/51Rx.St
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection starts
5
50/51Rx.StA
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection starts (Phase A)
6
50/51Rx.StB
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection starts (Phase B)
7
50/51Rx.StC
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection starts (Phase C)
8
50/51Rx.Op
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection operates
9
50/51Rx.Op.PhA
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection operates (Phase A)
10
50/51Rx.Op.PhB
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection operates (Phase B)
11
50/51Rx.Op.PhC
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection operates (Phase C)
12
50/51Rx.Alm
Stage x of RMS overcurrent protection alarms
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-117
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.11.4 Logic
50/51Rx.St
SET
IRMS >[50/51Rx.I_Set]
SIG
50/51Rx.Pkp
SET
[50/51Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
&
Timer
t
&
t
50/51Rx.Op
&
50/51Rx.Alm
3
SET
[50/51Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.11-8 Logic diagram of RMS overcurrent protection
3.11.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings RMS OC Settings
Table 3.11-2 Settings of RMS overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The current setting of
1
50/51R1.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
stage
1
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
The
2
50/51R1.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
operating
time
setting of stage 1 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The
3
50/51R1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
drop-out
time
setting of stage 1 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The logic setting for
4
50/51R1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
enabling/disabling
stage
1
of
the
RMS
overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 1 of
5
50/51R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
RMS
overcurrent
protection
operate
to
trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-118
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting
ANSILTV;
6
50/51R1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
the
IECDefTime
IECN;
-
-
inverse-time
operation characteristic
curve of stage 1 of RMS
IECV;
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic curve of
stage
Inst;
7
50/51R1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
1
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
DefTime;
Inst
-
-
IDMT
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
IDMT:
inverse-time
dropout
The
8
50/51R1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
time
multiplier
setting of stage 1 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating
9
50/51R1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
time setting of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
10
50/51R1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-119
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “α” of the
customized
11
50/51R1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
3
12
50/51R1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The current setting of
13
50/51R2.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
stage
2
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
The
14
50/51R2.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
operating
time
setting of stage 2 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The
15
50/51R2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
drop-out
time
setting of stage 2 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The logic setting for
16
50/51R2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
enabling/disabling
stage
2
of
the
RMS
overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 2 of
17
50/51R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
RMS
overcurrent
protection
operate
to
trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-120
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting
ANSILTV;
18
50/51R2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
the
IECDefTime
IECN;
-
-
inverse-time
operation characteristic
curve of stage 2 of RMS
IECV;
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic curve of
stage
Inst;
19
50/51R2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
2
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
DefTime;
Inst
-
-
IDMT
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
IDMT:
inverse-time
dropout
The
20
50/51R2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
time
multiplier
setting of stage 2 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating
21
50/51R2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
time setting of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
22
50/51R2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-121
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “α” of the
customized
23
50/51R2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
3
24
50/51R2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
3.12 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
Single-phase earthing fault and two-phases earthing fault are the most common fault on circuits,
the fault is easy to detect because the fault current will increase obviously.
Broken-conductor fault is difficult to detect since there is no increase of current but
negative-sequence current, so negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be considered to
detect broken-conductor fault. However, under heavy load condition, negative-sequence current is
relative large due to unbalance loading, but negative-sequence current because of
broken-conductor fault under light load condition is relative small. If negative-sequence current
protection is set larger than maximum negative-sequence current under loading,
negative-sequence overcurrent protection may be failure to operate if broken-conductor fault
happens under light load condition, negative-sequence overcurrent protection is therefore not
suitable to apply for broken-conductor fault.
The network of single-phase broken condition is similar to that of two-phases earthing fault,
positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in parallel, I2/I1=
Z0/(Z0+Z2), generally, zero-sequence impedance is larger than positive-sequence impedance, i.e.
I2/I1>0.5. The network of two-phases broken condition is similar to that of single-phase earthing
fault, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in series,
so I2/I1=1. Hence, broken conductor protection based on the ratio of negative-sequence current to
positive sequence current can detect the broken-conductor fault.
3.12.1 Function Description
Broken-conductor fault mainly is single-phase broken or two-phases broken. According to the ratio
of negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current (I2/I1), it is used to judge whether there
is a broken-conductor fault. Negative-sequence current under normal operating condition (i.e.
unbalance current) is due to CT error and unbalance load, so the ratio of negative-sequence
current to positive-sequence current (amplitude) is relative steady. The value with margin can then
be used as the setting of broken conductor protection. It is mainly used to detect broken-conductor
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-122
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
fault and CT circuit failure as well.
3.12.2 Function Block Diagram
46BC
46BC.Enable
46BC.Block
46BC.On
46BC.Blocked
46BC.Valid
46BC.St
3
46BC.Op
46BC.Alm
3.12.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.12-1 Input/Output signals of broken conductor protection
No.
Input Signal
Description
1
46BC.Enable
Input signal of enabling broken conductor protection
2
46BC.Block
Input signal of blocking broken conductor protection
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
46BC.On
Broken conductor protection is enabled.
2
46BC.Blocked
Broken conductor protection is blocked.
3
46BC.Valid
Broken conductor protection is valid.
4
46BC.St
Broken conductor protection starts.
5
46BC.Op
Broken conductor protection operates.
6
46BC.Alm
Broken conductor protection alarms.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-123
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.12.4 Logic
EN
[46BC.En]
&
46BC.On
SIG 46BC.Enable
&
SIG 46BC.Block
46BC.Blocked
>=1
SIG Fail_Device
&
46BC.Valid
3
SIG 46BC.Valid
SET Ia>[46BC.I_Min]
>=1
&
SET Ib>[46BC.I_Min]
46BC.St
SET Ic>[46BC.I_Min]
[46BC.t_Op] 0ms
&
SET I2/I1>[46BC.I2/I1_Set]
46BC.Op
SET [46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
&
46BC.Alm
SET [46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of broken conductor protection
3.12.5 Settings
Table 3.12-2 Settings of broken conductor protection
No.
1
Setting
46BC.I_Min
Range
(0.05~40) In
Default
1.000
Unit
Step
A
0.001
Description
Minimum operating current setting of
broken conductor protection
Ratio
2
46BC.I2/I1_Set
0~5
0.500
-
0.001
setting
(negative-sequence
current to positive-sequence current) of
broken conductor protection
3
46BC.t_Op
4
46BC.En
0~10
Disabled
Enabled
1.000
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
Time
delay
of
broken
conductor
protection
Enabling/disabling broken conductor
protection
Enabling/disabling broken conductor
5
46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp
Alm
Trp
-
-
protection operate to trip or alarm
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3.13 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)
Some abnormal conditions in the power system will generate high voltage, which may damage
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-124
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
the insulation performance of transformers, capacitors, motors and transmission lines, resulting in
equipment damage. Phase overvoltage protection can effectively detect the overvoltage that may
be generated in the system.
3.13.1 Function Description
The device can provide two stages of phase overvoltage protection with independent logic. When
a high voltage occurs in the system, it is greater than the voltage threshold, phase overvoltage
protection will operate to remove the device from the system after a time delay. In addition, the
overvoltage protection also provides the alarm function, prompting the overvoltage of the system,
it allows users to find the cause timely, and preventing further deterioration of the fault. Each stage
of phase overvoltage protection can be independently set as definite-time characteristics or
inverse-time characteristics. The dropout characteristics can be set as instantaneous dropout and
definite-time dropout.
Users can select phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for the protection calculation via the
setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]. If it is set as “Up”, phase voltage criterion is selected, and if it is set to
“Upp”, phase-to-phase voltage criterion is selected.
Users can select “1-out-of-3” or “3-out-of-3” logic for the protection criterion via the setting
[59P.Opt_1P/3P]. If it is set as “1P”, phase overvoltage protection can operate if any
phase/phase-to-phase voltage is greater than the voltage setting. If it is set as “3P”, phase
overvoltage protection cannot operate unless three phase/phase-to-phase voltages are greater
than the voltage setting.
Phase overvoltage protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals,
for some specific applications, overvoltage protection needs to be blocked by the external signal,
so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block overvoltage protection. In
addition, if the VT of the local side is out of service, phase overvoltage protection will be disabled.
The enabling and blocking logic of phase overvoltage protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
&
59Px.En
59Px.On
SIG
59Px.Enable
SIG
59Px.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
EN
[En_VT]
&
≥1
59Px.Blocked
&
&
59Px.Valid
SIG
BI_En_VT
Figure 3.13-1 The enabling and blocking logic of phase overvoltage protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase overvoltage protection is as follows:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-125
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
SET [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
SET Uab>U_DropOut
>=1
SET Ubc>U_DropOut
&
SET Uca>U_DropOut
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
&
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
SET Uab>U_DropOut
>=1
&
&
SET Ubc>U_DropOut
3
SET Uca>U_DropOut
SET Ua>U_DropOut
>=1
SET Ub>U_DropOut
&
SET Uc>U_DropOut
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
SET Ua>U_DropOut
>=1
&
&
SET Ub>U_DropOut
>=1
&
SET Uc>U_DropOut
&
0
500ms
&
59Px.Pkp
SET [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
SIG 59Px.On
&
SIG 59Px.Valid
FD.Pkp
SET [59Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase overvoltage protection
Where:
U_DropOut: the dropout voltage value, i.e. [59Px.K_DropOut]*[59Px.U_Set]
3.13.1.1 Operation Characteristic
Phase overvoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit, it can also operate with an
inverse-time limit. Phase overvoltage protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI
standard inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted
operating curve by the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] (x=1, 2), the relationship between the value of
the setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
59Px.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
α
k
c
ANSIDefTime
ANSI Definite Time
-
-
-
IECDefTime
IEC Definite Time
-
-
-
UserDefine
UserDefine
InvTime_U
InvCrv_U
1
1
0
When the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “InvTime_U”, the operation characteristic is the
corresponding selected operating curve type, and the settings [59Px.K], [59Px.C] and
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-126
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
[59Px.Alpha] are useless.
When the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the settings [59Px.K],
[59Px.C] and [59Px.Alpha].
When the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “ANSIDefTime” or “IECDefTime”, it is definite-time
overvoltage protection.
⚫
Definite-time characteristic
When U > Up , the protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting
[59Px.t_Op]), and the operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
t
t op
Up
U
Figure 3.13-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of phase overvoltage protection
⚫
Inverse-time characteristic
When U > Up , the inverse-time accumulator begins to accumulate, and the operating time is
affected by the applied voltage U . The larger voltage is, the smaller the operating time is, but not
unlimited. When the voltage is large enough to a certain threshold ( Up ), the inverse-time
operating time will not continue to decrease, then the operation characteristic becomes the
definite-time characteristic, and the operating time is tmin , i.e. the setting [59Px.tmin]. The
inverse-time operation characteristic equation is:
k
t=
+ c TMS
(U / U P ) − 1
Where:
Up is the voltage setting [59Px.U_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time time multiplier, i.e. the setting [59Px.TMS];
k is the inverse-time coefficient K, i.e. the setting [59Px.K];
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-127
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
c is the inverse-time coefficient C, i.e. the setting [59Px.C];
is the inverse-time coefficient Alpha, i.e. the setting [59Px.Alpha];
U is the measured voltage.
The inverse-time operation characteristic curve is shown as below:
t
3
t min
UP
UD
U
Figure 3.13-4 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of phase overvoltage protection
When the applied voltage is not a fixed value, but changes with time, the operating behaviour of
the protection is shown in the following equation:
T0
1
t (U )dt
=1
0
Where:
T0 is the operating time of the protection element;
t (U ) is the theoretical operating time when the voltage is U .
3.13.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the phase overvoltage protection include instantaneous
dropout and definite-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When U <[ 59Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When U <[59Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value
of the setting [59Px.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-128
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Start time
U>Up
Start
signal
Operating
signal
3
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.13-5 Definite-time dropout characteristic of phase overvoltage protection
3.13.2 Function Block Diagram
59P
59Px.Enable
59Px.Block
59Px.On
59Px.Blocked
59Px.Valid
59Px.St
59Px.StA
59Px.StB
59Px.StC
59Px.Op
59Px.Op.PhA
59Px.Op.PhB
59Px.Op.PhC
59Px.Alm
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-129
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.13.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.13-1 Input/output signals of phase overvoltage protection
No.
1
59Px.Enable
2
59Px.Block
No.
3
Input signal
Description
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output signal
Description
1
59Px.On
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection is enabled
2
59Px.Blocked
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection is blocked
3
59Px.Valid
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection is valid
4
59Px.St
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection starts
5
59Px.StA
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection starts (Phase A or AB)
6
59Px.StB
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection starts (Phase B or BC)
7
59Px.StC
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection starts (Phase C or CA)
8
59Px.Op
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection operates
9
59Px.Op.PhA
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection operates (Phase A or AB)
10
59Px.Op.PhB
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection operates (Phase B or BC)
11
59Px.Op.PhC
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection operates (Phase C or CA)
12
59Px.Alm
Stage x of phase overvoltage protection alarms
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-130
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.13.4 Logic
SET [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
SET Uab>[59Px.U_Set]
>=1
SET Ubc>[59Px.U_Set]
&
SET Uca>[59Px.U_Set]
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
&
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
>=1
>=1
&
SET Uab>[59Px.U_Set]
3
&
SET Ubc>[59Px.U_Set]
SET Uca>[59Px.U_Set]
SET [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
SET Ua>[59Px.U_Set]
>=1
SET Ub>[59Px.U_Set]
&
SET Uc>[59Px.U_Set]
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
&
SET [59P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
>=1
&
SET Ua>[59Px.U_Set]
&
59Px.St
SET Ub>[59Px.U_Set]
&
SET Uc>[59Px.U_Set]
Timer
t
t
SIG 59Px.Pkp
&
59Px.Op
SET [59Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
&
59Px.Alm
SET [59Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.13-6 Logic diagram of phase overvoltage protection
3.13.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings OV Settings
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-131
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Table 3.13-2 Settings of phase overvoltage protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Option of phase-to-phase
voltage or phase voltage for
1
59P.Opt_Up/Upp
Up;
Upp
Upp
-
-
overvoltage protection
Up: phase voltage
Upp:
phase-to-phase
voltage
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode or
3
2
59P.Opt_1P/3P
3-out-of-3
3P;
3P
1P
-
-
mode
for
overvoltage protection
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
The voltage setting of stage
3
59P1.U_Set
57.7~200
115
V
0.001
1
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
The dropout coefficient of
4
59P1.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1.00
0.98
-
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of
5
59P1.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of
6
59P1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The
7
59P1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Enabling stage 1 of phase
8
59P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
overvoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting the
ANSIDefTime;
9
59P1.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage
1
InvTime_U
operation
of
phase
overvoltage
protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-132
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
dropout
characteristic curve of stage
10
59P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
Inst
-
-
1
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting of
11
59P1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The minimum operating time
12
59P1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 1 of phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
13
59P1.K
0.001~120
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
14
59P1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
15
59P1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The voltage setting of stage
16
59P2.U_Set
57.7~200
115
V
0.001
2
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
The dropout coefficient of
17
59P2.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1.00
0.98
-
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of
18
59P2.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of
19
59P2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-133
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
20
59P2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Enabling stage 2 of phase
21
59P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
overvoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
3
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting the
ANSIDefTime;
22
59P2.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
2
InvTime_U
operation
characteristic curve of stage
of
phase
overvoltage
protection.
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
dropout
characteristic curve of stage
23
59P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
Inst
-
-
2
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting of
24
59P2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The minimum operating time
25
59P2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 2 of phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
26
59P2.K
0.001~120
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
27
59P2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-134
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “C” of the
customized
28
59P2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
3.14 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G)
If an earth fault occurs in the feeder of a high-resistance grounding system, the residual current
changes little and is difficult to detect. However, the amplitude of the residual voltage changes
significantly and can be used as a criterion for earth fault. In addition, the neutral point gap of the
transformer is grounded, once a fault occurs, the residual voltage increases, and the residual
overvoltage protection can also be used as the backup protection of the transformer, the residual
voltage is calculated internally by the protection device using three-phase voltage.
3.14.1 Function Description
The device can provide two stages of residual overvoltage protection with independent logic.
When the residual voltage is greater than the voltage threshold, the residual overvoltage
protection will operate to remove the device from the system after a time delay. In addition, the
residual overvoltage protection also provides the alarm function, it prompt that there is an earth
fault leading to residual voltage generation, it allows users to find the cause timely, and preventing
further deterioration of the fault. The dropout characteristics of residual overvoltage protection can
be set as instantaneous dropout and definite-time dropout.
Residual overvoltage protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals,
for some specific applications, residual overvoltage protection needs to be blocked by the external
signal, so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block residual
overvoltage protection. In addition, if the residual voltage used by residual overvoltage protection
is the calculated residual voltage, once the VT of the local side is out of service, residual
overvoltage protection will be disabled. The enabling and blocking logic of residual overvoltage
protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
&
59Gx.En
59Gx.On
SIG
59Gx.Enable
SIG
59Gx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
EN
[En_VT]
&
≥1
59Gx.Blocked
&
&
59Gx.Valid
SIG
BI_En_VT
Figure 3.14-1 The enabling and blocking logic of residual overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-135
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of residual overvoltage protection is as follows:
&
SET 3U0_Cal >3U0_DropOut
59Gx.Pkp
0ms
SIG
3
500ms
&
&
59Gx.On
SIG
59Gx.Valid
EN
[59Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.14-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of residual overvoltage protection
Where:
3U0_DropOut: the dropout voltage value, i.e. [59Gx.K_DropOut]*[59Gx.3U0_Set]
3.14.1.1 Operation Characteristic
Residual overvoltage protection can operate with a settable time delay. When U 0 > U 0 p , the
protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting [59Gx.t_Op]), and the
operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
t
t op
U0p
U0
Figure 3.14-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of residual overvoltage protection
3.14.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the residual overvoltage protection include
instantaneous dropout and definite-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When U 0 <[59Gx.K_DropOut]* U 0 p , the protection drops out immediately.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-136
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When U 0 <[59Gx.K_DropOut]* U 0 p , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the
value of the setting [59Gx.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the
following figure:
Start time
U0>U0p
3
Start
signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.14-4 Definite-time dropout characteristic of residual overvoltage protection
3.14.2 Function Block Diagram
59G
59Gx.Enable
59Gx.On
59Gx.Block
59Gx.Blocked
59Gx.Valid
59Gx.St
59Gx.Op
59Gx.Alm
3.14.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.14-1 Input/output signals of residual overvoltage protection
No.
1
Input signal
59Gx.Enable
Description
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection enabling input, it is triggered from
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-137
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
2
No.
3
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from
59Gx.Block
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output signal
Description
1
59Gx.On
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection is enabled
2
59Gx.Blocked
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection is blocked
3
59Gx.Valid
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection is valid
4
59Gx.St
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection starts
5
59Gx.Op
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection operates
6
59Gx.Alm
Stage x of residual overvoltage protection alarms
3.14.4 Logic
59Gx.St
SET
&
3U0_Cal> [59Gx.3U0_Set]
[59Gx.t_Op] [59Gx.t_DropOut]
&
59Gx.Op
SIG
59Gx.Pkp
SET
[59Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Trp
SET
[59Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Alm
&
59Gx.Alm
Figure 3.14-5 Logic diagram of residual overvoltage protection
3.14.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings ROV Settings
Table 3.14-2 Settings of residual overvoltage protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
59G1.3U0_Set
1~200
50
V
0.001
2
59G1.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1
0.98
-
0.001
3
59G1.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
4
59G1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
5
59G1.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
Description
The voltage setting of stage 1 of residual
overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of stage 1 of residual
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of stage 1 of
residual overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of stage 1 of
residual overvoltage protection
The logic setting for enabling/disabling the
stage 1 of residual overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-138
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
Enabling stage 1 of residual overvoltage
6
59G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
7
59G2.3U0_Set
1~200
50
V
0.001
8
59G2.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1
0.98
-
0.001
9
59G2.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
10
59G2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
11
59G2.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The voltage setting of stage 2 of residual
overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of stage 2 of residual
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of stage 2 of
residual overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of stage 2 of
residual overvoltage protection
The logic setting for enabling/disabling the
stage 2 of residual overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 2 of residual overvoltage
12
59G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3.15 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Q)
When the system has a broken-conductor, reverse phase sequence or inter-phase voltage
imbalance, the negative-sequence voltage increases, and the negative-sequence overvoltage
protection can reflect the system imbalance fault. It is used to protect the equipment from
insulation breakdown or premature aging due to overvoltage. The negative-sequence overvoltage
protection can also be used to alarm for prompting users the system voltage state is abnormal at
this moment.
3.15.1 Function Description
This device provides two stages of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. If the
negative-sequence voltage is larger than the predefined setting, this protection will operate. The
negative-sequence overvoltage protection is with independent definite-time delay characteristic
and with definite-time delay or instantaneous dropout characteristic.
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary
input signals, for some specific applications, overvoltage protection needs to be blocked by the
external signal, so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block
overvoltage protection. In addition, if the VT of the local side is out of service, negative-sequence
overvoltage protection will be disabled.The enabling and blocking logic of negative-sequence
overvoltage protection is shown in the figure below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-139
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
EN
&
59Qx.En
59Qx.On
SIG
59Qx.Enable
SIG
59Qx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
EN
[En_VT]
&
≥1
59Qx.Blocked
&
&
59Qx.Valid
SIG
3
BI_En_VT
Figure 3.15-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling negative-sequence overvoltage protection
When the negative-sequence overvoltage protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is
input, if the negative-sequence voltage is larger than the voltage setting multiplied by the dropout
coefficient setting of the negative-sequence overvoltage protection, the negative-sequence
overvoltage protection will pick up.
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the negative-sequence overvoltage protection is shown
as below.
SET U2 >U2_DropOut
&
59Qx.Pkp
0ms
SIG
500ms
SIG
59Qx.Valid
EN
[59Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
&
&
59Qx.On
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.15-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
Where:
U2_DropOut: the dropout voltage value, i.e. [59Qx.K_DropOut]*[59Qx.U2_Set]
3.15.1.1 Operation Characteristic
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit.
When the negative-sequence voltage is larger than the voltage setting, the protection operates
with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting [59Qx.t_Op]), and the operation
characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-140
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
t op
3
U2p
U2
Figure 3.15-3 Operation characteristic curve of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
3.15.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the negative-sequence overvoltage protection include
instantaneous dropout and definite-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When U2 <[ 59Qx.K_DropOut]*[59Qx.U2_Set] (x: 1~2), the protection drops out immediately.
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When U2 <[59Qx.K_DropOut]*[59Qx.U2_Set] (x: 1~2), the protection drops out with a time delay
of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting [59Qx.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is
shown in the following figure:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-141
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Start time
U 2> U2p
Start signal
Operating
signal
3
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.15-4 Definite-time dropout characteristic of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
3.15.2 Function Block Diagram
59Q
59Qx.Enable
59Qx.On
59Qx.Block
59Qx.Blocked
59Qx.Valid
59Qx.St
59Qx.Op
59Qx.Alm
3.15.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.15-1 Input/output signals of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
No.
Input Signal
1
59Qx.Enable
2
59Qx.Block
No.
1
Description
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection enabling input, it is
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection blocking input, it is
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output Signal
59Qx.On
Description
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection is enabled
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-142
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
2
59Qx.Blocked
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection is blocked
3
59Qx.Valid
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection is valid
4
59Qx.St
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection starts
5
59Qx.Op
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection operates
6
59Qx.Alm
Stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection alarms
3.15.4 Logic
59Qx.St
SET
&
U2 > [59Qx.U2_Set]
[59Qx.t_Op] [59Qx.t_DropOut]
SIG
59Qx.Pkp
SET
[59Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Trp
SET
&
59Qx.Op
&
59Qx.Alm
3
[59Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Alm
Figure 3.15-5 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
3.15.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings NegOV Settings
Table 3.15-2 Settings of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
No.
1
Setting
59Q1.U2_Set
Range
2~100
Default
15
Unit
Step
V
0.001
Description
The voltage setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the stage
2
59Q1.K_DropOut
0.93~1
0.98
-
0.001
1
of
negative-sequence
overvoltage
protection
3
59Q1.t_Op
0.1~100
1
s
0.001
4
59Q1.t_DropOut
0~100
0
s
0.001
5
59Q1.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The time setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 1 of negative-sequence
6
59Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overvoltage operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
7
59Q2.U2_Set
2~100
15
V
0.001
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
The voltage setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
3-143
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
The dropout coefficient setting of the stage
8
59Q2.K_DropOut
0.93~1
0.98
-
0.001
2
of
negative-sequence
overvoltage
protection
9
59Q2.t_Op
0.1~100
1
s
0.001
10
59Q2.t_DropOut
0~100
0
s
0.001
11
59Q2.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The time setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 2 of negative-sequence
3
12
59Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overvoltage operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3.16 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection (59Pos)
3.16.1 Function Description
This device provides one stage of positive-sequence overvoltage protection. If the
positive-sequence voltage is larger than the pre-defined setting, this protection will operate. The
positive-sequence overvoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit, and the supported
dropout characteristics include instantaneous dropout and definite-time dropout.
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary
input signals, for some specific applications, overvoltage protection needs to be blocked by the
external signal, so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block
overvoltage protection. In addition, if the VT of the local side is out of service, positive-sequence
overvoltage protection will be disabled. The enabling and blocking logic of positive-sequence
overvoltage protection is shown in the figure below:
The logic diagram of enabling/disabling positive-sequence overvoltage protection is shown as
below.
EN
&
59Pos.En
59Pos.On
SIG
59Pos.Enable
SIG
59Pos.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
EN
[En_VT]
&
≥1
59Pos.Blocked
&
&
59Pos.Valid
SIG
BI_En_VT
Figure 3.16-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling positive-sequence overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-144
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
When the positive-sequence overvoltage protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is
input, if the positive-sequence voltage is larger than the voltage setting multiplied by the dropout
coefficient setting of the positive-sequence overvoltage protection, the positive-sequence
overvoltage protection will pick up.
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the positive-sequence overvoltage protection is shown
as below.
&
SET U1 >U1_DropOut
59Pos.Pkp
0ms
SIG
500ms
&
&
59Pos.On
SIG
59Pos.Valid
EN
[59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
3
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.16-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
Where:
U1: the positive-sequence voltage;
U1_DropOut: the dropout voltage value, i.e. [59Pos.K_DropOut]*[59Pos.U1_Set].
3.16.1.1 Operation Characteristic
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit.
When the positive-sequence voltage is larger than the voltage setting, the protection operates
with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting [59Pos.t_Op]), and the operation
characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
t
t op
U 1p
U1
Figure 3.16-3 Operation characteristic curve of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-145
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.16.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the positive-sequence overvoltage protection include
instantaneous dropout and definite-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When U <[ 59Pos.K_DropOut]*[59Pos.U1_Set] (x: 1~2), the protection drops out immediately.
1
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When U <[59Pos.K_DropOut]*[59Pos.U1_Set] (x: 1~2), the protection drops out with a time delay
of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting [59Pos.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is
1
3
shown in the following figure:
Start time
U 1> U1p
Start signal
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.16-4 Definite-time dropout characteristic of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-146
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.16.2 Function Block Diagram
59Pos
59Pos.Enable
59Pos.On
59Pos.Block
59Pos.Blocked
59Pos.Valid
59Pos.St
59Pos.Op
59Pos.Alm
3
3.16.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.16-1 Input/output signals of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
No.
Input Signal
1
59Pos.Enable
2
59Pos.Block
No.
Description
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Output Signal
Description
1
59Pos.On
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection is enabled
2
59Pos.Blocked
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection is blocked
3
59Pos.Valid
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection is valid
4
59Pos.St
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection starts
5
59Pos.Op
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection operates
6
59Pos.Alm
Positive-sequence overvoltage protection alarms
3.16.4 Logic
59Pos.St
SET
U1 > [59Pos.U1_Set]
&
[59Pos.t_Op] [59Pos.t_DropOut]
SIG
59Pos.Pkp
SET
[59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Trp
SET
&
59Pos.Op
&
59Pos.Alm
[59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Alm
Figure 3.16-5 Logic diagram of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
3.16.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings PosOV Settings
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-147
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Table 3.16-2 Settings of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
6
59Pos.U1_Set
2~100
60
V
0.001
7
59Pos.K_DropOut
0.93~1
0.98
-
0.001
8
59Pos.t_Op
0.1~100
1
s
0.001
9
59Pos.t_DropOut
0~100
0
s
0.001
10
59Pos.En
Enabled
-
-
3
Disabled;
Enabled
Description
The
voltage
59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
of
the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection
The time setting of the positive-sequence
overvoltage protection
The
dropout
time
setting
of
the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the positive-sequence
overvoltage protection
Enabling
11
setting
the
positive-sequence
overvoltage operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3.17 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)
Some abnormal conditions in the power system will lead to low voltage. Electric equipment such
as motors cannot operate for a long time under the rated voltage and need to be removed from
the system in time. In addition, the voltage reduction may also be related to the shortage of
system reactive power. Reducing part of the reactive power load through the undervoltage
protection can help increase the voltage level of the system.
3.17.1 Function Description
The device can provide two stages of phase undervoltage protection with independent logic.
When the voltage drops in the system and it is lower than the voltage threshold, phase
undervoltage protection will operate.
Taking into account that the role of undervoltage protection is to remove the running device from
the system, but in order to prevent that undervoltage protection is always operating when it is not
charged, the breaker closed position check criterion is added, users can choose to detect the
breaker position, current or no-check as the releasing condition for the protection.
In addition, the undervoltage protection also provides the alarm function, prompting the voltage
drop of the system, it allows users to find the cause timely, and preventing further deterioration of
the fault. Each stage of phase undervoltage protection can be independently set as definite-time
characteristics or inverse-time characteristics. The dropout characteristics can be set as
instantaneous dropout and definite-time dropout.
Users can select phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for the protection calculation via the
setting [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]. If it is set as “Up”, phase voltage criterion is selected, and if it is set to
“Upp”, phase-to-phase voltage criterion is selected.
Users can select “1-out-of-3” or “3-out-of-3” logic for the protection criterion via the setting
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-148
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
[27P.Opt_1P/3P]. If it is set as “1P”, phase undervoltage protection can operate if any
phase/phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than the voltage setting. If it is set as “3P”, phase
undervoltage protection cannot operate unless three phase/phase-to-phase voltages are smaller
than the voltage setting.
The breaker closed position check mode is configured via the setting [27P.Opt_LogicMode], it
includes:
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=None: no-check;
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=Curr: check the current;
3
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CBPos: check the breaker position;
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrAndCBPos: check the current and the breaker position;
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrOrCBPos: check the current or the breaker position.
Undervoltage protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals, for
some specific applications, undervoltage protection needs to be blocked by the external signal, so
the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block undervoltage protection. In
addition, if the VT of the local side is out of service, undervoltage protection will be disabled. The
enabling and blocking logic of undervoltage protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
&
27Px.En
27Px.On
SIG
27Px.Enable
SIG
27Px.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
EN
[En_VT]
&
≥1
27Px.Blocked
&
&
27Px.Valid
SIG
BI_En_VT
Figure 3.17-1 The enabling and blocking logic of phase undervoltage protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase undervoltage protection is as follows:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-149
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
&
SET [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
SET Uab<[U_DropOut]
&
SET Ubc<[U_DropOut]
>=1
SET Uca<[U_DropOut]
&
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
SET Uab<[U_DropOut]
3
>=1
SET Ubc<[U_DropOut]
SET Uca<[U_DropOut]
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
&
SET [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
SET Ua<[U_DropOut]
&
SET Ub<[U_DropOut]
>=1
Pickup voltage criterion
>=1
SET Uc<[U_DropOut]
&
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
SET Ua<[U_DropOut]
>=1
SET Ub<[U_DropOut]
SET Uc<[U_DropOut]
SET [27P.Opt_LogicMode]=None
SET [27P.Opt_LogicMode]=Curr
&
>=1
>=1
SIG Ia, Ib and Ic > 0.04In
SET [27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CBPos
Auxiliary criterion
&
SIG CB closed position
>=1
&
>=1
SET [27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrOrCBPos
&
&
SET [27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrAndCBPos
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-150
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG Pickup voltage criterion
&
0
SIG Auxiliary criterion
500ms
27Px.Pkp
&
&
SIG VTS.Alm
FD.Pkp
&
&
EN
[27Px.En_VTS_Blk]
SIG 27Px.On
SIG 27Px.Valid
SET [27Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
3
Figure 3.17-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector element of phase undervoltage protection
Where:
U_DropOut: the dropout voltage value, i.e. [27Px.K_DropOut]*[27Px.U_Set]
3.17.1.1 Operation Characteristic
Undervoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit, it can also operate with an
inverse-time limit. Undervoltage protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard
inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve
by the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] (x=1 or 2), the relationship between the value of the setting and
the curve is shown in the table below.
27Px.Opt_Curve
Time Characteristic
α
k
c
ANSIDefTime
ANSI Definite Time
-
-
-
IECDefTime
IEC Definite Time
-
-
-
UserDefine
UserDefine
InvTime_U
InvCrv_U
1
1
0
When the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “InvTime_U”, the operation characteristic is the
corresponding selected operating curve type, and the settings [27Px.K], [27Px.C] and
[27Px.Alpha] are useless.
When the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the settings [27Px.K],
[27Px.C] and [27Px.Alpha].
When the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “ANSIDefTime” or “IECDefTime”, it is definite-time
undervoltage protection.
⚫
Definite-time characteristic
When U < Up , the protection operates with a time delay of top (i.e. the value of the setting
[27Px.t_Op]), and the operation characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-151
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
t op
3
Up
U
Figure 3.17-3 Definite-time operation characteristic curve of phase undervoltage protection
⚫
Inverse-time characteristic
When U < Up , the inverse-time accumulator begins to accumulate, and the operating time is
affected by the applied voltage U . The lower voltage is, the smaller the operating time is, but not
unlimited. When the voltage is low enough to a certain threshold ( Up ), the inverse-time operating
time will not continue to decrease, then the operation characteristic becomes the definite-time
characteristic, and the operating time is tmin , i.e. the setting [27Px.tmin]. The inverse-time
operation characteristic equation is:
k
t=
+ c TMS
1 − (U / U P )
Where:
Up is the voltage setting [27Px.U_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time time multiplier, i.e. the setting [27Px.TMS];
k is the inverse-time coefficient K, i.e. the setting [27Px.K];
c is the inverse-time coefficient C, i.e. the setting [27Px.C];
is the inverse-time coefficient Alpha, i.e. the setting [27Px.Alpha];
U is the measured voltage.
The inverse-time operation characteristic curve is shown as below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-152
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
3
t min
UD
UP
U
Figure 3.17-4 Inverse-time operation characteristic curve of phase undervoltage protection
When the applied voltage is not a fixed value, but changes with time, the operating behaviour of
the protection is shown in the following equation:
T0
1
t (U )dt
=1
0
Where:
T0 is the operating time of the protection element;
t (U ) is the theoretical operating time when the voltage is U .
3.17.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The supported dropout characteristics of the undervoltage protection include instantaneous
dropout and definite-time dropout.
⚫
Instantaneous dropout
When U >[27Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫
Definite-time dropout
When U >[27Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value
of the setting [27Px.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-153
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Start time
U<Up
Start
signal
3
Operating
signal
Protection
operate
Operating threshold
Operating
counter
t dr
t dr
Dropout time setting
t dr
Dropout time
Dropout time
Figure 3.17-5 Definite-time dropout characteristic of undervoltage protection
3.17.2 Function Block Diagram
27P
27Px.Enable
27Px.Block
27Px.On
27Px.Blocked
27Px.Valid
27Px.St
27Px.StA
27Px.StB
27Px.StC
27Px.Op
27Px.Op.PhA
27Px.Op.PhB
27Px.Op.PhC
27Px.Alm
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-154
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.17.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.17-1 Input/output signals of phase undervoltage protection
No.
Input signal
1
27Px.Enable
2
27Px.Block
No.
Description
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output signal
Description
1
27Px.On
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection is enabled
2
27Px.Blocked
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection is blocked
3
27Px.Valid
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection is valid
4
27Px.St
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection starts
5
27Px.StA
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection starts (Phase A or AB)
6
27Px.StB
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection starts (Phase B or BC)
7
27Px.StC
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection starts (Phase C or CA)
8
27Px.Op
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection operates
9
27Px.Op.PhA
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection operates (Phase A or AB)
10
27Px.Op.PhB
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection operates (Phase B or BC)
11
27Px.Op.PhC
Stage x of phase undervoltage protection operates (Phase C or CA)
12
27Px.Alm
Stage x of undervoltage protection alarms
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3
3-155
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.17.4 Logic
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
&
SET [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
SET Uab<[27Px.U_Set]
&
SET Ubc<[27Px.U_Set]
>=1
SET Uca<[27Px.U_Set]
&
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
3
SET Uab<[27Px.U_Set]
>=1
SET Ubc<[27Px.U_Set]
SET Uca<[27Px.U_Set]
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
&
SET [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
SET Ua<[27Px.U_Set]
&
SET Ub<[27Px.U_Set]
>=1
Voltage criterion
>=1
SET Uc<[27Px.U_Set]
&
SET [27P.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
SET Ua<[27Px.U_Set]
>=1
SET Ub<[27Px.U_Set]
SET Uc<[27Px.U_Set]
SIG
Voltage criterion
SIG
Auxiliary criterion
SIG
VTS.Alm
EN
[27Px.En_VTS_Blk]
SIG
27Px.On
SIG
27Px.Pkp
SET
[27Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
27Px.St
&
&
Timer
t
t
&
&
&
27Px.Op
&
27Px.Alm
SET
[27Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.17-6 Logic diagram of phase undervoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-156
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Where:
Auxiliary criterion: please refer to Figure 3.17-2.
3.17.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings UV Settings
Table 3.17-2 Settings of phase undervoltage protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
3
Option of phase-to-phase
voltage or phase voltage
1
27P.Opt_Up/Upp
for
Up;
Upp
Upp
-
-
stage
x
of
undervoltage protection
Up: phase voltage
Upp:
phase-to-phase
voltage
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode
or 3-out-of-3 mode for
2
27P.Opt_1P/3P
3P;
3P
1P
-
-
stage x of undervoltage
protection
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
Breaker closed position
check mode
None: no check
Curr: check the current
3
27P.Opt_LogicMode
None;
CBPos:
Curr;
normally
CBPos;
Curr
-
-
check
open
the
auxiliary
contact
CurrOrCBPos;
CurrOrCBPos: check the
CurrAndCBPos
current or normally open
auxiliary contact
CurrAndCBPos: check the
current and normally open
auxiliary contact
The voltage setting of
4
27P1.U_Set
5~120
80
V
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of
5
27P1.K_DropOut
1~1.2
1.03
-
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-157
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The operating time setting
6
27P1.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout time setting
7
27P1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Logic setting to determine
the behaviour of stage 1 of
3
phase
undervoltage
protection when VT circuit
8
27P1.En_VTS_Blk
supervision
Disabled;
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
function
is
enabled and VT circuit
failure happens.
Disabled: it is not affected
by VT circuit failure
Enabled: it will be blocked
by VT circuit failure signal
The
9
27P1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
stage
1
of
for
the
phase
undervoltage protection
Enabling stage 1 of phase
10
27P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
undervoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting
ANSIDefTime;
11
27P1.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
the inverse-time operation
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic
stage
InvTime_U
1
curve
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection.
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic
12
27P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
stage
Inst
-
-
1
curve
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-158
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The time multiplier setting
13
27P1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The minimum operating
14
27P1.tmin
0.03 ~10
0.03
s
0.001
time setting of stage 1 of
phase
undervoltage
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
15
27P1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
16
27P1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
17
27P1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The voltage setting of
18
27P2.U_Set
5~120
80
V
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of
19
27P2.K_DropOut
1~1.2
1.03
-
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The operating time setting
20
27P2.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout time setting
21
27P2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-159
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Logic setting to determine
the behaviour of stage 2 of
phase
undervoltage
protection when VT circuit
22
27P2.En_VTS_Blk
supervision
Disabled;
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
function
is
enabled and VT circuit
failure happens.
Disabled: it is not affected
3
by VT circuit failure
Enabled: it will be blocked
by VT circuit failure signal
The
23
27P2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
stage
2
of
for
the
phase
undervoltage protection
Enabling stage 2 of phase
24
27P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
undervoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting
ANSIDefTime;
25
27P2.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
the inverse-time operation
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic
stage
InvTime_U
curve
2
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection.
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic
26
27P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
stage
Inst
-
-
curve
2
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting
27
27P2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
0.001
of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The minimum operating
28
27P2.tmin
0.03 ~10
0.03
s
0.001
time setting of stage 2 of
phase
undervoltage
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-160
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “k” of the
customized
29
27P2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
30
27P2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
31
27P2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
3.18 Overfrequency Protection (81O)
Frequency is an important index of the power quality, which can reflect the balance of the output
power of the generator and the active power of the load. The increase of frequency indicates that
the output power of the system is much larger than that of the load. When the system frequency is
greater than the predefined setting, the overfrequency protection will operate for removing some
part of active power supplies from the system.
3.18.1 Function Description
The device can provide six stages of overfrequency protection. If the system frequency is greater
than the setting, overfrequency protection will operate to remove some part of active power
supplies from the system. Overfrequency protection is with independent definite-time
characteristics and with instantaneous dropout characteristics.
Overfrequency protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals, for
some specific applications, overfrequency protection needs to be blocked by the external signal,
so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block overfrequency protection.
The enabling and blocking logic of overfrequency protection is shown in the figure below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-161
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
EN
&
81Ox.En
SIG
81Ox.Enable
SIG
81Ox.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
81Ox.On
&
81Ox.Blocked
≥1
&
3
81Ox.Valid
Figure 3.18-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling overfrequency protection
When the overfrequency protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is input, if the
system frequency is greater than the frequency setting of the overfrequency protection and all the
phase-to-phase voltages are greater than the setting of the voltage blocking element of the
overfrequency protection, the overfrequency protection will pick up.
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the overfrequency protection is shown in Figure 3.18-2.
SET
f > [81Ox.f_Set]
SET
Upp_min > [81.Upp_Blk]
&
&
81Ox.Pkp
0ms
SIG
500ms
&
81Ox.On
FD.Pkp
SIG
81Ox.Valid
Figure 3.18-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of overfrequency protection
3.18.1.1 Operation Characteristic
The overfrequency protection has definite-time delay characteristic complied with IEC 60255-3
and ANSI C37.112. If the system frequency is greater than the frequency setting [81Ox.f_Set] (x:
1~6), the overfrequency protection will operate after the time setting [81Ox.t_Op] (x: 1~6).
The operation characteristic curve of overfrequency protection is shown in Figure 3.18-3.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-162
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
t op
3
fp
f
Figure 3.18-3 Operation characteristic curve of overfrequency protection
3.18.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The overfrequency protection is with instantaneous dropout characteristic. If the system frequency
is less than the setting [81Ox.f_Set] (x: 1~6), the overfrequency protection will drop out at once.
3.18.2 Function Block Diagram
81O
81Ox.On
81Ox.Enable
81Ox.Blocked
81Ox.Block
81Ox.Valid
81Ox.St
81Ox.Op
3.18.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.18-1 Input/output signals of overfrequency protection
No.
Input Signal
1
81Ox.Enable
2
81Ox.Block
No.
Description
Stage x of overfrequency protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Stage x of overfrequency protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Output Signal
Description
1
81Ox.On
Stage x of overfrequency protection is enabled.
2
81Ox.Blocked
Stage x of overfrequency protection is blocked.
3
81Ox.Valid
Stage x of overfrequency protection is valid.
4
81Ox.St
Stage x of overfrequency protection starts.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-163
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
5
81Ox.Op
Stage x of overfrequency protection operates.
3.18.4 Logic
SET f>[81Ox.f_Set]
81Ox.St
&
&
[81Ox.t_Op] 0
SET Upp_min>[81.Upp_Blk]
81Ox.Op
SIG 81Ox.Pkp
3
Figure 3.18-4 Logic diagram of overfrequency protection
3.18.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FreqProt Settings
Table 3.18-2 Settings of overfrequency protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
Description
The setting of the low voltage blocking
1
81.Upp_Blk
10~150
70
V
0.001
element
of
the
frequency
protection
(phase-to-phase voltage)
2
81O1.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
3
81O1.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
4
81O1.En
Enabled
-
-
5
81O2.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
6
81O2.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
7
81O2.En
Enabled
-
-
8
81O3.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
9
81O3.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
10
81O3.En
Enabled
-
-
11
81O4.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
12
81O4.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
The frequency setting of the stage 1 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
1 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 2 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
2 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 3 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
3 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 3 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 4 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
4 of
overfrequency protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-164
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
13
81O4.En
14
81O5.f_Set
15
81O5.t_Op
16
81O5.En
17
81O6.f_Set
18
81O6.t_Op
19
81O6.En
Disabled;
Enabled
-
-
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
The logic setting of the stage 4 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 5 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
5 of
overfrequency protection
The logic
setting of the stage 5 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 6 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
6 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 6 of
overfrequency protection
3.19 Underfrequency Protection (81U)
Frequency is an important index of the power quality, which can reflect the balance of the output
power of the generator and the active power of the load. The decrease of frequency indicates that
the output power of the system is much less than that of the load. When the system frequency is
less than the predefined setting, the underfrequency protection will operate for shedding some
part of loads from the system.
3.19.1 Function Description
This device provides six stages of underfrequency protection. If the system frequency is less than
the predefined setting, this protection will operate for shedding some part of loads from the system.
The underfrequency protection is with independent definite-time delay characteristic and with
instantaneous dropout characteristic.
Underfrequency protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals, for
some specific applications, underfrequency protection needs to be blocked by the external signal,
so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block underfrequency protection.
The enabling and blocking logic of underfrequency protection is shown in the figure below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-165
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
EN
&
81Ux.En
SIG
81Ux.Enable
SIG
81Ux.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
81Ux.On
&
81Ux.Blocked
≥1
&
3
81Ux.Valid
Figure 3.19-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling underfrequency protection
When the underfrequency protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is input, if the
system frequency is less than the setting of the underfrequency protection and all the
phase-to-phase voltages are greater than the setting of the voltage blocking element of the
underfrequency protection, the underfrequency protection will pick up.
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the underfrequency protection is shown in Figure 3.19-2.
SET
f < [81Ux.f_Set]
SET
Upp_min > [81.Upp_Blk]
&
&
81Ux.Pkp
0ms
SIG
500ms
&
81Ux.On
FD.Pkp
SIG
81Ux.Valid
Figure 3.19-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of underfrequency protection
3.19.1.1 Operation Characteristic
The underfrequency protection has definite-time delay characteristic complied with IEC 60255-3
and ANSI C37.112. If the system frequency is less than the frequency setting [81Ux.f_Set] (x:
1~6), the underfrequency protection will operate after the time setting [81Ux.t_Op] (x: 1~6).
The operation characteristic curve of underfrequency protection is shown in Figure 3.19-3.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-166
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
t op
3
fp
f
Figure 3.19-3 Operation characteristic curve of underfrequency protection
3.19.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The underfrequency protection is with instantaneous dropout characteristic. If the system
frequency is greater than the setting [81Ux.f_Set] (x: 1~6), the underfrequency protection will drop
out at once.
3.19.2 Function Block Diagram
81U
81Ux.Enable
81Ux.On
81Ux.Blocked
81Ux.Block
81Ux.Valid
81Ux.St
81Ux.Op
3.19.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.19-1 Input/output signals of underfrequency protection
No.
Input Signal
1
81Ux.Enable
2
81Ux.Block
No.
Description
Stage x of underfrequency protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Stage x of underfrequency protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Output Signal
Description
1
81Ux.On
Stage x of underfrequency protection is enabled.
2
81Ux.Blocked
Stage x of underfrequency protection is blocked.
3
81Ux.Valid
Stage x of underfrequency protection is valid.
4
81Ux.St
Stage x of underfrequency protection starts.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-167
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
5
81Ux.Op
Stage x of underfrequency protection operates.
3.19.4 Logic
SET f<[81Ux.f_Set]
81Ux.St
&
&
[81Ux.t_Op] 0
SET Upp_min>[81.Upp_Blk]
81Ux.Op
SIG 81Ux.Pkp
3
Figure 3.19-4 Logic diagram of underfrequency protection
3.19.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FreqProt Settings
Table 3.19-2 Settings of underfrequency protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
Description
The setting of the low voltage blocking
1
81.Upp_Blk
10~150
70
V
0.001
element
of
the
frequency
protection
(phase-to-phase voltage)
2
81U1.f_Set
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
3
81U1.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
4
81U1.En
Enabled
-
-
5
81U2.f_Set
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
6
81U2.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
7
81U2.En
Enabled
-
-
8
81U3.f_Set
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
9
81U3.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
10
81U3.En
Enabled
-
-
11
81U4.f_Set
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
12
81U4.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
The frequency setting of the stage 1 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
1 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 2 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
2 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 3 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
3 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 3 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 4 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
4 of
underfrequency protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-168
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
13
81U4.En
14
81U5.f_Set
15
81U5.t_Op
16
81U5.En
17
81U6.f_Set
18
81U6.t_Op
19
81U6.En
Disabled;
Enabled
-
-
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
The logic setting of the stage 4 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 5 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
5 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 5 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 6 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
6 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 6 of
underfrequency protection
3.20 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection (81R)
Frequency rate-of-change reflects the balance of the generator output power and the active power
of the load. It can reflect the increase of active load power and the decrease of frequency. When
the frequency changes too fast, it is generally considered that the system has a fault, and the
frequency rate-of-change protection can operate in such a situation.
3.20.1 Function Description
This device provides six stages of frequency rate-of-change protection. If the system frequency
rate-of-change is greater than the predefined setting, this protection will operate. The frequency
rate-of-change protection is with independent definite-time delay characteristic and with
instantaneous dropout characteristic.
The frequency rate-of-change protection protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or
binary input signals, for some specific applications, frequency rate-of-change protection needs to
be blocked by the external signal, so the device provides a function block input signal to be used
to block frequency rate-of-change protection. The enabling and blocking logic of frequency
rate-of-change protection is shown in the figure below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-169
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
EN
&
81Rx.En
SIG
81Rx.Enable
SIG
81Rx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
81Rx.On
&
81Rx.Blocked
≥1
&
3
81Rx.Valid
Figure 3.20-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling frequency rate-of-change protection
When the frequency rate-of-change protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is input,
if the absolute value of the system frequency rate-of-change is greater than the absolute value of
setting of the frequency rate-of-change protection, the frequency rate-of-change protection will
pick up.
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the frequency rate-of-change protection is shown in
Figure 3.20-2.
SET
[81Rx.df/dt_Set] > 0 &
df/dt > [81Rx.df/dt_Set]
SET
Upp_min > [81.Upp_Blk]
SET
[81Rx.df/dt_Set] < 0 &
df/dt < [81Rx.df/dt_Set]
SET
Upp_min > [81.Upp_Blk]
&
≥1
&
&
81Rx.Pkp
0ms
SIG
81Rx.On
SIG
81Rx.Valid
500ms
&
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.20-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of frequency rate-of-change protection
3.20.1.1 Operation Characteristic
The frequency rate-of-change protection has definite-time delay characteristic complied with IEC
60255-3 and ANSI C37.112. If the absolute value of the system frequency rate-of-change is
greater than the absolute value of setting [81Rx.df/dt_Set] (x: 1~6), the frequency rate-of-change
protection will operate after the time setting [81Rx.t_Op] (x: 1~6).
The operation characteristic curve of the frequency rate-of-change protection is shown in Figure
3.20-3.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-170
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
top
3
-df/dtset
-df/dt
df/dtset
df/dt
Figure 3.20-3 Operation characteristic curve of frequency rate-of-change protection
3.20.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The frequency rate-of-change protection is with instantaneous dropout characteristic. If the
absolute value of the system frequency rate-of-change is less than the absolute value of setting
[81Rx.df/dt_Set] (x: 1~6), the frequency rate-of-change protection will drop out at once.
3.20.2 Function Block Diagram
81R
81Rx.On
81Rx.Enable
81Rx.Blocked
81Rx.Block
81Rx.Valid
81Rx.St
81Rx.Op
3.20.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.20-1 Input/output signals of frequency rate-of-change protection
No.
Input Signal
1
81Rx.Enable
2
81Rx.Block
No.
Description
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~6)
Output Signal
Description
1
81Rx.On
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection is enabled.
2
81Rx.Blocked
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection is blocked.
3
81Rx.Valid
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection is valid.
4
81Rx.St
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection starts.
5
81Rx.Op
Stage x of frequency rate-of-change protection operates.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-171
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.20.4 Logic
SET
[81Rx.df/dt_Set] > 0 &
df/dt > [81Rx.df/dt_Set]
SET
f > [81Rx.f_Pkp]
SET
Upp_min > [81.Upp_Blk]
&
81Rx.St
≥1
SET
&
[81Rx.df/dt_Set] < 0 &
df/dt < [81Rx.df/dt_Set]
[81Rx.t_Op]
&
3
SET
f < [81Rx.f_Pkp]
SET
Upp_min > [81.Upp_Blk]
SIG
81Rx.Pkp
0
81Rx.Op
Figure 3.20-4 Logic diagram of frequency rate-of-change protection
3.20.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FreqProt Settings
Table 3.20-2 Settings of frequency rate-of-change protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
Description
The setting of the low voltage blocking
1
81.Upp_Blk
10~150
70
V
0.001
element
of
the
frequency
protection
(phase-to-phase voltage)
2
81R1.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
3
81R1.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
4
81R1.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
5
81R1.En
Enabled
-
-
6
81R2.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
7
81R2.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
8
81R2.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
9
81R2.En
Enabled
-
-
10
81R3.df/dt_Set
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
-5~5
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 1 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 1 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 1
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 2 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 2 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 2
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 3 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-172
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
11
81R3.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
12
81R3.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
13
81R3.En
Enabled
-
-
14
81R4.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
15
81R4.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
16
81R4.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
17
81R4.En
Enabled
-
-
18
81R5.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
19
81R5.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
20
81R5.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
21
81R5.En
Enabled
-
-
22
81R6.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
23
81R6.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
24
81R6.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
25
81R6.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
The time setting of the stage 3 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 3
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 3 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 4 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 4 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 4
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 4 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 5 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 5 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 5
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 5 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 6 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 6 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 6
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 6 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
3.21 Reverse Power Protection (32R)
If a power supply failure occurs on the feeder, the synchronous motors become generators due to
the inertia of their load and the induction motors become generators. The aim of the reverse
power protection is to detect the inverse flow of energy and to ensure that the motor does not feed
the fault which has appeared on the network.
3.21.1 Function Description
This device provides two stages of reverse power protection. If the reverse power is detected and
it is greater than the predefined setting, the reverse power protection will operate. The reverse
power protection is with independent definite-time delay characteristic and with instantaneous
dropout characteristic.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-173
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
The reverse power protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals,
for some specific applications, reverse power protection needs to be blocked by the external
signal, so the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block reverse power
protection. The enabling and blocking logic of reverse power protection is shown in the figure
below:
EN
&
32Rx.En
SIG
32Rx.Enable
SIG
32Rx.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
32Rx.On
&
3
32Rx.Blocked
≥1
&
32Rx.Valid
Figure 3.21-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling reverse power protection
When the reverse power protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is input, if the
reverse power is greater than the power setting of the reverse power protection, the reverse
power protection will pick up.
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the reverse power protection is shown in Figure 3.21-2.
SET
SIG
|P| > 0.95*[32Rx.P_Set]
&
P<0
32Rx.Pkp
SET
U1 < [32R.U1_VCE]
SET
I1 < [32R.I1_CCE]
SET
U2 > [32R.U2_VCE]
SIG
32Rx.On
SIG
32Rx.Valid
EN
[32Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
&
&
0ms
500ms
&
&
≥1
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.21-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of reverse power protection
Where:
The power value is positive-sequence power, P1 = 3×U1×I1×cosθ (θ is the phase angle
between positive-sequence voltage and positive-sequence current).
[32Rx.P_Set] (x: 1~2) is the power setting of the stage x reverse power protection.
[32R.U1_VCE] is the setting of the positive-sequence voltage control element of the reverse
power protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-174
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
[32R.I1_CCE] is the positive-sequence current setting of the current control element of the
reverse power protection.
[32R.U2_VCE] is the setting of the negative-sequence voltage control element of the reverse
power protection.
“I1” is the positive-sequence current.
“U1” is the positive-sequence voltage.
“U2” is the negative-sequence voltage.
3.21.1.1 Operation Characteristic
The reverse power protection has definite-time delay characteristic complied with IEC 60255-3
and ANSI C37.112. If the power value is less than “0”, and the absolute power value is greater
than the power setting of the reverse power protection [32Rx.P_Set] (x: 1~2), the reverse power
protection will operate after the time setting [32Rx.t_Op] (x: 1~2).
The operation characteristic curve of reverse power protection is shown in Figure 3.21-3.
t
top
P1
P1set
Figure 3.21-3 Operation characteristic curve of reverse power protection
3.21.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The reverse power protection is with instantaneous dropout characteristic. If the power is greater
than “0” or the power is less than the power setting [32Rx.P_Set] (x: 1~2) multiplied by 0.95, the
reverse power protection will drop out at once.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-175
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.21.2 Function Block Diagram
32R
32Rx.Enable
32Rx.On
32Rx.Blocked
32Rx.Block
32Rx.Valid
32Rx.St
32Rx.Op
32Rx.Alm
3
3.21.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.21-1 Input/output signals of reverse power protection
No.
Input Signal
1
32Rx.Enable
2
32Rx.Block
No.
Description
Stage x of reverse power protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Stage x of reverse power protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1~2)
Output Signal
Description
1
32Rx.On
Stage x of reverse power protection is enabled.
2
32Rx.Blocked
Stage x of reverse power protection is blocked.
3
32Rx.Valid
Stage x of reverse power protection is valid.
4
32Rx.St
Stage x of reverse power protection picks up.
5
32Rx.Op
Stage x of reverse power protection operates.
6
32Rx.Alm
Stage x of reverse power protection alarms.
3.21.4 Logic
SET
|P| > [32Rx.P_Set]
SIG
P<0
SET
U1 < [32R.U1_VCE]
SET
I1 < [32R.I1_CCE]
SET
U2 > [32R.U2_VCE]
&
32Rx.St
&
≥1
&
[32Rx.t_Op]
SIG
32Rx.Pkp
SET
[32Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Trp
0
&
&
SET
32Rx.Op
32Rx.Alm
[32Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm] = Alm
Figure 3.21-4 Logic diagram of reverse power protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-176
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.21.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings RevPower Settings
Table 3.21-2 Settings of reverse power protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
Description
The
1
32R.U1_VCE
5~60
5
V
0.001
voltage
setting
of
the
positive-sequence voltage control element
of the reverse power protection
The positive-sequence current setting of
2
32R.I1_CCE
0.01~1
0.1
p.u.
0.001
the current control element of the reverse
power protection
The
3
32R.U2_VCE
8~60
8
V
0.001
voltage
setting
of
the
negative-sequence voltage control element
of the reverse power protection
4
32R1.P_Set
0.1~10
0.15
p.u.
0.001
5
32R1.t_Op
0.01~100
0.1
s
0.001
6
32R1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
The power setting of the stage 1 of reverse
power protection
The time setting of the stage 1 of reverse
power protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of reverse
power protection
Enabling
7
32R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
stage
1
of
reverse
power
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
8
32R2.P_Set
0.1~10
0.15
p.u.
0.001
9
32R2.t_Op
0.01~100
0.1
s
0.001
10
32R2.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The power setting of the stage 2 of reverse
power protection
The time setting of the stage 2 of reverse
power protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of reverse
power protection
Enabling
11
32R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
stage
2
of
reverse
power
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
3.22 Undercurrent Protection (37)
The undercurrent protection can remove the device from the system by detecting the smaller load
current when the load is lost, the capacitor is in loss of voltage and the motor is running without
any load.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-177
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.22.1 Function Description
The device can provide one stage of undercurrent protection for tripping purpose or alarm
purpose. For different protected equipment, the single-phase criterion or three-phase criterion can
be selected. The position of circuit breaker, the load current also can be taken as the enabling
conditions for the undercurrent protection. The undercurrent protection is with definite-time
operation characteristic and instantaneous dropout characteristic. Undercurrent protection can
operate to trip or alarm, it can be enabled or blocked by the external binary input.
3
Undercurrent protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals, for
some specific applications, undercurrent protection needs to be blocked by the external signal, so
the device provides a function block input signal to be used to block undercurrent protection. The
enabling and blocking logic of undercurrent protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
37.En
SIG
37.Enable
SIG
37.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
37.On
&
37.Blocked
≥1
&
37.Valid
Figure 3.22-1 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling undercurrent protection
When the undercurrent protection is enabled and no external blocking signal is input, if the
detected current is less than the current setting multiplied by 1.10 of the undercurrent protection,
the undercurrent protection will pick up.
Users can select “1-out-of-3” or “3-out-of-3” logic for the protection criterion via the setting
[37.Opt_1P/3P]. If it is set as “1P”, undercurrent protection can operate if any phase current is
smaller than the current setting. If it is set as “3P”, undercurrent protection cannot operate unless
three phase currents are smaller than the current setting.
The circuit breaker position with/without the current condition can be used as an auxiliary criterion
for undercurrent protection, which can be configured via the setting [37.Opt_LogicMode].
The logic diagram of the fault detector of the undercurrent protection is shown as below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-178
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG
Ia<1.10×[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ib<1.10×[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ic<1.10×[37.I_Set]
>=1
&
>=1
Pickup current criterion
SET [37.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
SIG
Ia<1.10×[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ib<1.10×[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ic<1.10×[37.I_Set]
&
&
3
SET [37.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
SET
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=None
SET
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=Curr
SIG
Ip>0.04In
SET
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=CBPos
SIG
CB closed position
&
>=1
>=1
Auxiliary criterion
&
>=1
&
>=1
SET [37.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrOrCBPos
&
&
SET [37.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrAndCBPos
SIG
Pickup current criterion
SIG
Auxiliary criterion
SIG
37.On
SIG
37.Valid
SET
[37.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
&
0
500ms
&
37.Pkp
&
FD.Pkp
Figure 3.22-2 Logic diagram of the fault detector of undercurrent protection
3.22.1.1 Operation Characteristic
The undercurrent protection has definite-time operation characteristic complied with IEC 60255-3
and ANSI C37.112. If the load current is less than the current setting of the undercurrent
protection [37.I_Set], the undercurrent protection will operate after the time setting [37.t_Op].
The operation characteristic curve of undercurrent protection is shown as below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-179
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
t
t op
3
Ip
I
Figure 3.22-3 Operation characteristic curve of undercurrent protection
3.22.1.2 Dropout Characteristic
The undercurrent protection is with instantaneous dropout characteristic. If the load current is
larger than the current setting [37.I_Set] multiplied by 1.10, the undercurrent protection will drop
out immediately.
3.22.2 Function Block Diagram
37
37.Enable
37.Block
37.On
37.Blocked
37.Valid
37.St
37.StA
37.StB
37.StC
37.Op
37.Op.PhA
37.Op.PhB
37.Op.PhC
37.Alm
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-180
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.22.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.22-1 Input/output signals of undercurrent protection
No.
Input Signal
1
37.Enable
2
37.Block
No.
Description
Undercurrent protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Undercurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Output Signal
Description
1
37.On
Undercurrent protection is enabled.
2
37.Blocked
Undercurrent protection is blocked.
3
37.Valid
Undercurrent protection is valid.
4
37.St
Undercurrent protection starts.
5
37.StA
Undercurrent protection starts (Phase A)
6
37.StB
Undercurrent protection starts (Phase B)
7
37.StC
Undercurrent protection starts (Phase C)
8
37.Op
Undercurrent protection operates.
9
37.Op.PhA
Undercurrent protection operates (Phase A)
10
37.Op.PhB
Undercurrent protection operates (Phase B)
11
37.Op.PhC
Undercurrent protection operates (Phase C)
12
37.Alm
Undercurrent protection alarms.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3
3-181
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.22.4 Logic
SIG
Ia<[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ib<[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ic<[37.I_Set]
>=1
&
>=1
Current criterion
SET [37.Opt_1P/3P]=1P
3
SIG
Ia<[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ib<[37.I_Set]
SIG
Ic<[37.I_Set]
&
&
SET [37.Opt_1P/3P]=3P
SIG
Current criterion
SIG
Auxiliary criterion
SIG
37.On
SIG
37.Pkp
&
37.St
&
[37.t_Op] 0
&
37.Op
SET [37.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Trp
&
37.Alm
SET [37.Opt_Trp/Alm]=Alm
Figure 3.22-4 Logic diagram of undercurrent protection
Where:
Auxiliary criterion: please refer to Figure 3.22-2.
3.22.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings UC Settings
Table 3.22-2 Settings of undercurrent protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
37.I_Set
0.1~5
0.5
A
0.001
2
37.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
3
37.Opt_1P/3P
1P;
3P
Description
The
-
-
setting
of
the
undercurrent protection
The time setting of the undercurrent
protection
The
3P
current
setting
three-phase
for
selecting
criterion
(3P)
the
or
single-phase criterion (1P)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-182
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
None;
Curr;
4
37.Opt_LogicMode
CBPos;
CurrAndCBPos;
CurrAnd
CBPos
-
-
-
-
The setting of the CB position check
mode.
CurrOrCBPos
5
37.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
The logic setting of the undercurrent
protection
Enabling undercurrent protection
6
37.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
3
Alm: for alarm purpose
3.23 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
When a fault happens to the power system, the device will operate to trip the circuit breaker, and
the fault will be isolated by opening the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker fails to open within the
certain time due to some abnormalities (for example, low tripping pressure), the fault may cause
system stability being destroyed or electrical equipment being damaged. Breaker failure
protection is adopted to issue a backup tripping command to trip adjacent circuit breakers, and
isolate the fault as requested by the device.
According to the tripping information from the device and the auxiliary information (the current and
the position) of target circuit breaker, breaker failure protection constitutes the criterion to
discriminate whether the target circuit fails to open. If the criterion is confirmed, breaker failure
protection will operate to trip the target circuit breaker with the time delay [50BF.t_ReTrp], trip it
again with the time delay [50BF.t1_Op] and trip the adjacent circuit breakers with the time delay
[50BF.t2_Op]. As a special backup protection, breaker failure protection can quickly isolate the
fault, reduce the affected range by the fault, keep system stability and prevent generators,
transformers and other primary equipments from seriously damaged.
3.23.1 Function Description
For breaker failure protection, re-trip and two time delays are available.
3.23.1.1 Re-trip
When breaker failure protection receives initiating signal of tripping and phase overcurrent
element of any phase operates, the device will issue tripping command to re-trip the target circuit
breaker with the time delay [50BF.t_ReTrp]. In order to improve the sensitivity, both
zero-sequence overcurrent element and negative-sequence overcurrent element are added,
which can be enabled or disabled by the settings [50BF.En_3I0_3P] and [50BF.En_I2_3P].
3.23.1.2 First Time Delay
As similar as re-trip, the device will operate to re-trip the target circuit breaker again with the time
delay [50BF.t1_Op] when the relevant operating criterion is satisfied.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-183
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.23.1.3 Second Time delay
As similar as re-trip, the device will operate to trip the adjacent circuit breakers with the time delay
[50BF.t2_Op] when the relevant operating criterion is satisfied.
3.23.1.4 Current Criterion
1.
Phase overcurrent element
𝐼𝜑 > [50𝐵𝐹. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡]
Where:
3
𝜑 = A, B or C
2.
Zero-sequence overcurrent element
3I0 > [50𝐵𝐹. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡]
Where:
3I0 is the calculated residual current
3.
Negative-sequence overcurrent element
I2 > [50𝐵𝐹. 𝐼2_𝑆𝑒𝑡]
Where:
I2 is the negative-sequence current
For some special faults (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in
order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, an input
signal "50BF.ExTrp_WOI" is equipped to initiate breaker failure protection, once the input signal is
energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in addition to breaker
failure current check to trigger breaker failure timer. The device takes current as priority with CB
auxiliary contact "50BF.52b" as an option criterion for breaker failure check.
When the initiating signal of breaker failure protection is energized for longer than 10s, an alarm
signal "50BF.Alm_Init" will be issued, and will drop out with a time delay of 10s.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-184
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.23.2 Function Block Diagram
50BF
50BF.Enable
50BF.On
50BF.Block
50BF.Blocked
50BF.Valid
50BF.ExTrp3P
50BF.St
50BF.ExTrp_WOI
50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
3
50BF.Op_t1
50BF.Op_t2
50BF.Alm_Init
3.23.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.23-1 Input/output signals of breaker failure protection
No.
Input Signal
1
50BF.Enable
2
50BF.Block
3
50BF.ExtTrp3P
4
50BF.ExtTrp_WOI
No.
Description
Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Input signal of initiating breaker failure protection (three-phases)
Input signal of initiating breaker failure protection with the position check of
the circuit breaker
Output Signal
Description
1
50BF.On
Breaker failure protection is enabled.
2
50BF.Blocked
Breaker failure protection is blocked.
3
50BF.Valid
Breaker failure protection is valid.
4
50BF.St
Breaker failure protection starts
5
50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phases circuit breaker.
6
50BF.Op_t1
Breaker failure protection operates with the time delay [50BF.t1_Op].
7
50BF.Op_t2
Breaker failure protection operates with the time delay [50BF.t2_Op].
8
50BF.Alm_Init
The initiating signal of breaker failure protection is energized consistently.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-185
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.23.4 Logic
EN
[50BF.En]
&
50BF.On
SIG 50BF.Enable
&
SIG 50BF.Block
50BF.Blocked
>=1
SIG Fail_Device
&
50BF.Valid
3
Figure 3.23-1 Logic of enabling breaker failure protection
SIG
50BF.ExtTrp3P
10s
10s
SIG
50BF.ExtTrp_WOI
10s
10s
EN
[50BF.En_Alm_Init]
SIG
50BF.Valid
>=1
&
50BF.Alm_Init
Figure 3.23-2 Logic of breaker failure initiating signal abnormality
SIG 50BF.Valid
&
SIG 50BF.Alm_Init
EN
[50BF.En_ReTrp]
EN
[50BF.En_Ip]
SET IA>[50BF.I_Set]
&
>=1
[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0
SET IB>[50BF.I_Set]
50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
&
SET IC>[50BF.I_Set]
SIG 50BF.ExtTrp3P
&
EN
[50BF.En_3I0_3P]
&
>=1
SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
EN
[50BF.En_I2_3P]
&
&
[50BF.t1_Op] 0
>=1
50BF.Op_t1
&
SET I2>[50BF.I2_Set]
SIG 50BF.ExtTrp_WOI
EN
>=1
50BF.St
&
[50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]
SIG 50BF.52b
EN [50BF.En_t1]
&
[50BF.t2_Op]
0
50BF.Op_t2
EN [50BF.En_t2]
Figure 3.23-3 Logic of breaker failure protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-186
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Where:
50BF.52b: Input signal of three-phase open position of circuit breaker.
3.23.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings BFP Settings
Table 3.23-2 Settings of breaker failure protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
50BF.I_Set
0.05~200
1.000
A
0.001
2
50BF.3I0_Set
0.05~200
1.000
A
0.001
3
50BF.I2_Set
0.05~200
1.000
A
0.001
4
50BF.t_ReTrp
0~20
0.050
s
0.001
5
50BF.t1_Op
0~20
0.100
s
0.001
6
50BF.t2_Op
0~20
0.200
s
0.001
7
50BF.En
Enabled
-
-
8
50BF.En_ReTrp
Enabled
-
-
9
50BF.En_t1
Disabled
-
-
10
50BF.En_t2
Disabled
-
-
11
50BF.En_Ip
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Description
The phase current setting of breaker
failure protection
The zero-sequence current setting of
breaker failure protection
The negative-sequence current setting of
breaker failure protection
The re-trip time delay of breaker failure
protection
The first time delay of breaker failure
protection
The second time delay of breaker failure
protection
Enabling/disabling
-
-
Enabling/disabling
re-trip
50BF.En_3I0_3P
Disabled
Enabled
function
of
breaker failure protection
Enabling/disabling first time delay of
breaker failure protection
Enabling/disabling second time delay of
breaker failure protection
phase
overcurrent
element of breaker failure protection via
three-phases initiating signal
Enabling/disabling
12
failure
protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
breaker
Disabled
-
-
zero-sequence
overcurrent element of breaker failure
protection
via
three-phases
initiating
signal
Enabling/disabling
13
50BF.En_I2_3P
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
negative-sequence
overcurrent element of breaker failure
protection
via
three-phases
initiating
signal
14
50BF.En_CB_Ctrl
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
breaker
failure
protection be initiated by normally closed
contact of circuit breaker
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-187
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
15
50BF.En_Alm_Init
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
Enabling/disabling abnormality check of
-
breaker failure initiating signal
3.24 Switch-on-to-Fault Protection (SOTF)
When the line is put into operation or the power is restored, the circuit breaker is necessary to be
closed automatically, it is possible to switch on to a permanent fault. The conventional phase
overcurrent protection or earth fault overcurrent protection requires a time delay to operate and
isolate the fault, which will affect the power system seriously. Switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) protection
can quickly operate to remove the fault and reduce the impact of the fault on the system.
3
3.24.1 Function Description
The device can provide one stage of phase overcurrent SOTF protection and one stage of earth
fault overcurrent SOTF protection. The SOTF protection is with definite-time delay characteristic
and instantaneous dropout characteristic, it can be enabled or blocked by the external binary
input.
The SOTF protection can be enabled or disabled via the settings or binary input signals, for some
specific applications, the protection needs to be blocked by the external signal, so the device
provides a function block input signal to be used to block RMS overcurrent protection. The
enabling and blocking logic of the SOTF protection is shown in the figure below:
EN
50PSOTF.En
&
50PSOTF.On
SIG
50PSOTF.Enable
SIG
50PSOTF.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
≥1
50PSOTF.Blocked
&
50PSOTF.Valid
EN
50GSOTF.En
&
50GSOTF.On
SIG
50GSOTF.Enable
SIG
50GSOTF.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
≥1
50GSOTF.Blocked
&
50GSOTF.Valid
Figure 3.24-1 The enabling and blocking logic of SOTF protection
The SOTF protection must be initiated by auto-reclosing signal or manual closing signal, the
initiating time can be set by the setting [STOF.t_En]. After the acceleration condition is satisfied,
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-188
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
the SOTF protection will operate with a time delay of [50PSOTF.t_Op]/ [50GSOTF.t_Op_3P].
If the three-phase current changes from “no” to “have”, and the breaker position changes from
“open” to “closed”, it will be judged that the acceleration condition for manual closing is satisfied.
Then the manual closing signal will be kept for a certain time which is determined by the setting
[SOTF.t_En], and SOTF protection will be enabled.
When the SOTF protection is used for the transformer bay, large inrush current generated during
manual closing and auto-reclosing maybe lead to an undesired operation of SOTF protection.
Second
harmonic
blocking
can
be
selected
by
the
setting
[50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk]/[50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent the mal-operation due to inrush
current. The harmonic blocking characteristic of the phase overcurrent SOTF protection is
consistent with that of phase overcurrent protection. The harmonic blocking characteristic of the
earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection is consistent with that of earth fault overcurrent protection.
In order to improve the reliability, phase overcurrent SOTF protection can select phase voltage
element, phase-to-phase voltage element, zero-sequence voltage element and
negative-sequence voltage element as auxiliary criterion.
3.24.2 Function Block Diagram
50PSOTF
50PSOTF.Enable
50PSOTF.Block
50PSOTF.On
50GSOTF
50PSOTF.Blocked
50PSOTF.Valid
50PSOTF.Op
50GSOTF.Enable
50GSOTF.Block
50GSOTF.On
50GSOTF.Blocked
50PSOTF.St
50GSOTF.Valid
50PSOTF.StA
50GSOTF.Op
50PSOTF.StB
50GSOTF.St
50PSOTF.StC
3.24.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.24-1 Input/output signals of SOTF protection
No.
Input Signal
1
50PSOTF.Enable
2
50PSOTF.Block
3
50GSOTF.Enable
4
50GSOTF.Block
No.
Description
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Output Signal
Description
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-189
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3
1
50PSOTF.On
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection is enabled.
2
50PSOTF.Blocked
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection is blocked
3
50PSOTF.Valid
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection is valid
4
50PSOTF.Op
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection operates.
5
50PSOTF.St
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection starts.
6
50PSOTF.StA
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection starts (Phase A).
7
50PSOTF.StB
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection starts (Phase B).
8
50PSOTF.StC
Phase overcurrent SOTF protection starts (Phase C).
9
50GSOTF.On
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection is enabled.
10
50GSOTF.Op
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection operates.
11
50GSOTF.Blocked
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection is blocked
12
50GSOTF.Valid
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection is valid
13
50GSOTF.St
Earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection starts.
3.24.4 Logic
SIG
0
79.Close
[SOTF.t_En]
AR signal
Figure 3.24-2 Logic of auto-reclosing signal
SIG
Breaker position: open ->closed
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
FD.Pkp
SIG
Current: no -> have
&
>=1
&
0
[SOTF.t_En]
Manual closing signal
Figure 3.24-3 Logic of manual closing signal
If the three-phase current changes from “no” to “have”, and the breaker position changes from
“open” to “closed”, it will be judged that the acceleration condition for manual closing is satisfied.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-190
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG
AR signal
SIG
Manual closing signal
>=1
SET Ia>[50PSOTF.I_Set]
>=1
SET Ib>[50PSOTF.I_Set]
SET Ic>[50PSOTF.I_Set]
SIG
I3P
EN
[50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk]
2nd Hm Detect
SET Ua<[50PSOTF.Up_Set]
&
&
>=1
SET Ub<[50PSOTF.Up_Set]
3
&
SET Uc<[50PSOTF.Up_Set]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_Up_UV]
SET Uab<[50PSOTF.Upp_Set]
>=1
SET Ubc<[50PSOTF.Upp_Set]
>=1
&
SET Uca<[50PSOTF.Upp_Set]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV]
SET U2>[50PSOTF.U2_Set]
&
>=1
>=1
EN
[50PSOTF.En_U2_OV]
SET 3U0>[50PSOTF.3U0_Set]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_Up_UV]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_U2_OV]
EN
[50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV]
SIG
50PSOTF.Valid
&
>=1
&
[50PSOTF.t_Op]
0
50PSOTF.Op
50PSOTF.St
Figure 3.24-4 Logic of phase overcurrent SOTF protection
SIG I3P/I1P
2nd Hm Detect
&
SET [50/51G1.En_Hm2_Blk]
SIG AR signal
>=1
SIG Manual closing signal
&
50GSOTF.St
[50GSOTF.t_Op] 0
SET 3I0>[50GSOTF.3I0_Set]
50GSOTF.Op
SIG 50GSOTF.Valid
Figure 3.24-5 Logic of earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-191
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.24.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings SOTF Settings
Table 3.24-2 Settings of SOTF protection
No.
3
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
SOTF.t_En
0.2~100
0.4
s
0.001
2
50PSOTF.I_Set
0.05~200
1
A
0.001
3
50PSOTF.Up_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
4
50PSOTF.Upp_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
5
50PSOTF.U2_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
6
50PSOTF.3U0_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
7
50PSOTF.t_Op
0~100
0.1
s
0.001
8
50PSOTF.En
Enabled
-
-
9
50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
Disabled
-
-
10
11
50PSOTF.En_Up_UV
50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Description
The initiating time for the SOTF
protection
Current setting of phase overcurrent
SOTF protection
Voltage
setting
for
phase
undervoltage supervision logic
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase
undervoltage supervision logic
Voltage setting for negative-sequence
overvoltage supervision logic
Voltage setting for zero-sequence
overvoltage supervision logic
Time delay for phase overcurrent
SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling phase overcurrent
SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
blocking for phase overcurrent SOTF
protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
phase
undervoltage supervision logic for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
phase-to-phase
undervoltage supervision logic for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
12
50PSOTF.En_U2_OV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
negative-sequence
supervision
logic
overvoltage
for
phase
overcurrent SOTF protection
13
50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
overvoltage
zero-sequence
supervision
logic
for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection
The option of the residual current
14
50GSOTF.Opt_3I0
Ext
Cal
used by earth fault overcurrent SOTF
Cal
-
-
protection
Ext: the measured residual current
Cal: the calculated residual current
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-192
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
15
50GSOTF.3I0_Set
0.05~200
1
A
0.001
16
50GSOTF.t_Op_3P
0~100
0.1
s
0.001
17
50GSOTF.En
Enabled
-
-
18
50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Current
setting
-
-
earth
fault
overcurrent SOTF protection
Time delay for earth fault overcurrent
SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
earth
fault
overcurrent SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
of
earth
fault
overcurrent SOTF protection blocked
by harmonic
3
3.25 Thermal Overload Protection (49)
When the power equipment is overloaded, a large current may cause the temperature of the
equipment to rise. When the temperature is high, the internal insulation of the equipment may be
aged, thereby increasing the possibility of internal failure. Thermal overload protection considers
the continuous heating state of the device, the thermal model of the device is established based
on the measured current and the time constant.
3.25.1 Function Description
The device provides two thermal overload calculation methods: 1) only calculated by current; 2)
for the scenario with oil temperature measurement function, calculate the temperature difference
between the equipment (such as transformer windings) and the oil, and then plus the oil
temperature measured by the sensor, to obtain the final temperature.
⚫
Method 1:
Two stages overload protection are available, one stage for alarm purpose and the other stage for
trip purpose. The two stages are timed separately. When the thermal overload calculation reaches
the alarm setting value, an alarm signal will be issued to remind the operating personnel. If the
temperature continues to rise to reach the tripping setting value, the thermal overload protection
operates to trip.
The operating time of thermal overload protection complies with the IEC60255-8 standard and it is
calculated via the fundamental current or 1st to 11th harmonic current.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-193
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Refer to IEC60255-8
t
Ip
P=—
IB
P = 0.0
P = 0.6
P = 0.8
P = 0.9
3
kIB
I
Figure 3.25-1 The operation characteristic curve of thermal overload protection
There are two kinds of thermal overload calculation modes: cold start mode and hot start mode.
The calculation formulas for the two modes are as follows:
1)
Cold start mode
t = ln
2)
I eq
I eq − (k I B )
Hot start mode
t = ln
I eq − I p
I eq − (k I B )
Where:
t is the theoretical operating time for the corresponding current.
τ is the thermal time constant of the protected device, i.e. [49.Tau]. When the current Ieq is lower
than 0.04In, the thermal time constant adopts the value of [49.Tau]*[49.C_Disspt].
Ieq is the actual measured current.
IP is the steady-state load for a period of time before the overload. The result is that the
transformer is in a stable thermal equilibrium state (the duration needs to be several times longer
than the time constant τ), which is equivalent to the previous memoried current, the value is “0” for
the cold start mode.
ln is the natural logarithm.
IB is the reference current and it corresponds to the setting [49.Ib_Set].
k is the thermal overload factor, it corresponds to the setting [49.K_Trp] or [49.K_Alm].
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-194
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
If the device adopts the hot start model, the device calculates the I P in real time through the
external input current, and users do not need to set the value of IP.
The tripping of the protection is controlled by the current. After the current disappears, the
protection will drop-out immediately even if the heat accumulation is still greater than the tripping
setting. The alarm of the protection is not controlled by the current, as long as the heat
accumulation is greater than the alarm setting, it will always be alarmed and it can be used to
block the automatic closing of the device.
⚫
Method 2:
The temperature of the equipment can be calculated from the actual measured oil temperature
(via the PT100 sensor) plus the temperature difference between the equipment and the oil.
T_Equipment = T_Oil + T_Diff
The temperature difference between the equipment and the oil can be calculated by actual
measurement and it will change with the device current. When the current changes from “0” to “1”,
the temperature can be calculated by the following formula.
T_Diff = [49. K_T_Diff] × (
α
−t
I
) × (1 − eTau )
[49. Ib_Set]
Finally, the steady-state temperature difference is as follows:
T_Diff = [49. K_T_Diff] × (
α
I
)
[49. Ib_Set]
Where:
I is the measured current;
α is the cooling factor, it usually takes 1.6 or 2;
t is the time;
Tau is the time constant;
Users can compare the calculated temperature with the set temperature and set the time delay
through logic programming, it can be selected to operate to trip or alarm.
The logic diagram of enabling/disabling thermal overload protection is shown as below:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-195
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
EN
[49.En_Trp]
EN
[49.En_Alm]
>=1
&
49.On
SIG 49.Enable
&
SIG 49.Block
49.Blocked
>=1
SIG Fail_Device
&
49.Valid
3
Figure 3.25-2 Logic diagram of enabling/disabling thermal overload protection
The logic diagram of the fault detector of thermal overload protection is shown as below.
SIG
49.in_I3P
SET [49.Ib_Set]
&
0
SIG 49.On
500ms
&
49.Pkp
FD.Pkp
SIG 49.Valid
Figure 3.25-3 Logic diagram of the fault detector of thermal overload protection (method 1)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-196
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.25.2 Function Block Diagram
49
49.Accu_A
49.Enable
49.Accu_B
49.Block
49.Accu_C
49.Clr
49.T_Diff_A
49.T_Diff_B
49.T_Diff_C
49.On
3
49.Blocked
49.Valid
49.St
49.St_A
49.St_B
49.St_C
49.Op
49.Op_A
49.Op_B
49.Op_C
49.Alm
3.25.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.25-1 Input/output signals of thermal overload protection
No.
Input Signal
1
49.Enable
2
49.Block
3
49.Clr
No.
Description
Thermal overload protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Thermal overload protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Clear thermal overload statistics
Output Signal
Description
1
49.Accu_A
Phase-A thermal state of thermal overload protection.
2
49.Accu_B
Phase-B thermal state of thermal overload protection.
3
49.Accu_C
Phase-C thermal state of thermal overload protection.
4
49.T_Diff_A
5
49.T_Diff_B
6
49.T_Diff_C
7
49.On
Thermal overload protection is enabled
8
49.Blocked
Thermal overload protection is blocked
9
49.Valid
Thermal overload protection is valid
The calculated temperature difference of phase-A between winding temperature
and oil temperature.
The calculated temperature difference of phase-B between winding temperature
and oil temperature.
The calculated temperature difference of phase-C between winding temperature
and oil temperature.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-197
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3
10
49.St
Thermal overload protection starts
11
49.StA
Phase-A thermal overload protection starts.
12
49.StB
Phase-B thermal overload protection starts.
13
49.StC
Phase-C thermal overload protection starts.
14
49.Op
Thermal overload protection operates to trip.
15
49.Op.PhA
Phase-A thermal overload protection operates to trip.
16
49.Op.PhB
Phase-B thermal overload protection operates to trip.
17
49.Op.PhC
Phase-C thermal overload protection operates to trip.
18
49.Alm
Thermal overload protection operates to alarm.
3.25.4 Logic
SIG
49.Pkp
SIG
49.in_I3P
SET
[49.Ib_Set]
&
EN
49.St
&
Timer
t
[49.En_Alm]
&
EN
[49.En_Trp]
SIG
49.Clr
49.Alm
t
Timer
t
49.Op
t
Figure 3.25-4 Logic diagram of thermal overload protection (method 1)
3.25.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings ThOvLd Settings
Table 3.25-2 Settings of thermal overload protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
49.Ib_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
2
49.K_Trp
1~3
1.2
-
0.001
3
49.K_Alm
1~3
1.1
-
0.001
4
49.t_Tau
0.1~100
1
min
0.001
5
49.K_T_Diff
0~200
30
-
0.001
6
49.Alpha_Cold
1~2
2
-
0.001
Description
The reference current setting of thermal
overload protection
The thermal overload factor setting for
tripping
The thermal overload factor setting for
alarm
The heat accumulation time constant of
thermal overload protection
The temperature constant of thermal
overload protection
The cooling factor of thermal overload
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-198
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Heat dissipation time constant setting.
7
49.C_Disspt
0.100~10
.000
1.000
-
0.001
When the current Ieq is lower than 0.04In,
the thermal time constant adopts the value
of [49.Tau]*[49.C_Disspt].
8
49.En_Trp
9
49.En_Alm
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
Disabled
-
-
Enabling/Disabling
thermal
overload
protection operate to trip
Enabling/Disabling
thermal
overload
protection operate to alarm
3.26 Transfer Trip (TT)
When breaker failure protection, dead zone protection or overvoltage protection, etc. of the
opposite end operates, it is required that the device at the local end operates quickly. The device
provides transfer trip to fulfill the application, including phase-segregated and
non-phase-segregated input signals used to initiate transfer trip, which can receive transfer trip
signals from the opposite end. After receiving transfer trip signal from the opposite end,
simultaneous tripping at both ends can be ensured.
3.26.1 Function Description
The device provides phase-segregated transfer trip and three-phases transfer trip, which can be
controlled by local fault detector by the settings [TT.En_FD_Ctrl]. In addition, the input signals
[TT.Init_A], [TT.Init_B], [TT.Init_C] and [TT.Init_3P] are always supervised, and the device will
issue an alarm [TT.Alm] and block transfer trip once the binary input is energized for longer than
the setting [TT.t_Op]+5s and drop off after resumed to normal with a time delay of 10s. Both
phase-segregated transfer trip and three-phase transfer trip operate to block AR if the setting
[TT.En_BlkAR] is set as "Enabled".
3.26.2 Function Block Diagram
TT
TT.Enable
TT.Block
TT.On
TT.Blocked
TT.Init_3P
TT.Valid
TT.Alm
TT.Op_3P
3.26.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.26-1 Input/Output signals of transfer trip
No.
Input Signal
Description
1
TT.Enable
Input signal of enabling transfer trip
2
TT.Block
Input signal of blocking transfer trip
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-199
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3
TT.Init_3P
No.
Input signal of initiating transfer trip (Three phases)
Output Signal
Description
1
TT.On
Transfer trip is enabled.
2
TT.Blocked
Transfer trip is blocked.
3
TT.Valid
Transfer trip is valid.
4
TT.Alm
The initiating signal of transfer trip is abnormal.
5
TT.Op_3P
Transfer trip operates. (Three phases)
3.26.4 Logic
3
EN
[TT.En]
BI
TT.Enable
BI
TT.Block
&
TT.On
&
TT.Blocked
>=1
SIG Fail_Device
&
TT.Valid
[TT.t_Op]+5s 10s
SIG TT.Init_3P
TT.Alm
SIG TT.Alm
EN
[TT.En_FD_Ctrl]
>=1
&
SIG Local fault detector
&
SIG TT.Valid
[TT.t_Op] 0
TT.Op_3P
SIG TT.Init_3P
Figure 3.26-1 Logic of transfer trip
3.26.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings TT Settings
Table 3.26-2 Settings of transfer trip
No.
Setting
1
TT.t_Op
2
TT.En
3
TT.En_FD_Ctrl
Range
0.000~60
0.000
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Default
Unit
Step
Description
0.005
s
0.001
Time delay of transfer trip
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling transfer trip
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling transfer trip controlled
by local fault detector element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-200
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
4
TT.En_BlkAR
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling transfer trip operate to
block AR
3.27 Automatic Reclosure (79)
To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, the device is installed on the
transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances. Faults caused by
lightning, wind, or tree branches could be transient in nature and may disappear once the circuit is
de-energized. According to statistics, for overhead transmission line, 80%~90% of the faults on
overhead lines are the transient faults. AR are installed to restore the faulted section of the
transmission system once the fault is extinguished (providing it is a transient fault). For certain
transmission systems, AR is used to improve system stability by restoring critical transmission
paths as soon as possible.
Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so
on, are generally permanent fault, and AR is not initiated after faulty feeder is tripped. For some
mixed circuits, such as overhead line with a transformer unit, hybrid transmission lines, etc., it is
required to ensure that AR is only initiated for faults overhead line section, or make a choice
according to the situation.
3.27.1 Function Description
AR can be used with either integrated device or external device. When AR is used with integrated
device, the internal protection logic can initiate AR, moreover, a tripping contact from external
device can be connected to the device via input signal to initiate integrated AR.
When AR is used as an independent device, it can be initiated by operating signal of protections.
The device can output some configurable output signals (such as, contact signals or digital signal,
for example, GOOSE signal) to initiate external AR or block external AR. The contact signals
includes tripping signal, blocking AR signal and protection operating signal, etc,. According to
requirement, these contacts can be selectively connected to external AR and the device can be
set as one-shot or multi-shot AR.
3.27.1.1 Enable AR
When the setting [79.Opt_Enable] is set as "Setting&Config", AR is determined whether it is
enabled or disabled by the external input signal and the internal setting. Otherwise, it is only
determined by the internal setting. When AR is enabled, the device outputs the signal "79.On",
otherwise the device outputs the signal "79.Off".
The logic of enabling AR is:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-201
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
EN
[79.En]
SET
[79.Opt_Enable]=Setting
SET
[79.Opt_Enable]=Setting&Config
SIG
79.Enable
SIG
79.Block
&
>=1
79.On
&
79.Off
&
Figure 3.27-1 Logic of enabling AR
3
3.27.1.2 Synchronism Check for AR
When the synchronism check mode of auto-reclosing is independent of that of manual closing, the
device provides dedicated settings used by synchronism check for AR. The synchronism check
mode can be determined by the settings or configuration signals. When the setting
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting", the synchronism check mode for AR is determined
by
the
settings,
[79.En_SynChk],
[79.En_SynDd_RefDd],
[79.En_SynLv_RefDd],
[79.En_SynDd_RefLv] and [79.En_NoChk]. When the setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set
as "Config", the synchronism check mode for AR is determined by configuration signals,
"79.Sel_SynChk", "79.Sel_SynDd_RefDd", "79.Sel_SynLv_RefDd", "79.Sel_SynDd_RefLv"
and "79.Sel_NoChk".
EN
1
[79.En_SynChk]
79.On_SynChk
SIG
79.Sel_SynChk
EN
[79.En_SynDd_RefDd]
0
1
79.On_SynDd_RefDd
SIG
79.Sel_SynDd_RefDd
EN
[79.En_SynLv_RefDd]
SIG
79.Sel_SynLv_RefDd
EN
[79.En_SynDd_RefLv]
SIG
79.Sel_SynDd_RefLv
EN
[79.En_NoChk]
SIG
79.Sel_NoChk
EN
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
0
1
79.On_SynLv_RefDd
0
1
79.On_SynDd_RefLv
0
1
79.On_NoChk
0
Figure 3.27-2 Logic of synchronism check mode selection for AR
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-202
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Based on the chosen synchronism check mode for AR, the device judges whether the
synchronism condition is satisfied, and then implement reclosing. When none of the synchronism
check modes for AR is selected, the device will issue an alarm "79.Alm_RSYN_Mode".
3.27.1.3 AR Ready
AR must be ready to operate before performing reclosing. The output signal [79.Ready] means
that the auto-reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function, i.e., breaker
open-close-open.
When the device is energized or after the settings are modified, AR cannot be ready unless the
following conditions are met:
1.
AR is enabled.
2.
The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal.
3.
The duration of the circuit breaker in closed position pre-fault is greater than the setting
[79.t_CBClsd].
4.
There is no the signal of blocking AR.
After AR operates, it must reset, i.e. [79.Active]=0, in addition to the above conditions for reclosing
again.
When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After the fault is cleared, the tripping signal will drop out immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and in excess of the time
delay [79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked, as shown in Figure 3.27-3.
The input signal [79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before AR gets ready. Because most circuit
breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary that circuit breaker
has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is exhausted, AR will be blocked
if the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay [79.t_CBReady]. If this
function is not required, the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] can be not to configure, and its state will
be thought as “1” by default.
In order to block AR reliably even if the signal of manually open circuit breaker not connected to
the input signal of blocking AR, when the circuit breaker is open by manually and there is CB
position input under normal conditions, AR will be blocked with the time delay of 100ms if AR is
not initiated and no any trip signal.
SIG
Any tripping signal
[79.t_PersistTrp]
0
>=1
0
SIG
[79.t_DDO_Blk]
79.Blocked
79.LockOut
Figure 3.27-3 Logic of AR block
When AR is disabled, AR fails, synchronism check fails or last shot is reached, or when the
internal blocking condition of AR is met. AR will be discharged immediately and next AR will be
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-203
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
disabled. When the input signal [79.LockOut] is energized, AR will be blocked immediately. The
blocking flag of AR will be also controlled by the internal blocking condition of AR. When the
blocking flag of AR is valid, AR will be blocked immediately. The logic of AR ready is shown in
Figure 3.27-4.
AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, but the blocking
condition of AR will drop out with a time delay [79.t_DDO_Blk] after blocking signal disappears.
>=1
SIG CB closed position
3
[79.t_CBClsd]
SIG 79.Active
100ms
&
>=1
SIG Any tripping signal
&
&
2s
0
79.Ready
SIG 79.Inprog
BI
[79.CB_Healthy]
SIG 79.Blocked
0
[79.t_CBReady]
&
>=1
>=1
SIG 79.Lockout
SIG 79.Failed
&
>=1
SIG 79.Fail_Chk
SIG Last shot is made
SIG 79.On
Figure 3.27-4 Logic of AR ready
When any protection element operates to trip, the device will output a signal [79.Active] until AR
drop out (Reset Command). Any tripping signal can be from external protection device or internal
protection element.
3.27.1.4 AR Initiation
AR can be initiated by the tripping signal of line protection or CB state.
1.
AR initiated by tripping signal of line protection
AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from
internal trip signal or external trip signal.
When AR is ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1) and the tripping signal is received, this tripping
signal will be kept in the device, and AR will be initiated after the tripping signal drops out. The
tripping signal kept in the device will be cleared after the completion of AR sequence (Reset
Command). Its logic is shown in Figure 3.27-5.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-204
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG
Reset Command
&
>=1
SIG
Trip Signal
&
SIG
AR Initiation
79.Ready
Figure 3.27-5 Tripping initiating AR
2.
3
AR initiated by CB state
AR can be initiated by CB state by setting the setting [79.En_CBInit]. Under normal conditions,
when AR is ready to reclose (“79.Ready”=1), AR will be initiated if circuit breaker is open and
corresponding phase current is nil. AR initiated by CB state logic is shown in Figure 3.27-6
respectively. Usually normally closed contact of circuit breaker is used to reflect CB state.
SIG
CB open
EN
[79.En_CBInit]
SIG
79.Ready
&
AR Initiation
&
Figure 3.27-6 CB state initiating AR
3.27.1.5 AR Reclosing
When the dead time delay of AR expires after AR is initiated, if the synchronism check is enabled,
the release of reclosing signal shall be subject to the result of synchronism check.
After the dead time delay of AR expires, if the synchronism check is still unsuccessful within the
time delay [79.t_wait_Chk], the signal of synchronism check failure ("79.Fail_Chk") will be output
and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with no-check is enabled, the condition of synchronism
check success ("25.RSYN_OK") will always be established. And the signal of synchronism check
success ("25.RSYN_OK") from the synchronism check logic can be applied by AR inside the
device or outside the device.
[79.t_Dd_3PS1]
SIG 79.Inhibit_AR
SIG 3-pole AR Initiation
0
&
If 79.Inhibit_AR operates,
then circuit of time delay
will be interrupted.
AR Pulse
>=1
&
[79.t_Wait_Chk]
0
79.Fail_Chk
SIG 79.Ok_Chk
Figure 3.27-7 One-shot AR
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-205
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [79.t_PW]. For the circuit breaker without
anti-pump interlock, the setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to control the reclosing pulse. When
this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop
out immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto fault. After the reclosing signal is
issued, AR will drop out with time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next reclosing.
The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing signal is given. The reclaim timer defines a time
from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new
trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault.
SIG
3
0ms
AR Pulse
SIG
Three - phase Trip
EN
[ 79.En _ CutPulse ]
[79.t_PW]
&
&
79.Out
>=1
SIG
&
79.Out
[79.t_ Reclaim]
0ms
Reset Command
Figure 3.27-8 Reclosing output logic
3.27.1.6 Reclosing Failure and Success
For line fault, the fault will be cleared after the device operates to trip. When the following cases
appear, the reclosing is unsuccessful.
1.
If any protection element operates to trip when AR is enabled ("79.On"=1) and AR is not
ready ("79.Ready"=0), the device will output the signal "79.Failed".
2.
For one-shot AR, if the tripping signal is received again within reclaim time after the reclosing
pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
3.
For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and the
tripping signal is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be
considered as unsuccessful.
4.
The setting [79.En_FailCheck] is available to judge whether the reclosing is successful by CB
state, when it is set as “Enabled”. If CB is still in open position with a time delay [79.t_Fail]
after the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful. For this
case, the device will issue a signal "79.Failed" to indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful,
and this signal will drop out after (Reset Command). AR will be blocked if the reclosing shall
be considered as unsuccessful.
After unsuccessful AR is confirmed, AR will be blocked.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-206
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
SIG
79.On
SIG
79.Ready
SIG
Any tripping command
SIG
Last shot is made
&
&
>=1
0
SIG
79.Inprog
SIG
79.Blocked
100ms
>=1
79.Failed
&
3
>=1
SIG
AR Pulse
SIG
CB closed
EN
&
[79.t_Fail ]
0
&
[79.En_ FailCheck ]
&
&
0
SIG
0s 2s
Reset Command
79.Succeeded
[79.t_Fail ]
79.Completed
Figure 3.27-9 Reclosing failure and success
3.27.1.7 Reclosing Numbers Control
The device may be set up into one-shot or multi-shot AR. Through the setting [79.Num], the
maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is
selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is selected.
⚫
[79.Num]=1
It means one-shot reclosing. Line protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault
occurs on the line and AR will be initiated. After the dead time delay for AR is expired, the device
will send reclosing pulse, and then AR will drop out after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for
the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and the device will output the signal of reclosing failure "79.Failed".
⚫
[79.Num]>1
It means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing, line protection device will operate to trip
when a transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be initiated. After the dead time delay of the
first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then AR will drop out after the
time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will
operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and then AR is initiated after the tripping
contact drops off. After the time delay for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The
sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number
[79.Num] is reached.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-207
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.27.1.8 AR Time Sequence Diagram
The following two examples indicate typical time sequence of AR process for transient fault and
permanent fault respectively.
Signal
Fault
3
Trip
CB 52b
Open
[79.t_Reclaim]
79.t_Reclaim
79.Active
79.Inprog
[79.t_Dd_3PS1]
79.Inprog_3P
[79.t_Dd_3PS1]
79.Ok_Chk
AR Out
[79.t_PW]
79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Failed
Time
Figure 3.27-10 Transient fault
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-208
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
Signal
Fault
Trip
52b
Open
Open
[79.t_Reclaim]
79.t_Reclaim
79.Active
3
79.Inprog
79.Inprog_3P1
79.Inprog_3PS2
[79.t_Dd_3PS1]
[79.t_Dd_3PS2]
79.Ok_Chk
AR Out
[79.t_PW]
[79.t_PW]
79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Failed
200ms
Time
Figure 3.27-11 Permanent fault ([79.Num]=2)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-209
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.27.2 Function Block Diagram
79
79. Enable
79.On
79.Block
79.Off
79.Trp3P
79. Close
79. Ready
79. Lockout
3
79.CB_ Healthy
79.AR_Blkd
79.Clr_ Counter
79. Active
79. Inprog
79. Inprog_3P
79.Inprog _ 3PS1
79.Inprog _ 3PS2
79.Inprog _ 3PS3
79.Inprog _ 3PS4
79. Rcls_ Status
79.Failed
79.Succeeded
79.Completed
79.Fail_Chk
3.27.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.27-1 Input/Output signals of AR
No.
Input Signal
1
79.Enable
2
79.Block
3
79.Trp3P
Description
Input signal of enabling AR, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic
etc.
Input signal of blocking AR, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic
etc.
Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the operating
4
79.Lockout
signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection and busbar differential
protection, etc.
5
79.CB_Healthy
6
79.Clr_Counter
No.
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to perform the
close function
Clear the reclosing counter
Output Signal
Description
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-210
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
1
79.On
AR is enabled.
2
79.Off
AR is disabled.
3
79.Close
AR operates.
4
79.Ready
AR have been ready for reclosing cycle.
5
79.Blocked
AR is blocked.
6
79.Active
AR logic is active.
7
79.Inprog
AR cycle is in progress
8
79.Inprog_3P
3-pole AR cycle is in progress
9
79.Inprog_3PS1
First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
10
79.Inprog_3PS2
Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
11
79.Inprog_3PS3
Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
12
79.Inprog_3PS4
Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
3
AR status
0: AR is preprocessed
13
79.Status
1: AR is ready.
2: AR is in progress.
3: AR is successful.
14
79.Failed
Auto-reclosing fails
15
79.Succeeded
Auto-reclosing is successful
16
79.Fail_Chk
Synchro-check for AR fails
17
79.Completed
AR is completed.
3.27.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings AR Settings
Table 3.27-2 Settings of AR
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
79.Num
1~4
1
-
1
2
79.t_Dd_3PS1
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
3
79.t_Dd_3PS2
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
4
79.t_Dd_3PS3
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
5
79.t_Dd_3PS4
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
6
79.t_CBClsd
0~600
5.000
s
0.001
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Description
Maximum
number
of
reclosing
attempts
Dead time of first shot 3-pole
reclosing
Dead time of second shot 3-pole
reclosing
Dead time of third shot 3-pole
reclosing
Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole
reclosing
Time delay of circuit breaker in
closed position before reclosing
3-211
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
Time delay to wait for CB healthy,
and begin to timing when the input
7
79.t_CBReady
0~600
5.000
s
0.001
signal
[79.CB_Healthy]
de-energized
and
if
it
is
is
not
energized within this time delay, AR
will be blocked.
3
8
79.t_Wait_Chk
0~600
10.000
s
0.001
9
79.t_Reclaim
0~600
15.000
s
0.001
Maximum wait time for synchronism
check
Reclaim time of AR
Dropout time delay of blocking AR,
10
79.t_DDO_Blk
0~600
5.000
s
0.001
when
blocking
signal
for
AR
disappears, AR blocking condition
drops out after this time delay
11
79.t_PersistTrp
0~600
0.200
s
0.001
Time delay of excessive trip signal
to block AR
Time delay allow for CB status
12
79.t_Fail
0~600
0.200
s
0.001
change
to
conform
reclosing
successful
13
14
79.t_PW
79.En_FailCheck
15
79.En_CutPulse
16
79.En
0~600
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
0.120
s
0.001
Pulse width of AR closing signal
Enabling/disabling confirm whether
Disabled
-
-
AR is successful by checking CB
state
Disabled
-
-
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling adjust the length
of reclosing pulse
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing
Enabling/disabling AR by external
input signal besides logic setting
17
79.Opt_Enable
Setting
Setting&Config
Setting
-
-
[79.En]
Setting: only the setting
Setting&Config: the setting and
configuration signal
18
79.En_CBInit
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling AR be initiated
by open state of circuit breaker
Selection of decision mode for AR
19
79.Opt_RSYN_Valid
Setting;
Mode
Config
synchronism check
Setting
-
-
Setting: determined by the setting
Config:
determined
by
the
configuration signal
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-212
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
Enabling/disabling
20
79.En_SynChk
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
synchro-check
of AR (valid only if the setting
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
=
Setting)
Enabling/disabling dead check for
both the reference side and the
21
79.En_SynDd_RefDd
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
synchronization side (valid only if
the
setting
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
=
Setting)
Enabling/disabling live check for
synchronization
22
79.En_SynLv_RefDd
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
side
and
dead
check for reference side (valid only
if
the
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
setting
=
Setting)
Enabling/disabling dead check for
23
79.En_SynDd_RefLv
Disabled
Enabled
synchronization side and live check
Disabled
-
-
for reference side (valid only if the
setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
= Setting)
Enabling/disabling AR without any
24
79.En_NoChk
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
check (valid only if the setting
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
=
Setting)
3.28 VT Circuit Supervision (VTS)
3.28.1 General Application
The purpose of VT circuit supervision is to detect whether VT circuit is normal. Some protection
functions should be disabled when measurement from VT circuit fails.
VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,
poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect them and issue an
alarm signal to block relevant protection functions. However, the alarm of VT circuit failure should
not be issued when the following cases happen.
⚫
Line VT is used as protection VT and the protected line is out of service.
⚫
Only current protection functions are enabled and VT is not connected to the device.
⚫
The specific current protection has picked up before the satisfaction of conditions of VT circuit
failure alarm.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-213
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
3.28.2 Function Description
VT circuit supervision can detect failure of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase on VT. Under
normal condition, the device continuously supervises input voltage from VT. The VT circuit failure
alarm will be issued with configurable time delay if residual voltage exceeds or negative-voltage
exceeds the threshold value or positive-sequence voltage is less than the threshold value. If a
specific current protection (such as breaker failure protection) operates to pick up, the time delay
count-down will be paused until the protection returns to normal state.
3
Under normal conditions, the device detects residual voltage that is greater than the setting
[VTS.3U0_Set] or negative-sequence voltage that is greater than the setting [VTS.U2_Set] to
distinguish a single-phase or two-phase VT circuit failure, and detects positive-sequence voltage
that is less than the setting [VTS.U1_Set] to distinguish a three-phase VT circuit failure. Upon
detecting abnormality on VT circuit, an alarm will come up after a time delay of [VTS.t_DPU] and
drop-off with a time delay of [VTS.t_DDO] after that VT is restored to normal. Upon abnormality
detection on VT circuit, an instant alarm will be issued after a time delay of 25ms and drop-off
without time delay.
VT (secondary circuit) MCB auxiliary contact can be connected to the binary input circuit of the
device as a binary signal. If the MCB has been opened (i.e. "VTS.MCB_VT" is energized), the
device will consider that the VT circuit is in a bad condition and issue an alarm without a time
delay. If the auxiliary contact is not connected to the device, VT circuit supervision will be issued
with time delay as mentioned in previous paragraph.
When VT is not connected into the device, the alarm shall be not issued if the logic setting [En_VT]
is set as "Disabled". However, the alarm is still issued if the binary input "VTS.MCB_VT" is
energized, no matter that the logic setting [En_VT] is set as "Disabled" or "Enabled".
3.28.3 Function Block
VTS
VTS.Enable
VTS.Block
VTS.Alm
VTS.InstAlm
VTS.MCB_VT
VTS.in_52b
3.28.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.28-1 Input/output signals of VT circuit supervision
No.
Input Signal
1
VTS.Enable
2
VTS.Block
Description
VT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
VT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-214
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3
VTS.MCB_VT
Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
4
VTS.in_52b
Phase A opening position input of circuit breaker
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
VTS.Alm
Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails
2
VTS.InstAlm
Instantaneous alarm signal to indicate VT circuit failure
3.28.5 Logic
SIG
Pickup of specific current prot.
SET
3U0>[VTS.3U0_Set]
SET
U2>[VTS.U2_Set]
SET
U1<[VTS.U1_Set]
>=1
SET
[VTS.Opt_VT]=Bay
SIG
52b (three phase)
SIG
Ip > 0.04In
EN
[En_VT]
3
&
If specific current prot. picks up, the
time delay count-down will be paused.
>=1
&
[VTS.t_DPU]
[VTS.t_DDO]
>=1
&
>=1
&
VTS.Alm
VTS.MCB_VT
BI
EN
[VTS.En]
SIG
VTS.Enable
SIG
VTS.Block
&
Figure 3.28-1 VT circuit supervision logic diagram
SIG
Pickup of specific current prot.
SET
3U0>[VTS.3U0_Set]
SET
U2>[VTS.U2_Set]
SET
U1<[VTS.U1_Set]
>=1
&
>=1
SET
[VTS.Opt_VT]=Bay
SIG
52b (three phase)
SIG
Ip > 0.04In
EN
[En_VT]
&
If specific current prot. picks up, the
time delay count-down will be paused.
25ms
BI
>=1
0ms
&
>=1
&
VTS.InstAlm
VTS.MCB_VT
EN
[VTS.En]
SIG
VTS.Enable
SIG
VTS.Block
&
Figure 3.28-2 Instantaneous VT circuit supervision logic diagram
Where:
Ip is any measured single-phase current;
In is the rated phase current;
In this device, the specific current protection refers to phase overcurrent protection, earth fault
overcurrent protection and breaker failure protection.
⚫
If the specific protection picks up firstly and then an abnormality on VT circuit is detected. The
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-215
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
VT circuit failure alarm should not be issued before the specific protection returns to normal
state;
⚫
If an abnormality on VT circuit is detected firstly and then the specific protection operates to
pick up. The time delay count-down of VT circuit failure alarm shall be paused until the
protection return to normal state.
⚫
If the specific protection operates and VT circuit failure alarm has been issued, the alarm will
be maintained.
3.28.6 Settings
3
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Superv Settings
Table 3.28-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
1
VTS.U1_Set
30.00
0~100
0.01
V
2
VTS.3U0_Set
8.00
0~100
0.01
V
3
VTS.U2_Set
8.00
0~100
0.01
V
4
VTS.t_DPU
1.500
0.2~30
0.001
s
5
VTS.t_DDO
10.000
0.2~30
0.001
s
6
VTS.En
Enabled
-
-
7
VTS.Opt_VT
Bus
-
-
Disabled
Enabled
Bus or Bay
or
Description
Positive-sequence
voltage
threshold for VT circuit supervision
Zero-sequence voltage (calculated)
threshold for VT circuit supervision
Negative-sequence voltage setting
of VT circuit supervision function.
Delay pickup setting for the alarm of
VT circuit supervision
Delay drop off setting for the alarm
of VT circuit supervision
Logic setting for alarm function of
VT circuit supervision
Selection of Bay VT or Bus VT
3.29 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS)
The purpose of the CT circuit supervision is to detect any abnormality on CT secondary circuit.
When CT secondary circuit is abnormal, the current acquired by the device is not accurate, which
will affect protection functions related to the current. Therefore, it is necessary to monitor the CT
abnormal condition. When CT abnormality is detected, the device shall issue an alarm signal and
block the relevant protection functions.
3.29.1 Function Description
Under normal conditions, CT secondary signal is continuously supervised by detecting the
residual current and voltage. If residual current is larger than [CTS.3I0_Set] whereas residual
voltage is less than [CTS.3U0_Set], and any phase current is less than 0.04In, CT circuit failure is
considered. The concerned protection functions are blocked and an alarm is issued with a time
delay of [CTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of [CTS.t_DDO] after CT circuit is restored to
normal condition.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-216
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.29.2 Function Block Diagram
CTS
CTS.Enable
CTS.On
CTS.Block
CTS.Blocked
CTS.Valid
CTS.Alm
3
3.29.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.29-1 Input/output signals of CT circuit supervision
No.
Input Signal
1
CTS.Enable
2
CTS.Block
No.
Description
CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Output Signal
Description
1
CTS.Alm
Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails
2
CTS.On
CT circuit supervision is enabled.
3
CTS.Blocked
CT circuit supervision is blocked.
4
CTS.Valid
CT circuit supervision is valid.
3.29.4 Logics
EN
[CTS.En]
SIG
CTS.Enable
SIG
CTS.Block
SIG
Fail_Device
&
CTS.On
&
CTS.Blocked
>=1
&
CTS.Valid
SIG
CTS.Valid
SET
3I0>[CTS.3I0_Set]
SET
3U0<[CTS.3U0_Set]
SIG
IA<0.04In
SIG
IB<0.04In
SIG
IC<0.04In
&
[CTS.t_DPU]
[CTS.t_DDO]
CTS.Alm
&
>=1
Figure 3.29-1 Logic of CT circuit failure
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-217
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.29.5 Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Superv Settings
Table 3.29-2 Settings of CT circuit supervision
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Remark
The
1
CTS.3I0_Set
0.00~200.00
0.1
A
0.001
3
calculated
residual
current setting of CT circuit
supervision function.
The
2
CTS.3U0_Set
0.00~200.00
30
V
0.001
calculated
residual
voltage setting of CT circuit
supervision function.
3
CTS.t_DPU
0.000~100.000
1.25
s
0.001
4
CTS.t_DPO
0.000~100.000
10
s
0.001
5
CTS.En
Disabled
-
-
Disabled
Enabled
Delay pick-up time setting
for CT circuit failure
Delay drop-off time setting
for CT circuit failure
Enabling/disabling CT circuit
supervision function.
3.30 Fault Location (FL)
The main objective of line protection is fast, selective and reliable operation for faults on a
protected line section. Besides this, information on distance to fault is very important for those
involved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information on the fault location greatly
decreases the outage of the protected lines and increases the total availability of a power system.
This fault location function cannot be used for the transmission line with series compensation.
3.30.1 Function Description
For a permanent fault, it is necessary to find out and eliminate the fault point and as soon as
possible so as to reduce the time of power off. Therefore, accurate fault location is very important.
Single-end fault location is available in the device. Fault location picks up after the device
operates to trip when there is a fault in the line. If the pickup time is greater than 25ms, fault
location is calculated with a time delay of 10ms after the device operates to trip. If the pickup time
is smaller than 25ms, fault location is calculated with a time delay of 20ms after the device
operates to trip.
When there is a protection tripping with faulty phase selection, the calculation of the fault
impedance is initiated. According to the fault impedance to locate the fault point, two calculation
results are provided, which is the length of the fault point distance from the end of the device and
its percentage of the lines length.
For parallel lines, there is a mutual coupling between each phase, and there is also a mutual
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-218
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
coupling between parallel lines. The coupling strength between parallel lines associated with the
transposition way. For parallel lines with fully transposition, positive-sequence and
negative-sequence mutual coupling is very small, and usually can be ignored. But zero-sequence
mutual coupling has a greater influence on the line, so the measured impedance must consider
the effect.
3.30.1.1 Fault Location Algorithm
The device adopts single-end fault location, which only uses the measured value of the voltage
and the current at one end. The error is mainly from the effect of fault resistance of fault point and
infeed current from power source of the opposite end.
When a short-circuit fault with fault resistance occurs, additional voltage will be generated in the
fault resistance by infeed current from power source of the opposite end, which will have a great
impact on the measurement result. Generally, the larger the fault resistance is, the larger the
impact will be.
EM
UM
ZM
Bus M
ZF
ZL-ZF
IM
IN
IF
UN
ZN
EN
Bus N
RF
Figure 3.30-1 Equivalent circuit of single-phase fault with fault resistance
Where:
U̇M is busbar voltage at side M.
İM is line phase current at side M.
İ0 is line zero-sequence current at side M.
İF is the fault current of fault resistance.
K 0 is zeros-sequence compensation coefficient
R F is fault resistance.
U̇M = (İM + K 0 × 3İ0 ) × ZF + İF × R F
İF =
CM0
3İ0
CM0
ZN0 + ZL0 − ZF0
=
ZM0 + ZN0 + ZL0
K0 =
Equation 3.30-1
ZF0 − ZF1
3ZF1
CM0 is zero-sequence distribution coefficient at side M.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-219
Date: 2020-09-02
3
3 Protection Functions
ZM0 is zero-sequence impedance at side M.
ZN0 is zero-sequence impedance at side N.
ZL0 is line zero-sequence impedance.
ZF1 is line positive-sequence impedance from side M to fault point.
ZF0 is line zero-sequence impedance from side M to fault point.
3
U̇M, İM and İ0 can be measured. Because the parameters of zero-sequence impedance circuit
between the system at both sides are generally similar. CM0 can be approximately thought as real
number. Therefore, ZF1 can be calculated by Equation 3.30-1.
3İ0
Equation 3.30-2
U̇M = (İM + K 0 × 3İ0 ) × ZF1 +
× RF
CM0
The two ends are multiplied by conjugate complex number of İ0.
I0′ × U̇M = (İM + K 0 × 3İ0 ) × I0′ × ZF1 +
3|I0 |2
× RF
CM0
Equation 3.30-3
Take the imaginary part of Equation 3.30-3,
Im[I0′ × U̇M ] = Im[(İM + K 0 × 3İ0 ) × I0′ × ZF1 ]
Equation 3.30-4
The result of fault location can be obtained directly by solving ZF1 .
The distance from the location of the device to the fault point (i.e., Fault Location) is:
Fault Location =
Im[ZF1 ]
× Line Length (km)
X1L
Fault Location (Percent) =
Fault Location
× 100%
Line Length
Where:
ZF1 is the measured impedance from the location of the device to the fault point.
X1L is line positive-sequence impedance.
Line Length is the length of transmission line (km)
3.30.2 Function Block Diagram
FL
Fault_Location
Fault_Phase
Max_Diff_Curr
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-220
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3.30.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.30-1 Output signals of fault location
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
Fault_Location
The result of fault location
2
Faulty_Phase
The selected faulty phase
3
Max_Diff_Curr
The maximum differential current at the moment of fault location
3.30.4 Settings
⚫
Access path:
3
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings Line Settings
Table 3.30-2 Settings of fault location
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
X1L
0~600
10
Ω
0.001
2
R1L
0~600
1
Ω
0.001
3
X0L
0~600
20
Ω
0.001
4
R0L
0~600
3
Ω
0.001
5
LineLength
0~6000
100
km
0.01
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Remark
Positive-sequence reactance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Positive-sequence resistance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Zero-sequence reactance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Zero-sequence resistance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Total length of the whole line
3-221
Date: 2020-09-02
3 Protection Functions
3
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3-222
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4 Control Functions
Table of Contents
4.1 Switchgear Control .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Functional Description .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Operation Theory.................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.3 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 I/O Signals ............................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.1.5 Logics ................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2 Manual Closing Synchronism Check ........................................................... 4-12
4.2.1 Operation Theory................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.2 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.3 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.4 Logics ................................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.2.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................... 4-18
List of Figures
Figure 4.1-2 DPS synthesis logic............................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4.1-3 DPS alarm logic ...................................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4.1-4 Interlocking logic ................................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4.1-5 Manual control logic .............................................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4.1-6 Logic diagram of closing operation ................................................................... 4-10
Figure 4.1-7 Logic diagram of opening operation ................................................................. 4-11
Figure 4.2-1 Relationship between reference and synchronous voltages ......................... 4-13
Figure 4.2-2 Synchronism check logic.................................................................................... 4-16
Figure 4.2-2 Synchro-check logic ............................................................................................ 4-17
Figure 4.2-4 Dead charge check logic ..................................................................................... 4-18
List of Tables
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-a
Date: 2020-09-02
4
4 Control Functions
Table 4.1-1 Remote/Local control mode switch logic.............................................................. 4-2
Table 4.1-2 Input/Output signals of control function ............................................................... 4-5
Table 4.1-3 Settings of DPS function....................................................................................... 4-11
Table 4.1-4 Settings of control function .................................................................................. 4-12
Table 4.1-5 Settings of interlocking function ......................................................................... 4-12
Table 4.2-1 Input/Output signals of manual closing synchronism check ........................... 4-15
Table 4.2-2 Settings of synchronism check ........................................................................... 4-18
4
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-b
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4.1 Switchgear Control
The switchgear control function is mainly used to realize operation of primary equipment such as
circuit breaker (CB), disconnect switch (DS) and earthing switch (ES). This function can be
divided into remote control and local control according to the control source location. A remote
control mainly refers to remote control commands from substation automation system (SAS) or
network control center (NCC). However, a control triggered manually from the device LCD, by a
terminal contact or by a panel handle is a local control. The switchgear control function is closely
related to interlocking, double point status (DPS), remote/local control mode switching and
tripping statistics.
4.1.1 Functional Description
A control command can realize various control signals such as the CB/DS/ES opening/closing. In
order to ensure the reliability of the control output, a locking circuit is added to each control object.
The operation is strictly in accordance with the selection, check and execution steps, to ensure
that the control operation can be safely and reliably implemented. In addition, the device has a
hardware self-checking and blocking function to prevent hardware damage from mal-operation
output.
When the device is in the remote-control mode, the control command may be sent via
communication protocol; when it is in the local control mode, the local operation may be
performed on the device LCD or panel handle.
A complete control process is:
1.
Protocol module sends a selection command;
2.
Control module responds the success or failure result of selection;
3.
If the selection is successful, the protocol module sends an execution command, otherwise it
sends a cancel command;
4.
Control module responds the success or failure result of execution;
5.
The control operation may be open/close or up/down/stop.
When the device is in the maintenance status, it can still respond to local control commands.
The switchgear control function can cooperate with functions such as synchronism check and
interlocking criteria calculation to complete the output of the corresponding operation command. It
can realize the normal control output in one bay and the interlocking and programmable logic
configuration between bays.
This device supports the following functional control module:
Module
Description
CSWI
Control of circuit breaker (CB), disconnector switch (DS) or earthing switch (ES)
RMTLOC
Remote or local control mode
XCBR
Synthesis of CB position, three-phase or phase separated
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-1
Date: 2020-09-02
4
4 Control Functions
Module
Description
XSWI
Synthesis of DS/ES position
SXCBR/SCSWI
Trip counter of CB/DS/ES
RSYN
Synchronism check for CB closing
CILO
Interlocking logic for CB/DS/ES control
MCSWI
Manual control of CB/DS/ES
CHKPOS
Position verification for switchgear control
4.1.2 Operation Theory
The initiation of a control command may be sent to the device by the SCADA or the NCC through
communication protocol. It may also be the operation of the device LCD or the manual triggering
through configured signal. The command is sent by the CPU to the control module for processing,
and a control record is made on the CPU module according to the control result.
4
4.1.2.1 Remote/Local Control Mode Switch
Since the source of a control command may be SAS or NCC, or may be triggered by the device
LCD or terminal contact, it is necessary to provide a remote/local control mode switch function.
The remote/local control mode switch function determines whether the device is in the remote or
the local control permission state through the configuration of terminal contact, function key, or
binary signal. Each control object provides a remote/local input, and the control module
determines the current control authority to be remote or local according to the input value. By
default, if the input is not configured, any control operation is blocked.
Table 4.1-1 Remote/Local control mode switch logic
in_Remote
in_Local
Remote Control
Local Control
NULL
NULL
Disable
Disable
0
NULL
Disable
Enable
1
NULL
Enable
Disable
NULL
0
Enable
Disable
NULL
1
Disable
Enable
0
0
Disable
Disable
0
1
Disable
Enable
1
0
Enable
Disable
1
1
Enable
Enable
4.1.2.2 Double Point Status
A double point status (DPS), which usually indicates switchgear status, can be derived from 2
ordinary binary inputs. The signification of a DPS is shown in the following table. For switchgear
status, only the 2 statuses "01" and "10" indicating respectively the positions opening and closing
are valid. The other 2 statuses "00" and "11", i.e. intermediate or bad status, will cause the alarm
"DPS.Alm".
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-2
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
DPS
Bit0 = 0
Bit0 = 1
Bit1 = 0
DPS_INT
DPS_OFF
Bit1 = 1
DPS_ON
DPS_BAD
The unit also supports the DPS synthesis through switchgear opening and closing positions after
jittering processing. The synthetic DPS contains original SOE timestamp. The CB control function
supports phase-segregated position inputs and can synthesize these inputs into general position.
In accordance with the control object, the DPS synthesis function is divided into 2 modules: XCBR
and XSWI. The XCBR is mainly used for CB position synthesis, including phase-segregated
positions, while the XSWI is used DS or ES position synthesis.
For the convenient use in user-defined logic programming, this functional module derives four
single-bit outputs to indicate each DSP state.
DPS State
Indication Signal
DPS_ON
DPS_OFF
DPS_INT
DPS_BAD
ON
1
0
0
0
OFF
0
1
0
0
INT
0
0
1
0
BAD
0
0
0
1
4
4.1.2.3 Trip Counter
The trip counter function takes the DPS of switchgear position as input count the trip times. For
CB, this device supports phase-segregated and general trip statistics. The trip counter function is
triggered by DPS change. The counting result is stored in non-volatile memory for power-off
holding.
Use the clear command from the menu in local LCD or customized binary signal to reset trip
counter.
4.1.2.4 Interlocking
The interlocking function will influence the control operation output. When the function is enabled,
the device determines whether the control operation is permitted based on the interlocking logic
result. Each control object is equipped with an independent interlocking logic which supports
unlocking operation through a binary signal.
The interlocking function is very important for the control operation of switchgears. During the
operation of primary equipment, the positions of the relevant equipment must be correct for
operation permission. For remote control, i.e. command from SAS or NCC, this device could
judge the interlocking logic depending on the message within the command; for local control
through device LCD or terminal contact, please use the corresponding logic setting to
enable/disable the interlocking function.
4.1.2.5 Manual Control
The switchgear control function supports manual control function that can be configured with a
terminal contact or binary signal to trigger the control operation.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-3
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
The manual control function supports the control input configuration of selection and open/close.
When the control object selection input is configured, the signal "1" indicates that the current
control object has to be selected before a control operation; if the control object selection input is
not configured, the control command can be directly issued without judgment of selection.
4.1.2.6 Switchgear Position Verification
The position verification function is provided during switchgear control process. In a control
function block of circuit breaker, disconnector or earthing switch, if the input “in_CheckPos_En” is
set as 1, the CB/DS/ES position shall be verified when receiving a remote or local control
command.
The verification logic complies with IEC 61850 standard is:
4
⚫
A control object only permits to be opened when its DPS is CLOSE;
⚫
A control object only permits to be closed when its DPS is OPEN;
⚫
The device shall respond control command failed with the cause of failure when its DPS is
INT, BAD or opposite (i.e. OPEN while opening or CLOSE while closing).
4.1.2.7 Direct Control
For applications such as signal reset and function enable/disable, the control mode is generally
direct control, i.e. execution without selection before, direct control with normal security in IEC
61850.
The direct control function provides remote/local switch and interlocking configurations. The
control command is usually issued directly by the SAS. It also supports the command triggered by
binary signal.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-4
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4.1.3 Function Block Diagram
4
XCBR: circuit breaker; XSWI: disconnector switch or earthing switch
4.1.4 I/O Signals
The prefix CB** for circuit breaker and DS** for disconnector switch in the
following lists are hidden since their description (if valid) are similar.
Table 4.1-2 Input/Output signals of control function
No.
1
Input Signal
in_en
Description
Enabling function
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-5
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4
2
In_blk
Disabling function
3
in_Remote
Remote control mode
4
in_Local
Local control mode
5
in_Pos_NO
Normally opened contact input for DPS opening position
6
in_Pos_NC
Normally closed contact input for DPS closing position
7
in_Pos_A_NO
Phase A normally opened contact input for DPS opening position
8
in_Pos_A_NC
Phase A normally closed contact input for DPS closing position
9
in_Pos_B_NO
Phase B normally opened contact input for DPS opening position
10
in_Pos_B_NC
Phase B normally closed contact input for DPS closing position
11
in_Pos_C_NO
Phase C normally opened contact input for DPS opening position
12
in_Pos_C_NC
Phase C normally closed contact input for DPS closing position
13
in_N_Trp
Opening command for trip counter
14
in_N_Trp_A
Phase A opening command for trip counter
15
in_N_Trp_B
Phase B opening command for trip counter
16
in_N_Trp_C
Phase C opening command for trip counter
17
in_Clr_Cnt
Clear trip counters
18
in_Rsyn
Structure pointer of synchronism check element
19
in_EnaOpn
Opening permission for interlocking
20
in_EnaCls
Closing permission for interlocking
21
in_CILO_Bypass
Bypass for interlocking
22
in_Manual_Sel
Selection for manual control
23
in_Manual_Opn
Opening for manual control
24
in_Manual_Cls
Closing for manual control
25
in_CheckPos_En
Input signal of enabling of position verification function for switchgear control
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
NO_DPS
DPS opening position
2
NC_DPS
DPS closing position
3
NO_DPS_A
Phase A DPS opening position
4
NC_DPS_A
Phase A DPS closing position
5
NO_DPS_B
Phase B DPS opening position
6
NC_DPS_B
Phase B DPS closing position
7
NO_DPS_C
Phase C DPS opening position
8
NC_DPS_C
Phase C DPS closing position
9
DPS
Synthetic DPS for switchgear position
10
DPS_A
Synthetic DPS for switchgear phase A position
11
DPS_B
Synthetic DPS for switchgear phase B position
12
DPS_C
Synthetic DPS for switchgear phase C position
13
N_Trp
Trip counter
14
N_Trp_A
Phase A trip counter
15
N_Trp_B
Phase B trip counter
16
N_Trp_C
Phase C trip counter
17
Opn_Enabled
Permission of opening operation
18
Cls_Enabled
Permission of closing operation
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-6
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
19
Opn/Cls_Enabled
Permission of operation (Opn_Enabled OR Cls_Enabled)
20
Opn_Exec
Opening operation
21
Cls_Exec
Closing operation
22
Opn_Sel
Opening selection
23
Cls_Sel
Closing selection
24
DPS.Alm
Alarm signal when DPS status is BAD or INT
25
Cmd_ManSel
Selection command for manual control
26
Cmd_ManOpn
Opening command for manual control
27
Cmd_ManCls
Closing command for manual control
28
RSYN_ChkInprog
Synchronism check is in progress
29
DPS_ON
Single-bit DPS state indication of ON
30
DPS_OFF
Single-bit DPS state indication of OFF
31
DPS_INT
Single-bit DPS state indication of INT
32
DPS_BAD
Single-bit DPS state indication of BAD
33
DPS_A_ON
Phase A single-bit DPS state indication of ON
34
DPS_A_OFF
Phase A single-bit DPS state indication of OFF
35
DPS_A_INT
Phase A single-bit DPS state indication of INT
36
DPS_A_BAD
Phase A single-bit DPS state indication of BAD
37
DPS_B_ON
Phase B single-bit DPS state indication of ON
38
DPS_B_OFF
Phase B single-bit DPS state indication of OFF
39
DPS_B_INT
Phase B single-bit DPS state indication of INT
40
DPS_B_BAD
Phase B single-bit DPS state indication of BAD
41
DPS_C_ON
Phase C single-bit DPS state indication of ON
42
DPS_C_OFF
Phase C single-bit DPS state indication of OFF
43
DPS_C_INT
Phase C single-bit DPS state indication of INT
44
DPS_C_BAD
Phase C single-bit DPS state indication of BAD
4
In above table, the prefix can be “CB” or “DS01”~“DS09”.
4.1.5 Logics
The prefix CB** for circuit breaker and DS** for disconnector switch in the
following diagrams are hidden since their logics (if valid) are similar.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-7
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
SIG
DPS_A = OFF
SIG
DPS_B = OFF
SIG
DPS_C = OFF
SIG
DPS_A = ON
SIG
DPS_B = ON
SIG
DPS_C = ON
SIG
DPS_A = INT
SIG
DPS_B = INT
SIG
DPS_C = INT
SIG
DPS_A = BAD
SIG
DPS_B = BAD
SIG
DPS_C = BAD
≥1
DPS = OFF
&
DPS = ON
≥1
DPS = INT
≥1
4
DPS = BAD
Figure 4.1-1 DPS synthesis logic
SIG
CSWI**.DPS = BAD
SIG
CSWI**.DPS = INT
>=1
&
[CSWI**.DPS.t_Alm]
SET
[CSWI**.DPS.t_Alm]
Alm_DPS
[CSWI**.DPS.En_Alm]
Figure 4.1-2 DPS alarm logic
SIG
Remote command from
SAS/NCC with "Interlocking" flag
SIG
Local command from device
LCD with "InterlockChk"
≥1
CSWI** interlocking
function activated
≥1
&
SIG
Contact triggered manual
opening/closing operation
EN
[CSWI**.En_Opn_Blk]
EN
[CSWI**.En_Cls_Blk]
≥1
Figure 4.1-3 Interlocking logic
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-8
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
SIG in_Manual_Sel = NUL
&
>=1
SIG in_Manual_Opn
SIG in_Manual_Sel
&
SIG in_Manual_Opn
&
SIG Opn_Enabled
Opn_Exec_Man
SIG Control mode = Local
SIG in_Manual_Sel = NUL
&
SIG in_Manual_Cls
SIG in_Manual_Sel
>=1
&
SIG in_Manual_Cls
4
&
SIG Cls_Enabled
Cls_Exec_Man
SIG Control mode = Local
Figure 4.1-4 Manual control logic
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-9
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
≥1
EN
[CB.En_CILO_Cls]
SIG
CB.Cls_Enabled
SIG
CB Control Mode = Remote
SIG
CB.Cmd_ManCls
SIG
CB closing cmd. from device local
HMI
&
≥1
≥1
&
&
SIG
CB closing cmd. from SCADA or
Gateway
SIG
CB.25.RSYN_OK
SIG
CB.25.SynChk_Enabled
SIG
CB.25.DdChk_Enabled
EN
[DS**.En_CILO_Cls]
SIG
DS**.Cls_Enabled
SIG
DS** Control Mode = Remote
SIG
CB.Cmd_ManCls
SIG
DS** closing cmd. from device
local HMI
0ms
[CB.t_PW_Cls]
0ms
[DS**.t_PW_Cls]
CB.Cls_Exec
≥1
&
4
≥1
&
≥1
&
≥1
DS**.Cls_Exec
&
SIG
DS** closing cmd. from SCADA or
Gateway
Figure 4.1-5 Logic diagram of closing operation
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-10
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
EN
[CB.En_CILO_Opn]
SIG
CB.Opn_Enabled
SIG
CB Control Mode = Remot e
SIG
CB.Opn_Exec_Man
SIG
CB opening cmd. from device
local HMI
≥1
&
≥1
&
0ms
[CB.t_PW_Opn]
CB.Opn_Exec
≥1
&
SIG
CB opening cmd. from SCADA or
Gateway
EN
[DS**.En_CILO_Opn]
SI G
DS**.Opn_Enabled
SI G
DS** Control Mode = Remote
SIG
DS**.Opn_Exec_Man
SIG
DS** opening cmd. from device
local HMI
≥1
4
&
≥1
&
0ms
[DS**.t_PW_Opn]
DS**.Opn_Exec
≥1
&
SIG
DS** opening cmd. from SCADA
or Gateway
Figure 4.1-6 Logic diagram of opening operation
In above figures, CSWI** can be “Breaker” or “Switch 01”~“Switch 09”.
4.1.6 Settings
Table 4.1-3 Settings of DPS function
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e.
1
CB.DPS.t_DPU
500
0~60000
1
ms
debounce time, for DPS of the circuit
breaker
2
CB.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
3
CB.DPS.t_Alm
500
Disabled
or
Enabled
0~60000
-
-
1
ms
Logic setting for DPS alarm of the
circuit breaker
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
the circuit breaker
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e.
4
DS**.DPS.t_DPU
500
0~60000
1
ms
debounce
time,
for
DPS
of
disconnector switch ** (**=01~09)
5
DS**.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
or
-
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
Logic setting for DPS alarm of the
circuit breaker of disconnector switch
4-11
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
** (**=01~09)
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
6
DS**.DPS.t_Alm
500
0~60000
1
ms
the circuit breaker of disconnector
switch ** (**=01~09)
Table 4.1-4 Settings of control function
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time,
1
CB.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
for opening output of the circuit
breaker
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time,
2
CB.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
for closing output of the circuit
breaker
4
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time,
3
DS**.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
for
direct
opening
output
of
disconnector switch ** (**=01~09)
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time,
4
DS**.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
for
direct
closing
output
of
disconnector switch ** (**=01~09)
Table 4.1-5 Settings of interlocking function
No.
1
2
3
4
Setting
CB.En_CILO_Opn
CB.En_CILO_Cls
DS**.En_CILO_Opn
DS**.En_CILO_Cls
Default
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Range
Disabled
Step
or
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
Logic setting for interlocking logic
-
-
control of closing output of the circuit
Logic setting for interlocking logic
-
-
control of opening output of the circuit
breaker
or
Enabled
Disabled
Description
breaker
Enabled
Disabled
Unit
Logic setting for interlocking logic
-
-
control of direct closing output of
disconnector switch ** (**=01~09)
or
Logic setting for interlocking logic
-
-
control of direct opening output of
disconnector switch ** (**=01~09)
4.2 Manual Closing Synchronism Check
The purpose of synchronism check is to ensure two systems are synchronous before they are
going to be connected.
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between the
two systems, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. Thus, closing operation is
applied with the synchronism check to avoid this situation and maintain the system stability. The
synchronism check includes synchro-check and dead charge check.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-12
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4.2.1 Operation Theory
4.2.1.1 Synchro-check
The comparative relationship between the reference side voltage and the synchronous side
voltage for synchro-check is as follow. Furthermore, the measured three-phase voltages for
synchro-check should not exceed the overvoltage threshold [25.U_OV] or lag the undervoltage
threshold [25.U_UV].
U_Ref
U_Syn
4
Figure 4.2-1 Relationship between reference and synchronous voltages
This figure shows the characteristics of synchro-check element used for CB closing if both
reference and synchronous sides are live. The element operates if the voltage difference,
frequency difference, slip frequency difference and phase angle difference are all within their
setting ranges.
⚫
The voltage difference between the reference side and the synchronous side is checked by
the following equation
[25.U_UV] ≤ U_Ref ≤ [25.U_OV]
[25.U_UV] ≤ U_Syn ≤ [25.U_OV]
|U_Ref - U_Syn| ≤ [25.U_Diff_Set]
⚫
The frequency difference between the reference side and the synchronization side is
checked by the following equation
[25.f_UF] ≤ f(U_Ref) ≤ [25.f_OF]
[25.f_UF] ≤ f(U_Syn) ≤ [25.f_OF]
|f(U_Ref) - f(U_Syn)| ≤ [25.f_Diff_Set]
⚫
The slip frequency variation is checked by the following equation
df/dt ≤ [25.df/dt_Set]
⚫
The phase difference between the reference side voltage and the synchronous side voltage
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-13
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
is checked by the following equation
∆δ ≤ [25.phi_Diff_Set]
4.2.1.2 Dead Charge Check
The dead charge check mode checks either the reference side or the synchronous side voltage.
Several dead charge check modes are supported in using the setting [25.Opt_Mode_DdChk]. The
device compares the reference side and the synchronous side voltages at both ends of a circuit
breaker with the settings [25.U_LvChk] and [25.U_DdChk]. When the voltage is higher than
[25.U_LvChk], the corresponding side is regarded as live. When the voltage is lower than
[25.U_DdChk], the corresponding side is regarded as dead.
4.2.1.3 Voltage Input Channel
4
The synchronism check function is suitable for several applications. According to different
application scenarios, user needs to configure different voltage input channel. For both the
reference side and the synchronous side, the voltage input channel may be single phase or
three-phase.
While configuring through the PCS-Studio software, user can configure three phase or single
phase voltage channel for reference and synchronous sides inputs.
In the meantime, the voltage switching logic can be adopted for the synchronism check input
channel, please refer to the following section.
For synchronism check voltage input channel configuration, please MAKE
SURE that the voltage source to connect to the inputs "in_ref" and
"in_syn" should be the same with that used in measurement function,
such as BayMMXU and UMMXN. Otherwise, the alarm "25.Alm_Cfg_Ch"
will be issued.
4.2.1.4 Enabling Logic
If one of the following conditions is met, the synchro-check for CB closing is enabled.
⚫
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting, [25.En_SynChk] = Enabled;
⚫
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Config, “25.in_syn_chk” = 1.
If one of the following conditions is met, the dead charge check for CB closing is enabled.
⚫
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting, [25.En_DdChk] = Enabled;
⚫
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Config, “25.in_vol_chk” = 1.
If none of synchro-check and dead charge check is enabled, the synchronism check for CB
closing is disabled.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-14
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4.2.2 Function Block Diagram
4
4.2.3 I/O Signals
Table 4.2-1 Input/Output signals of manual closing synchronism check
No.
Input Signal
Description
1
in_en
Enabling function
2
In_blk
Disabling function
3
in_ref_A
Reference voltage channel (phase A or single phase)
4
in_ref_B
Reference voltage channel (phase B)
5
in_ref_C
Reference voltage channel (phase C)
6
in_syn_A
Synchronization voltage channel (phase A or single phase)
7
in_syn_B
Synchronization voltage channel (phase B)
8
in_syn_C
Synchronization voltage channel (phase C)
9
in_25_Blk
Signal to block synchronism check logic
10
in_Dd_Blk
Signal to block dead charge logic
11
in_Lv_Blk
Signal to block live check logic
12
in_SYN_Blk
Signal to block synchro-check logic
13
in_25_Bypass
Signal to temporarily bypass synchronism check logic
14
in_syn_chk
Activate synchro-check (valid only if the setting [25.Opt_ValidMode] = Config)
15
in_vol_chk
Activate dead charge check (valid only if the setting [25.Opt_ValidMode] = Config)
No.
Output Signal
Description
1
25.RSYN
Pointer to struct of synchronism check element
2
25.U_Ref_Sec
Reference side voltage secondary value
3
25.U_Ref_Pri
Reference side voltage primary value
4
25.f_Ref
Reference side frequency
5
25.U_Syn_Sec
Synchronous side voltage secondary value
6
25.U_Syn_Pri
Synchronous side voltage primary value
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-15
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
4
7
25.f_Syn
Synchronous side frequency
8
25.U_Diff_Sec
Voltage difference secondary value
9
25.U_Diff_Pri
Voltage difference primary value
10
25.phi_Diff
Phase angle difference
11
25.f_Diff
Frequency difference
12
25.df/dt
Frequency rate-of-change
13
25.SynChk_OK
Satisfaction of synchro-check logic
14
25.DdChk_OK
Satisfaction of dead charge check logic
15
25.RSYN_OK
Satisfaction of synchronism check logic, i.e. SynChk_OK or DdChk_OK
16
25.Alm_Cfg_Ch
Channel configuration for reference or synchronization is not correct.
17
25.SynChk_Enabled
Synchro-check is enabled
18
25.DdChk_Enabled
Dead charge check is enabled
19
25.U_Diff_OK
Voltage difference within setting range
20
25.f_Diff_OK
Frequency difference within setting range
21
25.df/dt_OK
Frequency variation difference within setting range
22
25.phi_Diff_OK
Phase difference within setting range
23
25.RefDd
The reference side is dead.
24
25.RefLv
The reference side is live.
25
25.SynDd
The synchronous side is dead.
26
25.SynLv
The synchronous side is live.
4.2.4 Logics
EN
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting
EN
[25.En_SynChk]
EN
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Config
SIG
25.in_syn_chk
EN
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting
EN
[25.En_DdChk]
EN
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Config
SIG
25.in_vol_chk
SIG
25.SynChk_Enabled
SIG
25.DdChk_Enabled
&
≥1
25.SynChk_Enabled
&
&
≥1
25.DdChk_Enabled
&
&
Synchronism check for CB closing is disabled
Figure 4.2-2 Synchronism check logic
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-16
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
SIG
in_25_Bypass
SIG
in_25_Blk
SIG
in_SYN_Blk
SET
df/dt ≤ [25.df/dt_Set]
SET
[25.En_df/dt_Chk] = Disa bled
SET
ΔU ≤ [25.U_Diff_Set]
SET
Δf ≤ [25.f_Diff_Set]
SET
[25.En_f_Diff_Chk] = Disa bled
SET
Δδ ≤ [25.phi_Diff_Set]
SET
U_Ref ≤ [25.U_UV]
≥1
≥1
SET
U_Ref ≥ [25.U_OV]
SET
U_Syn ≤ [25.U_UV]
SET
U_Syn ≥ [25.U_OV]
SET
f_Ref ≤ [25.f_UF]
SET
f_Ref ≥ [25.f_OF]
SET
f_Syn ≤ [25.f_UF]
SET
f_Syn ≥ [25.f_OF]
SIG
&
≥1
25.SynChk_OK
≥1
≥1
4
Cmd without synchro-check
SIG
25.SynChk_OK
SET
[25.Opt_Vali dMode] = Setting
EN
[25.En_SynChk]
SET
[25.Opt_Vali dMode] = Config
SIG
in_syn_chk
SIG
Cmd with synchro-check
≥1
SynChk Success
&
&
≥1
&
Figure 4.2-3 Synchro-check logic
SIG
Ua_Ref < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
Ub_Ref < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
Uc_Ref < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
U_Ref is three-phase voltage
SIG
U_Ref < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
U_Ref is single-phase voltage
SIG
Ua_Syn < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
Ub_Syn < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
Uc_Syn < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
U_Syn is three-phase voltage
SIG
U_Syn < [25.U_DdChk]
SIG
U_Syn is single-phase voltage
&
>=1
25.RefDd
&
&
>=1
25.SynDd
&
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-17
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
SIG
Ua_Ref > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
Ub_Ref > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
Uc_Ref > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
U_Ref is three-phase voltage
SIG
U_Ref > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
U_Ref is single-phase voltage
SIG
Ua_Syn > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
Ub_Syn > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
Uc_Syn > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
U_Syn is three-phase voltage
SIG
U_Syn > [25.U_LvChk]
SIG
U_Syn is single-phase voltage
SIG
in_25_Bypass
SIG
in_25_Blk
SIG
in_Dd_Blk
SIG
in_Lv_Blk
SET
[25.Opt_Mode_DdChk]
SIG
25.RefDd
SIG
25.RefLv
SIG
25.SynDd
SIG
25.SynLv
SIG
Cmd. without dead charge check
SIG
25.DdChk_Ok
SIG
25.DdChk_Enabled
SIG
Cmd. with dead charge check
&
>=1
25.RefLv
&
&
>=1
4
25.SynLv
&
>=1
25.DdChk_OK
>=1
Dead check
crite ria sel ection
&
>=1
&
DdChk Success
Figure 4.2-4 Dead charge check logic
4.2.5 Settings
Table 4.2-2 Settings of synchronism check
No.
1
Setting
25.Opt_ValidMode
Default
Setting
Range
Setting or Config
Step
Unit
-
-
Description
Selection of decision
mode for synchronism
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-18
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
check
Logic
setting
synchro-check
2
25.En_SynChk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
only
if
the
for
(valid
setting
[25.Opt_ValidMode] =
Setting)
Logic setting for dead
charge check (valid
3
25.En_DdChk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
only
if
the
setting
[25.Opt_ValidMode] =
Setting)
Percentage threshold
4
25.U_UV
80.00
0~100
0.01
%
of under voltage for
4
CB closing blocking
Percentage threshold
5
25.U_OV
170.00
100~170
0.01
%
of over voltage for CB
closing blocking
Percentage threshold
6
25.f_UF
45.000
45~65
0.001
Hz
of under frequency for
CB closing blocking
Percentage threshold
7
25.f_OF
65.000
45~65
0.001
Hz
of over frequency for
CB closing blocking
8
25.Opt_U_SynChk
Ua
Ua, Ub, Uc, Uab, Ubc, Uca
-
-
Selection of voltage
for synchronism check
Threshold of voltage
9
25.U_Diff_Set
10.00
0~100
0.01
V
difference
for
synchronism check
Logic
10
25.En_f_Diff_Chk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
setting
frequency
for
difference
check
11
25.f_Diff_Set
0.50
0~2
0.01
Hz
Threshold
of
frequency
difference
for synchronism check
Logic
12
25.En_df/dt_Chk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
setting
frequency
for
variation
difference check
Threshold
13
25.df/dt_Set
1.00
0~2
0.01
Hz/s
of
frequency variation for
synchronism check.
Threshold of phase
14
25.phi_Diff_Set
15.00
0~180
0.01
°
difference
for
synchronism check
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-19
Date: 2020-09-02
4 Control Functions
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
Compensation angle
15
25.phi_Comp
0.00
0~360
0.01
°
of phase difference for
synchronism check
SynDdRefDd
SynLvRefDd
SynDdRefLv
16
25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
AnySideDd
RefDd
-
-
Selection
of
dead
charge check mode
SynDd
SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv
AnySideDd
4
17
25.U_DdChk
17.32
0~100
0.01
V
18
25.U_LvChk
34.64
0~100
0.01
V
19
25.t_Reset
5
0~60
1
s
Threshold for voltage
dead check
Threshold for voltage
live check
Threshold of duration
for synchro-check
Circuit breaker closing
time. It is the time
20
25.t_Close_CB
20
0~2000
1
from receiving closing
ms
command pulse till the
CB
is
completely
closed.
⚫ 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
No.
Setting Value
Dead charge check mode
1
SynDdRefDd
Dead check for both the reference and the synchronization sides
2
SynLvRefDd
Live check for synchronization side and dead check for reference side
3
SynDdRefLv
Dead check for synchronization side and live check for reference side
4
RefDd
Dead check for reference side
5
SynDd
Dead check for synchronization side
6
SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv
Option 2 or 3
7
AnySideDd
Option 1, 2 or 3
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
4-20
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
5 Measurement
Table of Contents
5.1 Primary Values ................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 General Values ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Angle Values ......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Sequence Components Values ............................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.4 Power Values........................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.5 Harmonics ............................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2 Secondary Values ............................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 General Values ..................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Angle Values ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 Sequence Components Values ............................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.4 Power Values........................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.5 Harmonics ............................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3 Calculation Values ........................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.1 Synchro-check...................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Differential Current ............................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.3 Thermal Overload ................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.4 Energy Metering............................................................................................... 5-8
5.5 Power Quality ................................................................................................... 5-8
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-a
Date: 2020-09-02
5
5 Measurement
5
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-b
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
5.1 Primary Values
Access path: MainMenu “Measurements” “Primary Values”
5.1.1 General Values
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
Ia_Pri
Phase-A current
A
2
Ib_Pri
Phase-B current
A
3
Ic_Pri
Phase-C current
A
4
Ua_Pri
Phase-A protection voltage
kV
5
Ub_Pri
Phase-B protection voltage
kV
6
Uc_Pri
Phase-C protection voltage
kV
7
Uab_Pri
Phase-AB protection voltage
kV
8
Ubc_Pri
Phase-BC protection voltage
kV
9
Uca_Pri
Phase-CA protection voltage
kV
10
f
Frequency of protection voltage
Hz
11
Neu.I_Pri
External measured residual current
A
12
Syn.U_Pri
Voltage for synchronism check
kV
5.1.2 Angle Values
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
Ang (Ua-Ia)
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and phase-A current
°
2
Ang (Ub-Ib)
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and phase-B current
°
3
Ang (Uc-Ic)
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and phase-C current
°
4
Ang (Ua-Ub)
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and phase-B voltage
°
5
Ang (Ub-Uc)
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and phase-C voltage
°
6
Ang (Uc-Ua)
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and phase-A voltage
°
7
Ang (Ia-Ib)
Phase angle between phase-A current and phase-B current
°
8
Ang (Ib-Ic)
Phase angle between phase-B current and phase-C current
°
9
Ang (Ic-Ia)
Phase angle between phase-C current and phase-A current
°
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and the referenced angle,
10
Ang (Ua)
currently, the angle of the positive voltage is used as the referenced angle
(if voltage is not connected, the angle of the positive current is used as
°
the referenced angle).
11
Ang (Ub)
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and the referenced angle
°
12
Ang (Uc)
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and the referenced angle
°
13
Ang (Ia)
Phase angle between phase-A current and the referenced angle
°
14
Ang (Ib)
Phase angle between phase-B current and the referenced angle
°
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-1
Date: 2020-09-02
5
5 Measurement
No.
Symbol
15
Ang (Ic)
16
Neu.Ang (I)
17
Syn.Ang (U)
Definition
Unit
Phase angle between phase-C current and the referenced angle
Phase angle between the external measured residual current and the
referenced angle
Phase angle between the synchronism check used voltage and the
referenced angle
°
°
°
5.1.3 Sequence Components Values
No.
5
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
I1_Pri
The positive-sequence current
A
2
I2_Pri
The negative-sequence current
A
3
3I0_Pri
Residual current
A
4
U1_Pri
The positive-sequence voltage
kV
5
U2_Pri
The negative-sequence voltage
kV
6
3U0_Pri
The calculated residual voltage
kV
5.1.4 Power Values
No.
Sign
1
Pa_Pri
2
Pb_Pri
3
Pc_Pri
4
Qa_Pri
5
Qb_Pri
6
Qc_Pri
7
Sa_Pri
8
Sb_Pri
9
Sc_Pri
10
Description
The primary values of three-phases active powers.
Unit
MW
The primary values of three-phases reactive powers.
MVAr
The primary values of three-phases apparent powers.
MVA
P_Pri
The primary value of active power.
MW
11
Q_Pri
The primary value of reactive power.
MVAr
12
S_Pri
The primary value of apparent power.
MVA
13
Cosa
14
Cosb
15
Cosc
16
Cos
Three-phases power factors.
Power factor
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-2
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
5.1.5 Harmonics
No.
Sign
Description
Unit
1
U_Hm01_Pri
kV
2
U_Hm02_Pri
kV
3
U_Hm03_Pri
kV
4
U_Hm04_Pri
kV
5
U_Hm05_Pri
kV
6
U_Hm06_Pri
kV
7
U_Hm07_Pri
kV
8
U_Hm08_Pri
9
U_Hm09_Pri
kV
10
U_Hm10_Pri
kV
11
U_Hm11_Pri
kV
12
U_Hm12_Pri
kV
13
U_Hm13_Pri
kV
14
U_Hm14_Pri
kV
15
U_Hm15_Pri
kV
The primary value of the 1st~15th voltage harmonic
kV
5.2 Secondary Values
Access path: MainMenu “Measurements” “Secondary Values”
5.2.1 General Values
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
Ia_Sec
Phase-A current (summation current for double circuit breakers mode)
A
2
Ib_Sec
Phase-B current (summation current for double circuit breakers mode)
A
3
Ic_Sec
Phase-C current (summation current for double circuit breakers mode)
A
4
Ua_Sec
Phase-A protection voltage
V
5
Ub_Sec
Phase-B protection voltage
V
6
Uc_Sec
Phase-C protection voltage
V
7
Uab_Sec
Phase-AB protection voltage
V
8
Ubc_Sec
Phase-BC protection voltage
V
9
Uca_Sec
Phase-CA protection voltage
V
10
f
Frequency of protection voltage
Hz
11
Neu.I_Sec
External measured residual current
A
12
Syn.U_Sec
Voltage for synchronism check
V
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-3
Date: 2020-09-02
5
5 Measurement
5.2.2 Angle Values
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
Ang (Ua-Ia)
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and phase-A current
°
2
Ang (Ub-Ib)
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and phase-B current
°
3
Ang (Uc-Ic)
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and phase-C current
°
4
Ang (Ua-Ub)
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and phase-B voltage
°
5
Ang (Ub-Uc)
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and phase-C voltage
°
6
Ang (Uc-Ua)
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and phase-A voltage
°
7
Ang (Ia-Ib)
Phase angle between phase-A current and phase-B current
°
8
Ang (Ib-Ic)
Phase angle between phase-B current and phase-C current
°
9
Ang (Ic-Ia)
Phase angle between phase-C current and phase-A current
°
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and the referenced angle,
10
Ang (Ua)
currently, the angle of the positive voltage is used as the referenced angle
(if voltage is not connected, the angle of the positive current is used as
°
the referenced angle).
5
11
Ang (Ub)
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and the referenced angle
°
12
Ang (Uc)
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and the referenced angle
°
13
Ang (Ia)
Phase angle between phase-A current and the referenced angle
°
14
Ang (Ib)
Phase angle between phase-B current and the referenced angle
°
15
Ang (Ic)
Phase angle between phase-C current and the referenced angle
°
16
Neu.Ang (I)
17
Syn.Ang (U)
Phase angle between the external measured residual current and the
referenced angle
Phase angle between the synchronism check used voltage and the
referenced angle
°
°
5.2.3 Sequence Components Values
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
I1_Sec
The positive-sequence current
A
2
I2_Sec
The negative-sequence current
A
3
3I0_Sec
Residual current
A
4
U1_Sec
The positive-sequence voltage
V
5
U2_Sec
The negative-sequence voltage
V
6
3U0_Sec
The calculated residual voltage
V
5.2.4 Power Values
No.
1
Sign
Pa_Sec
Description
The secondary values of three-phases active powers.
Unit
W
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-4
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
No.
Sign
2
Pb_Sec
3
Pc_Sec
4
Qa_Sec
5
Qb_Sec
6
Qc_Sec
7
Sa_Sec
8
Sb_Sec
9
Sc_Sec
10
Description
Unit
The secondary values of three-phases reactive powers.
Var
The secondary values of three-phases apparent powers.
VA
P_Sec
The primary value of active power.
W
11
Q_Sec
The primary value of reactive power.
Var
12
S_Sec
The primary value of apparent power.
VA
13
Cosa
14
Cosb
15
Cosc
16
Cos
Three-phases power factors.
5
Power factor
5.2.5 Harmonics
No.
Sign
Description
Unit
1
U_Hm01_Sec
V
2
U_Hm02_Sec
V
3
U_Hm03_Sec
V
4
U_Hm04_Sec
V
5
U_Hm05_Sec
V
6
U_Hm06_Sec
V
7
U_Hm07_Sec
V
8
U_Hm08_Sec
9
U_Hm09_Sec
V
10
U_Hm10_Sec
V
11
U_Hm11_Sec
V
12
U_Hm12_Sec
V
13
U_Hm13_Sec
V
14
U_Hm14_Sec
V
15
U_Hm15_Sec
V
The secondary value of the 1st~15th voltage harmonic
V
5.3 Calculation Values
Access path: MainMenu “Measurements” “Function Values”
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-5
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
5.3.1 Synchro-check
No.
5
Sign
Description
Unit
1
25.U_Ref_Sec
Secondary voltage of reference side
V
2
25.U_Ref_Pri
Primary voltage of reference side
kV
3
25.f_Ref
Frequency of reference side
Hz
4
25.U_Syn_Sec
Secondary voltage of synchronization side
V
5
25.U_Syn_Pri
Primary voltage of synchronization side
kV
6
25.f_Syn
Synchronization side frequency
Hz
7
25.U_Diff_Sec
Secondary voltage difference for CB synchronism check
V
8
25.U_Diff_Pri
Primary voltage difference for CB synchronism check
kV
9
25.phi_Diff
Phase angle difference for CB synchronism check
deg
10
25.f_Diff
Frequency difference for CB synchronism check
Hz
11
25.df/dt
Frequency variation difference for CB synchronism check
12
25.RSYN_OK
Synchronism check is passed.
13
25.SynChk_OK
Synchro-check is passed.
14
25.DdChk_OK
Dead charge check is passed.
15
25.U_Diff_OK
Voltage difference criteria is satisfied.
16
25.f_Diff_OK
Frequency difference criteria is satisfied.
17
25.dfdt_OK
Voltage variation difference criteria is satisfied.
18
25.phi_Diff_OK
Phase difference criteria is satisfied.
19
25.RefDd
Dead check of reference side is passed.
20
25.RefLv
Live check of reference side is passed.
21
25.SynDd
Dead check of synchronization side is passed.
22
25.SynLv
Live check of synchronization side is passed.
Hz/s
5.3.2 Differential Current
No.
Sign
1
87L.FO1.Ia_Loc
Phase-A current of optical fibre channel 1 at the local end
V
2
87L.FO1.Ib_Loc
Phase-B current of optical fibre channel 1 at the local end
kV
3
87L.FO1.Ic_Loc
Phase-C current of optical fibre channel 1 at the local end
Hz
4
87L.FO1.Ia_Rmt
Phase-A current of optical fibre channel 1 from the opposite end
V
5
87L.FO1.Ib_Rmt
Phase-B current of optical fibre channel 1 from the opposite end
kV
6
87L.FO1.Ic_Rmt
Phase-C current of optical fibre channel 1 from the opposite end
Hz
87L.FO1.Ang
Phase angle between local phase-A current and remote phase-A current
(Ia_Loc-Ia_Rmt)
of optical fibre channel 1
87L.FO1.Ang
Phase angle between local phase-B current and remote phase-B current
(Ib_Loc-Ib_Rmt)
of optical fibre channel 1
7
8
Description
Unit
V
kV
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-6
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
No.
Sign
Description
Unit
87L.FO1.Ang
Phase angle between local phase-C current and remote phase-C current
(Ic_Loc-Ic_Rmt)
of optical fibre channel x
10
87L.FO1.Ida
Phase-A differential current of optical fibre channel 1
Hz
11
87L.FO1.Idb
Phase-B differential current of optical fibre channel 1
Hz/s
12
87L.FO1.Idc
Phase-C differential current of optical fibre channel 1
13
87L.FO1.Ira
Phase-A restrained current of optical fibre channel 1
14
87L.FO1.Irb
Phase-B restrained current of optical fibre channel 1
15
87L.FO1.Irc
Phase-C restrained current of optical fibre channel 1
16
87L.FO2.Ia_Loc
Phase-A current of optical fibre channel 2 at the local end
17
87L.FO2.Ib_Loc
Phase-B current of optical fibre channel 2 at the local end
18
87L.FO2.Ic_Loc
Phase-C current of optical fibre channel 2 at the local end
19
87L.FO2.Ia_Rmt
Phase-A current of optical fibre channel 2 from the opposite end
20
87L.FO2.Ib_Rmt
Phase-B current of optical fibre channel 2 from the opposite end
21
87L.FO2.Ic_Rmt
Phase-C current of optical fibre channel 2 from the opposite end
87L.FO2.Ang
Phase angle between local phase-A current and remote phase-A current
(Ia_Loc-Ia_Rmt)
of optical fibre channel 2
87L.FO2.Ang
Phase angle between local phase-B current and remote phase-B current
(Ib_Loc-Ib_Rmt)
of optical fibre channel 2
87L.FO2.Ang
Phase angle between local phase-C current and remote phase-C current
(Ic_Loc-Ic_Rmt)
of optical fibre channel 2
25
87L.FO2.Ida
Phase-A differential current of optical fibre channel 2
26
87L.FO2.Idb
Phase-B differential current of optical fibre channel 2
27
87L.FO2.Idc
Phase-C differential current of optical fibre channel 2
28
87L.FO2.Ira
Phase-A restrained current of optical fibre channel 2
29
87L.FO2.Irb
Phase-B restrained current of optical fibre channel 2
30
87L.FO2.Irc
Phase-C restrained current of optical fibre channel 2
9
22
23
24
Deg
5
5.3.3 Thermal Overload
No.
Sign
Description
1
49.Accu_A
Phase-A thermal state of thermal overload protection
2
49.Accu_B
Phase-B thermal state of thermal overload protection
3
49.Accu_C
Phase-C thermal state of thermal overload protection
4
49.T_Diff_A
5
49.T_Diff_B
6
49.T_Diff_C
The calculated temperature difference of phase-A between the
equipment and the oil.
The calculated temperature difference of phase-B between the
Unit
℃
℃
equipment and the oil.
The calculated temperature difference of phase-C between the
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
℃
5-7
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
No.
Sign
Description
Unit
equipment and the oil.
5.4 Energy Metering
Access path: MainMenu “Measurements” “Energy Metering”
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
1
MMTR.EA_Accu_Fwd
Positive active energy
kWh
2
MMTR.EA_Accu_Rev
Negative active energy
kWh
3
MMTR.ER_Accu_Fwd
Positive reactive energy
kVarh
4
MMTR.ER_Accu_Rev
Negative reactive energy
kVarh
5.5 Power Quality
Access path: MainMenu “Measurements” “Power Quality”
No.
Symbol
5
Definition
Unit
1
Ua_Devn
Deviation of phase A voltage =
U a 3 − U nn
U nn
%
2
Ub_Devn
Deviation of phase B voltage =
U b 3 − U nn
U nn
%
3
Uc_Devn
Deviation of phase C voltage =
U c 3 − U nn
U nn
%
4
f_Devn
Deviation of frequency = f_meas - fn
Hz
5
UnbalRate_U2
Unbalance rate of negative-sequence voltage = U2/U1
%
6
UnbalRate_3U0
Unbalance rate of zero-sequence voltage (calculated) =
3U0/U1
%
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of phase A voltage
15
7
THD_Ua
THD =
U
2
%
Hm _ i
i=2
U Hm _1
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of phase B voltage
15
8
THD_Ub
THD =
9
THD_Uc
U
i=2
2
%
Hm _ i
U Hm _1
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of phase C voltage
%
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-8
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
No.
Symbol
Definition
Unit
15
THD =
10
UnbalRate_I2
11
UnbalRate_3I0
U
i=2
2
Hm _ i
U Hm _1
Unbalance rate of negative-sequence current = I2/I1
Unbalance rate of zero-sequence current (calculated) =
3I0/I1
%
%
5
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-9
Date: 2020-09-02
5 Measurement
5
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
5-10
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
6 Supervision
Table of Contents
6.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Device Hardware Supervision ........................................................................ 6-1
6.2.1 Hardware Resource Consumption Supervision ................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Hardware Status Supervision............................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Hardware Configuration Supervision ................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.4 Device Firmware Supervision .............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.5 CPU Process and Module Supervision ................................................................................ 6-3
6.3 Analog Input Supervision ............................................................................... 6-3
6.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision....................................................................... 6-4
6.5 Binary Input Supervision ................................................................................ 6-5
6.5.1 Debounce Time .................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.2 Jitter Processing ................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6 Tripping Counter Statistics ............................................................................. 6-9
6.7 Supervision Alarms and Handling Suggestion ............................................. 6-9
List of Figures
Figure 6.4-1 Principle of the TCS function with two binary inputs ........................................ 6-4
Figure 6.5-1 Sequence chart of debounce technique ............................................................. 6-5
Figure 6.5-2 Debounce time configuration page...................................................................... 6-6
Figure 5.5-3 Sequence chart of jitter processing..................................................................... 6-8
List of Tables
Table 6.7-1 Alarm description..................................................................................................... 6-10
Table 6.7-2 Alarm handling suggestion .................................................................................... 6-17
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-a
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
6
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-b
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
6.1 Overview
Protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, and it is required to respond
promptly for faults occurred on power system. When the device is in energizing process before
the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the device needs to be checked to ensure no abnormality. Therefore,
the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup
and during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a defect is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the device,
the device will be blocked with indication and alarm of relay out of service. It is suggested a trial
recovery of the device by re-energization. Please contact supplier if the device is still failure.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed by a LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. The failure alarm is also recorded in event recording report
and can be printed if required.
6.2 Device Hardware Supervision
All hardware has real-time monitoring functions, such as CPU module monitoring, communication
interface status monitoring, power supply status monitoring.
The monitoring function of CPU module also includes processor self-check, memory self-check
and so on. The processor self-check is checked by designing execution instructions and data
operations. Check whether the processor can execute all instructions correctly, and whether it can
correctly calculate complex data operations to determine whether it works normally. For
peripherals, it can monitor the status of the interface module, check the input and output data,
send the communication interface and receive self-loop detection. Memory self-check is used to
detect unexpected memory errors in the running process. It can effectively prevent program logic
abnormality caused by memory errors.
The status monitoring of communication interface also includes Ethernet communication interface
monitoring and differential channel communication interface monitoring. By accessing the status
register of the communication interface, the state of the corresponding interface is obtained, such
as the state of connection, the number of sending frames, the number of frames received, and the
number of wrong frames. According to the statistics of the acquired interface state, it is detected
whether the interface work is abnormal.
The hardware supervision also includes the power supply status monitoring. The voltage
monitoring chip is used by all the power supplies. The reset voltage threshold is pre-set to the
reset monitoring circuit. When the power supply is abnormal, the voltage monitoring chip will
output the reset signal to control CPU to be in the reset state and avoid the wrong operation.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-1
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
6.2.1 Hardware Resource Consumption Supervision
1.
Logic component total execution time monitoring
In the process of operation, the safety allowance should always be kept and no overload
phenomenon is allowed. When the user configures logic components with PCS-Studio, the
PCS-Studio automatically calculates the time required for the theoretical execution of the
configured components. When the security limit is exceeded, the PCS-Studio will indicate that the
configuration error is not allowed to download the current configuration to the device.
2.
Module data exchange monitoring
During the operation of the device, there is a lot of data exchange between modules. The number
of data exchanges is related to the number of logical components configured by the user. When
the configuration is too large to cause the number of data exchange to exceed the upper limit
supported by the device, the PCS-Studio prompts the configuration error.
3.
Configuration file size monitoring
The initialization of the device depends on the configuration files of each module. The user
configured logical components will eventually be embodied in the configuration file, limited to the
hardware memory space. When the configuration file size is more than the upper limit, the
PCS-Studio prompts the configuration error.
6.2.2 Hardware Status Supervision
6
1.
Memory ECC and parity functions.
The DDR3 memory chip has the function of ECC (Error Checking and Correcting) to eliminate
unexpected changes in memory caused by electromagnetic interference. The chip memory has
parity function. When an error occurs, the system can detect anomalies immediately, and
eliminate the logic abnormity caused by memory errors.
2.
Memory error monitoring in code area and constant data area
In addition to the above hardware memory reliability measures, the device software is also
constantly checking the memory during operation, including code, constant data, and so on. Once
the error detection, the system will automatically restart the restore operation. If they detect the
error immediately after the restart, it may be the result of a permanent fault locking device
hardware, only at the moment and not restart.
3.
Binary output relay drive monitoring
The reliability of the device is largely determined by the reliability of the export drive. By reading
the driving state of the binary output relay, the alarm signal will be generated and the device is
immediately blocked to prevent the relay from mal-operation when the device is not given a
tripping order and the binary output relay driver is detected in the effective state.
4.
CPU temperature monitoring
The CPU chip needs to be able to ensure long-term stability under the permissible working
temperature of the specification. Therefore, it is necessary to monitor the working temperature
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-2
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
monitored by CPU.
6.2.3 Hardware Configuration Supervision
The device is blocked when the actual hardware configuration is not consistent with the hardware
configuration file. Compared with pre-configured modules, this device will be blocked if more
module is inserted, fewer module is inserted, and wrong modules is inserted.
6.2.4 Device Firmware Supervision
1.
Each hardware module configuration check code needs to be consistent with CPU module.
The device CPU module stores the configuration check codes of other modules. In initialization
procedure, it checks whether the configuration check code of each module is consistent with the
stored code in CPU module, and if it is not consistent, this device is blocked.
The hardware modules and process interface versions need to be consistent with the CPU
module.
2.
If the system is incompatible with the upgrade, it will upgrade the internal interface version. At this
moment, each hardware module and process will be upgraded synchronously, otherwise the
version of the interface will be inconsistent.
3.
Configuration text is correct.
The configuration text formed by the device calibration visualization project includes checking
whether the check code is wrong or not.
4.
Whether any setting is over the range, whether it needs to confirm the settings.
If the setting exceeds the configuration range, the device is blocked; if some settings are added, it
is necessary to confirm the new values through the LCD.
6.2.5 CPU Process and Module Supervision
1.
Monitor the heartbeat of the module.
In the operation procedure, the CPU module sends a time synchronization command to other
module, each module repeats heartbeat message to the CPU module, if it does not respond or the
heartbeat is abnormal, then this device is blocked.
2.
Check whether the settings of other modules are consistent with the CPU module.
The actual values of all the settings in the CPU module are initialized to send to the corresponding
slave modules. In the process of operation, the setting values stored in the CPU module and the
setting values of other modules will be checked one by one. If they are not consistent, this device
will issue the alarm signal "Fail_Settings".
6.3 Analog Input Supervision
The sampling circuit of this device is designed as dual-design scheme. Each analog sampling
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-3
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
channel is sampled by two groups of ADC. The sampling data is self checking and inter checking
in real time. If any sampling circuit is abnormal, the device reports the alarm signal “Alm_Sample”,
and the protection function related to the sampling channel is disabled at the same time. When
the sampling circuit returns to normal state, the related protection is not blocked after 10s.
6.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision
The secondary circuit supervision function includes current transformer supervision (CTS),
voltage transformer supervision (VTS) and tripping/closing circuit supervision.
⚫
CTS function
The purpose of the CTS function is to detect whether the current transformer circuit is failed. In
some cases, if the CT is failed (broken-conductor, short-circuit), related protective element should
be blocked for preventing this device from mal-operation.
See further details about the CTS function, please refer Chapter 3.
⚫
VTS function
The purpose of the VTS function is to detect whether the VT analog input is normal. Because
some function, such as synchronism check, will be influenced by a voltage input failure.
6
The VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit
fault, poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect the failure, and
then issue an alarm signal and block relevant function.
See further details about the VTS function, please refer to Chapter 3.
⚫
Tripping circuit supervision function
The tripping circuit supervision function can be realized by program the logic function of this
device through the PCS-Studio according to the practical application experience of the user. In
this manual, a scheme which uses two independent binary inputs to supervise the tripping circuit
is recommended.
The following figure show the recommended scheme for tripping circuit supervision and the logic
diagram of the TCS function.
DC+
DC-
52a
BTJ
TC
52b
Protection Device
[BI_01]
[BI_02]
Circuit Breaker
&
600ms
[Alm_TCS]
Figure 6.4-1 Principle of the TCS function with two binary inputs
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-4
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
Where:
“BTJ” is the protection tripping output contact;
“TC” is the tripping coil of the circuit breaker;
[BI_01] is the binary input which is parallel connected with “BTJ”;
[BI_02] is the binary input which is serial connected with the “52b” contact.
6.5 Binary Input Supervision
6.5.1 Debounce Time
The well-designed debounce technique is adopted in this device, and the state change of binary
input within “Debounce time” will be ignored. As shown in Figure 6.5-1.
Binary input
state
SOE report
timestamps
SOE report
timestamps
Validated binary input
state changes
1
Validated binary input
state changes
6
0
Debounce time of
delayed pickup
Debounce time of
delayed dropout
Time
Figure 6.5-1 Sequence chart of debounce technique
All binary inputs should setup necessary debounce time to prevent the device from undesired
operation due to transient interference or mixed connection of AC system and DC system. When
the duration of binary input is less than the debounce time, the state of the binary input will be
ignored. When the duration of binary input is greater than the debounce time, the state of the
binary input will be validated and wrote into SOE.
In order to meet flexible configurable requirement for different project field, all binary inputs
provided by the device are configurable. Through the configuration tool, this device provides two
parameters to setup debounce time of delayed pickup and dropout based on specific binary
signal.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-5
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
Figure 6.5-2 Debounce time configuration page
The configurable binary signals can be classified as follows:
1.
Type 1
This type of binary inputs includes enable/disable of protection functions, AR mode selection,
“BI_RstTarg”, “BI_Maintenance”, disconnector position, settings group switch, open and
close command of circuit breaker and disconnector, enable/disable of auxiliary functions (for
example, manually trigger recording). They are on the premise of reliability, and the
debounce time of delayed pickup and delayed dropout is recommended to set as 100ms at
least.
6
2.
Type 2
This type of binary inputs include breaker failure
“CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl”, “CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl” and so on.
initiating
binary
inputs,
Debounce time
BI
Input Signal.X1
t1
t2
&
Time delay
Output
SIG Operation condition
⚫
Time delay is equal to 0
The debounce time of delayed pickup and delayed dropout is recommended to set as
15ms, in order to prevent binary signals from mal-operation due to mixed connection of
AC system and DC system.
⚫
Time delay is not equal to 0
The debounce time of delayed pickup and delayed dropout is recommended to set as
(-t1+ t2+Time delay)≥15ms, in order to prevent binary signals from mal-operation due to
mixed connection of AC system and DC system. Where, “t1” is the debounce time of
delayed pickup, and “t2” is the debounce time of delayed dropout.
3.
Type 3
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-6
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
This type of binary inputs is usually used as auxiliary input condition, and the debounce time
of delayed pickup and delayed dropout is recommended to set as 5ms.
When users have their own reasonable setting principles, they can set the
debounce time related settings according to their own setting principles.
6.5.2 Jitter Processing
This device can handle repetitive signal or so-called jitter via binary input module with the following
settings:
[Mon_Window_Jitter]
T, monitoring window of binary input jitter processing
[Num_Blk_Jitter]
N, times threshold to block binary input status change due to jitter
[Blk_Window_Jitter]
T', blocking window of binary input status change due to jitter
[Num_Reblk_Jitter]
N', times threshold to initiate immediately another blocking
window of binary input status change due to continuous jitter
For a binary input voltage variation, if the jitter processing function is enabled, its handling
principle is:
1.
2.
During the T,
⚫
If the actual jitter times < N, the block will not be initiated and the status change of this
binary input will be considered.
⚫
If the actual jitter times ≥ N, the T' is initiated, and the status change of binary input will
be ignored during the T'.
During the T',
⚫
If the actual jitter times < N', the block window will expire. The final status of this binary
input will be compared to the original one before T', so as to determine whether there is a
change or not.
⚫
If the actual jitter times ≥ N', the T' will be initiated again immediately (i.e. restart the
timer), and the status change of binary input will be ignored during the next T'.
An example of jitter processing is shown in the following sequence chart:
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-7
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
Input voltage level
Debounce time
(falling edge)
Debounce time
(rising edge)
Jitter blocking flag
n=N
initiate jitter block
Signal after
debounce & jitter
processing
n=N
Prolong blocking
window
n=6<N=7
T
T
t5
T
t1
t7
t8
t6
T
t2 t3
T
t4
t9
t10
t
Figure 6.5-3 Sequence chart of jitter processing
6
①Red line
Voltage variation of binary input
②Green line
Blocking signal of binary input status change due to jitter
③Blue line
Binary input status after debounce and jitter processing
n
Actual jitter times
We take N = 7 and N' = 5 in this example.
1.
2.
3.
T = t2 - t1
⚫
n=6<N
⚫
No blocking, ② stays at 0 and ③ is tracing the voltage variation to create SOE.
T = t4 - t3, at t5
⚫
n=7=N
⚫
The processing initiates the blocking immediately due to jitter
⚫
Jitter blocking, no more SOE event, ② changes its status to 1 and ③ stops the tracing.
T' = t6 - t5
⚫
At t7, n = 5 =N', the processing prolongs the blocking immediately due to jitter
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-8
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
⚫
4.
5.
Jitter blocking continues, no SOE event, ② stays at 1 and ③ keeps its status.
T'= t8 - t7
⚫
At t9, n = 5 =N', the processing prolongs the blocking immediately due to jitter.
⚫
Jitter blocking continues, no SOE event, ② stays at 1 and ③ keeps its status.
T'= t10 - t9
⚫
n = 2 < N'
⚫
At t10, jitter unblocking, ② changes its status to 0, the blocking window expires and ③
restart to trace the voltage varation immediately. At this point, no debounce time takes
effect and SOE can be created since then.
6.6 Tripping Counter Statistics
The tripping counter statistics function supports statistics of the tripping operation, such as circuit
breakers, disconnectors and so on. For phase separation circuit breaker, when the position of
phase A, B, and C is detected from close state to open state, the total position tripping counter is
added, and the tripping counter is added once when the position of the disconnector is detected
from close state to open state.
In addition, the statistics of the number of state change of circuit breakers and disconnectors are
also provided. The state change counter will add one when the position is detected from close
state to open state or from open state to close state.
6.7 Supervision Alarms and Handling Suggestion
Hardware circuit and operation status of this device are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality, such as PWR module failure,
DC converter failure and so on, are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the LED
“HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts “BO_Fail” will be given. The
protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.
All the alarm signals and the corresponding handling suggestions are listed below.
If the device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find out its reason with
the help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason cannot be found at site, please notify the factory
NR. Please do not simply press button “TARGET RESET” on the protection panel or re-energize
on the device.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-9
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
Table 6.7-1 Alarm description
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
Fail Signals (Device will be blocked)
This signal will be issued if
1
Fail_Device
OFF
ON
NO
any fail signal picks up and it
will drop off when all fail
signals drop off.
This signal will be issued if
any hardware or software
2
Fail_DeviceInit
OFF
ON
NO
failure,
or
configuration
detected
serious
error
in
the
is
device
initialization process.
This signal will be issued due
to mismatch between the
3
Fail_BoardConfig
OFF
ON
NO
configuration
of
plug-in
modules and the designing
drawing
of
an
applied-specific project.
This signal will be issued if
6
the
4
Fail_ProcLevelConfig
OFF
ON
NO
CCD
configure
process
file
is
level
parsed
wrongly or the type in the file
is inconsistent with the actual
device.
After
configuration file
is
updated, settings of the file
and settings saved on the
device are not matched. This
5
Fail_SettingItem_Chgd
OFF
ON
NO
signal
will
be
issued
instantaneously and will be
latched
unless
recommended
the
handling
suggestion is adopted.
The value of any setting is
out of scope. This signal will
6
Fail_Setting_OvRange
OFF
ON
NO
be issued instantaneously
and will be latched unless
the recommended handling
suggestion is adopted.
7
Fail_Memory
OFF
ON
NO
The alarm signal will be
issued instantaneously when
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-10
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
an error is found during
checking memory data, and
usually, it will automatically
drop out.
The board fails to register the
variable,
8
Fail_BoardRegister
OFF
ON
NO
because
of
abnormal board, insufficient
memory space, or incorrect
configuration.
9
Fail_ProcessConfig
OFF
ON
NO
The configuration process
does not run properly.
The
board
fails
initialized,
10
Fail_BoardInit
OFF
ON
NO
to
because
be
of
abnormal board, insufficient
memory space, or incorrect
configuration.
Error
is
found
during
checking settings. It means
inappropriate
or
incorrect
settings for some application
11
Fail_Settings
OFF
ON
NO
scenarios are checked.
This signal will be issued
instantaneously and will be
latched
unless
recommended
the
handling
suggestion is adopted.
A/D
sampling
data
push
error, the possible cause is
12
Fail_Sample
OFF
ON
NO
that the data verification fails
or no data is sampled by A/D
converter.
13
Fail_Output
OFF
ON
NO
The
output
module
is
abnormal
Alarm Signals (Device will not be blocked)
The device is abnormal. This
signal will be issued if any
14
Alm_Device
ON
ON
NO
alarm signal picks up and it
will drop off when all alarm
signals drop off.
15
Alm_DeviceInit
ON
OFF
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
NO
This signal will be issued if
any hardware or software
6-11
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
configuration
detected
wrong
in
the
is
device
initialization process.
The error is found during
checking
16
Alm_Version
ON
ON
NO
the
version
of
software downloaded to the
device. This signal will be
issued instantaneously and
will drop off instantaneously.
Alarm signal indicating that
the
17
Alm_Maintenance
ON
ON
YES
equipment
maintenance
is
state
in
(the
binary
input
[BI_Maintenance]
is
energized.
The
device
is
in
the
communication test mode.
18
Alm_CommTest
ON
ON
NO
This signal will be issued
instantaneously and will drop
6
off instantaneously.
The device is in the GOOSE
19
Alm_GOOSETest
ON
OFF
NO
test mode. This signal will be
issued instantaneously and
will drop off instantaneously.
Management procedure will
upload
and
check
the
parameters and settings of
20
Alm_Settings_MON
ON
ON
NO
each
protection
module
regularly,
plug-in
if
the
parameters and settings are
inconsistent, the alarm signal
will be issued.
The active group set by
settings in device and that
21
Alm_BI_SettingGrp
ON
OFF
NO
set by binary input are not
matched. This signal will be
issued instantaneously and
will drop off instantaneously.
22
Alm_TimeSyn
ON
ON
YES
23
Alm_Insuf_Memory
ON
ON
NO
The
time
synchronization
abnormality alarm.
The memory of CPU plug-in
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-12
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
module is insufficient.
The
configuration
file
of
IEC103 is detected to be not
24
Alm_CfgFile_IEC103
ON
ON
NO
correct when this file is
parsed
in
the
device
initialization process.
CPU module detects that
25
Alm_Board
ON
OFF
NO
some module is reset due to
the abnormality during the
device operating.
An abnormality is detected
26
Bx.Alm_Board
ON
ON
NO
during
the
module
self-check.
No
27
Alm_Insuf_NORflash
ON
OFF
NO
sufficient
NOR
flash
space used to store the
program in CPU module
The
settings
which
are
stored in CPU module are
28
Alm_Settings
ON
ON
NO
different with the settings
which are used by other
modules.
29
Alm_Settings_DFR
ON
OFF
NO
Disturbance fault recording
settings are set wrongly
The
network
mode
is
inconsistent, such as the
30
Alm_NetMode_Unmatched
ON
OFF
NO
setting is set as HSR mode,
but
the
actual
operation
mode is PRP mode.
The device's master process
31
Alm_master
ON
ON
NO
is abnormal and it is blocked
for more than 1 minute.
32
Alm_CfgFile_FPGA
ON
OFF
NO
33
Alm_DSP_HTM_Comm
ON
ON
NO
Error is detected in the FPGA
configuration file.
Error is detected in internal
communication.
Error is detected in the
34
Alm_CRC_ProcLevel
ON
OFF
NO
configuration file of process
level by CRC.
35
Alm_CfgFile_TCP1_DNP
ON
OFF
NO
36
Alm_CfgFile_TCP2_DNP
ON
OFF
NO
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
The configuration file of DNP
client 1 is incorrect.
The configuration file of DNP
6-13
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
client 2 is incorrect.
37
Alm_CfgFile_TCP3_DNP
ON
OFF
NO
38
Alm_CfgFile_TCP4_DNP
ON
OFF
NO
39
Alm_BOTest
ON
OFF
NO
The configuration file of DNP
client 3 is incorrect.
The configuration file of DNP
client 4 is incorrect.
The device is in the binary
output test mode.
This signal will be issued if
the sampled values from the
dual
40
Alm_Sample
ON
ON
NO
A/D
converters
are
inconsistent or the sampled
value contains a large DC
component during the self or
mutual
supervision
of
sampling channels.
41
Alm_Quality
ON
ON
NO
The quality of sampled data
is abnormal.
DPS abnormality signal, if
the circuit breaker position is
6
intermediate or
42
CB.DPS.Alm
ON
OFF
YES
bad, this
alarm will be issued.
This signal will pick up and
drop off with a time delay
defined
by
[CSWI**.DPS.t_Alm].
DPS abnormality signal, if
the switch 0x position is
intermediate or
43
DS0x.DPS.Alm
(x=1~9)
ON
OFF
YES
bad, this
alarm will be issued.
This signal will pick up and
drop off with a time delay
defined
by
[CSWI**.DPS.t_Alm].
The
44
50BF.Alm_Init
ON
ON
YES
initiating
signal
of
breaker failure protection is
energized consistently.
CT circuit fails.
This signal will pick-up with a
45
CTS.Alm
ON
ON
YES
time delay of [CTS.t_DPU]
and will drop-out with a time
delay of [CTS.t_DDO].
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-14
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
VT circuit fails.
This signal will pick-up with a
46
VTS.Alm
ON
ON
YES
time delay of [VTS.t_DPU]
and will drop-out with a time
delay of [VTS.t_DDO].
Input
signal
of
receiving
transfer trip is energized for
47
TT.Alm
ON
ON
YES
longer
than
the
[TT.t_Op]+5s
and
setting
it
will
drop-out with a time delay of
10s.
48
87L.FOx.Alm_Diff
ON
ON
YES
The differential current of
channel No.x is abnormal.
Pilot channel alarm signals (Device will not be blocked)
Received ID from the remote
end is not as same as the
setting [FOx.RmtID] of the
49
FOx.Alm_ID
ON
ON
YES
device in local end
This signal will pick up with a
time delay of 100ms and will
drop off with a time delay of
1s.
Channel x is abnormal
This signal will pick up with a
50
FOx.Alm
ON
ON
YES
time delay of 100ms and will
drop off with a time delay of
1s.
No valid frame of channel x
is received.
51
FOx.Alm_NoValFram
ON
ON
YES
This signal will pick up with a
time delay of 100ms and will
drop off with a time delay of
1s.
Rate of error code of channel
x is larger than 40 error
52
FOx.Alm_CRC
ON
ON
YES
codes per second.
This
signal
will
pick
up
instantaneously and will drop
off with a time delay of 10s.
53
FOx.Alm_Off
ON
ON
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
YES
Channel x is out of service
due to receive error codes
6-15
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
after device picking up.
This
signal
will
pick
up
instantaneously and will drop
off instantaneously.
Optical fibre of channel x is
connected wrongly.
54
FOx.Alm_Connect
ON
ON
YES
This signal will pick up with a
time delay of 100ms and will
drop off with a time delay of
1s.
The
55
FOx.Alm_87L_Unmatched
ON
ON
YES
status of
protection
between
differential
of
channel
local
end
x
and
remote end is inconsistent.
GOOSE alarm signals (Device will not be blocked)
The GOOSE communication
is abnormal.
It is an overall alarm signal
6
56
GAlm_Overall
ON
ON
NO
and will be issued if any
GOOSE alarm signal picks
up and it will drop-out when
all
these
alarm
signals
GOOSE
alarm
signal
indicating
that
drop-out.
57
GAlm_CfgFile
ON
ON
NO
GOOSE
configuration file is incorrect.
For
GOOSE
link,
the
incoming data with test=true
58
GAlm_Maint_Unmatched
ON
ON
NO
&
validity=good
operatorBlocked=false,
&
but
the quality status (q) of the
device equals to "on".
Network A of corresponding
GOOSE link is disconnected
59
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink.
GAlm_ADisc
ON
ON
NO
(No GOOSE message is
received within two times
TAL
from
corresponding
GOOSE link)
60
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink.
GAlm_BDisc
Network B of corresponding
ON
ON
NO
GOOSE link is disconnected
(No GOOSE message is
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-16
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
Running Status LED
No.
Item
HEALTHY
ALARM
Description
Modifiable
received within two times
TAL
from
corresponding
GOOSE link)
The GOOSE control blocks
received on network and the
GOOSE
61
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink.
GAlm_CfgUnmatched
ON
ON
NO
control
defined
in
configuration
blocks
GOOSE
file
are
unmatched (Including config
version, number of data sets
and data type).
Table 6.7-2 Alarm handling suggestion
No.
Item
Handling suggestion
Fail Signals (Device will be blocked)
1
Fail_Device
2
Fail_DeviceInit
The signal is issued with other specific fail signals, and please refer to the
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.
1. Go to the menu “Information→Borad Info”, check the abnormality
information.
3
Fail_BoardConfig
2. For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if
the board is used, then check whether the board is installed properly and
work normally.
Check whether the CCD process level configuration file of this device is
4
Fail_ProcLevelConfig
existed and whether the file content is correct. May need to download and
update the correct CCD process level configuration file.
Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD,
5
Fail_SettingItem_Chgd
and go to the menu “Settings” and select “Confirm_Settings” item to
confirm settings. Then, the device will restore to normal operation stage.
Please reset setting values according to the range described in the
6
Fail_Setting_OvRange
instruction manual, then re-power or reboot the device and the device will
restore to normal operation state.
7
Fail_Memory
8
Fail_BoardRegister
9
Fail_ProcessConfig
View the menu "Initialization Error" to check the detailed reason, and
10
Fail_BoardInit
send the reason to manufacturer the manufacturer or the agent.
11
Fail_Settings
Please check the settings and set them correctly
12
Fail_Sample
Please check the connection of CPU plug-in module.
13
Fail_Output
Please inform manufacturer the manufacturer or the agent for repair.
Put the protective device out of service at once. Inform the manufacturer
or the agent to maintain it.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-17
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
No.
Item
Handling suggestion
Alarm Signals (Device will not be blocked)
14
Alm_Device
15
Alm_DeviceInit
The signal is issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to
the handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
Please inform manufacturer the manufacturer or the agent to deal with it.
Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project
commissioning stage, but it is needed to download the latest package file
(including correct version checksum file) provided by R&D engineer to
16
Alm_Version
make the alarm signal disappear. Then users get the correct software
version. It is not allowed that the alarm signal is issued on the device
already has been put into service. The devices having being put into
service so that the alarm signal disappears.
17
Alm_Maintenance
Check the binary input [BI_Maintenance].
18
Alm_CommTest
No special treatment is needed, and disable the communication test
19
Alm_GOOSETest
function after the completion of the test.
20
Alm_Settings_MON
Put the protective device out of service at once. Inform the manufacturer
or the agent to maintain it.
Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of
21
Alm_BI_SettingGrp
6
indicating active group, and make them matched. Then the “ALARM”
LED will be extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will
disappear and the device will restore to normal operation state.
1. Check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the
clock synchronization source;
2. Check whether the wiring connection between the device and the clock
synchronization source is correct
22
Alm_TimeSyn
3. Check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e.
[Opt_TimeSyn]) is set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization,
please set the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] as “No TimeSyn”.
After the abnormality is removed, the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished
and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the device will
restore to normal operation state.
23
Alm_Insuf_Memory
Please inform manufacturer the manufacturer or the agent to deal with it.
24
Alm_CfgFile_IEC103
Please inform manufacturer the manufacturer or the agent to deal with it.
25
Alm_Board
26
Bx.Alm_Board
27
Alm_Insuf_NORflash
28
Alm_Settings
29
Alm_Settings_DFR
30
Alm_NetMode_Unmatched
31
Alm_master
Please inform manufacturer the manufacturer or the agent to deal with it.
Please refer to the fault recording configuration related contents, i.e.
Section 7.4.
Check the setting of network mode, or upload the device log and confirm
with the manufacturer or agent whether the network mode is supported.
Please check the load of the device.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-18
Date: 2020-09-02
6 Supervision
No.
Item
Handling suggestion
32
Alm_CfgFile_FPGA
Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.
33
Alm_DSP_HTM_Comm
Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.
34
Alm_CRC_ProcLevel
Please check the configuration and network of the process level.
35
Alm_CfgFile_TCP1_DNP
36
Alm_CfgFile_TCP2_DNP
Please contact the configuration engineer to check and confirm the
37
Alm_CfgFile_TCP3_DNP
contents of DNP configuration file.
38
Alm_CfgFile_TCP4_DNP
39
Alm_BOTest
40
Alm_Sample
Please check the connection of AC AI module and CPU module.
41
Alm_Quality
Please check SV quality if adopting IED 61850-9-2.
42
CB.DPS.Alm
43
No special treatment is needed, and disable the binary output test
function after the completion of the test.
Check the corresponding DPS signal
DS0x.DPS.Alm
(x=1~9)
44
50BF.Alm_Init
45
CTS.Alm
46
VTS.Alm
Check the initiating contact of breaker failure protection
Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the
abnormality is eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit. After the
abnormality is eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding binary input secondary circuit. After the
47
abnormality is eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off automatically and
TT.Alm
device returns to normal operation state with a time delay of 10s.
48
87L.FOx.Alm_Diff
Please check whether the CT circuit is normal.
Pilot channel alarm signals (Device will not be blocked)
49
FOx.Alm_ID
50
FOx.Alm
51
FOx.Alm_NoValFram
52
FOx.Alm_CRC
53
FOx.Alm_Off
Please check the connection of optical fibre channel.
Please check the connection of optical fibre channel. (For example,
54
FOx.Alm_Connect
receiving and sending are inconsistent, or channel 1 and channel 2 are
inconsistent)
55
FOx.Alm_87L_Unmatched
Please check the device's enabling/disabling status of current differential
protection at both ends, ensure that their status are consistent
GOOSE alarm signals (Device will not be blocked)
The signal is issued with other specific GOOSE alarm signals, and please
56
GAlm_Overall
57
GAlm_CfgFile
Inform commissioning personnel to check the GOOSE configuration file.
58
GAlm_Maint_Unmatched
Please check the quality status (q) of the incoming data and the device.
59
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink.
GAlm_ADisc
refer to the handling suggestion of them.
Please check the GOOSE network and GOOSE configuration file.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-19
Date: 2020-09-02
6
6 Supervision
No.
60
61
Item
Handling suggestion
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink.
GAlm_BDisc
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink.
GAlm_CfgUnmatched
Where:
@Bx.Name_n_GCommLink is the set value of the label setting of [Bx.Name_n_GCommLink]
(n=00~63)
6
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
6-20
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
7 System Functions
Table of Contents
7.1 Clock Synchronization .................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Clock Synchronization Mode................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 Clock Synchronization Abnormality ...................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.3 Clock Synchronization Priority ............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.4 SNTP Setup.......................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 State Information ............................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Access Method ..................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Event Recording .............................................................................................. 7-3
7.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3.2 Disturbance Records ............................................................................................................ 7-3
7.3.3 Supervision Events............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3.4 Binary Events ....................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.5 Device Logs .......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.6 Control Logs ......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.7 High-frequency Recording ................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.8 Access Method ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.4 Fault Recording ............................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.2 Fault Report .......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.3 Fault Waveform .................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.4 Access Method ..................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Maintenance State ........................................................................................... 7-7
7.6 Communication Test ....................................................................................... 7-7
7.7 Output Test ....................................................................................................... 7-8
7.8 Target Reset ..................................................................................................... 7-9
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-a
Date: 2020-09-02
7
7 System Functions
7.9 Switch Setting Groups .................................................................................... 7-9
7
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-b
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
7.1 Clock Synchronization
7.1.1 Clock Synchronization Mode
The device supports both hardware-based and software-based clock synchronization modes.
1.
2.
Hardware-based clock synchronization ([Opt_TimeSyn]=Conventional)
⚫
IRIG-B: IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level, TTL level or optical fibre interface
⚫
PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level or binary input
⚫
PPM: Pulse per minute (PPM) via RS-485 differential level or binary input
⚫
IEEE 1588: Clock message based on IEEE 1588 via Ethernet network
Software-based clock synchronization ([Opt_TimeSyn]=SAS)
⚫
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
⚫
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
⚫
Message (IEC 60870-5-103 / Modbus / DNP3): Clock messages through IEC
60870-5-103 protocol, Modbus protocol and DNP3 protocol
7.1.2 Clock Synchronization Abnormality
The device provides an alarm signal "Alm_TimeSyn", which indicates the signal of clock
synchronization is abnormal or is lost. The setting [Opt_TimeSyn] should be set reasonably
according to actual clock synchronization source. But if the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as
"NoTimeSyn" and no clock synchronization signal is inputted, the device will not issue the alarm
signal.
7.1.3 Clock Synchronization Priority
The device provides a priority-based adaptive clock synchronization scheme, which means that it
can automatically identify multiple clock synchronization sources in the same clock
synchronization mode and choose the highest priority of clock synchronization sources.
Clock synchronization mode
Hardware-based
Software-based
Input signal
The Highest priority
IRIG-B + IEEE 1588 + PPS/PPM
IRIG-B
IEEE 1588 + PPS/PPM
IEEE1588
SNTP + Message
SNTP
7.1.4 SNTP Setup
When the device adopts SNTP to realize clock synchronization, [IP_Server_SNTP] and
[IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] shall be set correctly.
[IP_Server_SNTP] is the address of SNTP clock synchronization server which sends SNTP timing
messages to the relay or BCU. [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is the address of standby SNTP clock
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-1
Date: 2020-09-02
7
7 System Functions
synchronization server.
Both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are ineffective unless SNTP clock
synchronization is valid.
When both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as "000.000.000.000", the
device receives broadcast SNTP synchronization message.
When either [IP_Server_SNTP] or [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as "000.000.000.000", the
device adopts the setting whose value is not equal to "000.000.000.000" as SNTP server address
and receives unicast SNTP synchronization message.
If neither [IP_Server_SNTP] nor [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as "000.000.000.000", the
device adopts the setting [IP_Server_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message. If the device does not receive any server response after 30s, it adopts
the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message.
The device will switch between [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] repeatedly if it
does not receive any server response in 30s.
7.2 State Information
7.2.1 Overview
7
The device can provide real-time state information, including analog quantities (such primary
measurement value, secondary measurement value, metering value and so on) and status
quantities (supervision status, input status, output status and so on). By check these state
information, operators can know operation state of the protected equipment and whether the
device is healthy.
7.2.2 Access Method
7.2.2.1 Access by Local HMI (Human Machine Interface)
These state information can be gained via local HMI. The menu path is:
1.
2.
Analog quantities
⚫
MainMenu "Measurements" "Primary Values"
⚫
MainMenu "Measurements" "Secondary Values"
⚫
MainMenu "Measurements" "Function Values" "Synchronism Check"
⚫
MainMenu "Measurements" "Energy Metering"
⚫
MainMenu "Measurements" "Power Quality"
⚫
MainMenu "Measurements" "UserDef Values" "UserDef Values1/2"
Status quantities
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-2
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
⚫
MainMenu "Status" "Inputs"
⚫
MainMenu "Status" "Outputs"
⚫
MainMenu "Status" "Superv Status"
⚫
MainMenu "Status" "Logic Links Status"
⚫
MainMenu "Status" "Running Status"
⚫
MainMenu "Status" "UserDef Status" "UserDef Status1/2"
7.2.2.2 Access by Virtual HMI
Using the virtual LCD tool, the corresponding content can be viewed through the same menu path
as local LCD.
7.2.2.3 Access by Communication Client
Device's state information can be uploaded into clients through message communication. For
differential protocols, the state information can be gained through corresponding communication
service.
7.2.2.4 Access by Printer
The device can print the current state information, so that the operator can observe and save the
current operation condition. The access path is:
MainMenu "Print" "Device Status"
7.3 Event Recording
7
7.3.1 Overview
The device can store the latest 1024 time-stamped disturbance records, 1024 time-stamped
binary events, 1024 time-stamped supervision events, 256 time-stamped control logs and 1024
time-stamped device logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the
available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
7.3.2 Disturbance Records
When any protection element operates or drops out, such as fault detector, distance protection
etc., they will be logged in event records. Disturbance records include signal name, its value
before and after changing, and the time precision is up to 1ms.
7.3.3 Supervision Events
The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or abnormal
condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged in event
records. Supervision events include signal name, its value before and after changing, and the
time precision is up to 1ms.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-3
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
7.3.4 Binary Events
When there is a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from “0” to “1”
or from “1” to “0”, it will be logged in event records. Binary events include signal name, its value
before and after changing, and the time precision is up to 1ms.
7.3.5 Device Logs
If an operator executes some operations on the device, such as reboot protective device, modify
setting, etc., they will be logged in event records. Device logs include signal name, its value
before and after changing, and the time precision is up to 1ms.
7.3.6 Control Logs
When an operator executes a control command via local LCD, PCS-Studio or communication
client, it will be logged in control logs. Control logs include time stamp, controlled object, control
origination, control position, operation condition ,interlocking condition, control command and
operation result.
7.3.7 High-frequency Recording
The high-frequency recording is available by PCS-Studio. By switching the option "Disabled" or
"Enabled" to enable or disable the function in the following path through the PCS-Studio
configuration tool: Project Node → Device Node → Device Setup → Global Config → System
Config.
7
When high-frequency recording is enabled, a high-frequency waveforms record (9.6kHz sampling)
can also be gained besides the normal disturbance waveforms record (1.2kHz sampling). The
difference between high-frequency waveforms records and normal disturbance waveforms
records is only the sampling rate. This kind of high-resolution records is convenient to perform
post-fault system and device operation analysis.
7.3.8 Access Method
7.3.8.1 Access by Local HMI
The device provides corresponding menus to view event recorders. The menu path is:
MainMenu "Test" "Disturb Records"
MainMenu "Records" "Superv Events"
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-4
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
MainMenu "Records" "IO Events"
MainMenu "Records" "Device Logs"
MainMenu "Records" "Control Logs"
MainMenu "Records" "HighFreqRecords"
7.3.8.2 Access by Virtual HMI
Using the virtual LCD tool, the corresponding content can be viewed through the same menu path
as local LCD.
7.3.8.3 Access by Communication Client
Event recorders can be uploaded into clients through corresponding communication service of the
protocol (including IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3).
7.3.8.4 Access by Printer
The device can print event recorders, so that the operator can observe and save the current
operation condition. The access path is:
MainMenu "Print" "Superv Events"
MainMenu "Print" "IO Events"
7.4 Fault Recording
7.4.1 Overview
Fault recorder can be used to have a better understanding of the behaviour of the power network
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Analysis of the
recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment. This
information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.
The fault recorder is comprised of the report and the waveform, which can be triggered by pickup
signals, trip signals and configurable binary signal “BI_TrigDFR”.
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault
memory is filled completely, the oldest records are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most
recent recordings are always stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 64.
7.4.2 Fault Report
For each fault report, the following items are included:
1.
Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the record and displayed on LCD
screen.
2.
Date and time of fault occurrence
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-5
Date: 2020-09-02
7
7 System Functions
The date and time are recorded when a system fault is detected. The time resolution is 1ms.
3.
Relative operating time
An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the record. The
time resolution is 1ms.
4.
Fault information
Including faulty phase, fault location and protection elements
7.4.3 Fault Waveform
A fault waveform contains all analog and digital quantities related to protection such as currents,
voltages, differential current, alarm elements, binary inputs and etc.
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable
recording criterion, the pre-trigger time and the post-trigger time. With the fault recording
parameter, these components can be individually set. The pre-trigger waveform recorded duration
is configured via the setting [RecDur_PreTrigDFR]. The waveform recorded duration after the fault
disappears is configured via the setting [RecDur_PostFault]. The maximum post-trigger waveform
recorded duration is configured via the setting [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR].
4. [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR]
1. [RecDur_PreTrigDFR]
2.Pickup
3. [RecDur_PostFault]
Trigger point
Total recording time
7
1.
Pre-trigger recording time
Use the setting [RecDur_PreTrigDFR] to set this time.
2.
Pickup recording time
The pickup recording time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary
or analog, persists (unless limited by the limit time, which is determined by the setting
[MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR]).
3.
Post-fault recording time
The recording time begins after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting [RecDur_PostFault]
to set this time.
4.
Maximal post-trigger recording time
Use the setting [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR] to set this time. If the summation of pickup recording
time and post-fault recording time is larger than maximal post-trigger recording time, the
post-trigger recording time shall be equal to the setting [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR].
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-6
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
7.4.4 Access Method
7.4.4.1 Access by Local HMI
The device provides corresponding menus to check fault recording. The menu path is:
MainMenu "Records" "Disturb Records"
7.4.4.2 Access by Virtual HMI
Using the virtual LCD tool, the corresponding content can be viewed through the same menu path
as local LCD.
7.4.4.3 Access by Communication Client
Fault recording can be uploaded into clients through corresponding communication service of the
protocol (including IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3).
7.4.4.4 Access by Printer
The device can print fault recording, so that the operator can observe and save the current
operation condition. The access path is:
MainMenu "Print" "Disturb Records"
7.5 Maintenance State
The device provides maintenance state, i.e., the binary input [BI_Maintenance] is energized,
which is convenient for maintenance work. For adopting conventional CT/VT, binary inputs and
binary outputs, maintenance state has no influence on protection logics. For binary inputs and
binary outputs by GOOSE connections. During device maintenance, the object will send GOOSE
message with Test quality attribute. The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiver device that
the object received via a GOOSE message was created under test conditions and not operating
conditions. If the Test quality attribute received is different with the object's Test quality attribute,
binary inputs and binary outputs by GOOSE connections will be affected based on different types
of binary inputs and binary outputs. For SV (Sampling Value) message, if the Test quality attribute
received is different with the object's Test quality attribute, the relevant protection functions will be
blocked.
For IEC60870-5-103 protocol, only the messages in link layer maintained, service messages in
the application layer which is uploaded automatically are blocked, and service messages in the
application layer which is issued by the client are rejected. For IEC61850 protocol, all Test quality
attribute set as "1". For DNP3 and ModBus protocol, they are not affected.
7.6 Communication Test
The device provides Test Mode to allow all protection elements, supervision events and binary
events to fulfill communication test, but to avoid the output contacts to close. During
communication test, protection functions are not affected, the signals generated by
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-7
Date: 2020-09-02
7
7 System Functions
communication test are recorded in relevant reports, and event recording and fault recording will
not stop recording disturbance information. The alarm signal "Alm_CommTest" will be issued to
indicate the operator when activating Test Mode and exiting Test Mode.
Communication test can be gained via local HMI and the virtual HMI, the corresponding content
can be viewed through the following menu paths:
⚫
Events Simulation
Main Menu "Test" "Device Test" "Disturb Events"
Main Menu "Test" "Device Test" "Superv Events"
Main Menu "Test" "Device Test" "IO Events"
⚫
Forced Measurements
Main Menu "Test" "Device Test" "Measurements"
Forced measurement ONLY affects the values modified and transmitted to
station control or control center. Primary circuit, secondary circuit and
device local logic will not be influenced. Forced value will remain during the
test until the exit of this menu.
If no input operation is carried out within 60s, this test will exit and return to
the previous menu automatically.
7
7.7 Output Test
The device provides Output Test Mode to test all outputs. Through this mode, there will be real
operations, such as contact closing and GOOSE output value change, triggered by the device to
test output circuits and links. So, protection functions outputs and the connecting primary
equipments are affected. The output signals generated by output test are not recorded, while the
entering and exiting of output test mode will be recorded in Superv Events. During the output test,
the protection functions will not stop, nor will the all recording functions.
Output test can be gained via the local LCD or virtual HMI of a debugging PC, the corresponding
content can be viewed through the following menu paths:
⚫
Contacts Outputs
Main Menu "Test" "Device Test" "Contact Outputs"
⚫
GOOSE Outputs
Main Menu "Test" "Device Test" "GOOSE Outputs"
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-8
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
Dismantle the wiring connection if any influence on relevant primary
equipment is undesired. The output test will cause operation of relay
contacts through secondary circuit and GOOSE link.
7.8 Target Reset
The device provides target reset which can be used to reset local signals (including magnetic
latching output relays), latched LEDs, and confirm pop-up windows of reports. The function does
not affect the protection logic and communication function. There are several ways to reset.
1.
2.
Reset via local HMI
⚫
Access menu path: MainMenu "Local Cmd" "Reset Target"
⚫
Press the command pushbutton “ESC”+“ENT” on operation panel of the device under
main interface
⚫
Press the command pushbutton " TARGET RESET" on operation panel of the device
Reset via virtual HMI
Access menu path: MainMenu "Local Cmd" "Reset Target"
3.
Reset via binary input
Energize the binary input "BI_RstTarg"
4.
Reset via IEC61870-5-103
Use ASDU20, INF19 of IEC61870-5-103 protocol
5.
7
Reset via remote control
Use standard remote service of corresponding protocol
7.9 Switch Setting Groups
For different applications users can save the respective function settings in so-called settings
groups, and if necessary enable them quickly. Up to 20 different settings groups can be saved in
the device. In the process, only one settings group is active at any given time. During operation,
the operator can switch between setting groups.
The device will be temporarily blocked during switching setting groups. During temporary device
blocking, the device will loss protection functions and communication functions. Alarm signals
"Fail_Device" and "Alm_Device" will be issued. There are several ways to switch setting groups.
1.
Switch via local HMI
⚫
Access menu path: MainMenu "Setting" "Global Settings" "System Settings",
change the value of the setting [Active_Grp]
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-9
Date: 2020-09-02
7 System Functions
⚫
2.
Press the command pushbutton “MENU” under main interface (password is required)
Switch via virtual HMI
Access menu path: MainMenu "Setting" "Global Settings" "System Settings",
modify the setting [Active_Grp]
3.
Switch via communication client
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 can be used for switching the
setting groups via a communication connection.
4.
⚫
Use "General Service" of IEC61870-5-103 protocol to modify the setting [Active_Grp]
⚫
Use "SelectActiveSG" of IEC61850 protocol to switch setting groups.
Switch via binary signals
The device also provides an available function by configuring associated binary signals via
PCS-Studio to switch setting group, which can be external binary inputs or internal logic
signals. By default, no binary signals are configured, so the function is invalid. (The specificed
confiuration method can refer to the application manual).
Each input signal is coded with a sequence number that corresponds to a setting group.
When the associated input signal changes, the device scans all input signals and selects the
input with the smallest sequence number as the valid input. The device switches to the
setting range corresponding to the input signal. The device can switch up to 20 setting
groups.
7
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
7-10
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
8 Hardware
Table of Contents
8.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 CT Requirement ............................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1 CT Types .............................................................................................................................. 8-7
8.3.2 CT Requirement ................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4 Plug-in Module Description ............................................................................ 8-9
8.4.1 Human-machine Interface Module (NR6855/NR6856) ........................................................ 8-9
8.4.2 Power Supply Module (NR6305/NR6310) ........................................................................... 8-9
8.4.3 CPU Module (NR6106) ...................................................................................................... 8-12
8.4.4 Analog Input Module (NR6641) .......................................................................................... 8-16
8.4.5 Binary Input Module (NR6601/NR6610) ............................................................................ 8-19
8.4.6 Binary Output Module (NR6651/NR6652/NR6660/NR6663)............................................. 8-23
8.4.7 Binary Input/Output Module (NR6661)............................................................................... 8-28
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Hardware diagram .................................................................................................. 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Front view of this device.......................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8.1-3 Typical rear view of this device (pin-ferrule-terminal modules) ............................ 8-3
Figure 8.1-4 Typical rear view of this device (ring-ferrule-terminal modules) ........................... 8-4
Figure 8.2-1 Typical hardware configuration 1 (pin-ferrule-terminal modules) ......................... 8-4
Figure 8.2-2 Typical wiring 1 (pin-ferrule-terminal modules)...................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-3 Typical hardware configuration 2 (ring-ferrule-terminal modules)........................ 8-6
Figure 8.2-4 Typical wiring 2 (ring-ferrule-terminal modules) .................................................... 8-7
Figure 8.4-1 View of power supply module ............................................................................... 8-10
Figure 8.4-2 View of CPU module .............................................................................................. 8-14
Figure 8.4-3 Connection of communication terminal ............................................................ 8-15
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-a
Date: 2020-09-02
8
8 Hardware
Figure 8.4-4 Jumpers of printer/RS-485 port .......................................................................... 8-15
Figure 8.4-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ................................... 8-16
Figure 8.4-6 Terminal definition of analog input module ...................................................... 8-17
Figure 8.4-7 Current connection examples ............................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8.4-8 Voltage connection examples............................................................................. 8-18
Figure 8.4-9 Voltage dependence for binary inputs............................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.4-10 View of binary input module (NR6601A) ......................................................... 8-20
Figure 8.4-11 View of binary input module (NR6610A).......................................................... 8-22
Figure 8.4-12 View of binary output module NR6651A ......................................................... 8-24
Figure 8.4-13 View of binary output module NR6651B ......................................................... 8-25
Figure 8.4-14 View of binary output module NR6652A ......................................................... 8-26
Figure 8.4-15 View of binary output module (NR6660A) ....................................................... 8-27
Figure 7.4-9 View of binary output module (NR6663A) ......................................................... 8-28
Figure 7.4-16 View of binary input/output module (NR6661A) ............................................. 8-29
List of Tables
Table 8.4-1 Terminal definition and description of power supply module ............................... 8-11
Table 8.4-2 Terminal definition and description of power supply module ............................... 8-11
Table 8.4-3 Configuration and terminal definition of CPU module........................................... 8-14
Table 8.4-4 Terminal definition and description of binary input module (NR6601A)............... 8-20
8
Table 8.4-5 Terminal definition and description of binary input module (NR6610A) .............. 8-22
Table 7.4-6 Terminal definition and description of NR6661A ................................................... 8-29
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-b
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
8.1 Overview
The modular design of this device allows this device to be easily upgraded or repaired by a
qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the configurable
modules, and back-plugging structure design makes it easy to repair or replace any module.
This device adopts one 32-bit ARM core in the CPU chip as control core for management and
monitoring function, and adopts another 32-bit ARM core in the CPU chip for all the protection
calculation. The parallel processing of sampled data can be realized in each sampling interval to
ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of the device.
This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the new
platform major characteristics are of high reliability, networking and great capability in
anti-interference. See Figure 8.1-1 for the hardware diagram.
External
Binary Input
Conventional CT/VT
A/D
Output
Relay
ARM1
A/D
Pickup
Relay
ECVT
ETHERNET
+E
LCD
Uaux
Power
Supply
LED
Clock SYN
ARM2
Keypad
RJ45
PRINT
8
Figure 8.1-1 Hardware diagram
The working process of the device is shown in above figure: the currents and voltages from
conventional CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to ARM1 core after filtered
and A/D conversion for protection calculation and fault detector respectively (ECVT signals are
sent to the device without small signal and A/D conversion). The ARM1 core carries out fault
detector, protection logic calculation, tripping output, and the ARM2 core performs SOE
(sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between the device and
SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. When the fault detector detects a fault and picks
up, the positive power supply for output relay is provided.
The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of the
device (conventional CT/VT or ECT/EVT), and the mode of binary output (conventional binary
output or GOOSE binary output). The configurations for PCS S series based on microcomputer
are classified into standard and optional modules.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-1
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
Table 8.1-1 Module configuration of this device
Module ID
Module description
Remark
NR6855/NR6856
Human machine interface module (HMI module)
Mandatory
NR6305/6310
Power supply module (PWR module)
Mandatory
NR6106
Main CPU module (CPU module)
Mandatory
NR6641
Analog input module (AI module)
Mandatory
NR6601/NR6610
Binary input module (BI module)
Mandatory
NR6651/NR6652/NR6660/NR6663
Binary output module (BO module)
Mandatory
NR6661
Binary Input/output module (BI/BO module)
Mandatory
⚫
HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicators and multiplex RJ45 ports for user
as human-machine interface.
⚫
PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into various DC voltage levels for modules of
the device.
⚫
CPU module provides functions like communication with SAS, event record, setting
management etc., and performs filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.
⚫
AI module converts AC current and voltage from current transformers and voltage
transformers respectively to small voltage signal.
⚫
BI module provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rating voltage among AC110V/220V
or DC24V/48V/110V/125V/220V/250V (configurable).
⚫
BO module provides output contacts for tripping, and signal output contact for annunciation
signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal etc.
⚫
BI/BO module not only provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rating voltage among
AC110V/220V or DC24V~250V (configurable), but also provides output contacts for tripping,
and signal output contact for annunciation signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal,
operation abnormal signal, etc.
8
Following figures show front and rear views of this device respectively.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-2
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
Figure 8.1-2 Front view of this device
8
Figure 8.1-3 Typical rear view of this device (pin-ferrule-terminal modules)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-3
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
Figure 8.1-4 Typical rear view of this device (ring-ferrule-terminal modules)
8.2 Typical Wiring
B01
B02&B03
B04
B05
B06
P1
B01
B02&B03
B04
P1
NR6106AB
NR6641-4I4U
Option
Option
Option
NR6310A
NR6106AB
NR6641-4I4U
Option
NR6310A
01
03
NET
8
05
Ia
Ian
02
Ib
Ibn
04
Ic
Icn
06
BI_01+
BI_01_
BI_02+
01
BI_02-
04
BI_COM
BI_03
LC
07
LC
I0
I0n
09
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
08
10
BI_04
BI_05
BI_06
12
BI_07
13
14
BI_08
BI_09
15
16
BO_01
18
BO_02
11
17
Usyn Usynn
01
04
BI_01+
BI_01_
BI_02+
BI_02-
04
06
BI_COM
05
BI_03
06
BI_04
BI_05
07
09
BI_06
09
10
12
BI_07
10
11
13
14
BI_08
BI_09
TX2
15
16
BO_01
RX2
17
18
BO_02
19
Ua
Uan
20
21
Ub
Ubn
22
Uc
Ucn
24
01
Ia
Ian
02
03
Ib
Ibn
Icn
02
03
NET
05
06
LC
07
07
08
05
LC
Ic
I0
I0n
09
08
10
11
TX1
11
12
RX1
13
14
15
Usyn Usynn
16
01
1A
02
1B
03
SG ND
04
2A
05
2B
06
SG ND
07
SY N+
08
SY N-
09
SG ND
10 SY N-TTL
CONSOLE
19
Ua
Uan
20
21
Ub
Ubn
22
23
Uc
Ucn
BO_03
BO_04
24
BO_05
BO_FAIL
17
01
1A
18
02
1B
19
03
SG ND
20
04
2A
21
05
2B
22
06
SG ND
23
07
SY N+
24
08
SY N-
09
SG ND
PWR+
25
PWR-
26
Ground
23
BO_03
BO_04
BO_05
BO_FAIL
02
03
08
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
10 SY N-TTL
PWR+
25
PWR-
26
Ground
CONSOLE
Figure 8.2-1 Typical hardware configuration 1 (pin-ferrule-terminal modules)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-4
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
The following wiring is given based on above hardware configuration
SGND
0103
485-2A
0104
485-2B
0105
SGND
0106
0107
SYN-
0108
SGND
0109
TTL
0110
Clock SYN
SYN+
Optional optical or electrical Ethernet to SCADA
0102
COM
0101
485-1B
COM
485-1A
Multiplex RJ45
+
P102
-
P103
+
P104
-
P106
+
BI_01
0206
0207
I0
0208
0209
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
BI_02
0215
0216
0217
BI_03
+
BI_04
…
BI_09
P105
P113
BO_01
P114
PWR plug-in module
+
0218
0219
Ua
P112
0204
0205
Ic
Usyn
P107
0202
0203
Ib
AI plug-in module
-
P101
0201
Ia
0220
0221
Ub
0222
0223
Uc
0224
P115
BO_02
P116
P122
…
P121
BO_05
P123
P124
External DC power
supply
PWR+
P125
PWR-
P126
BO_Fail
8
Power
Supply
Grounding Bus
Figure 8.2-2 Typical wiring 1 (pin-ferrule-terminal modules)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-5
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
B01
B02 & B03
B04
B05
B06
P1
B01
B02 & B03
B04
P1
NR6106AB
NR6641-4I4U
Option
Option
Option
NR6305A
NR6106AB
NR6641-4I4U
Option
NR6305A
NET
LC
LC
01
Ia
Ian
02
01 BI_01+ BI_01- 02
01
Ia
Ian
02
01 BI_01+ BI_01- 02
03
Ib
Ibn
04
03 BI_02+ BI_02- 04
03
Ib
Ibn
04
03 BI_02+ BI_02- 04
05
Ic
Icn
06
05 BI_COM BI_03
06
05
Ic
Icn
06
05 BI_COM BI_03
06
07
I0
I0n
08
07 BI_04
BI_05
08
LC
07
I0
I0n
08
07 BI_04
BI_05
08
09
10
09 BI_06
BI_07
10
LC
09
10
09 BI_06
BI_07
10
BI_09
12
BI_09
12
NET
11
12
11 BI_08
11
12
11 BI_08
RX1
13
14
13
BO_01
14
RX1
13
14
13
BO_01
14
TX2
15
16
15
BO_02
16
TX2
15
16
15
BO_02
16
18
17
BO_03
18
17
18
17
BO_03
18
20
19
BO_04
20
19
Ua
Uan
20
19
BO_04
20
21
Ub
Ubn
22
21
BO_05
22
23
Uc
Ucn
24
23
BO_Fail
24
TX1
RX2
01
1A
02
1B
03
SGND
04
2A
05
2B
06
SGND
07
08
09
10
TX1
RX2
17
19
Usyn Usynn
Ua
Uan
21
Ub
Ubn
22
21
BO_05
22
23
Uc
Ucn
24
23
BO_Fail
24
01
1A
02
1B
03
SGND
04
2A
05
2B
06
SGND
SYN+
07
SYN+
SYN-
08
SYN-
SGND
09
SGND
SYN-TTL
10
SYN-TTL
CONSOLE
25 PWR+ PWR- 26
Ground
Usyn Usynn
25 PWR+ PWR- 26
CONSOLE
Ground
Figure 8.2-3 Typical hardware configuration 2 (ring-ferrule-terminal modules)
The following wiring is given based on above hardware configuration
8
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-6
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
SGND
0103
485-2A
0104
485-2B
0105
SGND
0106
0107
SYN-
0108
SGND
0109
TTL
0110
Clock SYN
SYN+
Optional optical or electrical Ethernet to SCADA
0102
COM
0101
485-1B
COM
485-1A
Multiplex RJ45
+
P102
-
P103
+
P104
-
P106
+
BI_01
0206
0207
I0
0208
0209
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
BI_02
0215
0216
0217
BI_03
+
BI_04
…
BI_09
P105
P113
BO_01
P114
PWR plug-in module
+
0218
0219
Ua
P112
0204
0205
Ic
Usyn
P107
0202
0203
Ib
AI plug-in module
-
P101
0201
Ia
0220
0221
Ub
0222
0223
Uc
0224
P115
BO_02
P116
P122
…
P121
BO_05
P123
P124
External DC power
supply
PWR+
P125
PWR-
P126
BO_Fail
Power
Supply
8
Grounding Bus
Figure 8.2-4 Typical wiring 2 (ring-ferrule-terminal modules)
8.3 CT Requirement
8.3.1 CT Types
Generally there are three types of CT: high remanence, low remanence and no
remanence.
⚫
High remanence: TPX, TPS, P, PX.
⚫
Low remanence: TPY, PR, and the residual magnetism does not exceed 10% of the
saturation flux.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-7
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
⚫
No remanence: TPZ level, residual magnetism can actually be ignored.
The high residual magnetism CT may have large residual magnetism. When the fault
non-periodic component and residual magnetism are in the same direction, the CT
saturation degree will be more serious. The following CT type checking calculation takes
into account the maximum residual magnetism of CT and the maximum non periodic
component on the site.
8.3.2 CT Requirement
Rated secondary limit e.m.f (volts) formula:
Esl = Kalf × Isn × (Rct + Rbn)
Kalf
Accuracy limit factor: Kalf = Ipal / Ipn
Isn
Rated secondary current (amps)
Rct
Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Sbn
Rated burden (VAs)
Rbn
Rated resistance burden (ohms): Rbn = Sbn / Isn2
Actual secondary limit e.m.f (volts) under different fault conditions:
Esl1′ = k1×Ipcf1 ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
Esl2′ = k2×Ipcf2 ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
Esl3′ = k3×Ipnt×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
Esl4′ = k4×Ipcf4×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k1, k2, k3, k4 are transient factors.
Ipcf1
Maximum through fault current when out-zone fault (amps)
Maximum fault current through two bridge CB but not transformer when
Ipcf2
8
out-zone fault (amps)
Ipcf4
Maximum fault current when in-zone fault (amps)
Ipnt
Transformer rated primary current (amps)
Ipn
CT rated primary current (amps)
Isn
CT rated secondary current (amps)
Rct
Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Rb
Real resistance burden (ohms): Rb = Rr + 2RL
RL
Resistance of a single lead from relay to the CT (ohms)
Rr
Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
1. K Value Requirement
1) Single CB connection, the following condition should be fulfilled
Esl > Esl1′
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-8
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
Esl > min (Esl3′, Esl4′)
While: k1=2，k3=30，k4=1.
2) Double CB connection, the following condition should be fulfilled:
Esl > Esl1′
Esl > Esl2′
Esl > min (Esl3′, Esl4′)
If both CTs of double CB are low remanence type, and with the same model, then k1=2,
k2=1.5, k3=30, k4=1.
Otherwise: k1=2，k2=2，k3=30，k4=1.
2. Example
Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1Ω, Sbn=60VA
Ipcf1=40000A, RL=0.5Ω, Rr=0.1Ω, Rc=0.1Ω, Ipn=2000A, Ipnt=1500A
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/Isn2)
= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V
Esl1′ = k1×Ipcf1×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2×Ipcf1 ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL))/Ipn
= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5))/2000=420V
Esl3′ = k3×Ipnt×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
=30×1500*5*(1+(0.1+2×0.5)) /2000=236.25V
Thus, Esl > Esl1′ and Esl > Esl3′
8
8.4 Plug-in Module Description
The device consists of power supply module (PWR), main CPU module (CPU), AI module, BI
module, BO plug-in module, CH plug-in module and NET-DSP plug-in module. Terminal
definitions and application of each plug-in module are introduced as follows.
8.4.1 Human-machine Interface Module (NR6855/NR6856)
The human machine interface (HMI) module is installed on the front panel of this device. It is used
to observe the running status and event information on the LCD, and configure the protection
settings and device operation mode. It can help the user to know the status of this device and
detailed event information easily, and provide convenient and friendly access interface for the
user.
8.4.2 Power Supply Module (NR6305/NR6310)
The power supply module is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-9
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
output. It has an input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 Technical Data. The standardized
output voltages are +5Vdc and +12Vdc. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously
monitored.
The +5Vdc output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5Vdc power
supply in this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device
is in cold reserve.
8
Figure 8.4-1 View of power supply module
Three types of power supply modules are provided: NR6305A, NR6305B and NR6310A. The
NR6305B is same as the NR6305A except that the NR6305B can support at least 500ms power
supply interruption.
⚫
NR6305A & NR6305B
The power supply module also provides 9 binary inputs, 5 binary outputs and a device failure
binary output. A 26-pin connector is fixed on the power supply module. The terminal definition of
the connector is described as below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-10
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
Table 8.4-1 Terminal definition and description of power supply module
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
BI_01+
02
BI_01-
03
BI_02+
04
BI_02-
05
BI_COM
The common negative connection of the BI_01 to BI_09
06
BI_03
The No.3 programmable binary input
07
BI_04
The No.4 programmable binary input
08
BI_05
The No.5 programmable binary input
09
BI_06
The No.6 programmable binary input
10
BI_07
The No.7 programmable binary input
11
BI_08
The No.8 programmable binary input
12
BI_09
The No.9 programmable binary input
BO_01
The No.1 programmable binary output
BO_02
The No.2 programmable binary output
BO_03
The No.3 programmable binary output
BO_04
The No.4 programmable binary output
BO_05
The No.5 programmable binary output
BO_Fail
The device failure signal output
25
PWR+
DC power supply positive input
26
PWR-
DC power supply negative input
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
The No.1 programmable binary input
The No.2 programmable binary input
8
Grounded connection of the power supply
⚫
NR6310A
The power supply module also provides 9 binary inputs, 5 binary outputs and a device failure
binary output. A 22-pin connector and a 4-pin connector are fixed on the power supply module.
The terminal definition of the connector is described as below.
Table 8.4-2 Terminal definition and description of power supply module
Pin No.
22-pin
Symbol
01
BI_01+
02
BI_01-
03
BI_02+
04
BI_02-
05
BI_COM
Description
The No.1 programmable binary input
The No.2 programmable binary input
The common negative connection of the BI_01 to BI_09
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-11
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
06
BI_03
The No.3 programmable binary input
07
BI_04
The No.4 programmable binary input
08
BI_05
The No.5 programmable binary input
09
BI_06
The No.6 programmable binary input
10
BI_07
The No.7 programmable binary input
11
BI_08
The No.8 programmable binary input
12
BI_09
The No.9 programmable binary input
BO_01
The No.1 programmable binary output
BO_02
The No.2 programmable binary output
BO_03
The No.3 programmable binary output
BO_04
The No.4 programmable binary output
BO_05
The No.5 programmable binary output
BO_Fail
The device failure signal output
25
PWR+
DC power supply positive input
26
PWR-
DC power supply negative input
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
4-pin
24
Grounded connection of the power supply
The standard rated voltage of the PWR module is self-adaptive to
88~300Vdc or 88~275Vac. For a non-standard rated voltage power supply
module please specify when place order, and check if the rated voltage of
power supply module is the same as the voltage of power source before
the device being put into service.
8
The PWR module a grounding screw for device grounding. The grounding
screw shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the
earth copper bar of panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent
EMI, so effective grounding must be ensured before the device is put into
service.
8.4.3 CPU Module (NR6106)
The CPU module is the central part of this device, and contains a multi-core 32-bit powerful
processor and some necessary electronic elements. This powerful processor performs all of the
functions for this device: protection function, communication function, human-machine interface
function and so on. There are several A/D conversion circuits on this module, which are used to
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-12
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
convert the AC analog signals to corresponding DC signals for fulfilling the demand of the
electrical level standard. A high-accuracy clock chip is contained in this module, it provide
accurate current time for this device.
The main functional details of the CPU module are listed as below:
⚫
Protection calculation and logical judgment function
The CPU module can calculate protective elements (such as overcurrent element) on the
basis of the analog sampled values (voltages and currents) and binary inputs, then it does
logical judgment function and decides whether the device needs to trip or close.
⚫
Communication function
The CPU module can effectively manage all communication procedures, and reliably send
out some useful information through its various communication interfaces. These interfaces
are used to communicate with a SAS or a RTU. It also can communicate with the human
machine interface module. If an event occurs (such as SOE, protective tripping event etc.),
this module will send out the relevant event information through these interfaces, and make it
be easily observed by the user.
⚫
Auxiliary calculation
Based on the voltage and current inputs, the CPU module also can calculate out the metering
values, such as active power, reactive power and power factor etc. All these values can be
sent to a SAS or a RTU through the communication interfaces.
⚫
Human-machine interface function
This module can respond the commands from the keypad of this device and show the results
on the LCD and LED indicators of this device. It also can show the operation situation and
event information for the users through the LCD and LED indicators.
⚫
Time synchronization
This module has a local clock chip and an interface to receive time synchronized signals from
external clock source. These signals include PPS (pulse per second) signal and IRIG-B
signal. Basing on the timing message (from SAS or RTU) and the PPS signal, or basing on
the IRIG-B signal, this module can synchronize local clock with the standard clock.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-13
Date: 2020-09-02
8
8 Hardware
Figure 8.4-2 View of CPU module
Do NOT look into the end of an optical fiber connected to an optical port.
Do NOT look into an optical port/connector.
A direct sight to laser light may cause temporary or permanent blindness.
8
The configuration and terminal definition of the CPU modules are listed in following table.
Table 8.4-3 Configuration and terminal definition of CPU module
Module ID
Memory
Interface
Terminal No.
2 RJ45 Ethernet
Ethernet
2 SFP Ethernet
communication
Optical
2 Fiber-Optic
NR6106AB
1G DDR
Usage
RS-485
RS-485
01
A
02
B
03
SGND
04
A
05
B
06
SGND
Physical Layer
Twisted pair wire
channel
for
Optical
fiber
pilot protection
(single-mode)
To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
To SCADA or printer
Twisted pair wire
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-14
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
RS-485
TTL
07
SYN+
08
SYN-
To clock
09
SGND
synchronization
10
SYN-TTL
1 RJ45 Ethernet
Cable
Cable
For debugging
Twisted pair wire
The correct connection is shown in Figure 8.4-3. Generally, the shielded cable with two pairs of
twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect
the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect
the signal ground of the communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device, and it is
used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.
Twisted pair wire
01
B
02
SGND
03
COM
A
Twisted pair wire
SYN+
01
SYN-
02
SGND
03
Clock SYN
To the screen of other coaxial
cable with single point earthing
04
04
Cable
05
TXD
06
SGND
07
PRINT
RTS
Figure 8.4-3 Connection of communication terminal
8
Figure 8.4-4 Jumpers of printer/RS-485 port
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-15
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
The 2nd RS-485 port also can be configured as a printer port through the
jumpers “J10” and “J11”.
Jumper
RS-485
Printer
J10
Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected
Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected
J11
Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected
Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected
8.4.4 Analog Input Module (NR6641)
The analog input module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT,
and it can transform high AC input values to relevant low AC output value, which are suited to the
analog inputs of the CPU module. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and
voltages to levels appropriate to the device’s electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation
between this device and the power system. A low pass filter circuit is connected to each
transformer (CT or VT) secondary circuit for reducing the noise of each analog AC input signal.
For the analog input module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself.
Just shown as below.
Socket
Plug
In
Out
8
plug is not put in the socket
In
Out
Put the plug in the socket
Figure 8.4-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed
There are several types of analog input modules. The rated current is adaptive (1A/5A). Please
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-16
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the current
converter is 40In.
⚫
NR6641-4I4U: 4CT+4VT
The terminal definition of the analog input module is shown as below.
NR6641-4I4U
01
Ia
Ian
02
03
Ib
Ibn
04
05
Ic
Icn
06
07
I0
I0n
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
16
Usyn Usynn
18
19
Ua
Uan
20
21
Ub
Ubn
22
23
Uc
Ucn
24
Figure 8.4-6 Terminal definition of analog input module
8
NEVER allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to
this device to be opened while the primary system is energized. The
opened CT secondary circuit will produce a dangerously high voltage. If
this safety precaution is disregarded, personal death, severe personal
injury or considerable equipment damage will occur.
Each analog input channel can be configured according to practical
application through PCS-Studio.
Some connection examples of the current transformers and voltage transformers which are
supported by this relay are shown in this section. If one of the analog inputs has no input in a
practical engineering, the relevant input terminals should be disconnected.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-17
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
1.
Current connections examples
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
Ia
Ia
Ia
Ian
Ian
Ian
Ib
Ib
Ib
Ibn
Ibn
Ibn
Ic
Ic
Ic
Icn
Icn
Icn
I0
I0
I0n
I0n
I0
I0n
(1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 8.4-7 Current connection examples
Where:
(1) Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection for ground
current.
(2) Current connections to three current transformers with a separate ground current
transformer (summation current transformer or core balance current transformer).
(3) Current connections to two current transformers with a separate ground current
transformer (summation current transformer or core balance current transformer), only
for ungrounded or compensated networks.
2.
Voltage connections examples
8
A
B
C
52
52
52
Ua
Ub
Uc
Un
Usyn
Usynn
Figure 8.4-8 Voltage connection examples
Where:
Voltage connections to three star-connected voltage transformers and additionally to any
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-18
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
phase/phase-to-phase voltage (for synchronism check, just takes phase-C line voltage as an
example).
8.4.5 Binary Input Module (NR6601/NR6610)
The binary input module contains some binary inputs which are used to monitor the contact
positions of the corresponding bay, and all the binary inputs are configurable through PCS-Studio
according to practical application.
There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR6601A and NR6610A. The binary input module
can respectively provide 25 or 32 binary inputs.
The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24Vdc, 30Vdc, 48Vdc, 110Vdc,
125V, 220V, 110Vac or 220Vac (@50Hz), which must be specified when
placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of binary
input module complies with site DC power supply rating before put this
device in service.
Voltage
300
157.5
8
138.6
125
110
78.75
69.3
62.5
55
Operation
30.24
24
15.12
12
0
Operation uncertain
No operation
24V
48V
110V
125V
220V
250V
Figure 8.4-9 Voltage dependence for binary inputs
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-19
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
⚫
NR6601A
Each BI module is with a 26-pin connector for 25 binary inputs which share one common negative
power input and can be configurable. The pickup voltages and dropout voltages of the binary
inputs are settable by the setting [U_Pickup_BI] and [U_Dropoff_BI], and the range is from
50%Un to 80%Un.
01
BI_01
BI_02
02
03
BI_03
BI_04
04
05
BI_05
BI_06
06
07
BI_07
BI_08
08
09
BI_09
BI_10
10
11
BI_11
BI_12
12
13
BI_13
BI_14
14
15
BI_15
BI_16
16
17
BI_17
BI_18
18
19
BI_19
BI_20
20
21
BI_21
BI_22
22
23
BI_23
BI_24
24
25
BI_25
BI_COM
26
Figure 8.4-10 View of binary input module (NR6601A)
8
A 26-pin connector is fixed on the binary input module. The terminal definition of the connector is
described as below.
Table 8.4-4 Terminal definition and description of binary input module (NR6601A)
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
BI_01
The No.1 programmable binary input
02
BI_02
The No.2 programmable binary input
03
BI_03
The No.3 programmable binary input
04
BI_04
The No.4 programmable binary input
05
BI_05
The No.5 programmable binary input
06
BI_06
The No.6 programmable binary input
07
BI_07
The No.7 programmable binary input
08
BI_08
The No.8 programmable binary input
09
BI_09
The No.9 programmable binary input
10
BI_10
The No.10 programmable binary input
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-20
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
⚫
11
BI_11
The No.11 programmable binary input
12
BI_12
The No.12 programmable binary input
13
BI_13
The No.13 programmable binary input
14
BI_14
The No.14 programmable binary input
15
BI_15
The No.15 programmable binary input
16
BI_16
The No.16 programmable binary input
17
BI_17
The No.17 programmable binary input
18
BI_18
The No.18 programmable binary input
19
BI_19
The No.19 programmable binary input
20
BI_20
The No.20 programmable binary input
21
BI_21
The No.21 programmable binary input
22
BI_22
The No.22 programmable binary input
23
BI_23
The No.23 programmable binary input
24
BI_24
The No.24 programmable binary input
25
BI_25
The No.25 programmable binary input
26
BI_COM
The common negative connection of the BI_01 to BI_25.
NR6610A
Each BI module is with two 18-pin connectors for 32 binary inputs. The first 16 binary inputs share
one common negative power input and the last 16 binary inputs share another common negative
power input. All binary inputs are configurable. The pickup voltages and dropout voltages of the
binary inputs are settable by the setting [U_Pickup_BI] and [U_Dropoff_BI], and the range is from
50%Un to 80%Un.
8
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-21
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
01
BI_01
19
BI_17
02
BI_02
20
BI_18
03
BI_03
21
BI_19
04
BI_04
22
BI_20
05
BI_05
23
BI_21
06
BI_06
24
BI_22
07
BI_07
25
BI_23
08
BI_08
26
BI_24
09
BI_09
27
BI_25
10
BI_10
28
BI_26
11
BI_11
29
BI_27
12
BI_12
30
BI_28
13
BI_13
31
BI_29
14
BI_14
32
BI_30
15
BI_15
33
BI_31
16
BI_16
34
BI_32
17
BI_COM
35
BI_COM
18
BI_COM
36
BI_COM
Figure 8.4-11 View of binary input module (NR6610A)
The terminal definition of the connector is described as below.
Table 8.4-5 Terminal definition and description of binary input module (NR6610A)
Pin No.
8
18-pin
Pin No.
Symbol
Description
01
BI_01
The No.1 programmable binary input
02
BI_02
The No.2 programmable binary input
03
BI_03
The No.3 programmable binary input
04
BI_04
The No.4 programmable binary input
05
BI_05
The No.5 programmable binary input
06
BI_06
The No.6 programmable binary input
07
BI_07
The No.7 programmable binary input
08
BI_08
The No.8 programmable binary input
09
BI_09
The No.9 programmable binary input
10
BI_10
The No.10 programmable binary input
11
BI_11
The No.11 programmable binary input
12
BI_12
The No.12 programmable binary input
13
BI_13
The No.13 programmable binary input
14
BI_14
The No.14 programmable binary input
15
BI_15
The No.15 programmable binary input
16
BI_16
The No.16 programmable binary input
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-22
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
17
BI_COM
The common negative connection of the BI_01 to BI_16.
19
BI_17
The No.17 programmable binary input
20
BI_18
The No.18 programmable binary input
21
BI_19
The No.19 programmable binary input
22
BI_20
The No.20 programmable binary input
23
BI_21
The No.21 programmable binary input
24
BI_22
The No.22 programmable binary input
25
BI_23
The No.23 programmable binary input
26
BI_24
The No.24 programmable binary input
27
BI_25
The No.25 programmable binary input
28
BI_26
The No.26 programmable binary input
29
BI_27
The No.27 programmable binary input
30
BI_28
The No.28 programmable binary input
31
BI_29
The No.29 programmable binary input
32
BI_30
The No.30 programmable binary input
33
BI_31
The No.31 programmable binary input
34
BI_32
The No.32 programmable binary input
BI_COM
The common negative connection of the BI_17 to BI_32.
18
18-pin
35
36
8.4.6 Binary Output Module (NR6651/NR6652/NR6660/NR6663)
The binary output module consists of some necessary contact outputs, and the binary outputs are
used as tripping and closing (protection, auto-reclosing or remote control) outputs or signal
outputs. It can receive tripping commands or closing commands from the CPU module, and then
executes these commands. It also can output some alarm signals from the CPU module.
The device can provide five types of binary output modules: NR6651A, NR6651B, NR6652A,
NR6660A and NR6663A.
⚫
8
NR6651A
The NR6651A provides 13 normal open contacts (NOC) with pickup relay control.
A 26-pin connector is fixed on the binary input module.
The terminal definition of the connector is shown as below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-23
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
BO_01
01
02
BO_02
03
04
BO_03
05
06
BO_04
07
08
BO_05
09
10
BO_06
11
12
BO_07
13
14
BO_08
15
16
BO_09
17
18
BO_10
19
20
BO_11
21
22
BO_12
23
24
BO_13
25
26
Figure 8.4-12 View of binary output module NR6651A
⚫
NR6651B
The NR6651B provides 11 normal open contacts (NOC, the first 11 contacts) and 2 normal close
contacts (NCC, the last 2 contacts). These binary outputs are controlled by pickup relay.
A 26-pin connector is fixed on the binary input module.
The terminal definition of the connector is shown in as below.
8
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-24
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
BO_01
01
02
BO_02
03
04
BO_03
05
06
BO_04
07
08
BO_05
09
10
BO_06
11
12
BO_07
13
14
BO_08
15
16
BO_09
17
18
BO_10
19
20
BO_11
21
22
BO_12
23
24
BO_13
25
26
Figure 8.4-13 View of binary output module NR6651B
⚫
NR6652A
The NR6652A provides 4 normal open contacts (NOC, the first 4 contacts) with heavy capacity for
controlling the circuit breaker directly, and provides 4 general normal open contacts (NOC, the last
4 contacts). These binary outputs are controlled by pickup relay.
A 26-pin connector is fixed on the binary input module.
8
The terminal definition of the connector is shown in as below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-25
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
BO_01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
BO_05
19
20
BO_06
21
22
BO_07
23
24
BO_08
25
26
BO_02
BO_03
BO_04
Figure 8.4-14 View of binary output module NR6652A
⚫
NR6660A
The NR6660A provides 17 normally open contacts (NOC, the first 17 contacts) and 2 normally
close contacts (NCC, the 16th and the 17th contacts). These binary outputs are controlled by
pickup relay.
Two 18-pin connectors are fixed on the binary input module.
8
The terminal definition of the connector is shown in Figure 8.4-15.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-26
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
BO_01
01
02
BO_02
03
04
BO_03
05
06
BO_04
07
08
BO_05
09
10
BO_06
11
12
BO_07
13
14
BO_08
15
16
BO_09
17
18
BO_10
19
20
BO_11
21
22
BO_12
23
24
BO_13
25
26
BO_14
27
28
BO_15
29
30
BO_16
32
31
BO_16
33
BO_17
35
34
BO_17
36
Figure 8.4-15 View of binary output module (NR6660A)
⚫
NR6663A
The NR6663A provides 4 normal open contacts (NOC, the first 4 contacts) with heavy capacity for
controlling the circuit breaker directly, and provides 4 general normal open contacts (NOC, the last
4 contacts). These binary outputs are controlled by pickup relay.
Two 18-pin connectors are fixed on the binary input module.
8
The terminal definition of the connector is shown as below.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-27
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
BO_01
BO_02
BO_03
BO_04
BO_05
BO_06
BO_07
BO_08
General tripping/signaling contact
02
03
Heavy-capacity tripping contact
01
Figure 8.4-16 View of binary output module (NR6663A)
Each binary output can be set as a specified tripping output contact or a
signal output contact through PCS-Studio according to practical
application.
8
8.4.7 Binary Input/Output Module (NR6661)
NR6661A module provides both binary inputs and binary outputs.
Two 18-pin connectors are fixed on the NR6661A module:
The upper 18-pin connector provides 16 binary inputs, the supported rated voltages of binary
inputs are listed in Chapter 2 Technical Data.
The lower 18-pin connector provides 6 normally open contacts (NOC) and 2 normally open
contacts & normally closed contacts (NOC/NCC). These binary outputs are controlled by pickup
relay.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-28
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
01
BI_01
02
BI_02
03
BI_03
04
BI_04
05
BI_05
BO_01
19
20
06
BI_06
BO_02
21
22
07
BI_07
BO_03
23
24
08
BI_08
BO_04
25
26
09
BI_09
BO_05
27
28
10
BI_10
BO_06
29
30
11
BI_11
BO_07_NO
12
BI_12
BO_07_NC
13
BI_13
BO_08_NO
14
BI_14
BO_08_NC
15
BI_15
16
BI_16
17
18
32
31
33
35
34
36
COM(01-16)
COM(01-16)
Figure 8.4-17 View of binary input/output module (NR6661A)
The terminal definition of NR6661A is described as below.
Table 8.4-6 Terminal definition and description of NR6661A
Pin No.
18-pin
Symbol
Description
01
BI_01
The No.1 programmable binary input
02
BI_02
The No.2 programmable binary input
03
BI_03
The No.3 programmable binary input
04
BI_04
The No.4 programmable binary input
05
BI_05
The No.5 programmable binary input
06
BI_06
The No.6 programmable binary input
07
BI_07
The No.7 programmable binary input
08
BI_08
The No.8 programmable binary input
09
BI_09
The No.9 programmable binary input
10
BI_10
The No.10 programmable binary input
11
BI_11
The No.11 programmable binary input
12
BI_12
The No.12 programmable binary input
13
BI_13
The No.13 programmable binary input
14
BI_14
The No.14 programmable binary input
15
BI_15
The No.15 programmable binary input
16
BI_16
The No.16 programmable binary input
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8
8-29
Date: 2020-09-02
8 Hardware
17
COM-
18
(01-16)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
18-pin
27
28
29
30
BO_01
BO_03
The No.03 binary output contact. It is a normally open contact.
BO_04
The No.04 binary output contact. It is a normally open contact.
BO_05
The No.05 binary output contact. It is a normally open contact.
BO_06
The No.06 binary output contact. It is a normally open contact.
BO_07
34
36
(NOC).
The No.02 binary output contact. It is a normally open contact.
33
35
The No.01 binary output contact. It is a normally open contact
BO_02
31
32
The common negative connection of the BI_01 to BI_16.
BO_08
The No.07 binary output contact. It can be selected as a normally
open contact or a normally closed contact (NCC).
The No.08 binary output contact. It can be selected as a normally
open contact or a normally closed contact.
8
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
8-30
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
9 Settings
Table of Contents
9.1 Global Settings ................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1 System Settings.................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Device Settings..................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Communication Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.4 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings ............................................................................... 9-16
9.1.5 Label Settings ..................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.1.6 Clock Synchronization Settings.......................................................................................... 9-17
9.1.7 OutMap Settings ................................................................................................................. 9-19
9.1.8 Supervision Settings........................................................................................................... 9-19
9.2 Protection Settings ........................................................................................ 9-20
9.2.1 Fault Detector (FD)............................................................................................................. 9-20
9.2.2 Optical Pilot Channel (FO) ................................................................................................. 9-20
9.2.3 Current Differential Protection (87L) .................................................................................. 9-21
9.2.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection Settings.............................................................................. 9-22
9.2.5 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Settings ...................................................................... 9-38
9.2.6 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings......................................................... 9-54
9.2.7 RMS Overcurrent Protection Settings ................................................................................ 9-59
9.2.8 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) ................................................................................ 9-63
9.2.9 Phase Overvoltage Protection Settings ............................................................................. 9-63
9.2.10 Residual Overvoltage Protection Settings ....................................................................... 9-67
9.2.11 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection Settings ...................................................... 9-68
9.2.12 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection Settings ........................................................ 9-68
9.2.13 Phase Undervoltage Protection Settings ......................................................................... 9-69
9.2.14 Frequency Protection Settings ......................................................................................... 9-73
9.2.15 Reverse Power Protection Settings ................................................................................. 9-76
9.2.16 Undercurrent Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-77
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-a
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
9.2.17 Breaker Failure Protection Settings ................................................................................. 9-78
9.2.18 Switch-on-to-Fault ProtectionSettings.............................................................................. 9-79
9.2.19 Thermal Overload Protection Settings ............................................................................. 9-80
9.2.20 Transfer Trip Settings ....................................................................................................... 9-81
9.2.21 Automatic Reclosure Settings .......................................................................................... 9-81
9.2.22 Fault Location Settings ..................................................................................................... 9-83
9.3 Measurement and Control Settings ............................................................. 9-84
9.3.1 Function Settings ................................................................................................................ 9-84
9.3.2 Synchronism Check Settings ............................................................................................. 9-84
9.3.3 Double Point Status Settings ............................................................................................. 9-86
9.3.4 Control Settings .................................................................................................................. 9-88
9.3.5 Interlocking Logic Settings ................................................................................................. 9-89
9.4 Logic Links ..................................................................................................... 9-91
9.4.1 Function Links .................................................................................................................... 9-91
9.4.2 GOOSE Receiving Links .................................................................................................... 9-91
List of Tables
Table 9.1-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 9-1
Table 9.1-2 Device settings......................................................................................................... 9-2
Table 9.1-3 General communication settings ........................................................................... 9-3
Table 9.1-4 IEC61850 communication settings ........................................................................ 9-7
Table 9.1-5 DNP communication settings ................................................................................. 9-8
9
Table 9.1-6 IEC103 communication settings .......................................................................... 9-14
Table 9.1-7 GOOSE communication settings ......................................................................... 9-16
Table 9.1-8 Disturbance fault recording settings ................................................................... 9-16
Table 9.1-9 Label settings ......................................................................................................... 9-16
Table 9.1-10 Clock synchronization settings ......................................................................... 9-17
Table 9.1-11 Outmap settings ................................................................................................... 9-19
Table 9.1-11 Supervision settings ............................................................................................ 9-19
Table 9.2-1 Settings of fault detector ...................................................................................... 9-20
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-b
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
Table 9.2-2 Settings of optical pilot channel .......................................................................... 9-21
Table 9.2-3 Settings of current differential protection .......................................................... 9-21
Table 9.2-4 Settings of phase overcurrent protection ........................................................... 9-22
Table 9.2-5 Settings of earth fault overcurrent protection .................................................... 9-38
Table 9.2-6 Settings of negative-sequence overcurrent protection..................................... 9-54
Table 9.2-7 Settings of RMS overcurrent protection ............................................................. 9-59
Table 9.2-5 Settings of broken conductor protection ............................................................ 9-63
Table 9.2-8 Settings of phase overvoltage protection ........................................................... 9-64
Table 9.2-9 Settings of residual overvoltage protection ....................................................... 9-67
Table 9.2-10 Settings of negative-sequence overvoltage protection .................................. 9-68
Table 9.2-11 Settings of positive-sequence overvoltage protection.................................... 9-69
Table 9.2-12 Settings of phase undervoltage protection ...................................................... 9-69
Table 9.2-13 Settings of frequency protection ....................................................................... 9-73
Table 9.2-14 Settings of reverse power protection ................................................................ 9-76
Table 9.2-15 Settings of undercurrent protection .................................................................. 9-77
Table 9.2-16 Settings of breaker failure protection................................................................ 9-78
Table 9.2-17 Settings of SOTF protection ............................................................................... 9-79
Table 9.2-19 Settings of thermal overload protection ........................................................... 9-80
Table 9.2-18 Settings of transfer trip ....................................................................................... 9-81
Table 9.2-19 Settings of AR ...................................................................................................... 9-81
Table 9.2-20 Settings of fault location ..................................................................................... 9-83
Table 9.4-1 Function links ......................................................................................................... 9-91
Table 9.4-2 GOOSE receiving links.......................................................................................... 9-91
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-c
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
9
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-d
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
9.1 Global Settings
9.1.1 System Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings System Settings
Table 9.1-1 System settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Remark
The number of active setting group,
1
Active_Grp
1~30
1
-
1
several setting groups can be configured
for protection settings, and only one is
active at a time.
2
PrimaryEquip_Name
Max
20
characters
Name
-
-
-
of
the
protected
primary
equipment, such as feeder, transformer,
etc.
3
Opt_SysFreq
50, 60
50Hz
Hz
The system frequency.
4
Prot.I1n
0~9999
1000
A
1
5
Prot.I2n
1, 5
1
A
-
6
Neu.I1n
0~9999
1000
A
1
7
Neu.I2n
1, 5
1
A
-
8
Prot.U1n
0~1100
10
kV
0.001
Rated primary value of protection VT
9
Prot.U2n
1~200
100
V
0.001
Rated secondary value of protection VT
10
Syn.U1n
0~1100
10
kV
0.001
Rated primary value of synchro-check VT
11
Syn.U2n
1~200
100
V
0.001
Rated primary value of protection phase
CT
Rated secondary value of protection
phase CT
Rated
primary
value
of
the
No.1
zero-sequence CT
Rated secondary value of the No.1
zero-sequence CT
Rated secondary value of synchro-check
VT
The logic setting determines that whether
12
Prot.En_RevCT
Disabled;
Enabled
the CT polarity of the three-phase
Disabled
-
-
protection CT is reversed.
Enabled: The CT polarity is reversed
Disabled: The CT polarity is not reversed
The logic setting determines that whether
13
Neu.En_RevCT
Disabled;
Enabled
the
Disabled
-
-
CT
polarity
of
the
No.1
zero-sequence CT is reversed.
Enabled: The CT polarity is reversed
Disabled: The CT polarity is not reversed
14
Opt_PhSeq
ABC;
ACB
ABC
-
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
This setting informs the device of the
actual system phase sequence, either
9-1
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Remark
ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the
device, labelled as A, B and C, must be
connected to system phase A, B and C
for correct operation.
15
Disabled;
En_VT
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Logic setting to put VT into service
9.1.2 Device Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Device Settings
Table 9.1-2 Device settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Remark
Logic setting to enable/disable the
1
En_DebugPort
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
debugging port. Used for debugging
tool connection, program download,
variable debugging, etc.
2
En_TelnetPort
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Logic setting to enable/disable the
Telnet port.
Enabled: Connecting to the device via
3
En_VirtualLCDPort
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
the software Teldevice is supported
Disabled: Connecting to the device via
the software Teldevice is not supported
Enabled: printing data to the software
4
En_NetPrintPort
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Netpts is supported
Disabled: printing data to the software
Netpts is not supported
9
5
En_NoCtrlPwd
6
Ctrl_Password
7
Un_BinaryInput
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
000~999
111
-
-
24~250
220
V
-
DC
-
-
Enabled
DC
8
Opt_Pwr_BI
AC50Hz
AC60Hz
9
U_Pickup_BI
50%Un~80%Un
63
%
0.1
10
U_DropOut_BI
50%Un~80%Un
55
%
0.1
11
Mon_Window_Jitter
0.000~500.000
1
0.001
s
Override control password via local
LCD
The control password via local LCD.
This setting is used to set the voltage
level of the binary input module.
Power supply mode of binary input
module
This setting is used to set pickup
voltage of the binary input module.
This setting is used to set drop-out
voltage of the binary input module.
Monitoring window of binary input jitter
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-2
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Remark
processing
12
Num_Blk_Jitter
2~500000
10
1
-
13
Blk_Window_Jitter
0.000~500.000
1
0.001
s
14
Num_Reblk_Jitter
1~500000
10
1
-
Times threshold to block binary input
status change due to jitter
Blocking window of binary input status
change due to jitter
Times threshold to initiate immediately
another blocking window of binary input
status change due to continuous jitter
15
En_Jitter_Blk
Disabled
Enabled
The logic setting to enable/disable the
Disabled
-
-
jitter processing function in case of
binary input voltage variation
9.1.3 Communication Settings
9.1.3.1 General Communication Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Comm Settings General Comm Settings
Table 9.1-3 General communication settings
No.
Settings
1
IP_LAN1
2
Mask_LAN1
3
IP_LAN2
4
Mask_LAN2
5
En_LAN2
6
IP_LAN3
7
Mask_LAN3
8
En_LAN3
9
IP_LAN4
10
Mask_LAN4
11
En_LAN4
Range
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
Disabled
Enabled
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
Disabled
Enabled
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
Disabled
Default value
Unit
Step
198.120.0.100
-
-
255.255.0.0
-
-
198.121.0.100
-
-
255.255.0.0
-
-
Enabled
-
-
198.122.0.100
-
-
255.255.0.0
-
-
Disabled
-
-
198.123.0.100
-
-
255.255.0.0
-
-
Disabled
-
-
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Remark
IP address of Ethernet port A
Subnet mask of Ethernet port
A
IP address of Ethernet port B
Subnet mask of Ethernet port
B
Put
Ethernet
port
B
into
service
IP address of Ethernet port C
Subnet mask of Ethernet port
C
Put
Ethernet
port
C
into
service
IP address of Ethernet port D
Subnet mask of Ethernet port
D
Put
Ethernet
port
D
into
9-3
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default value
Unit
Step
Enabled
12
Gateway
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
Remark
service
0.0.0.0
-
-
19200
bps
-
Disabled
-
-
IP address of the gateway
(router)
4800
9600
13
Baud_Printer
19200
38400
Baud rate of printer port
57600
115200
14
En_AutoPrint
Disabled
Enabled
Enable/disable
Communication
15
Protocol_RS485-1
IEC103
Modbus
automatic
printing function
protocol
of
rear RS-485 serial port 1.
IEC103
-
-
IEC103:
IEC60870-5-103
protocol
Modbus: Modbus protocol
Communication
16
Protocol_RS485-2
IEC103
Modbus
protocol
of
rear RS-485 serial port 2.
IEC103
-
-
IEC103:
IEC60870-5-103
protocol
Modbus: Modbus protocol
4800
9600
17
Baud_RS485-1
19200
38400
19200
bps
-
19200
bps
-
Baud rate of rear RS-485
serial port 1.
57600
115200
4800
9600
18
Baud_RS485-2
19200
38400
Baud rate of rear RS-485
serial port 2.
57600
9
115200
Communication
19
Addr_RS485-1
0~255
100
-
1
address
between the device and the
SCADA or RTU via RS-485
serial port 1.
Communication
20
Addr_RS485-2
0~255
100
-
1
address
between the device and the
SCADA or RTU via RS-485
serial port 2.
21
Cfg_NetPorts_Bond
0~255
0
-
-
The setting is used to set the
Ethernet ports that are used
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-4
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default value
Unit
Step
Remark
as hot standby each other.
Normal;
22
B01.Opt_NetMode
The network method of the
1-2:Normal,3-4:HSR;
Normal
1-2:Normal,3-4:PRP;
-
-
CPU module located in slot
No.1
1-2:Normal,3-4:RSTP
The setting is used to set IP
address of syslog server 01,
and the device can upload
audit log to syslog server.
23
IP_SyslogServer01
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
The setting is invalid unless
0.0.0.0
-
-
cyber security is configured
in the device.
Syslog is a communication
protocol
for
message
logging, it is used for security
auditing in this device.
The setting is used to set IP
address of syslog server 02,
and the device can upload
audit log to syslog server.
24
IP_SyslogServer02
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
The setting is invalid unless
0.0.0.0
-
-
cyber security is configured
in the device.
Syslog is a communication
protocol
for
message
logging, it is used for security
auditing in this device.
The setting is used to set IP
address of syslog server 03,
and the device can upload
audit log to syslog server.
25
IP_SyslogServer03
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
The setting is invalid unless
0.0.0.0
-
-
cyber security is configured
in the device.
Syslog is a communication
protocol
for
message
logging, it is used for security
auditing in this device.
The setting is used to set IP
26
IP_SyslogServer04
000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
address of syslog server 04,
0.0.0.0
-
-
and the device can upload
audit log to syslog server.
The setting is invalid unless
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-5
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default value
Unit
Step
Remark
cyber security is configured
in the device.
Syslog is a communication
protocol
for
message
logging, it is used for security
auditing in this device.
1.
[Cfg_NetPorts_Bond]
The setting is used to configure dual-networks switching, and it means that no dual-networks
switching is created when the setting is set as “0”. The device supports a bond between any two
Ethernet ports, and the bond among three or above Ethernet ports is impermissible.
The devices communicate with SAS by station level network. In order to ensure reliable
communication, dual networks (i.e., network 1 and network 2) are adopted. Another special
communication mode based on dual networks is that Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the
device own the same IP address and MAC address, and network 1 and network 2 are used as hot
standby each other. When both network 1 and network 2 are normal, any of them is used to
communicate between the device and SAS. The device will automatically switch to the other
healthy network when one network is abnormal, which will not affect normal communication.
Taking a CPU module with four Ethernet ports as an example, each bit is corresponding with an
Ethernet port, i.e., Bit0, Bit1, Bit2 and Bit3 are corresponding with Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2,
Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 respectively. If a bond between Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet 2
is created, the setting [Cfg_NetPorts_Bond] is set as “3”. The specific setting is as below.
Ethernet port 1
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
1
1
Binary
Setting
Value
0011
3
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
Bonding
Bonding
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
1
0
0
1
Binary
Setting
Value
1001
9
Ethernet port 2
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Binary
Setting
Value
0101
5
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
Bonding
Bonding
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
1
1
0
Binary
Setting
Value
0110
6
Ethernet port 3
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
9
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
Binary
Setting
Value
1010
10
Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1
Bonding
Bonding
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
1
1
0
0
Binary
Setting
Value
1100
12
Ethernet port 4
CPU Module
The switching logic is as below.
⚫
After the device is powered on, network 1 is selected when the link status of both network 1
and network 2 are normal.
⚫
When the link status of network 1 is abnormal, network 2 is selected if network 2 is normal.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-6
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
⚫
When the link status of network 1 is abnormal, network 1 is kept to work if network 2 is also
abnormal.
⚫
When network 2 is working, network 2 is kept to work even if network 1 has been restored to
normal. The device will be switched to network 1 only if network 2 is abnormal.
9.1.3.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Comm Settings IEC61850 Settings
Table 9.1-4 IEC61850 communication settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Remark
The identification of the IED in
IEC 61850 protocol.
It cannot be an empty string and
shall be unique within an SCL
file. IEDNAME should be less
1
IEDNAME
-
TEMPLATE
-
-
than 20 characters comprising
letters or digits or underline ( _ ),
and it is case sensitive.
If this setting is modified, the IED
name in ".cid"
changed
file
will
simultaneously
be
and
vice versa.
It is used to set the change
detection threshold for suddenly
2
Threshold_Measmt_Net
0~100.00
1
%
0.01
sending measurement value to
the SCADA via the device's
Ethernet port using IEC 61850
protocol
3
ThAbs_Measmt
0.001~0.5
0.02
-
0.001
Measurement values zero drift
suppression threshold
If users need to support the
4
En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
quality change upload function,
this parameter should be set as
“Enabled”
It is used to select the network
mode of MMS network for the
SingleNet
5
Opt_DualNetMode_MMS
HotStdby
communication with SCADA
SingleNet
ColdStdby
-
-
SingleNet: Single network
HotStdby: Hot standby mode
(always two ports in service)
ColdStdby: Cold standby mode
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-7
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Remark
(only one port in service)
6
En_IEC62351_TCP_Port
7
En_IEC61850_TCP_Port
The
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
enable/disable
TCP
to
port
in
IEC62351 protocol
The
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
enable/disable
TCP
to
port
in
IEC61850 protocol
9.1.3.3 DNP Communication Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Comm Settings DNP Settings
Table 9.1-5 DNP communication settings
No.
1
Settings
En_TCP1_DNP
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
The
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
Addr_Slave_TCP1_DNP
0~65519
2
-
1
3
Addr_Master_TCP1_DNP
0~65519
1
-
1
IP_Master_TCP1_DNP
logic
setting
to
enable/disable the No.1
network DNP client
2
4
Remark
The local address of the
No.1 network DNP client
The master address of the
No.1 network DNP client
The IP address of the
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
-
-
master of the No.1 network
DNP client
The communication map
5
Opt_Map_TCP1_DNP
0~4
0
-
1
of the No.1 network DNP
client
The
6
t_AppLayer_TCP1_DNP
1~5
3
s
1
timeout
of
the
application layer of the
No.1 network DNP client
9
The heartbeat time interval
7
t_KeepAlive_TCP1_DNP
0~7200
120
s
1
of the No.1 network DNP
client
The
8
En_UR_TCP1_DNP
Disabled
Enabled
logic
setting
to
enable/disable
Disabled
-
-
unsolicited
function
the
message
of
the
No.1
network DNP client
9
Num_URRetry_TCP1_DNP
2~10
3
-
1
The online retransmission
number for sending the
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-8
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Remark
unsolicited message of the
No.1 network DNP client
The offline retransmission
10
t_UROfflRetry_TCP1_DNP
1~5000
60
s
1
interval for sending the
unsolicited message of the
No.1 network DNP client
The default class level of
11
Class_BI_TCP1_DNP
0~3
1
-
1
the “Binary Input” of the
No.1 network DNP client
The default class level of
12
Class_AI_TCP1_DNP
0~3
2
-
1
the “Analog Input” of the
No.1 network DNP client
The selection timeout of
13
t_Select_TCP1_DNP
0~240
30
s
1
the remote control and
remote adjustment of No.1
network DNP client
The time interval of the
14
t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP1_DNP
0~3600
180
s
1
time
synchronization
function
of
the
No.1
network DNP client
15
Obj01DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
The
1-BISingleBit
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
16
Obj02DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
2-BIChWithAbsTime
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-BISingleBit
-
-
“OBJ1”
variation
of
default
the
No.1
network DNP client
2-BIChWithA
bsTime
The
-
-
“OBJ2”
variation
of
default
the
No.1
network DNP client
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
17
Obj30DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
3-AI32IntWoutF
4-AI16IntWoutF
3-AI32IntWo
utF
The
-
-
“OBJ30”
variation
of
default
the
No.1
network DNP client
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
18
Obj32DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
2-AI16IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AI32IntEv
WoutT
The
-
-
Obj40DefltVar_TCP1_DNP
2-AO16Int
The
1-AO32Int
-
-
3-AO32Flt
20
21
En_TCP2_DNP
Addr_Slave_TCP2_DNP
Disabled
Enabled
0~65519
variation
of
default
the
No.1
network DNP client
1-AO32Int
19
“OBJ32”
“OBJ40”
variation
of
default
the
No.1
network DNP client
The
Disabled
-
-
logic
setting
to
enable/disable the No.2
network DNP client
2
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
1
The local address of the
No.2 network DNP client
9-9
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
22
23
Settings
Addr_Master_TCP2_DNP
IP_Master_TCP2_DNP
Default
Range
value
0~65519
1
Unit
Step
-
1
Remark
The master address of the
No.2 network DNP client
The IP address of the
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
-
-
master of the No.2 network
DNP client
The communication map
24
Opt_Map_TCP2_DNP
0~4
0
-
1
of the No.2 network DNP
client
The
25
t_AppLayer_TCP2_DNP
1~5
3
s
1
timeout
of
the
application layer of the
No.2 network DNP client
The heartbeat time interval
26
t_KeepAlive_TCP2_DNP
0~7200
120
s
1
of the No.2 network DNP
client
The
27
En_UR_TCP2_DNP
Disabled
Enabled
logic
setting
to
enable/disable
Disabled
-
-
unsolicited
function
the
message
of
the
No.2
network DNP client
The online retransmission
28
Num_URRetry_TCP2_DNP
2~10
3
-
1
number for sending the
unsolicited message of the
No.2 network DNP client
The offline retransmission
29
t_UROfflRetry_TCP2_DNP
1~5000
60
s
1
interval for sending the
unsolicited message of the
No.2 network DNP client
The default class level of
30
Class_BI_TCP2_DNP
0~3
1
-
1
the “Binary Input” of the
No.2 network DNP client
The default class level of
9
31
Class_AI_TCP2_DNP
0~3
2
-
1
the “Analog Input” of the
No.2 network DNP client
The selection timeout of
32
t_Select_TCP2_DNP
0~240
30
s
1
the remote control and
remote adjustment of No.2
network DNP client
The time interval of the
33
t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP2_DNP
0~3600
180
s
1
time
synchronization
function
of
the
No.2
network DNP client
34
Obj01DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
1-BISingleBit
1-BISingleBit
-
-
The
“OBJ1”
default
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-10
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
2-BIWithStatus
Remark
variation
of
the
No.2
network DNP client
1-BIChWoutT
35
Obj02DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
2-BIChWithAbsTime
3-BIChWithRelTime
2-BIChWithA
bsTime
The
-
-
“OBJ2”
variation
of
default
the
No.2
network DNP client
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
36
Obj30DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
3-AI32IntWoutF
4-AI16IntWoutF
3-AI32IntWo
utF
The
-
-
“OBJ30”
variation
of
default
the
No.2
network DNP client
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
37
Obj32DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
2-AI16IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AI32IntEv
WoutT
The
-
-
Obj40DefltVar_TCP2_DNP
The
2-AO16Int
1-AO32Int
-
-
3-AO32Flt
39
En_TCP3_DNP
the
“OBJ40”
variation
The
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
No.2
of
default
the
No.2
logic
setting
to
enable/disable the No.3
network DNP client
Addr_Slave_TCP3_DNP
0~65519
2
-
1
41
Addr_Master_TCP3_DNP
0~65519
1
-
1
IP_Master_TCP3_DNP
of
network DNP client
40
42
variation
default
network DNP client
1-AO32Int
38
“OBJ32”
The local address of the
No.3 network DNP client
The master address of the
No.3 network DNP client
The IP address of the
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
-
-
master of the No.3 network
DNP client
The communication map
43
Opt_Map_TCP3_DNP
0~4
0
-
1
of the No.3 network DNP
client
The
44
t_AppLayer_TCP3_DNP
1~5
3
s
1
timeout
of
the
application layer of the
No.3 network DNP client
The heartbeat time interval
45
t_KeepAlive_TCP3_DNP
0~7200
120
s
1
of the No.3 network DNP
client
The
46
En_UR_TCP3_DNP
Disabled
Enabled
logic
setting
to
enable/disable
Disabled
-
-
unsolicited
function
the
message
of
the
No.3
network DNP client
47
Num_URRetry_TCP3_DNP
2~10
3
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
1
The online retransmission
number for sending the
9-11
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Remark
unsolicited message of the
No.3 network DNP client
The offline retransmission
48
t_UROfflRetry_TCP3_DNP
1~5000
60
s
1
interval for sending the
unsolicited message of the
No.3 network DNP client
The default class level of
49
Class_BI_TCP3_DNP
0~3
1
-
1
the “Binary Input” of the
No.3 network DNP client
The default class level of
50
Class_AI_TCP3_DNP
0~3
2
-
1
the “Analog Input” of the
No.3 network DNP client
The selection timeout of
51
t_Select_TCP3_DNP
0~240
30
s
1
the remote control and
remote adjustment of No.3
network DNP client
The time interval of the
52
t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP3_DNP
0~3600
180
s
1
time
synchronization
function
of
the
No.3
network DNP client
53
Obj01DefltVar_TCP3_DNP
The
1-BISingleBit
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
54
Obj02DefltVar_TCP3_DNP
2-BIChWithAbsTime
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-BISingleBit
-
-
“OBJ1”
variation
of
default
the
No.3
network DNP client
2-BIChWithA
bsTime
The
-
-
“OBJ2”
variation
of
default
the
No.3
network DNP client
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
55
Obj30DefltVar_TCP3_DNP
3-AI32IntWoutF
4-AI16IntWoutF
3-AI32IntWo
utF
The
-
-
“OBJ30”
variation
of
default
the
No.3
network DNP client
5-AI32Flt
9
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
56
Obj32DefltVar_TCP3_DNP
2-AI16IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AI32IntEv
WoutT
The
-
-
Obj40DefltVar_TCP3_DNP
2-AO16Int
The
1-AO32Int
-
-
3-AO32Flt
58
59
En_TCP4_DNP
Addr_Slave_TCP4_DNP
Disabled
Enabled
0~65519
variation
of
default
the
No.3
network DNP client
1-AO32Int
57
“OBJ32”
“OBJ40”
variation
of
default
the
No.3
network DNP client
The
Disabled
-
-
logic
setting
to
enable/disable the No.4
network DNP client
2
-
1
The local address of the
No.4 network DNP client
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-12
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
60
61
Settings
Addr_Master_TCP4_DNP
IP_Master_TCP4_DNP
Default
Range
value
0~65519
1
Unit
Step
-
1
Remark
The master address of the
No.4 network DNP client
The IP address of the
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
-
-
master of the No.4 network
DNP client
The communication map
62
Opt_Map_TCP4_DNP
0~4
0
-
1
of the No.4 network DNP
client
The
63
t_AppLayer_TCP4_DNP
1~5
3
s
1
timeout
of
the
application layer of the
No.4 network DNP client
The heartbeat time interval
64
t_KeepAlive_TCP4_DNP
0~7200
120
s
1
of the No.4 network DNP
client
The
65
En_UR_TCP4_DNP
Disabled
Enabled
logic
setting
to
enable/disable
Disabled
-
-
unsolicited
function
the
message
of
the
No.4
network DNP client
The online retransmission
66
Num_URRetry_TCP4_DNP
2~10
3
-
1
number for sending the
unsolicited message of the
No.4 network DNP client
The offline retransmission
67
t_UROfflRetry_TCP4_DNP
1~5000
60
s
1
interval for sending the
unsolicited message of the
No.4 network DNP client
The default class level of
68
Class_BI_TCP4_DNP
0~3
1
-
1
the “Binary Input” of the
No.4 network DNP client
The default class level of
69
Class_AI_TCP4_DNP
0~3
2
-
1
the “Analog Input” of the
No.4 network DNP client
The selection timeout of
70
t_Select_TCP4_DNP
0~240
30
s
1
the remote control and
remote adjustment of No.4
network DNP client
The time interval of the
71
t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP4_DNP
0~3600
180
s
1
time
synchronization
function
of
the
No.4
network DNP client
72
Obj01DefltVar_TCP4_DNP
1-BISingleBit
1-BISingleBit
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
-
The
“OBJ1”
default
9-13
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Remark
2-BIWithStatus
variation
of
the
No.4
network DNP client
1-BIChWoutT
73
Obj02DefltVar_TCP4_DNP
2-BIChWithAbsTime
3-BIChWithRelTime
2-BIChWithA
bsTime
The
-
-
“OBJ2”
variation
of
default
the
No.4
network DNP client
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
74
Obj30DefltVar_TCP4_DNP
3-AI32IntWoutF
4-AI16IntWoutF
3-AI32IntWo
utF
The
-
-
“OBJ30”
variation
of
default
the
No.4
network DNP client
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
75
Obj32DefltVar_TCP4_DNP
2-AI16IntEvWoutT
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AI32IntEv
WoutT
The
-
-
variation
Obj40DefltVar_TCP4_DNP
The
2-AO16Int
of
default
the
No.4
network DNP client
1-AO32Int
76
“OBJ32”
1-AO32Int
-
-
“OBJ40”
variation
3-AO32Flt
of
default
the
No.4
network DNP client
9.1.3.4 IEC103 Communication Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Comm Settings IEC103 Settings
Table 9.1-6 IEC103 communication settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default value
Unit
Step
Current
The language of group caption of
Language;
1
Opt_Caption_103
Remark
Fixed
Current
Chinese;
Language
IEC103 protocol
-
-
It is recommended to be set as “Fixed
Chinese” if the device communicate with
Fixed
SCADA in Chinese.
English
This setting is only used for IEC 103
protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol
9
is used, the setting must be set as
2
En_Broadcast_LAN1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
“Enabled”.
Disabled: the device does not send UDP
messages through Ethernet port A;
Enabled:
the
device
sends
UDP
messages through Ethernet port A.
This setting is only used for IEC 103
3
En_Broadcast_LAN2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol
is used, the setting must be set as
“Enabled”.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-14
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default value
Unit
Step
Remark
Disabled: the device does not send UDP
messages through Ethernet port B;
Enabled:
the
device
sends
UDP
messages through Ethernet port B.
This setting is only used for IEC 103
protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol
is used, the setting must be set as
4
En_Broadcast_LAN3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
“Enabled”.
Disabled: the device does not send UDP
messages through Ethernet port C;
Enabled:
the
device
sends
UDP
messages through Ethernet port C.
This setting is only used for IEC 103
protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol
is used, the setting must be set as
5
En_Broadcast_LAN4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
“Enabled”.
Disabled: the device does not send UDP
messages through Ethernet port D;
Enabled:
the
device
sends
UDP
messages through Ethernet port D.
This setting is used to set the data
format for sending waveform list using
6
Format_Wave_Sent
DisturbData;
File
IEC 60870-5-103.
File
-
-
DisturbData: Send the waveform list in
ASDU23 mode;
File: Send the waveform list in ASDU222
mode.
It is used to set the change detection
threshold
7
Threshold_Measmt_Net
0~100.00
1.00
%
0.01
for
suddenly
sending
measurement value to the SCADA via
the device's Ethernet port using IEC
60870-5-103
It is used to set the time period for
8
Period_Measmt_Net
0~65535
30
s
1
sending the measurement value to
SCADA via the device's Ethernet port
using IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850.
9.1.3.5 GOOSE Communication Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Comm Settings GOOSE Settings
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-15
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
Table 9.1-7 GOOSE communication settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default value
Unit
Step
Remark
The GOOSE receiving mode.
1
Opt_RecvMode_GOOSE
DoubleFrameChk: double frame
DoubleFrameChk
SingleFrameChk
SingleFrameChk
-
-
check mode;
SingleFrameChk:
single
frame
check mode;
2
En_NetA_GOOSE
3
En_DualNet_GOOSE
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Disabled
-
-
Logic setting to enable/disable
GOOSE net A
Logic setting to enable/disable
GOOSE double-net mode
Logic setting to enable/disable
GOOSE
4
En_ComplexNet_GOOSE
complex-net
mode.
GOOSE complex-net mode: for
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
the
GOOSE
control
receiving,
blocks
adopt
some
dual-net
receiving and other control blocks
adopt single-net receiving.
9.1.4 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings DFR Settings
Table 9.1-8 Disturbance fault recording settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
RecDur_PreTrigDFR
0~1
0.1
s
0.001
2
RecDur_PostFault
0~10
5
s
0.001
Remark
Waveform recorded duration before the
trigger element operating
Waveform recorded duration after the
fault happens
The
3
MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR
0~10
10
s
0.001
9
maximum
duration
after
waveform
recorded
the trigger
element
operating
9.1.5 Label Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Label Settings
Table 9.1-9 Label settings
No.
1
Symbol
Bx.Name_00_GCommLink
Default value
GOOSE_Link00
Description
Label setting of GOOSE communication link 00 of the
module located in slot No.x.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-16
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
2
……
……
……
3
Bx.Name_63_ommLink
GOOSE_Link63
Label setting of GOOSE communication link 63f the
module located in slot No.x.
These settings are used to definite the label of each GOOSE communication link. The label of
each GOOSE communication link will influence the displayed contents of all reports, settings and
metering that related with each GOOSE communication link.
9.1.6 Clock Synchronization Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings ClockSyn Settings
Table 9.1-10 Clock synchronization settings
No
Settings
.
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Conventional
1
Opt_TimeSyn
Remark
Select
SAS
NoTimeSyn
-
-
NoTimeSyn
the
time
synchronization mode of the
device.
The local time zone also
2
OffsetHour_UTC
-12~12
8
-
1
refered to as the hour offset
hour from UTC .
3
OffsetMinute_UTC
0~60
0
-
1
The offset minute of local time
from UTC.
The IP address of the server
4
IP_Server_SNTP
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
-
-
when
SNTP
synchronization
time
mode
is
selected
The IP address of the standby
5
IP_StandbyServer_S
0.0.0.0~
NTP
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
-
-
server
when
SNTP
synchronization
mode
time
is
selected
6
DST.En
The logic setting is used to
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
enable or disable Daylight
Saving Time (DST)
It is used to set the minute
7
DST.OffsetMinute
0~255
60
-
1
offset
of
DST,
i.e.
the
difference between DST time
and local time
8
Jan,
Feb,
Mar,
DST.MonthInYear_St
Apr,
May,
Jun,
art
Jul,
Aug,
Sep,
Mar
-
-
1st
-
-
It is used to set the start month
of DST.
Oct, Nov, Dec
9
DST.WeekInMonth_S
1st,
2nd,
3nd,
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
It is used to set the start week
9-17
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No
Settings
.
tart
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
4th, Last
Remark
of DST.
Sunday, Monday,
10
DST.DayInWeek_Star
t
Tuesday,
Wednesday,
Sunday
-
-
3
-
1
Oct
-
-
1st
-
-
Sunday
-
-
9
-
1
Thursday, Friday,
It is used to set the start day of
DST.
Saturday
11
12
DST.HourInDay_Start
0~23
Jan,
Feb,
Mar,
DST.MonthInYear_En
Apr,
May,
Jun,
d
Jul,
Aug,
Sep,
It is used to set the start hour
of DST.
It is used to set the end month
of DST.
Oct, Nov, Dec
13
DST.WeekInMonth_E
1st,
2nd,
nd
4th, Last
3nd,
It is used to set the end week
of DST.
Sunday, Monday,
Tuesday,
14
DST.DayInWeek_End
Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday,
It is used to set the end day of
DST.
Saturday
15
1.
DST.HourInDay_End
0~23
It is used to set the end hour of
DST.
[Opt_TimeSyn]
There are three selections for clock synchronization of the device, each selection includes
different time clock synchronization signals shown in following table.
Item
Description
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
Conventional
PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
IEEE1588 (Fiber): Clock message via IEEE1588.
9
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SAS
IEC103: Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.
MODBUS: Clock messages through MODBUS protocol.
NoTimeSyn
1)
If time synchronization function is not needed for the device, this option can be
selected.
When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-18
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
2)
When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send time synchronization alarm
signal.
The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device
receives the IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.
9.1.7 OutMap Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings OutMap Settings
Table 9.1-11 Outmap settings
No.
1
2
Name
Range
OutMapxxx
00000000~
(xxx=001, 002…032)
FFFFFFFF
t_Dwell_xxx_OutMap
0.000~0.500
(xxx=001, 002…032)
Unit
Default
-
0
s
0.060
Description
Tripping logic setting of programmable trip
output map xxx
The pulse width setting of programmable
trip output map xxx
9.1.8 Supervision Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Global Settings Superv Settings
Table 9.1-12 Supervision settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Remark
The calculated residual current
1
CTS.3I0_Set
0~200
0.1
A
0.001
setting of CT circuit supervision
function.
The calculated residual voltage
2
CTS.3U0_Set
0~200
30
V
0.001
setting of CT circuit supervision
function.
3
CTS.t_DPU
0~100
10
s
0.001
4
CTS.t_DPO
0~100
10
s
0.001
5
CTS.En
Disabled
-
-
6
VTS.U1_Set
30.00
V
0.01
Disabled
Enabled
0~100
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Delay pick-up time setting for CT
circuit failure
Delay drop-out time setting for CT
circuit failure
Enabling/disabling
CT
circuit
supervision function.
Positive-sequence
threshold
for
voltage
VT
circuit
9-19
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Remark
supervision
7
VTS.3U0_Set
0~100
8.00
V
0.01
Zero-sequence
voltage
(calculated)
for
threshold
VT
circuit supervision
Negative-sequence
8
VTS.U2_Set
0~100
8.00
V
0.01
voltage
setting of VT circuit supervision
function.
9
VTS.t_DPU
0.2~30
1.500
s
0.001
10
VTS.t_DDO
0.2~30
10.000
s
0.001
11
VTS.En
Enabled
-
-
12
VTS.Opt_VT
Bus
-
-
Disabled or
Enabled
Bus or Bay
Delay pickup setting for the alarm
of VT circuit supervision
Delay drop off setting for the
alarm of VT circuit supervision
Logic setting for alarm function of
VT circuit supervision
Selection of Bay VT or Bus VT
9.2 Protection Settings
9.2.1 Fault Detector (FD)
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FD Settings
Table 9.2-1 Settings of fault detector
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
FD.DPFC.I_Set
(0.050~40.000)×In
0.100
A
0.001
2
FD.ROC.3I0_Set
(0.050~40.000)×In
0.100
A
0.001
Description
Current setting of DPFC current
fault detector element
Current
FD.NOC.I2_Set
(0.050~40.000)×In
0.100
A
0.001
9
of
residual
current fault detector element
Current
3
setting
setting
of
negative-sequence current fault
detector element
4
FD.NOC.En
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Enabled
-
-
negative-sequence current fault
detector element
9.2.2 Optical Pilot Channel (FO)
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings Rmt CommCh Settings
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-20
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
Table 9.2-2 Settings of optical pilot channel
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
1
LocID
0~65535
1
-
1
2
RmtID
0~65535
2
-
1
3
BaudRate
2048
kbps
-
4
Protocol
C37.94
-
-
64
2048
Description
Identity code of the device at local end
Identity code of the device at remote
end
Baud rate of optical pilot channel
G.703
It is used to select protocol type, G.703
or C37.94
C37.94
The setting for the times of 64kbit/s,
5
FOx.Nx64k_C37.94
1~12
12
-
1
which is an N*64kbit/s standard defined
by IEEE C37.94 standard
Option of internal clock or external
6
FOx.Opt_ClkSrc
Ext
Int
Int
-
clock
-
Ext: external clock
Int: internal clock
7
FOx.En
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling channel x
9.2.3 Current Differential Protection (87L)
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings Diff Settings
Table 9.2-3 Settings of current differential protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Unit
value
Step
1
87L.I_Pkp
(0.05~40)×In
0.300
A
0.001
2
87L.I_Alm
(0.05~40)×In
0.300
A
0.001
3
87L.I_Pkp_CTS
(0.05~40)×In
1.0×In
A
0.001
4
87L.K_Cr_CT
0.2~10
1.0
-
0.001
5
87L.I_Knee1
(0.05~40)×In
1.0×In
A
0.001
6
87L.I_Knee2
(0.05~40)×In
3.0×In
A
0.001
7
87L.Slope1
0.3~0.75
0.500
-
0.01
8
87L.Slope2
0.3~0.75
0.700
-
0.01
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Description
Minimum pickup current setting of
current differential protection
Current setting of differential current
abnormality alarm
Current
setting
of
differential
protection when CT circuit failure
The factor of CT ratio
Current setting of knee point 1 for
current differential protection
Current setting of knee point 2 for
current differential protection
Slope 1 of steady-state current
differential element
Slope 2 of steady-state current
differential element
9-21
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
9
10
11
12
Settings
87L.En
87L.En_Biased1
87L.En_Biased2
87L.InterTrp
Range
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Default
Unit
value
Enabled
-
Step
Description
Enabling/disabling
-
differential protection
Enabling/disabling
Enabled
-
current
-
stage
1
of
steady-state current differential
element
Enabling/disabling
Enabled
-
-
stage
2
of
steady-state current differential
element
Enabled
-
Enabling/disabling
-
inter-tripping
element
Enabling/disabling
local
independent current differential
13
87L.En_LocDiff
Disabled
Enabled
protection (independent current
Enabled
-
-
differential protection means local
current differential protection can
operate without permissive signal
from remote end)
14
87L.En_CTS_Blk
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
differential
current
protection
blocked
during CT circuit failure
9.2.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings OC Settings
Table 9.2-4 Settings of phase overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The low voltage blocking setting
1
50/51P.VCE.Upp
10~100
70
V
0.001
of the voltage control element of
phase overcurrent protection
9
The negative-sequence voltage
2
50/51P.VCE.U2
2~57
8
V
0.001
blocking setting of the voltage
control
element
of
phase
overcurrent protection
The residual voltage setting (set
3
50/51P.VCE.3U0
2~57
8
V
0.001
according to 3U0) of voltage
control
element
of
phase
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-22
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The relay characteristic angle of
4
50/51P.DIR.RCA
-180~179
45
deg
1
the direction control element of
phase overcurrent protection
The relay negative-sequence
5
50/51P.DIR.RCA_N
egOC
-180~179
45
deg
1
characteristic
direction
angle
control
of
the
element
of
phase overcurrent protection
6
7
8
9
50/51P.DIR.phi_Min
_Fwd
50/51P.DIR.phi_Ma
x_Fwd
50/51P.DIR.phi_Min
_Rev
50/51P.DIR.phi_Ma
x_Rev
The minimum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The maximum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The minimum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The maximum boundary of the
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
phase overcurrent protection
The voltage polarization mode
for direction control element of
phase overcurrent protection
10
50/51P.DIR.Opt_Pol
arizedVolt
Upp;
Up;
Upp:
Upp
-
-
U1
phase-to-phase
voltage
polarized
Up:
phase-to-ground
voltage
polarized
U1: positive-sequence voltage
polarized
The minimum operating current
11
50/51P.DIR.I_Min
(0.05~1)In
0.05
-
0.001
setting for the direction control
element of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating voltage
12
50/51P.DIR.U_Min
1~10
4
V
0.001
setting for the direction control
element of phase overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-23
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Logic setting to determine the
behaviour of phase overcurrent
protection
when
VT
circuit
supervision function is enabled
and VT circuit failure happens.
13
50/51P.En_VTS_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
Disabled:
phase
overcurrent
protection will not affected by VT
circuit failure
Enabled:
voltage
controlled
phase overcurrent protection will
be blocked by VT circuit failure
signal
14
50/51P.HMB.K_Hm
2
The
0.1~1
0.2
-
0.001
percent
setting
of
the
harmonic control element of
phase overcurrent protection
The current setting for releasing
15
50/51P.HMB.I_Rls
2~150
20
A
0.001
the harmonic control element of
phase overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
harmonic
16
50/51P.HMB.Opt_Bl
k
PhaseBlk
CrossBlk
blocking
mode
of
phase overcurrent protection
PhaseBlk
-
-
MaxPhaseBlk
PhaseBlk: phase blocking
CrossBlk: cross blocking
MaxPhaseBlk: maximum phase
blocking
17
50/51P1.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
18
50/51P1.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
9
19
50/51P1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-24
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 1 of phase
20
50/51P1.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 1 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
21
50/51P1.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 1 of phase
22
50/51P1.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 1 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
23
50/51P1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 1 of phase
24
50/51P1.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-25
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
25
50/51P1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
26
50/51P1.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 1 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
27
50/51P1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
28
50/51P1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 1 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
9
29
50/51P1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
1
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
30
50/51P1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
1
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-26
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
31
50/51P1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
1
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
32
50/51P2.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
33
50/51P2.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
34
50/51P2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 2 of phase
35
50/51P2.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 2 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
36
50/51P2.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 2 of phase
37
50/51P2.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 2 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-27
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
38
Settings
50/51P2.En
Default
Range
Disabled;
Enabled
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 2 of phase
39
50/51P2.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
40
50/51P2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
41
50/51P2.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 2 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
9
The time multiplier setting of
42
50/51P2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
43
50/51P2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 2 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
44
50/51P2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
2
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-28
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
45
50/51P2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
“α”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
2
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
46
50/51P2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
2
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
47
50/51P3.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
48
50/51P3.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
49
50/51P3.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 3 of phase
50
50/51P3.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 3 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
51
50/51P3.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection.
9-29
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 3 of phase
52
50/51P3.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 3 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
53
50/51P3.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 3 of phase
54
50/51P3.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
55
50/51P3.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
IECV;
-
-
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 3 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
9
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-30
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
56
50/51P3.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 3 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
57
50/51P3.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 3 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
58
50/51P3.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 3 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
59
50/51P3.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
3
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
60
50/51P3.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
3
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
61
50/51P3.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
3
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
62
50/51P4.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
63
50/51P4.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 4 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
64
50/51P4.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 4 of phase overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-31
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 4 of phase
65
50/51P4.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 4 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
66
50/51P4.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 4 of phase
67
50/51P4.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 4 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
68
50/51P4.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 4 of phase
9
69
50/51P4.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-32
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
70
50/51P4.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
71
50/51P4.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 4 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
72
50/51P4.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 4 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
73
50/51P4.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 4 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
74
50/51P4.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
4
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
75
50/51P4.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
4
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-33
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
76
50/51P4.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
4
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
77
50/51P5.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
78
50/51P5.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 5 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
79
50/51P5.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 5 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 5 of phase
80
50/51P5.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 5 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
81
50/51P5.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection.
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 5 of
9
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 5 of phase
82
50/51P5.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 5 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-34
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
83
Settings
50/51P5.En
Default
Range
Disabled;
Enabled
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 5 of phase
84
50/51P5.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
85
50/51P5.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
-
-
IECV;
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 5 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
86
50/51P5.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 5 of
Inst
-
-
IDMT
phase overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
87
50/51P5.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 5 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
88
50/51P5.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 5 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
89
50/51P5.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.000
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
5
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-35
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
90
50/51P5.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.000
1
constant
“α”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
5
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
91
50/51P5.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.000
1
constant
“C”
customized
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
5
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
92
50/51P6.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
The current setting of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
93
50/51P6.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 6 of phase overcurrent
protection
The dropout time setting of
94
50/51P6.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 6 of phase overcurrent
protection
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the voltage
control element of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 6 of phase
95
50/51P6.En_Volt_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the voltage control
element
Enabled: stage 6 of phase
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the voltage control
element
Non_Directional
9
96
50/51P6.Opt_Dir
Forward
Reverse
Non_Directio
nal
The setting used to select the
-
-
directional mode of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-36
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the harmonic
control element of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
Disabled: stage 6 of phase
97
50/51P6.En_Hm_Bl
Disabled;
k
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled
by
the
harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 6 of phase
overcurrent
controlled
protection
by
the
is
harmonic
control element
98
50/51P6.En
Disabled;
Enabled
The
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 6 of phase
99
50/51P6.Opt_Trp/Al
Trp;
m
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
100
50/51P6.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
The setting for selecting the
IECDefTime
IECV;
-
-
inverse-time
operation
characteristic curve of stage 6 of
phase overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
9
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-37
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
101
50/51P6.Opt_Curve
_DropOut
Inst;
dropout
characteristic curve of stage 6 of
DefTime;
Inst
-
-
phase overcurrent protection
IDMT
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
102
50/51P6.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 6 of phase overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating time
103
50/51P6.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 6 of phase
overcurrent protection
The
104
50/51P6.K
0.001~120
0.14
0.000
-
1
constant
customized
“k”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
6
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
105
50/51P6.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
0.000
-
1
constant
customized
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
6
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
The
106
50/51P6.C
0 ~1
0
0.000
-
1
constant
customized
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
operation characteristic of stage
6
of
phase
overcurrent
protection
9.2.5 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Settings
⚫
9
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings ROC Settings
Table 9.2-5 Settings of earth fault overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The relay characteristic angle
1
50/51G.DIR.RCA
-180~179
45
deg
1
of
the
element
direction
of
earth
control
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-38
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The minimum boundary of the
2
50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_
Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The maximum boundary of the
3
50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_
Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The minimum boundary of the
4
50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_
Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The maximum boundary of the
5
50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_
Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The
6
50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min
(0.05~1)In
0.05
-
0.001
minimum
operating
current setting for the direction
control element of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
7
50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min
1~10
4
V
0.001
minimum
operating
voltage setting for the direction
control element of earth fault
overcurrent protection
Logic setting to determine the
behaviour
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection when
VT circuit supervision function
is enabled and VT circuit
8
50/51G.En_VTS_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
failure happens.
Disabled
-
-
Disabled:
earth
fault
overcurrent protection will not
affected by VT circuit failure
Enabled:
earth
voltage controlled
fault
overcurrent
protection will be blocked by
VT circuit failure signal
The percent setting of the
9
50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2
0.1~1
0.2
-
0.001
harmonic control element of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-39
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
10
50/51G.HMB.I_Rls
2~150
20
A
0.001
current
setting
for
releasing the harmonic control
element
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
11
50/51G1.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 1
12
50/51G1.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
13
50/51G1.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
14
50/51G1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
15
50/51G1.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Directio
Forward;
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 1 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 1 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
9
16
50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 1 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 1 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
17
50/51G1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-40
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
Enabling stage 1 earth fault
18
50/51G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
19
50/51G1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 1
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
20
50/51G1.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 1
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
21
50/51G1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
1
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
22
50/51G1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 1 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
23
50/51G1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
1
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-41
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
24
50/51G1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
1
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
25
50/51G1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
1
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
26
50/51G2.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 2
27
50/51G2.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
28
50/51G2.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
29
50/51G2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
30
50/51G2.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Directio
Forward;
nal
Reverse
-
-
directional mode of stage 2 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
9
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-42
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 2 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
31
50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 2 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 2 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
32
50/51G2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 2 earth fault
33
50/51G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
34
50/51G2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 2
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
9
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-43
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
35
50/51G2.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 2
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
36
50/51G2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
2
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
37
50/51G2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 2 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
38
50/51G2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
2
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
39
50/51G2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
2
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
40
50/51G2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
2
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
9
stage
41
50/51G3.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 3
42
50/51G3.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-44
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The operating time setting of
43
50/51G3.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
44
50/51G3.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
45
50/51G3.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Directio
Forward;
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 3 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 3 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
46
50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 3 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 3 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
47
50/51G3.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 3 earth fault
48
50/51G3.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9
9-45
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
49
50/51G3.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 3
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
50
50/51G3.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 3
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
51
50/51G3.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
3
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
52
50/51G3.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 3 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
9
constant
customized
53
50/51G3.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
3
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
54
50/51G3.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
3
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-46
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
constant
“C”
customized
55
50/51G3.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
of
the
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
3
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
56
50/51G4.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 4
57
50/51G4.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
58
50/51G4.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
59
50/51G4.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
60
50/51G4.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Directio
Forward;
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 4 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 4 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
61
50/51G4.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 4 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 4 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-47
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
62
50/51G4.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 4 earth fault
63
50/51G4.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
64
50/51G4.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 4
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
65
50/51G4.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 4
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
9
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
66
50/51G4.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
4
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
67
50/51G4.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 4 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-48
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
68
50/51G4.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
4
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
69
50/51G4.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
4
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
70
50/51G4.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
4
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
71
50/51G5.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 5
72
50/51G5.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
The operating time setting of
73
50/51G5.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
74
50/51G5.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
75
50/51G5.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Directio
Forward;
nal
Reverse
-
-
directional mode of stage 5 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-49
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 5 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
76
50/51G5.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 5 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 5 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
77
50/51G5.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 5 earth fault
78
50/51G5.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
79
50/51G5.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
characteristic curve of stage 5
of
IECV;
9
-
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-50
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
80
50/51G5.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 5
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
81
50/51G5.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
5
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
82
50/51G5.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 5 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
83
50/51G5.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
5
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
84
50/51G5.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
5
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
85
50/51G5.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
5
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The setting used to select the
residual current that used for
stage
86
50/51G6.Opt_3I0
Ext;
Cal
Ext
-
-
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Ext: the measured residual
current
Cal: the calculated residual
current
The current setting of stage 6
87
50/51G6.3I0_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-51
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The operating time setting of
88
50/51G6.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
89
50/51G6.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
90
50/51G6.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al;
Non_Directio
Forward;
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 6 of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
The
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
for
the
harmonic control element of
the stage 6 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
91
50/51G6.En_Hm_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled: stage 6 of earth fault
Disabled
-
-
overcurrent protection is not
controlled by the harmonic
control element
Enabled: stage 6 of earth fault
overcurrent
protection
is
controlled by the harmonic
control element
The
92
50/51G6.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Enabling stage 6 earth fault
93
50/51G6.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
overcurrent protection operate
Trp
-
-
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
9
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-52
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
94
50/51G6.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 6
of
IECV;
operation
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
95
50/51G6.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 6
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
earth
fault
overcurrent
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
96
50/51G6.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
6
of
earth
fault
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
97
50/51G6.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 6 of earth fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
98
50/51G6.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
“k”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
6
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
99
50/51G6.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
“α”
of
operation
characteristic
stage
of
6
the
inverse-time
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-53
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Range
Default
Uni
value
t
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
100
50/51G6.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
“C”
of
inverse-time
operation
characteristic
stage
of
6
the
earth
of
fault
overcurrent protection
9.2.6 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings NegOC Settings
Table 9.2-6 Settings of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The relay characteristic angle
1
50/51Q.DIR.RCA
-180~179
45
deg
1
of
the
direction
control
element of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum boundary of the
2
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_
Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The maximum boundary of the
3
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max
_Fwd
10~90
90
deg
1
forward direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum boundary of the
4
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_
Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The maximum boundary of the
9
5
50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max
_Rev
10~90
90
deg
1
reverse direction element of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
minimum
operating
current setting for the direction
6
50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min
(0.05~1)In
0.05
-
0.001
control
element
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-54
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
minimum
operating
voltage setting for the direction
7
50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min
1.0~10.0
4
V
0.001
control
element
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Logic setting to determine the
behaviour
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection when
VT circuit supervision function
is enabled and VT circuit
8
50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk
Disabled;
Enabled
failure happens.
Disabled
-
-
Disabled: negative-sequence
overcurrent protection will not
affected by VT circuit failure
Enabled:
voltage controlled
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection will be
blocked by VT circuit failure
signal
The current setting of stage 1
9
50/51Q1.I2_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
10
50/51Q1.t_Op
0.03 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
11
50/51Q1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
12
50/51Q1.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al
Non_Directio
Forward
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 1 of
negative-sequence
The
13
50/51Q1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
9
overcurrent protection.
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 1
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-55
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Enabling
stage
1
of
negative-sequence
14
50/51Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overcurrent protection operate
to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
15
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 1
of
IECV;
operation
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
16
50/51Q1.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 1
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
9
17
50/51Q1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
18
50/51Q1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting
of
stage
1
of
of
the
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
19
50/51Q1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
operation
“k”
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-56
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
constant
customized
20
50/51Q1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
operation
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
21
50/51Q1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
operation
“C”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The current setting of stage 2
22
50/51Q2.I2_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The operating time setting of
23
50/51Q2.t_Op
0.03 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The dropout time setting of
24
50/51Q2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Non_Direction
25
50/51Q2.Opt_Dir
The setting used to select the
al
Non_Directio
Forward
nal
-
-
Reverse
directional mode of stage 2 of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
The
26
50/51Q2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage 2
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Enabling
stage
2
of
negative-sequence
27
50/51Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overcurrent protection operate
to trip or alarm.
9
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-57
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting the
ANSILTV;
28
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
IECN;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage 2
of
IECV;
operation
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
29
50/51Q2.Opt_Curve_
DropOut
characteristic curve of stage 2
Inst;
DefTime;
dropout
Inst
-
-
IDMT
of
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime: definite-time dropout
IDMT: inverse-time dropout
The time multiplier setting of
30
50/51Q2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The minimum operating time
31
50/51Q2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting
of
stage
2
of
of
the
negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
9
constant
customized
32
50/51Q2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
operation
“k”
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
The
constant
customized
33
50/51Q2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
operation
“α”
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-58
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
Unit
value
Step
Description
The
constant
“C”
customized
34
50/51Q2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
operation
of
the
inverse-time
characteristic
of
stage 2 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
9.2.7 RMS Overcurrent Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings RMS OC Settings
Table 9.2-7 Settings of RMS overcurrent protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The current setting of
1
50/51R1.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
stage
1
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
The
2
50/51R1.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
operating
time
setting of stage 1 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The
3
50/51R1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
drop-out
time
setting of stage 1 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The logic setting for
4
50/51R1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
enabling/disabling
stage
1
of
the
RMS
overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 1 of
5
50/51R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
RMS
overcurrent
protection
operate
to
trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-59
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting
ANSILTV;
6
50/51R1.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
the
IECDefTime
IECN;
-
-
inverse-time
operation characteristic
curve of stage 1 of RMS
IECV;
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic curve of
stage
Inst;
7
50/51R1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
1
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
DefTime;
Inst
-
-
IDMT
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
IDMT:
inverse-time
dropout
The
8
50/51R1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
time
multiplier
setting of stage 1 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating
9
9
50/51R1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
time setting of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
10
50/51R1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-60
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “α” of the
customized
11
50/51R1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
12
50/51R1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 1
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The current setting of
13
50/51R2.I_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
stage
2
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
The
14
50/51R2.t_Op
0 ~100
0.1
s
0.001
operating
time
setting of stage 2 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The
15
50/51R2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
drop-out
time
setting of stage 2 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The logic setting for
16
50/51R2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
enabling/disabling
stage
2
of
the
RMS
overcurrent protection
Enabling stage 2 of
17
50/51R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
RMS
overcurrent
protection
operate
to
trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-61
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
The setting for selecting
ANSILTV;
18
50/51R2.Opt_Curve
ANSILT;
the
IECDefTime
IECN;
-
-
inverse-time
operation characteristic
curve of stage 2 of RMS
IECV;
overcurrent protection.
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic curve of
stage
Inst;
19
50/51R2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
2
of
RMS
overcurrent protection
DefTime;
Inst
-
-
IDMT
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
IDMT:
inverse-time
dropout
The
20
50/51R2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
time
multiplier
setting of stage 2 of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The minimum operating
9
21
50/51R2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
time setting of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
22
50/51R2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-62
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “α” of the
customized
23
50/51R2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
24
50/51R2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation
characteristic of stage 2
of
RMS
overcurrent
protection
9.2.8 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
⚫
Access path:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsBCP Settings
Table 9.2-8 Settings of broken conductor protection
No.
1
Setting
46BC.I_Min
Range
(0.05~40) In
Default
1.000
Unit
Step
A
0.001
Description
Minimum operating current setting of
broken conductor protection
Ratio
2
46BC.I2/I1_Set
0~5
0.500
-
0.001
setting
(negative-sequence
current to positive-sequence current) of
broken conductor protection
3
46BC.t_Op
4
46BC.En
0~10
Disabled
Enabled
1.000
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
Time
delay
of
broken
conductor
protection
Enabling/disabling broken conductor
protection
Enabling/disabling broken conductor
5
46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp
Alm
Trp
-
-
protection operate to trip or alarm
Trp: for tripping purpose
9
Alm: for alarm purpose
9.2.9 Phase Overvoltage Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings OV Settings
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-63
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
Table 9.2-9 Settings of phase overvoltage protection
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Option of phase-to-phase
voltage or phase voltage for
1
59P.Opt_Up/Upp
Up;
Upp
Upp
-
-
overvoltage protection
Up: phase voltage
Upp:
phase-to-phase
voltage
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode or
2
59P.Opt_1P/3P
3-out-of-3
3P;
3P
1P
-
-
mode
for
overvoltage protection
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
The voltage setting of stage
3
59P1.U_Set
57.7~200
115
V
0.001
1
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
The dropout coefficient of
4
59P1.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1.00
0.98
-
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of
5
59P1.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of
6
59P1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The
7
59P1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Enabling stage 1 of phase
9
8
59P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
overvoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting the
ANSIDefTime;
9
59P1.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic curve of stage
1
InvTime_U
operation
of
phase
overvoltage
protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-64
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
dropout
characteristic curve of stage
10
59P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
Inst
-
-
1
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting of
11
59P1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The minimum operating time
12
59P1.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 1 of phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
13
59P1.K
0.001~120
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
14
59P1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
15
59P1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The voltage setting of stage
16
59P2.U_Set
57.7~200
115
V
0.001
2
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
The dropout coefficient of
17
59P2.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1.00
0.98
-
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of
18
59P2.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of
19
59P2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-65
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The
20
59P2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
for
enabling/disabling the stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Enabling stage 2 of phase
21
59P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
overvoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting the
ANSIDefTime;
22
59P2.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
inverse-time
IECDefTime
-
-
2
InvTime_U
operation
characteristic curve of stage
of
phase
overvoltage
protection.
The setting for selecting the
inverse-time
dropout
characteristic curve of stage
23
59P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
Inst
-
-
2
of
phase
overvoltage
protection
Inst: instantaneous dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting of
24
59P2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The minimum operating time
25
59P2.tmin
0 ~10
0.02
s
0.001
setting of stage 2 of phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
26
59P2.K
0.001~120
1
-
0.0001
9
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
27
59P2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
1
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-66
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The constant “C” of the
customized
28
59P2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
overvoltage protection
9.2.10 Residual Overvoltage Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings ROV Settings
Table 9.2-10 Settings of residual overvoltage protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
59G1.3U0_Set
1~200
50
V
0.001
2
59G1.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1
0.98
-
0.001
3
59G1.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
4
59G1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
5
59G1.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
Description
The voltage setting of stage 1 of residual
overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of stage 1 of residual
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of stage 1 of
residual overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of stage 1 of
residual overvoltage protection
The logic setting for enabling/disabling the
stage 1 of residual overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 1 of residual overvoltage
6
59G1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
7
59G2.3U0_Set
1~200
50
V
0.001
8
59G2.K_DropOut
0.93 ~1
0.98
-
0.001
9
59G2.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
10
59G2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
11
59G2.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The voltage setting of stage 2 of residual
overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of stage 2 of residual
overvoltage protection
The operating time setting of stage 2 of
residual overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of stage 2 of
residual overvoltage protection
The logic setting for enabling/disabling the
stage 2 of residual overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 2 of residual overvoltage
12
59G2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-67
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
9.2.11 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings NegOV Settings
Table 9.2-11 Settings of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
No.
1
Setting
59Q1.U2_Set
Range
2~100
Default
15
Unit
Step
V
0.001
Description
The voltage setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the stage
2
59Q1.K_DropOut
0.93~1
0.98
-
0.001
1
of
negative-sequence
overvoltage
protection
3
59Q1.t_Op
0.1~100
1
s
0.001
4
59Q1.t_DropOut
0~100
0
s
0.001
5
59Q1.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The time setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 1 of negative-sequence
6
59Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overvoltage operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
7
59Q2.U2_Set
2~100
15
V
0.001
The voltage setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the stage
8
59Q2.K_DropOut
0.93~1
0.98
-
0.001
2
of
negative-sequence
overvoltage
protection
9
59Q2.t_Op
0.1~100
1
s
0.001
10
59Q2.t_DropOut
0~100
0
s
0.001
11
59Q2.En
Enabled
-
-
9
Disabled;
Enabled
The time setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout time setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of
negative-sequence overvoltage protection
Enabling stage 2 of negative-sequence
12
59Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Alm
Trp
-
-
overvoltage operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
9.2.12 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings PosOV Settings
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-68
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
Table 9.2-12 Settings of positive-sequence overvoltage protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
59Pos.U1_Set
2~100
60
V
0.001
2
59Pos.K_DropOut
0.93~1
0.98
-
0.001
3
59Pos.t_Op
0.1~100
1
s
0.001
4
59Pos.t_DropOut
0~100
0
s
0.001
5
59Pos.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
Description
The
voltage
59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
of
the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection
The time setting of the positive-sequence
overvoltage protection
The
dropout
time
setting
of
the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the positive-sequence
overvoltage protection
Enabling
6
setting
the
positive-sequence
overvoltage operate to trip or alarm.
-
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
9.2.13 Phase Undervoltage Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings UV Settings
Table 9.2-13 Settings of phase undervoltage protection
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
Description
Option of phase-to-phase
voltage or phase voltage
1
27P.Opt_Up/Upp
Up;
Upp
for
Upp
-
-
stage
x
of
undervoltage protection
Up: phase voltage
Upp:
phase-to-phase
voltage
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode
or 3-out-of-3 mode for
2
27P.Opt_1P/3P
3P;
1P
3P
-
-
stage x of undervoltage
protection
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-69
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Breaker closed position
check mode
None: no check
Curr: check the current
3
27P.Opt_LogicMode
None;
CBPos:
Curr;
normally
CBPos;
Curr
-
-
check
open
the
auxiliary
contact
CurrOrCBPos;
CurrOrCBPos: check the
CurrAndCBPos
current and normally open
auxiliary contact
CurrAndCBPos: check the
current or normally open
auxiliary contact
The voltage setting of
4
27P1.U_Set
5~120
80
V
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of
5
27P1.K_DropOut
1~1.2
1.03
-
0.001
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The operating time setting
6
27P1.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout time setting
7
27P1.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Logic setting to determine
the behaviour of stage 1 of
phase
undervoltage
protection when VT circuit
8
27P1.En_VTS_Blk
9
Disabled;
Enabled
supervision
Disabled
-
-
function
is
enabled and VT circuit
failure happens.
Disabled: it is not affected
by VT circuit failure
Enabled: it will be blocked
by VT circuit failure signal
The
9
27P1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
stage
1
of
for
the
phase
undervoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-70
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Enabling stage 1 of phase
10
27P1.Opt_Trp/Alm
undervoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting
ANSIDefTime;
11
27P1.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
the inverse-time operation
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic
stage
InvTime_U
curve
1
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection.
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic
12
27P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut
Inst;
DefTime
stage
Inst
-
-
curve
1
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting
13
27P1.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The minimum operating
14
27P1.tmin
0.03 ~10
0.03
s
0.001
time setting of stage 1 of
phase
undervoltage
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
15
27P1.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
16
27P1.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
17
27P1.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
1
of
phase
undervoltage protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-71
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The voltage setting of
18
27P2.U_Set
5~120
80
V
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout coefficient of
19
27P2.K_DropOut
1~1.2
1.03
-
0.001
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The operating time setting
20
27P2.t_Op
0.1 ~100
1
s
0.001
of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The dropout time setting
21
27P2.t_DropOut
0 ~100
0
s
0.001
of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Logic setting to determine
the behaviour of stage 2 of
phase
undervoltage
protection when VT circuit
22
27P2.En_VTS_Blk
supervision
Disabled;
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
function
is
enabled and VT circuit
failure happens.
Disabled: it is not affected
by VT circuit failure
Enabled: it will be blocked
by VT circuit failure signal
The
23
27P2.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
-
logic
setting
enabling/disabling
stage
2
of
for
the
phase
undervoltage protection
Enabling stage 2 of phase
24
27P2.Opt_Trp/Alm
undervoltage
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
-
protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
9
Alm: for alarm purpose
The setting for selecting
ANSIDefTime;
25
27P2.Opt_Curve
IECDefTime;
UserDefine;
the inverse-time operation
IECDefTime
-
-
characteristic
stage
InvTime_U
2
curve
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-72
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
The setting for selecting
the inverse-time dropout
characteristic
26
27P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut
stage
Inst;
Inst
DefTime
-
-
curve
2
of
of
phase
undervoltage protection
Inst:
instantaneous
dropout
DefTime:
definite-time
dropout
The time multiplier setting
27
27P2.TMS
0.04~ 20
1
-
0.001
of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The minimum operating
28
27P2.tmin
0.03 ~10
0.03
s
0.001
time setting of stage 2 of
phase
undervoltage
protection
The constant “k” of the
customized
29
27P2.K
0.001~120
0.14
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “α” of the
customized
30
27P2.Alpha
0.01 ~3
0.02
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
The constant “C” of the
customized
31
27P2.C
0 ~1
0
-
0.0001
inverse-time
operation characteristic of
stage
2
of
phase
undervoltage protection
9
9.2.14 Frequency Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FreqProt Settings
Table 9.2-14 Settings of frequency protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
Description
The setting of the low voltage blocking
1
81.Upp_Blk
10~150
70
V
0.001
element
of
the
frequency
protection
(phase-to-phase voltage)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-73
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
9
2
81O1.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
3
81O1.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
4
81O1.En
Enabled
-
-
5
81O2.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
6
81O2.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
7
81O2.En
Enabled
-
-
8
81O3.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
9
81O3.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
10
81O3.En
Enabled
-
-
11
81O4.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
12
81O4.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
13
81O4.En
Enabled
-
-
14
81O5.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
15
81O5.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
16
81O5.En
Enabled
-
-
17
81O6.f_Set
50~65
52
Hz
0.001
18
81O6.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
19
81O6.En
Enabled
-
-
26
81U1.f_Set
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
27
81U1.t_Op
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
28
81U1.En
Enabled
-
-
29
81U2.f_Set
48
Hz
0.001
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
45~60
The frequency setting of the stage 1 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
1 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 2 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
2 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 3 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
3 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 3 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 4 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
4 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 4 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 5 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
5 of
overfrequency protection
The logic
setting of the stage 5 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 6 of
overfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
6 of
overfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 6 of
overfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 1 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
1
of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 2 of
underfrequency protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-74
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
30
81U2.t_Op
31
81U2.En
32
81U3.f_Set
33
81U3.t_Op
34
81U3.En
35
81U4.f_Set
36
81U4.t_Op
37
81U4.En
38
81U5.f_Set
39
81U5.t_Op
40
81U5.En
41
81U6.f_Set
42
81U6.t_Op
43
81U6.En
44
81R1.df/dt_Set
45
46
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
45~60
48
Hz
0.001
0.1~100
0.3
s
0.001
Enabled
-
-
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
81R1.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
81R1.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
47
81R1.En
48
81R2.df/dt_Set
49
0.1~100
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
-
-
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
81R2.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
50
81R2.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
51
81R2.En
Enabled
-
-
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
2 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 3 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
3 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 3 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 4 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
4 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 4 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 5 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
5 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 5 of
underfrequency protection
The frequency setting of the stage 6 of
underfrequency protection
The
time
setting
of
the
stage
6 of
underfrequency protection
The logic setting of the stage 6 of
underfrequency protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 1 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 1 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 1
9
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 2 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 2 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 2
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
9-75
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
9
52
81R3.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
53
81R3.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
54
81R3.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
55
81R3.En
Enabled
-
-
56
81R4.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
57
81R4.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
58
81R4.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
59
81R4.En
Enabled
-
-
60
81R5.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
61
81R5.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
62
81R5.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
63
81R5.En
Enabled
-
-
64
81R6.df/dt_Set
-5~5
0.5
Hz/s
0.001
65
81R6.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
66
81R6.f_Pkp
45~65
50
Hz
0.001
67
81R6.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 3 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 3 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 3
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 3 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 4 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 4 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 4
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 4 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 5 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 5 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 5
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 5 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The rate-of-change setting of the stage 6 of
frequency rate-of-change protection
The time setting of the stage 6 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
The pickup frequency setting of the stage 6
of frequency rate-of-change protection
The logic setting of the stage 6 of frequency
rate-of-change protection
9.2.15 Reverse Power Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings RevPower Settings
Table 9.2-15 Settings of reverse power protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
Description
The
1
32R.U1_VCE
5~60
5
V
0.001
voltage
setting
of
the
positive-sequence voltage control element
of the reverse power protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-76
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
The positive-sequence current setting of
2
32R.I1_CCE
0.01~1
0.1
p.u.
0.001
the current control element of the reverse
power protection
The
3
32R.U2_VCE
8~60
8
V
0.001
voltage
setting
of
the
negative-sequence voltage control element
of the reverse power protection
4
32R1.P_Set
0.1~10
0.15
p.u.
0.001
5
32R1.t_Op
0.01~100
0.1
s
0.001
6
32R1.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
-
The power setting of the stage 1 of reverse
power protection
The time setting of the stage 1 of reverse
power protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 of reverse
-
power protection
Enabling
7
32R1.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
stage
1
of
reverse
power
protection operate to trip or alarm.
-
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
8
32R2.P_Set
0.1~10
0.15
p.u.
0.001
9
32R2.t_Op
0.01~100
0.1
s
0.001
10
32R2.En
Enabled
-
-
Disabled;
Enabled
The power setting of the stage 2 of reverse
power protection
The time setting of the stage 2 of reverse
power protection
The logic setting of the stage 2 of reverse
power protection
Enabling
11
32R2.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
stage
2
of
reverse
power
protection operate to trip or alarm.
-
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
9.2.16 Undercurrent Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings UC Settings
Table 9.2-16 Settings of undercurrent protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
37.I_Set
0.1~5
0.5
A
0.001
2
37.t_Op
0.1~100
0.1
s
0.001
3
37.Opt_1P/3P
1P;
3P
Description
The
-
-
setting
of
the
undercurrent protection
The time setting of the undercurrent
protection
The
3P
current
setting
three-phase
for
selecting
criterion
(3P)
the
or
single-phase criterion (1P)
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-77
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
None;
Curr;
4
37.Opt_LogicMode
CurrAnd
CBPos;
CurrAndCBPos;
CBPos
-
-
-
-
The setting of the CB position check
mode.
CurrOrCBPos
5
37.En
Disabled;
Enabled
Enabled
The logic setting of the undercurrent
protection
Enabling undercurrent protection
6
37.Opt_Trp/Alm
Trp;
Trp
Alm
-
operate to trip or alarm.
-
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
9.2.17 Breaker Failure Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings BFP Settings
Table 9.2-17 Settings of breaker failure protection
No.
9
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
50BF.I_Set
0.05~200
1.000
A
0.001
2
50BF.3I0_Set
0.05~200
1.000
A
0.001
3
50BF.I2_Set
0.05~200
1.000
A
0.001
4
50BF.t_ReTrp
0~20
0.050
s
0.001
5
50BF.t1_Op
0~20
0.100
s
0.001
6
50BF.t2_Op
0~20
0.200
s
0.001
7
50BF.En
Enabled
-
-
8
50BF.En_ReTrp
Enabled
-
-
9
50BF.En_t1
Disabled
-
-
10
50BF.En_t2
Disabled
-
-
11
50BF.En_Ip
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Description
The phase current setting of breaker
failure protection
The zero-sequence current setting of
breaker failure protection
The negative-sequence current setting of
breaker failure protection
The re-trip time delay of breaker failure
protection
The first time delay of breaker failure
protection
The second time delay of breaker failure
protection
Enabling/disabling
-
-
failure
protection
Enabling/disabling
re-trip
function
of
breaker failure protection
Enabling/disabling first time delay of
breaker failure protection
Enabling/disabling second time delay of
breaker failure protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
breaker
phase
overcurrent
element of breaker failure protection via
three-phases initiating signal
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-78
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
Enabling/disabling
12
50BF.En_3I0_3P
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
zero-sequence
overcurrent element of breaker failure
-
protection
via
three-phases
initiating
signal
Enabling/disabling
13
50BF.En_I2_3P
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
negative-sequence
overcurrent element of breaker failure
-
protection
via
three-phases
initiating
signal
14
15
50BF.En_CB_Ctrl
50BF.En_Alm_Init
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
breaker
failure
protection be initiated by normally closed
contact of circuit breaker
Disabled
-
Enabling/disabling abnormality check of
-
breaker failure initiating signal
9.2.18 Switch-on-to-Fault ProtectionSettings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings SOTF Settings
Table 9.2-18 Settings of SOTF protection
No.
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
SOTF.t_En
0.2~100
0.4
s
0.001
2
50PSOTF.I_Set
0.05~200
1
A
0.001
3
50PSOTF.Up_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
4
50PSOTF.Upp_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
5
50PSOTF.U2_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
6
50PSOTF.3U0_Set
0~200
1
V
0.001
7
50PSOTF.t_Op
0~100
0.1
s
0.001
8
50PSOTF.En
Enabled
-
-
9
10
50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
50PSOTF.En_Up_UV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Description
The initiating time for the SOTF
protection
Current setting of phase overcurrent
SOTF protection
Voltage
setting
for
phase
undervoltage supervision logic
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase
undervoltage supervision logic
Voltage setting for negative-sequence
overvoltage supervision logic
Voltage setting for zero-sequence
overvoltage supervision logic
Time delay for phase overcurrent
SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling phase overcurrent
SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
Disabled
-
-
blocking for phase overcurrent SOTF
protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
-
-
phase
undervoltage supervision logic for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-79
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
11
50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
phase-to-phase
undervoltage supervision logic for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
12
Disabled
50PSOTF.En_U2_OV
Disabled
Enabled
-
negative-sequence
-
supervision
overvoltage
logic
for
phase
overcurrent SOTF protection
13
50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
overvoltage
zero-sequence
supervision
logic
for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection
The option of the residual current
14
used by earth fault overcurrent SOTF
Ext
50GSOTF.Opt_3I0
Cal
Cal
-
-
protection
Ext: the measured residual current
Cal: the calculated residual current
15
50GSOTF.3I0_Set
0.05~200
1
A
0.001
16
50GSOTF.t_Op_3P
0~100
0.1
s
0.001
17
50GSOTF.En
Enabled
-
-
18
Disabled
Enabled
50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk
Current
setting
of
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
fault
overcurrent SOTF protection
Time delay for earth fault overcurrent
SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
earth
fault
overcurrent SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling
Disabled
earth
earth
fault
overcurrent SOTF protection blocked
by harmonic
9.2.19 Thermal Overload Protection Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings ThOvLd Settings
Table 9.2-19 Settings of thermal overload protection
No.
9
Setting
Range
Default
Unit
Step
1
49.Ib_Set
0.05~200
15
A
0.001
2
49.K_Trp
1~3
1.2
-
0.001
3
49.K_Alm
1~3
1.1
-
0.001
4
49.t_Tau
0.1~100
1
min
0.001
5
49.K_T_Diff
0~200
30
-
0.001
6
49.Alpha_Cold
1~2
2
-
0.001
Description
The reference current setting of thermal
overload protection
The thermal overload factor setting for
tripping
The thermal overload factor setting for
alarm
The heat accumulation time constant of
thermal overload protection
The temperature constant of thermal
overload protection
The cooling factor of thermal overload
protection
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-80
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
Heat dissipation time constant setting.
7
49.C_Disspt
0.100~10
.000
1.000
-
When the current Ieq is lower than 0.04In,
0.001
the thermal time constant adopts the value
of [49.Tau]*[49.C_Disspt].
8
49.En_Trp
9
49.En_Alm
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled;
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
Disabled
-
-
Enabling/Disabling
thermal
overload
protection operate to trip
Enabling/Disabling
thermal
overload
protection operate to alarm
9.2.20 Transfer Trip Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings TT Settings
Table 9.2-20 Settings of transfer trip
No.
Setting
1
TT.t_Op
2
TT.En
3
TT.En_FD_Ctrl
4
TT.En_BlkAR
Range
0.000~60
0.000
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Default
Unit
Step
Description
0.005
s
0.001
Time delay of transfer trip
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling transfer trip
Enabled
-
-
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling transfer trip controlled
by local fault detector element
Enabling/disabling transfer trip operate to
block AR
9.2.21 Automatic Reclosure Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings AR Settings
Table 9.2-21 Settings of AR
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
79.Num
1~4
1
-
1
2
79.t_Dd_3PS1
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
3
79.t_Dd_3PS2
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
4
79.t_Dd_3PS3
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
5
79.t_Dd_3PS4
0~600
0.600
s
0.001
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Description
Maximum
number
of
reclosing
9
attempts
Dead time of first shot 3-pole
reclosing
Dead time of second shot 3-pole
reclosing
Dead time of third shot 3-pole
reclosing
Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole
reclosing
9-81
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
6
Settings
79.t_CBClsd
Range
0~600
Default
value
5.000
Unit
Step
s
0.001
Description
Time delay of circuit breaker in
closed position before reclosing
Time delay to wait for CB healthy,
and begin to timing when the input
7
79.t_CBReady
0~600
5.000
s
0.001
signal
[79.CB_Healthy]
de-energized
and
if
it
is
is
not
energized within this time delay, AR
will be blocked.
8
79.t_Wait_Chk
0~600
10.000
s
0.001
9
79.t_Reclaim
0~600
15.000
s
0.001
Maximum wait time for synchronism
check
Reclaim time of AR
Drop-out time delay of blocking AR,
10
79.t_DDO_Blk
0~600
5.000
s
0.001
when
blocking
signal
for
AR
disappears, AR blocking condition
drops out after this time delay
11
79.t_PersistTrp
0~600
0.200
s
0.001
12
79.t_Fail
0~600
0.200
s
0.001
Time delay of excessive trip signal
to block AR
Time delay allow for CB status
change
to
conform
reclosing
successful
13
79.t_PW
14
79.En_FailCheck
15
79.En_CutPulse
16
79.En
0~600
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
0.120
s
0.001
Disabled
-
-
Pulse width of AR closing signal
Enabling/disabling confirm whether
AR is successful by checking CB
state
Disabled
-
-
Enabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling adjust the length
of reclosing pulse
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing
Enabling/disabling AR by external
input signal besides logic setting
9
17
79.Opt_Enable
Setting
Setting&Config
Setting
-
-
[79.En]
Setting: only the setting
Setting&Config: the setting and
configuration signal
18
79.En_CBInit
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
-
Enabling/disabling AR be initiated
by open state of circuit breaker
Selection of decision mode for AR
19
79.Opt_RSYN_Valid
Setting;
Mode
Config
synchronism check
Setting
-
-
Setting: determined by the setting
Config:
determined
by
the
configuration signal
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-82
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Settings
Default
Range
value
Unit
Step
Description
Enabling/disabling
20
79.En_SynChk
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
synchro-check
of AR (valid only if the setting
-
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
=
Setting)
Enabling/disabling dead check for
both the reference side and the
21
79.En_SynDd_RefDd
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
synchronization side (valid only if
-
the
setting
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
=
Setting)
Enabling/disabling live check for
synchronization
22
79.En_SynLv_RefDd
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
side
and
dead
check for reference side (valid only
-
if
the
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
setting
=
Setting)
Enabling/disabling dead check for
23
79.En_SynDd_RefLv
synchronization side and live check
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-
-
for reference side (valid only if the
setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
= Setting)
Enabling/disabling AR without any
24
79.En_NoChk
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
check (valid only if the setting
-
[79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
=
Setting)
9.2.22 Fault Location Settings
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Protection Settings FL Settings
Table 9.2-22 Settings of fault location
No.
Settings
Range
Default
value
Unit
Step
1
X1L
0~600
10
Ω
0.001
2
R1L
0~600
1
Ω
0.001
3
X0L
0~600
20
Ω
0.001
4
R0L
0~600
3
Ω
0.001
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9
Remark
Positive-sequence reactance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Positive-sequence resistance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Zero-sequence reactance of the whole
line (secondary value)
Zero-sequence resistance of the whole
line (secondary value)
9-83
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
5
Settings
LineLength
Range
0~6000
Default
value
100
Unit
Step
km
0.01
Remark
Total length of the whole line
9.3 Measurement and Control Settings
In this section, the "XXXX" stands for bay indication. By default, it could be
BayMMXU, BusMMXU, etc. and it is configurable through the configuration
tool PCS-Studio.
9.3.1 Function Settings
⚫
Access path:
Main Menu Settings Meas Control Settings Function Settings
No.
Setting
Default
1
Opt_CT_Measmt
Ia-Ib-Ic
2
ZeroDrift_U
0.20
3
ZeroDrift_I
0.20
Range
Step
Unit
-
-
0.00~1.00
0.01
%
0.00~1.00
0.01
%
Ia-Ib-Ic or
Ia-Ic
Remark
Source selection of current measurement
Threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of
voltage, current or power due to temperature or
other environmental factors. A measured value
less than this setting will be regarded as a zero
4
ZeroDrift_PQ
0.50
0.00~1.00
0.01
%
drift and ignored.
Threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of
corresponding current due to temperature or
5
Neu.ZeroDrift_I
0.20
0.00~1.00
0.01
%
other environmental factors. A measured value
less than this setting will be regarded as a zero
drift and ignored.
Threshold to limit the zero-drift influence of
corresponding voltage due to temperature or
9
6
Syn.ZeroDrift_U
0.20
0.00~1.00
0.01
%
other environmental factors. A measured value
less than this setting will be regarded as a zero
drift and ignored.
9.3.2 Synchronism Check Settings
⚫
Access path:
Main Menu Settings Meas Control Settings Syn Settings
No.
1
Setting
25.Opt_ValidMode
Default
Setting
Range
Setting or Config
Step
Unit
-
-
Description
Selection of decision
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-84
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
mode for synchronism
check
Setting: the mode
depends on the
setting values of
[25.En_SynChk] and
[25.En_DdChk];
Config:
the
mode
depends on the input
values
of
"in_syn_chk"
and
"in_vol_chk"
terminals.
Logic
setting
synchro-check
2
25.En_SynChk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
only
if
the
for
(valid
setting
[25.Opt_ValidMode] =
Setting)
Logic setting for dead
charge check (valid
3
25.En_DdChk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
only
if
the
setting
[25.Opt_ValidMode] =
Setting)
Percentage threshold
4
25.U_UV
80.00
0~100
0.01
%
of under voltage for
CB closing blocking
Percentage threshold
5
25.U_OV
170.00
100~170
0.01
%
of over voltage for CB
closing blocking
Percentage threshold
6
25.f_UF
45.000
45~65
0.001
Hz
of under frequency for
CB closing blocking
Percentage threshold
7
25.f_OF
65.000
45~65
0.001
Hz
of over frequency for
CB closing blocking
8
25.Opt_U_SynChk
Ua
Ua, Ub, Uc, Uab, Ubc, Uca
-
-
Selection of voltage
for synchronism check
Threshold of voltage
9
25.U_Diff_Set
10.00
0~100
0.01
V
difference
for
synchronism check
10
25.En_f_Diff_Chk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
-
Logic
setting
frequency
for
difference
9-85
Date: 2020-09-02
9
9 Settings
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
check
11
25.f_Diff_Set
0.50
0~2
0.01
Hz
Threshold
of
frequency
difference
for synchronism check
Logic
12
25.En_df/dt_Chk
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
-
-
setting
frequency
for
variation
difference check
Threshold
13
25.df/dt_Set
1.00
0~2
0.01
Hz/s
of
frequency variation for
synchronism check.
Threshold of phase
14
25.phi_Diff_Set
15.00
0~180
0.01
°
difference
for
synchronism check
Compensation angle
15
25.phi_Comp
0.00
0~360
0.01
°
of phase difference for
synchronism check
SynDdRefDd
SynLvRefDd
SynDdRefLv
16
25.Opt_Mode_DdChk
AnySideDd
RefDd
-
-
Selection
of
dead
charge check mode
SynDd
SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv
AnySideDd
17
25.U_DdChk
17.32
0~100
0.01
V
18
25.U_LvChk
34.64
0~100
0.01
V
19
25.t_Reset
5
0~60
1
s
Threshold for voltage
dead check
Threshold for voltage
live check
Threshold of duration
for synchro-check
Circuit breaker closing
time. It is the time
9
20
25.t_Close_CB
20
0~2000
1
ms
from receiving closing
command pulse till the
CB
is
completely
closed.
9.3.3 Double Point Status Settings
⚫
Access path:
Main Menu Settings Meas Control Settings DPS Settings
No.
1
Setting
CB.DPS.t_DPU
Default
500
Range
0~60000
Step
Unit
1
ms
Description
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of the circuit breaker
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-86
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
2
CB.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
3
CB.DPS.t_Alm
500
4
DS01.DPS.t_DPU
500
5
DS01.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
6
DS01.DPS.t_Alm
500
7
DS02.DPS.t_DPU
500
8
DS02.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
9
DS02.DPS.t_Alm
500
10
DS03.DPS.t_DPU
500
11
DS03.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
12
DS03.DPS.t_Alm
500
13
DS04.DPS.t_DPU
500
14
DS04.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
15
DS04.DPS.t_Alm
500
16
DS05.DPS.t_DPU
500
17
DS05.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
18
DS05.DPS.t_Alm
500
19
DS06.DPS.t_DPU
500
20
DS06.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
21
DS06.DPS.t_Alm
500
22
DS07.DPS.t_DPU
500
23
DS07.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
Disabled
or
-
-
0~60000
1
ms
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
0~60000
1
ms
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
0~60000
1
ms
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
0~60000
1
ms
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
0~60000
1
ms
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
1
ms
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
0~60000
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
0~60000
1
ms
0~60000
1
ms
-
-
Disabled
or
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
or
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
Logic setting for DPS alarm of the circuit
breaker
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of the
circuit breaker
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 01
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 01
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 01
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 02
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 02
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 02
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 03
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 03
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 03
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 04
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 04
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 04
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 05
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 05
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
9
disconnector switch 05
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 06
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 06
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 06
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 07
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 07
9-87
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
24
DS07.DPS.t_Alm
500
0~60000
1
ms
25
DS08.DPS.t_DPU
500
0~60000
1
ms
26
DS08.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
-
-
27
DS08.DPS.t_Alm
500
0~60000
1
ms
28
DS09.DPS.t_DPU
500
0~60000
1
ms
29
DS09.DPS.En_Alm
Disabled
-
-
30
DS09.DPS.t_Alm
500
1
ms
Disabled
or
Enabled
Disabled
or
Enabled
0~60000
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 07
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 08
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 08
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 08
Delay Pick Up (DPU) time, i.e. debounce
time, for DPS of disconnector switch 09
Logic
setting
for
DPS
alarm
of
disconnector switch 09
Operation time delay of DPS alarm of
disconnector switch 09
9.3.4 Control Settings
⚫
Access path:
Main Menu Settings Meas Control Settings Control Settings
No.
9
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
1
CB.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
2
CB.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
3
DS01.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
4
DS01.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
5
DS02.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
6
DS02.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
7
DS03.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
8
DS03.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
9
DS04.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
10
DS04.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
11
DS05.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
12
DS05.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
Description
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for opening
output of the circuit breaker
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for closing
output of the circuit breaker
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 01
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 01
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 02
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 02
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 03
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 03
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 04
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 04
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 05
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-88
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
Setting
Default
Range
Step
Unit
Description
closing output of disconnector switch 05
13
DS06.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
14
DS06.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
15
DS07.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
16
DS07.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
17
DS08.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
18
DS08.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
19
DS09.t_PW_Opn
500
0~60000
1
ms
20
DS09.t_PW_Cls
500
0~60000
1
ms
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 06
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 06
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 07
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 07
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 08
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 08
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
opening output of disconnector switch 09
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, for direct
closing output of disconnector switch 09
9.3.5 Interlocking Logic Settings
⚫
Access path:
Main Menu Settings Meas Control Settings Interlock Settings
No.
Setting
Default
1
CB.En_CILO_Opn
Disabled
2
CB.En_CILO_Cls
Disabled
3
4
5
6
7
DS01.En_CILO_Opn
DS01.En_CILO_Cls
DS02.En_CILO_Opn
DS02.En_CILO_Cls
DS03.En_CILO_Opn
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Range
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Step
Unit
-
-
-
-
Description
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
of opening output of the circuit breaker.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
of closing output of the circuit breaker.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 01.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
9
switch 01.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 02.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 02.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 03.
9-89
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Setting
DS03.En_CILO_Cls
DS04.En_CILO_Opn
DS04.En_CILO_Cls
DS05.En_CILO_Opn
DS05.En_CILO_Cls
DS06.En_CILO_Opn
DS06.En_CILO_Cls
DS07.En_CILO_Opn
DS07.En_CILO_Cls
DS08.En_CILO_Opn
DS08.En_CILO_Cls
Default
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
9
19
20
DS09.En_CILO_Opn
DS09.En_CILO_Cls
Disabled
Disabled
Range
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Disabled or
Enabled
Step
Unit
Description
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 03.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 04.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 04.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 05.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 05.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 06.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 06.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 07.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 07.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 08.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 08.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct opening output of disconnector
switch 09.
Logic setting for interlocking logic control
-
-
of direct closing output of disconnector
switch 09.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-90
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
9.4 Logic Links
Logic link is a special logic setting which can be configured through local HMI or remote PC.
These logic links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out of
service remotely away from an unattended substation.
9.4.1 Function Links
⚫
Access path:
Main Menu Settings Logic Links Function Links
Table 9.4-1 Function links
No.
Settings
1
Link_01
2
Link_02
3
Link_03
4
Link_04
5
Link_05
6
Link_06
7
Link_07
8
Link_08
Range
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Default
Remark
value
Enabled
Function link setting 01
Enabled
Function link setting 02
Enabled
Function link setting 03
Enabled
Function link setting 04
Enabled
Function link setting 05
Enabled
Function link setting 06
Enabled
Function link setting 07
Enabled
Function link setting 08
9
9.4.2 GOOSE Receiving Links
⚫
Access path:
MainMenu Settings Logic Links GOOSE Recv Links
Table 9.4-2 GOOSE receiving links
No.
1
Settings
Range
@Bx.Name_00_GCommLink.G
Disabled
Link_Recv
Enabled
Default
Remark
value
Enabled
GOOSE receiving link 00 is enabled or disabled
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-91
Date: 2020-09-02
9 Settings
No.
2
3
Settings
……
Range
Disabled
Enabled
@Bx.Name_63_GCommLink.G
Disabled
Link_Recv
Enabled
Default
Remark
value
Enabled
……
Enabled
GOOSE receiving link 63 is enabled or disabled
Enabling/disabling the allowance for the acceptance
of GOOSE messages
4
GLink_RecvSim
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled: not receiving the GOOSE message
(simulation=1)
Enabled:
receiving
the
GOOSE
message
(simulation=1)
@Bx.Name_00_GCommLink is the set value of the label setting of [Bx.Name_00_GCommLink],
@Bx.Name_63_GCommLink is the set value of the label setting of [Bx.Name_63_GCommLink].
9
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
9-92
Date: 2020-09-02
Appendix A Glossary
Appendix A Glossary
The abbreviations adopted in this manual are listed as below.
A
BOM Binary Output Module
"a" Contact is breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI
Standard Device Number 52A) that closes
when the breaker is closed and opens when
the breaker is open.
C
AC Alternating current
CB Circuit breaker
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
CID Configured IED Description
AI Analog input
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for
Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC 60255-24
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used
sending binary signals between IEDs
ASDU Application Service Data Unit – An
ASDU can consist of one or more identical
information objects. A sequence of the same
information elements, for example measured
values, is identified by the address of the
information object. The address of the
information object defines the associated
address of the first information element of the
sequence. A consecutive number identifies the
subsequent information elements. The number
builds on this address in integral increments
(+1).
CPU Central Processing Unit
B
DLLB Dead Line Live Bus
"b" Contact is breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI
Standard Device Number 52B) that closes
when the breaker is open and opens when the
breaker is closed.
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary Input
BO Binary Output
BIM Binary Input Module
when
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CT Current Transformer
CTS Current Circuit Supervision
D
DBDL Dead Bus Dead Line
DBLL Dead Bus Live Line
DC Direct Current
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE
Std 1815-2012
DPFC Deviation of Power Frequency
Component–In case of a fault occurred in the
power system, the fault component could be
analyzed into three parts: the power frequency
components before the fault, the power
frequency variables during the fault and the
transient variables during the fault. DPFC is
the power frequency variable during the fault.
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
1
Date: 2020-09-02
A
Appendix A Glossary
DSP Digital Signal Processor
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light-emitting Diode
E
M
EHV Extra High Voltage
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
F
MOV Metal-oxide Varistor
FL Fault Location
P
FR Fault Recorder
PD Pole Discrepancy
G
PL Programmable Logic
G.703 Electrical and functional description for
digital lines used by local telephone
companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalance lines
PPM Pulse Per Minute
PPS Pulse Per Second
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol
GIS Gas-insulated Switchgear
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation
Event
GPS Global Positioning System
R
RMS Root Mean Square
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
H
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
HMI Human-machine Interface
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
S
SA Substation Automation
HVDC High-voltage Direct Current
SCADA Supervision,
Acquisition
I
Control
And
Data
SCD Substation Configuration Description
ICD IED Capability Description
A
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
SCL Substation Configuration Description
Language
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
SLD Single-line Diagram
IRIG-B InterRange Instrumentation Group
Time code format B
SIR Source-to-line Impedance Ratio
L
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
–An Internet standard protocol and serves for
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2
Date: 2020-09-02
Appendix A Glossary
the administration of nodes in an IP network.
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol – A
protocol for the synchronization of clocks via
the Internet. With SNTP, client computers can
synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a
time server.
SOE Sequence of Events – An ordered,
time-stamped log of status changes at binary
inputs (also referred to as state inputs). SOE is
used to restore or analyze the performance, or
an electrical power system itself, over a certain
period of time.
SOTF Switch-Onto-Fault
T
TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol over
Internet Protocol
U
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
V
VT Voltage transformer
VTS Voltage Circuit Supervision
STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
A list of function numbers used to represent electrical protection and control element. The device
function numbers used in this manual include the following:
25 Synchronism-check element
element
27 Undervoltage element
52 AC circuit breaker
32 Power element
59 Overvoltage element
37 Undercurrent element
67 Directional overcurrent element
46 Phase-balance current element
79 Reclosing element
49 Thermal overload element
81 Frequency element
50 Instantaneous overcurrent element
87 Differential element
51 Definite-time or inverse-time overcurrent
These numbers are frequently used within a suffix letter to further designate their application. The
suffix letters used in this instruction manual include the following:
P Phase element
Q Negative-sequence element
G Residual/Ground element
A
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
3
Date: 2020-09-02
Appendix A Glossary
A
PCS-9613S Differential Relay
2
Date: 2020-09-02
